Home

SQL*Plus User's Guide and Reference

1. Name Null Type EMPLOYEE_ID NOT NULL NUMBER 6 JOB_ID NOT NULL VARCHAR2 10 MANAGER_ID NUMBER 6 DEPARTMENT _ID NUMBER 4 LOCATION_ID NUMBER 4 COUNTRY_ID CHAR 2 FIRST NAME VARCHAR2 20 LAST NAME NOT NULL VARCHAR2 25 SALARY NUMBER 8 2 COMMISSION_PCT NUMBER 2 2 DEPARTMENT_NAME NOT NULL VARCHAR2 30 JOB_TITLE NOT NULL VARCHAR2 35 CELPY NOT NULL VARCHAR2 30 STATE PROVINCE VARCHAR2 25 COUNTRY_NAME VARCHAR2 40 REGION_NAME VARCHAR2 25 Note DESCRIBE accesses information in the Oracle Database data dictionary You can also use SQL SELECT commands to access this and other information in the database See your Oracle Database SQL Reference for details 5 4 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Running SQL Commands Listing PL SQL Definitions To see the definition of a function or procedure use the SQL Plus DESCRIBE command Example 5 2 Using the DESCRIBE Command To list the definition of a function called AFUNC enter DESCRIBE afunc FUNCTION afunc RETURNS NUMBER Argument Name Type In Out Default F1 CHAR IN F2 NUMBER IN Running SQL Commands The SQL command language enables you to manipulate data in the database See your Oracle Database SQL Reference for information on individual SQL commands Example 5 3 Entering a SQL Command In this example you will enter and execute a SQL command to display the employee number name job and salary of e
2. 8 4 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Creating Reports using Command line SQL Plus lt td gt Oxford lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td gt lt A HREF http oracle com Sales html gt Sales lt A gt lt td gt lt td gt Oxford lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td gt lt A HREF http oracle com Marketing html gt Marketing lt A gt lt td gt lt td gt Toronto lt td gt lt tr gt lt table gt lt p gt 6 rows selected lt br gt SQL amp gt spool off lt br gt lt body gt lt html gt Example 8 2 Creating a Report using the SQLPLUS Command Enter the following command at the operating system prompt SQLPLUS S M HTML ON TABLE BORDER 2 HR your_password Oral0g depart sql gt depart html where depart sql contains SELECT DEPARTMENT_NAME CITY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 EXIT This example starts SQL Plus with user HR sets HTML ON sets a BORDER attribute for TABLE and runs the script depart sql The output from depart sql is a web page which in this case has been redirected to the file depart html using the gt operating system redirect command it may be different on your operating system It could be sent to a web browser if SQL Plus was called in a web server CGI script See Suppressing the Display of SQL Plus Commands in Reports for information about calling SQL Plus from a CGI script Generating HTML Reports from SQL Plus 8 5 Creating Reports usin
3. Note Your output may vary depending on the server version and configuration Collecting Timing Statistics Use the SQL Plus TIMING command to collect and display data on the amount of computer resources used to run one or more commands or blocks TIMING collects data for an elapsed period of time saving the data on commands run during the period in a timer See the TIMING command on page 13 153 and Tracing Statements on page 9 1 for information about using AUTOTRACE to collect statistics To delete all timers enter CLEAR TIMING Tracing Parallel and Distributed Queries When you trace a statement in a parallel or distributed query the Execution Plan shows the cost based optimizer estimates of the number of rows the cardinality In general the cost cardinality and bytes at each node represent cumulative results For example the cost of a join node accounts for not only the cost of completing the join operations but also the entire costs of accessing the relations in that join Lines marked with an asterisk denote a parallel or remote operation Each operation is explained in the second part of the report See the Oracle Database Performance Tuning Guide for more information on parallel and distributed operations The second section of this report consists of three columns displayed in the following order Column Name Description ID_PLUS_EXP Shows the line number of each execution step O
4. SP2 0749 Cannot resolve circular path of synonym synonym_name Cause An attempt was made to use a synonym to point to an object that no longer exists where the synonym had the same name as the base object or an attempt was made to use a synonym that has a circular path that points back to itself Action Make sure that the last synonym in the synonym path points to an object that exists and that it doesn t point back to itself SP2 0750 ORACLE_HOME may not be set Cause SQL Plus was unable to find a message file during program initialization and could not display error messages or text required for normal operation The most common cause is that ORACLE_HOME has not been set Other possible causes are a corrupt or unreadable message file On Windows the SQLPLUS registry entry may be invalid This message is hard coded in English in the SQL Plus source code so it can be displayed on message file error It could never be read from this message file because the error occurs only when the message files cannot be opened This entry in the message file is for documentation purposes only Action Make sure that all environment variables or registry entries needed to run SQL Plus are set The variables are platform specific but may include ORACLE_HOME ORACLE SID NLS_LANG and LD_LIBRARY_PATH On Windows if the environment variable called SOQLPLUS is set it must contain the directory name of the SQL Plus message files for example ORACLE
5. SP2 0609 Usage SET AUTOT RACE OFF ON TRACE ONLY EXP LAIN STAT ISTICS Cause An invalid option was used in the SET AUTOTRACE command Action Check the syntax of the SET AUTOTRACE command for the correct options SP2 0610 Error initializing feature_name Cause Not enough memory to enable this feature Action Free up additional memory by closing applications not required or reduce the size of the command statement or query output SP2 0612 Error generating report_name report Cause Unable to generate the report using AUTOTRACE Action Make a note of the message and the number then contact the Database Administrator SP2 0613 Unable to verify PLAN_TABLE format or existence Error enabling autotrace_report report Cause An AUTOTRACE command was issued by a user with insufficient privileges or who did not have a PLAN_TABLE Action Make sure the user has been granted the PLUSTRACE role and that a PLAN_TABLE has been created for the user SP2 0614 Server version too low for this feature Cause The current version of the Oracle Server is too low for this feature Action Use a higher version of the Oracle Server SP2 0617 Cannot construct a unique STATEMENT_ID Cause Unable to construct a unique statement ID in AUTOTRACE Action Check that AUTOTRACE is configured and that you have the PLUSTRACE role enabled SP2 0618 Cannot find the Session Identifier Check PLUSTRACE role is enabled Error enabling autotr
6. SET the SQLPROMPT to include the _USER _CONNECT_IDENTIFIER and _DATE variables SET SQLPROMPT _USER CONNECT_IDENTIFIER _DATE gt To set the number of lines to display in a report page to 24 SET PAGESIZE 24 To set the number of characters to display on each report line to 78 SET LINESIZE 78 To set the number format used in a report to 99 999 SET NUMFORMAT 99 999 See Also SET command on page 13 103 for more information on these and other SET command variables you may wish to set in your SOL Plus LOGIN file a Using Predefined Variables on page 6 16 for more information about predefined variables Storing and Restoring SQL Plus System Variables From the Command line and Windows GUI you can store the current SQL Plus system variables in a script with the STORE command If you alter any variables this script can be run to restore the original values This is useful if you want to reset system variables after running a report that alters them You could also include the script in your User Profile script so that these system variables are set each time you start SQL Plus To store the current setting of all system variables enter STORE SET file_name Enter a file name and file extension or enter only the file name to use the default extension SQL You can use the SET SUFFIX command to change the default file extension 3 8 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus and iSQL Plu
7. A SQL Plus Limits The general SQL Plus limits shown are valid for most operating systems Table A 1 SQL Plus Limits Item Limit filename length username length substitution variable name length substitution variable value length command line length LONG LINESIZE LONGCHUNKSIZE value output line size SQL or PL SQL command line size after variable substitution number of characters in a COMPUTE command label number of lines per SQL command maximum PAGESIZE total row width system dependent 30 bytes 30 bytes 240 characters 2500 characters 2 000 000 000 bytes system dependent system dependent system dependent 3 000 characters internal only 500 characters 500 assuming 80 characters per line 50 000 lines 32 767 characters SQL Plus Limits A 1 Table A 1 SQL Plus Limits Item Limit maximum ARRAYSIZE 5000 rows maximum number of 20 nested scripts maximum page number 99 999 maximum PL SQL error 2K message size maximum ACCEPT 240 Bytes character string length maximum number of 2048 substitution variables A 2 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference SQL Plus COPY Command This appendix discusses the following topics a COPY Command Syntax Copying Data from One Database to Another Copying Data between Tables on One Database Read this chapter while sitting at your computer and try out the example shown Before beginning make s
8. Cause STARTUP UPGRADE was used to try to startup an Oracle server for a release prior to 9 2 Action Check the platform specific environment to verify that you are connecting to an Oracle server that is at least release 9 2 1501 STARTUP with DOWNGRADE only valid with Oracle 9 2 or greater Cause STARTUP DOWNGRADE was used to try to startup an Oracle server for a release prior to 9 2 Action Check the platform specific environment to verify that you are connecting to an Oracle server that is at least release 9 2 SP2 1502 The HTTP proxy server specified by http_proxy is not accessible 14 44 SQL Plus User Cause The HTTP proxy server used by SQL Plus cannot be accessed SQL Plus will be unable to run scripts located on a web server Action Check that the proxy setting has the correct value or unset it if no proxy is needed SQL Plus may get the proxy name from the environment variable http_proxy or the value may be set in another way on your system Check that the given proxy server is operational Most web browsers can be configured to use a proxy Configure a browser to use the desired proxy and verify that web pages can still be loaded s Guide and Reference iSQL Plus Error Messages ISQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0850 Command command_name is not available in iSQL Plus Cause The command was not recognized by the SQL Plus engine or it is disabled in iSQL Plus This occurs if it is a command that does not have an
9. To suppress the display of column headings in a report enter SET HEADING OFF 13 118 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary If you then run a SQL SELECT command SELECT LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE JOB_ID AC_MGR the following output results Higgins 12000 To turn the display of column headings back on enter SET HEADING ON SET HEADS EP _ cl ON OFF Defines the character used as a line break in column headings The heading separator character cannot be alphanumeric or white space You can use the heading separator character in the COLUMN command and in the old forms of BTITLE and TTITLE to divide a column heading or title onto more than one line ON or OFF turns heading separation on or off When heading separation is OFF SQL Plus prints a heading separator character like any other character ON changes the value of c back to the default The Heading Separator character SET HEADSEP is only supported in iSQL Plus when the Preformatted Output preference is ON SET MARKUP HTML PREFORMAT SET INSTANCE instance_path LOCAL Changes the default instance for your session to the specified instance path Using the SET INSTANCE command does not connect to a database The default instance is used for commands when no instance is specified Any commands preceding the first use of SET INSTANCE communicate with the default instance To reset the instance to
10. Trust this certificate no yes Certificate was added to keystore In this example an alias servertest is created for the root certificate servertest cer 3 Request Certificate from CA Create a certificate request to request a certificate from your CA SJAVA_HOME bin keytool certreq keystore keystore file mycsr csr Enter keystore password 123456 In this example the certificate request file is named mycsr csr Use the contents of mycsr csr to request a new certificate from your CA Create a new file called mycert cer and paste in the contents of your new certificate 3 22 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference iSQL Plus Application Server Configuration 4 Import Certificate into Storage File Import the new certificate obtained in the previous step into the storage file SJAVA_HOME bin keytool import trustcacerts file mycert cer Enter keystore password 123456 Owner CN Test User OU IT Department O Oracle Corporation L San Francisco ST California C US Issuer CN Thawte Test CA Root OU TEST TEST TEST O Thawte Certification ST FOR TESTING PURPOSES ONLY C ZA Serial number 7988 Valid from Thu Sep 04 14 12 45 EST 2003 until Thu Sep 25 14 12 45 EST 2003 Certificate fingerprints MD5 P3 E2 1F 6B 5E E0 8A 7C 7D 94 60 96 28 55 CF 75 SHA1 D2 54 0E 97 86 53 D7 F5 E9 68 BC C6 BF 42 62 88 38 15 BE F4 Trust this certificate no yes Certificate was added to keystore 5 Configure iSQL Plus to run
11. iSQL Plus Architecture iSQL Plus is a browser based interface which uses the SQL Plus processing engine in a three tier model comprising a Client Web browser a Middle tier Application Server a Database Oracle Database 1 2 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference iSQL Plus Architecture Web Browser s T k HTTP Oracle Net Web Browser TCP IP Application Server Oracle Database Client tier Middle tier Database tier The iSQL Plus Server is installed on the same machine as the Application Server The client may or may not also be on this machine The middle tier coordinates interactions and resources between the client tier and the database tier The database is Oracle8i Oracle9i or Oracle Database 10g accessed through Oracle Net The iSQL Plus user interface comprises web pages served to your web browser through the Internet or your intranet There is no installation or configuration required for the iSQL Plus user interface You only need to know the URL of the Application Server to access an available Oracle database Application Server The Application Server is installed when Oracle Database is installed The middle tier contains a Java2 Enterprise Edition J2EE compliant application server It uses Oracle Containers for Java OC4J as the server engine The Application Server enables communication and authentication between the iSQL Plus user interface and Oracle Database Oracle Database Oracle Net co
12. CONNECT AS SYSDBA In the last two examples your default schema becomes SYS SQL Plus Command Reference 13 49 COPY COPY The COPY command is not being enhanced to handle datatypes or features introduced with or after Oracle8i The COPY command is likely to be made obsolete in a future release For COPY command details and syntax see Appendix B SQL Plus COPY Command 13 50 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference DEFINE DEFINE Syntax Terms Usage DEF INE variable variable texi Specifies a user or predefined variable and assigns a CHAR value to it or lists the value and variable type of a single variable or all variables variable Represents the user or predefined variable whose value you wish to assign or list text Represents the CHAR value you wish to assign to variable Enclose text in single quotes if it contains punctuation or blanks variable text Defines names a substitution variable and assigns it a CHAR value Enter DEFINE followed by variable to list the value and type of variable Enter DEFINE with no clauses to list the values and types of all substitution variables Defined variables retain their values until you enter a new DEFINE command referencing the variable a enter an UNDEFINE command referencing the variable enter an ACCEPT command referencing the variable a reference the variable in the NEW_VALUE or OLD_VALUE clause of a COLUMN command and then reference
13. DECLARE block for reporting monthly sales For SQL Plus commands you can only include style comments if they are on a line by themselves For example these comments are legal set maximum width for LONG to 777 SET LONG 777 This comment is illegal SET LONG 777 set maximum width for LONG to 777 If you enter the following SQL Plus command SQL Plus interprets it as a comment and does not execute the command SET LONG 777 Notes on Placing Comments SQL Plus does not have a SQL or PL SQL command parser It scans the first few keywords of each new statement to determine the command type SQL PL SQL or SQL Plus Comments in some locations can prevent SQL Plus from correctly identifying the command type giving unexpected results The following usage notes may help you to use SQL Plus comments more effectively 1 Do not put comments within the first few keywords of a statement For example CREATE OR REPLACE 2 HELLO PROCEDURE HELLO AS BEGIN DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_LINE HELLO END YH WO FP WwW Warning Procedure created with compilation errors The location of the comment prevents SQL Plus from recognizing the command as a command SQL Plus submits the PL SQL block to the server when it sees the slash at the beginning of the comment which it interprets as the statement terminator Move the comment to avoid this error For example CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE 2 HELLO Using Script
14. Edit Menu The Edit menu has the following options Option Description of Edit Menu Option Command line Copy The Copy option copies selected text to the Clipboard not applicable Ctrl C After you copy text to the Clipboard you can paste the text into other Windows applications such as Microsoft Excel and Microsoft Word The Copy keyboard shortcut is only available when no SQL operations are running in the SQL Plus session When a SQL operation is running Ctrl C cancels the running operation Paste The Paste option pastes the contents of the Clipboard to the SQL Plus command line not applicable Ctrl V Note A maximum of 3625 characters can be pasted from the Clipboard to the SQL Plus command line during a single paste operation Clear The Clear option clears the screen buffer and the screen of the SQL Plus application CLEAR SCREEN Shift Del window Editor The Editor option has two alternatives Invoke Editor and DefineEditor a I nvokeEditor loads the contents of the SQL Plus buffer into an editor By default EDIT SQL Plus saves the file to AFIEDT BUF Define Editor defines the editor that is invoked DEFINE _EDITOR editor_name Search Menu The Search menu has the following options Option Description of Search Menu Option Command line Find The Find option searches for a character a word or a group of characters or not applicable Alt F3 words in the SQL Plus application window Find begins the search at the top of the di
15. SQL Plus Command Reference 13 131 SET SQLPRE FIX c Table 13 4 Compatibility Matrix Value Consequence When available gt 9 0 Whitespace before a slash in a SQL statement is ignored and 9 0 1 4 the slash is taken to mean execute the statement Otherwise the slash is treated as part of the statement for example as a division sign gt 9 0 The length specified for NCHAR and NVARCHAR2 types is 9 0 1 characters Otherwise the length may represent bytes or characters depending on the character set SET SQLPRE FIX c SET SQLPREFIX is not supported in iSQL Plus Sets the SQL Plus prefix character While you are entering a SOL command or PL SQL block you can enter a SQL Plus command on a separate line prefixed by the SQL Plus prefix character SQL Plus will execute the command immediately without affecting the SQL command or PL SQL block that you are entering The prefix character must be a non alphanumeric character SET SQLP ROMPT SQL gt tex Example SET SQLPROMPT is not supported in iSQL Plus Sets the SQL Plus command prompt SET SQLPROMPT substitute variables dynamically This enables the inclusion of runtime variables such as the current connection identifier Substitution variables used in SOQLPROMPT do not have to be prefixed with amp and they can be used and accessed like any other substitution variable Variable substitution is not attempted for SQL in the default prompt Variabl
16. Username a Old Password New Password a Retype New Password Eo Ch P d g e Change Passwor Workspace History Logout Preferences Help Copytigh 2003 Oracle All right reserved Username Enter your Oracle Database account username Old password Enter your current Oracle Database account password New password Enter your new password Retype new password Enter your new password again to make sure you have entered it correctly Apply Click the Apply button to change the password for your Oracle Database account Cancel Click the Cancel button to clear the screen without changing your password Starting SQL Plus 4 3 Connecting to a Database Expired Password In the command line interface if your password has expired SQL Plus prompts you to change it when you attempt to log in You are logged in once you successfully change your password Expired Password Screen in SQL Plus If your password has expired the Expired Password screen is automatically displayed when you attempt to log in Fill out the fields on the Expired Password screen as you would for the Change Password screen You are logged in once you successfully change your password If you click the Cancel button you are returned to the Login screen ORACLE 7SQL Plus 2 p Expired Password Your password has expired Change your password to log into iSQL Plus neel indicates required field Cancer
17. WHERE EMPLOYEER_ID amp ENUMBER Save this file as PROMPT2 Next run this script SQL Plus prompts for the value of ENUMBER using the text you specified with PROMPT and ACCEPT START PROMPT2 SQL Plus prompts you to enter an Employee ID Enter a valid employee ID For Example 145 206 Employee ID 205 old 3 WHERE EMPLOYEE _ID amp ENUMBER new 3 WHERE EMPLOYEE_ID 205 Department Report FIRST_NAME LAST_NAME SALARY Shelley Higgins 12000 What would happen if you typed characters instead of numbers Since you specified NUMBER after the variable name in the ACCEPT command SQL Plus will not accept a non numeric value Try entering characters instead of numbers to the prompt for Employee ID SQL Plus will respond with an error message and prompt you again to re enter the correct number START PROMPT2 6 30 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Communicating with the User When SQL Plus prompts you to enter an Employee ID enter the word one instead of a number Enter a valid employee ID For Example 145 206 Employee ID SP2 0425 one is not a valid number Sending a Message and Accepting Return as Input If you want to display a message on the user s screen and then have the user press Return after reading the message use the SOL Plus command PAUSE For example you might include the following lines in a script PROMPT Before continuing make sure you have your account
18. a Enter Execute and Cancel scripts Load and Save scripts a View Save and Print output a Access Preferences screens a Get help and Log out ORACLE 7SQL Plus D Logout Preferences Help Connected as SYSTEM inst1 Workspace Enter SQL PL SQL and SQL Plus statements Clear Execute Load Script Save Script Cancel Clear Workspace History Logout Preferences Help Copyiigh 2003 Oracle All right reserved The Workspace and History screens display the user s connection information in the top right The connection information is displayed in the form Connected as username connection_identifier AS SYSDBA AS SYSOPER or Not connected 2 16 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference iSQL Plus User Interface Clear Clears all statements in the Input area and all displayed output Cancels any script that may be running It does not clear the SQL buffer nor does it clear any variable values altered by changing preferences or changing options of the SET command Execute Executes the contents of the Input area Depending on your preference settings the results are displayed in the Output area in a new web browser window or saved to a file Load Script Displays the Load Script screen where you enter a path and file name or a URL for the script you want to load into the Input area for editing or execution Save
19. lt Building gt Owned lt Building gt lt Warehouse gt To set the XMLType column width to 20 characters and then select the XMLType column enter COLUMN Building FORMAT A20 SELECT w warehouse_spec extract Warehouse Building text getStringVal Building FROM warehouses w Building For more information about the createXML extract text and getStringVal functions and about creating and manipulating XMLType data see Oracle XML API Reference 7 8 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Formatting Columns Copying Column Display Attributes When you want to give more than one column the same display attributes you can reduce the length of the commands you must enter by using the LIKE clause of the COLUMN command The LIKE clause tells SQL Plus to copy the display attributes of a previously defined column to the new column except for changes made by other clauses in the same command Example 7 7 Copying a Column s Display Attributes To give the column COMMISSION_PCT the same display attributes you gave to SALARY but to specify a different heading enter the following command COLUMN COMMISSION_PCT LIKE SALARY HEADING BONUS Rerun the query LAST MONTHLY NAME SALARY BONUS Russell 14 000 0 Partners 13 500 0 Errazuriz 12 000 0 Cambrault 11 000 0 Zlotkey 10 500 0 Listing and Resetting Column Display Attributes To list the current display attributes for a given column use t
20. 13 160 NUMBER columns changing format 7 4 13 34 default format 7 4 13 36 number formats 7 5 0 7 5 9 7 5 comma 7 5 setting default 6 23 13 106 13 124 NUMFORMAT clause in LOGIN SQL 3 8 NUMFORMAT variable 13 106 13 124 NUMWIDTH variable 13 106 13 124 effect on NUMBER column format 7 4 13 36 NVARCHAR2 columns changing format 13 33 default format 7 6 13 33 N N Index 13 O objects describing 13 115 obsolete commands BTITLE C 2 COLUMN command DEFAULT clause C 2 DOCUMENT C 1 C 3 NEWPAGE C 1 C 3 SET command BUFFER variable C 3 SET command CLOSECURSOR variable C 2 C 4 SET command DOCUMENT variable C 2 C 4 SET command MAXDATA variable C 2 C 4 SET command SCAN variable C 2 C 4 SET command SPACE variable C 2 C 4 SET command TRUNCATE variable C 2 C 5 SHOW command LABEL variable C 2 C 5 TTITLE command old form C 5 OF clause 7 17 OFF clause 13 38 in ATTRIBUTE command 13 18 in COLUMN command 7 10 13 38 in REPFOOTER commands 13 98 in REPHEADER commands 13 98 in SPOOL command 7 35 13 144 in TTITLE and BTITLE commands 7 30 13 156 OLD_VALUE clause 7 32 13 38 ON clause in ATTRIBUTE command 13 18 in COLUMN command 7 10 13 38 in TTITLE and BTITLE commands 7 31 ON column clause in BREAK command 7 13 13 19 in COMPUTE command 7 17 13 43 ON expr clause in BREAK command 13 20 in COMPUTE command 13 43 ON REPORT clause in BREAK command 7 21 13 21 in COMPUTE c
21. CHANG Ensen s rn Gee cot a a E cca tiasts lutptaosedtutatisasecege tote dtgensvestaeddsturbean aes Ra 13 26 CLEAR 006 forse OR a E E EA aa E E a hares oly ates aha Mastek 13 29 COLUMN fscieccierdictecosteceit ucts enana a i o ai n r Sees ates tis E A Ea A as a a E 13 31 COMPUTE pa a a e e tthe createed ee E A ve tos e a A 13 42 CONNECT katehina rre aaa e eri at ran sae as a i araa alaia ouiraste eins 13 48 COPY a a a N a A 13 50 DEFINE neto nAn e aa a e e a E a A E data haiaiaaiten at 13 51 Predefined Variapl Ssis niama nae EA a a a E a A ape ea aaa EEE 13 53 DE ESEE EE A tess et es Ast E E E E EE E 13 57 DESCRIBE sirarsa inune aa n a i ata aA E a ds 13 59 xi xii EDDY EENE EENES EE E A dae sages hed Soha ae teas AE AEEA 13 67 EXECUTE vices cose cessive ie sae aia eek daa ie aa tok ea N Ia ed es dG eg catenin vega eee 13 69 EX Tkn nata ete Sati eee an aves Sih de Roe a a Same aden edie eoe eit 13 70 GE Deriniai na a B acres ans ahead a hea eadiaslet elas i meena Oil a a aaas 13 72 HEEP hei aa ee ii tae otis an GE et ea hats Reel EEA 13 74 FOS Teco cesses esi e CoS ie Sse Se oat a Se ga E Ga cS EA aes E EA ena abs Sea Ea 13 75 INPUT na a e end nid ah a ahha R A E tine i hha ai aus 13 77 LES Doce EES E AEE EEA wh ce teach acees dae E OEI EAEI ENANS 13 79 PASSWORD irnir a r ae a e a a E E a eaten A EEA 13 81 PAUSE seccdchecectecn coh an eean e a a dete deta a a ata a aeta aaa ita aN 13 82 ld t MRE ETR ASR AEIR I EEE ITSE 13 83 PROMPT eenen aa
22. COLUMN LAST_NAME HEADING Family Name Similarly to list column definitions for the EMPLOYEES table enter the command DESCRIBE EMPLOYEES 1 4 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Oracle Database Sample Schemas and SQL Plus How Can Learn SQL Plus There are several sources available to assist you to learn SQL Plus a Part Il of this Guide Using SQL Plus a Help for SQL Plus Command line and iSQL Plus online help a Oracle Database 10g SQL Fundamentals An instructor led course run by Oracle This is a comprehensive hands on course taking the student through all aspects of using SQL Plus and iSQL Plus to access Oracle Database a More Oracle Database 10g Training To find more useful Oracle courses go to http www oracle com education How to Use the SQL Plus Guide This guide provides information about SQL Plus that applies to all operating systems It also includes some Windows and UNIX specific information for example the Windows Graphical User Interface Some aspects of SQL Plus differ on each operating system Such operating system specific details are covered in the Oracle Database Installation Guide provided for your system Use these operating system specific guides in conjunction with this SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Throughout this guide examples showing how to enter commands use a common command syntax and a common set of sample tables The tables are described in Oracle Database Sample Schemas and S
23. DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_LINE Task is complete END Task is complete PL SQL procedure successfully completed The following example shows what happens when you create a trigger with SET SERVEROUTPUT ON 13 126 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary CREATE TABLE SERVER_TAB Letter CHAR CREATE TRIGGER SERVER_TRIG BEFORE INSERT OR UPDATE OR DELETE ON SERVER_TAB BEGIN DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_LINE Task is complete END Trigger Created INSERT INTO SERVER_TAB VALUES M DROP TABLE SERVER_TAB Remove SERVER_TAB from database Task is complete 1 row created To set the output to WORD_WRAPPED enter SET SERVEROUTPUT ON FORMAT WORD_WRAPPED SET LINESIZE 20 BEGIN DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_LINE If there is nothing left to do DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_LINE shall we continue with plan B END If there is nothing left to do shall we continue with plan B To set the output to TRUNCATED enter SET SERVEROUTPUT ON FORMAT TRUNCATED SET LINESIZE 20 BEGIN DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_LINE If there is nothing left to do DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_LINE shall we continue with plan B END SQL Plus Command Reference 13 127 SET SHIFT INOUT VIS IBLE INV ISIBLE If there is nothing shall we continue wi SET SHIFT INOUT VIS IBLE INV ISIBLE Example SET SHIFTINOUT is not supported in iSQL Plus Enables correct alignment for terminals that display shift charac
24. DEPARTMENT NAME CITY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 Enter the SPOOL OFF command SPOOL OFF The lt BODY gt and lt HTML gt tags are appended to the spool file report html before it is closed The output from report sq is a file report html that can be loaded into a web browser Open report html in your web browser It should appear something like the following SQL gt SELECT lt A HREF bttp oracle com DEPARTMENT NAME html gt DEPARTMENT_NAME lt A gt DEPARTMENT NAME CITY 2 FROM EMP_DETAILS_ VIEW 3 WHERE SALARY gt 12000 DEPARTMENT CITY Marketing 6 rows selected SQL gt SPOOL OFF Generating HTML Reports from SQL Plus 8 3 Creating Reports using Command line SQL Plus In this example the prompts and query text have not been suppressed Depending on how you invoke a script you can use SET ECHO OFF or command line SILENT options to do this The SQL Plus commands in this example contain several items of usage worth noting The hyphen used to continue lines in long SQL Plus commands The TABLE option to set table WIDTH and BORDER attributes The COLUMN command to set ENTMAP OFF for the DEPARTMENT_NAME column to enable the correct formation of HTML hyperlinks This makes sure that any HTML special characters such as quotes and angle brackets are not replaced by their equivalent entities amp quot amp amp amp lt and amp gt The use of quotes and
25. Environment variable to specify the location of SQL Plus message files in Windows This environment variable is set during installation It has a default value of SORACLE_HOME SQLPLUS MESG Not applicable to UNIX Windows registry entry to specify the font face used in the SQL Plus Windows GUI If the SQLPLUS_FONT entry is not created or if it has an invalid name or value the default face Fixedsys is used Windows registry entry to specify the font size used in the SQL Plus Windows GUI If the SQLPLUS_FONT_SIZE entry is not created or if it has an invalid name or value the default size 16 is used Environment variable to specify the location of the tnsnames ora file If not specified 0RACLE_ HOME network admin is used Example h network var opt oracle UNIX environment variable to specify a connection string Connections that do not specify a database will connect to the database specified in TWO_TASK Example TWO_TASK MYDB export TWO_TASK sqlplus hr your_password is the same as sqlplus hr your_password MYDB Configuring SQL Plus 3 3 SQL Plus and iSQL Plus Configuration Table 3 1 Parameters or Environment Variables influencing SQL Plus and iSQL Plus Parameter or Variable Description iSQLPlusAllowUserMarkup iSQLPlusConnectIdList log4j rootLogger iSQL Plus configuration file option to specify whether HTML entity mapping replaces characters of special significance with print
26. PAUSE Syntax Usage Examples PAU SE text where text represents the text you wish to display Displays the specified text then waits for the user to press RETURN In iSQL Plus displays the Next Page button which the user must click to continue Enter PAUSE followed by no text to display two empty lines Because PAUSE always waits for the user s response it is best to use a message that tells the user explicitly to press Return PAUSE reads input from the terminal if a terminal is available even when you have designated the source of the command input as a file See SET PAU SE ON OFF text on page 13 125 for information on pausing between pages of a report To print Adjust paper and press RETURN to continue and to have SQL Plus wait for the user to press Return you might include the following PAUSE command in a script SET PAUSE OFF PAUSE Adjust paper and press RETURN to continue SELECT 13 82 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference PRINT PRINT Syntax Usage Examples PRI NT variable where variable represents names of bind variables whose values you want to display Displays the current values of bind variables For more information on bind variables see your PL SQL User s Guide and Reference Enter PRINT with no variables to print all bind variables Bind variables are created using the VARIABLE command See VARIABLE on page 13 160 for more information and examp
27. Procedure created with compilation errors SHOW ERRORS PROCEDURE PROC1 NO ERRORS SHOW ERRORS PROCEDURE HR PROC1 Errors for PROCEDURE HR PROC1 LINE COL ERROR 3 3 PLS 00049 bad bind variable P1 To show whether AUTORECOVERY is enabled enter SHOW AUTORECOVERY AUTORECOVERY ON To display the connect identifier for the default instance enter SHOW INSTANCE INSTANCE LOCAL To display the location for archive logs enter SHOW LOGSOURCE LOGSOURCE usr oracle90 dbs arch To display objects that can be reverted with the FLASHBACK commands where CJ1 and ABC were objects dropped enter SHOW RECYCLEBIN 13 140 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SHOW ORIGINAL NAME RECYCLEBIN NAME OBJECT TYPE DROP TIME cJ1 RB 29458STABLES 0 TABLE 2003 01 22 14 54 07 ABC RB 29453STABLES 0 TABLE 2003 01 20 18 50 29 To restore CJ1 enter FLASHBACK TABLE CJ1 TO BEFORE DROP SQL Plus Command Reference 13 141 SHUTDOWN SHUTDOWN Syntax Terms SHUTDOWN ABORT IMMEDIATE NORMAL TRANSACTIONAL LOCAL Shuts down a currently running Oracle Database instance optionally closing and dismounting a database ABORT Proceeds with the fastest possible shutdown of the database without waiting for calls to complete or users to disconnect Uncommitted transactions are not rolled back Client SOL statements currently being processed are terminated All users currently con
28. SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY is 10 1 See Also SET SQLPLUSCOMPATIIBILITY x y z on page 13 130 SQLPLUS C OMPATIBILITY Argument There is a new command line argument for the SQLPLUS command SQLPLUS C x y z which specifies the value of the SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY system variable for example sqlplus c 9 2 This has the same effect as using SET SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY 9 2 It is not to be confused with the SET COMPATIBILITY command which sets the SQL language version See Also SOQLPLUS Program Syntax on page 4 18 SQL Plus Quick Start These instructions are to enable you to login and connect to a database after you have installed SQL Plus You can connect to the default database you created during installation or to another existing Oracle database a Resources a What is SQL Plus a Before Starting SQL Plus or iSQL Plus a Starting SQL Plus Command line Starting SQL Plus Windows GUI a Starting and Stopping the iSQL Plus Application Server a Starting iSQL Plus Connecting to a Different Database Sample Schemas and SQL Plus a Running your first Query a Exiting SQL Plus XXXV Resources a SQL Plus on the Oracle Technology Network at http otn oracle com tech sql_plus a SQL Plus Discussion Forum at http www oracle com forums a Oracle Documentation Library at http otn oracle com documentation a SQL Plus Product and Documentation feedback by emailing sqlplus oracle com What is SQL Pl
29. Sess cassie lassavsscendoas se dosa ates eleasoucdaoatins aera tu traer les coedae ns 13 126 SET SHIFTINOU Tj enireoni eeaeee ened ie tar Ne e a 13 128 GBT SHOW MODE ssc So icecto hs cacat a tats tiny daty ounce eed sae Ores bat ee 13 128 SET SO BLTANKLINE Snaha niao ate cnet dod a adnate a ania 13 129 CPT SOMCIAGE I EAEE T AA E E A EEEE TAAN 13 129 SET SQLCOINTINUP erate ia i i a a aa 13 130 SFT SOLNIUMBER siinne AC herpes cate ule a Ain let e ES 13 130 SET SQLPLUSCOMPAT IBILITY ssssssssssssssecsssssssssssssscesssssevsesesssssssessceesssssenssseessssneseee 13 130 SET SOLER ELE os sitacs ates chee al weit Pic acisls No Lal ice une eae oh a EU cd st 13 132 SET SOLPIR MPT Pee ee ee One eI Se Re eC ERA ae 13 132 xiii 14 xiv SET SOLT ERMINATOR gt ctanuahansanguletalidaceette esha Gdnies Queenie 13 133 SET SUB EDX sss fe dette hess ease nlece ee ott ENE EEE E wana 13 133 SET LAB wc neaetinweetiine heen aa ee eee eds 13 134 SET TERM OUWT sii22cosec soasdtetiees wh Save aa Bie Bate So a os Be eee 13 134 SET TIME i 2822268 r eh Ata Reais iid Madi nese Rake eee 13 134 SETTIMI LNG ested ein ra a eee SS teeter a a aa aoas eel aes 13 134 SPT TTRM OU T Aen Ss ee RS oe ee Sn ee et 13 135 SET TRIMS POOE Jinenn a Sekine 2 ai een ae ee atin eee 13 135 SET UND EREINE EA EE EE E EE geod ben EOE 13 135 SET VERIFY friert aa a e a a E a r a aN 13 135 SET WRAP kren a a Seen nie Nite S AEEA Ena a ao 13 135 SHO a a a aaea lout ee
30. TYPE BODY DIMENSION JAVA CLASS schema name 13 136 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SHOW Shows the compilation errors of a stored procedure includes stored functions procedures and packages After you use the CREATE command to create a stored procedure a message is displayed if the stored procedure has any compilation errors To see the errors you use SHOW ERRORS When you specify SHOW ERRORS with no arguments SOL Plus shows compilation errors for the most recently created or altered stored procedure When you specify the type function procedure package package body trigger view type type body dimension or java class and the name of the PL SQL stored procedure SQL Plus shows errors for that stored procedure For more information on compilation errors see your PL SQL User s Guide and Reference schema contains the named object If you omit schema SHOW ERRORS assumes the object is located in your current schema SHOW ERRORS output displays the line and column number of the error LINE COL as well as the error itself ERROR LINE COL and ERROR have default widths of 8 and 65 respectively You can use the COLUMN command to alter the default widths LNO Shows the current line number the position in the current page of the display and or spooled output PARAMETERS parameter_name Displays the current values for one or more initialization parameters You can use a string after the command to see
31. This is especially useful for storing complex commands or frequently used reports Writing Scripts with a System Editor Your operating system may have one or more text editors that you can use to write scripts You can run your operating system s default text editor without leaving SQL Plus command line or Windows GUI by entering the EDIT command You can use the SQL Plus DEFINE command to define the variable EDITOR to hold the name of your preferred text editor For example to define the editor used by EDIT to be vi enter the following command DEFINE _EDITOR vi You can include an editor definition in your user or site profile so that it is always enabled when you start SQL Plus See SOQL Plus and iSQL Plus Configuration on page 3 4 and the DEFINE and EDIT commands in Chapter 13 SQL Plus Command Reference for more information To create a script with a text editor enter EDIT followed by the name of the file to edit or create for example EDIT SALES EDIT adds the filename extension SQL to the name unless you specify the file extension When you save the script with the text editor it is saved back into the same file EDIT lets you create or modify scripts You must include a semicolon at the end of each SQL command and a slash on a line by itself after each PL SQL block in the file You can include multiple SQL commands and PL SQL blocks in a script Example 6 1 Using a System Editor to Write a SQL Script Sup
32. What is your first and last name nknown Test User What is the name of your organizational unit nknown IT Department at is the name of your organization nknown Oracle Corporation What is the name of your City or Locality nknown San Francisco at is the name of your State or Province nknown California a n t is the two letter country code for this unit known US Configuring SQL Plus 3 21 iSQL Plus Application Server Configuration Is CN Test User OU IT Department O Oracle Corporation L San Francisco ST California C US correct no yes Enter key password for lt mykey gt RETURN if same as keystore password A storage file named keystore is generated in the current directory 2 Load Root Certificate into Storage File Load your server s root certificate into the storage file you created in the step 1 SJAVA_HOME bin keytool keystore keystore import alias servertest file servertest cer Enter keystore password 123456 Owner CN Thawte Test CA Root OU TEST TEST TEST O Thawte Certification ST FO TESTING PURPOSES ONLY C ZA Issuer CN Thawte Test CA Root OU TEST TEST TEST O Thawte Certification ST F R TESTING PURPOSES ONLY C ZA Serial number 0 Valid from Thu Aug 01 10 00 00 EST 1996 until Fri Jan 01 08 59 59 EST 2021 Certificate fingerprints MD5 5E E0 0E 1D 17 B7 CA A5 7D 36 D6 02 DF 4D 26 A4 SHA1 39 C6 9D 27 AF DC EB 47 D6 33 36 6A B2 05 F1 47 A9 B4 DA EA
33. You can remove the current break definition by entering the CLEAR command with the BREAKS clause CLEAR BREAKS You may wish to place the command CLEAR BREAKS at the beginning of every script to ensure that previously entered BREAK commands will not affect queries you run in a given file 7 16 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines Computing Summary Lines when a Break Column s Value Changes If you organize the rows of a report into subsets with the BREAK command you can perform various computations on the rows in each subset You do this with the functions of the SQL Plus COMPUTE command Use the BREAK and COMPUTE commands together in the following forms BREAK ON break_column COMPUTE function LABEL label_name OF column column column ON break_column You can include multiple break columns and actions such as skipping lines in the BREAK command as long as the column you name after ON in the COMPUTE command also appears after ON in the BREAK command To include multiple break columns and actions in BREAK when using it in conjunction with COMPUTE use these commands in the following forms BREAK ON break_column_1 SKIP PAGE ON break_column_2 SKIP 1 COMPUTE function LABEL label_name OF column column column ON break_column_2 The COMPUTE command has no effect without a corresponding BREAK command You can COMPUTE on NUMBER columns and in certain cases on all types of columns
34. and START commands to create and use external files Obsolete SQL Plus Commands C 1 BTI TLE text obsolete old form Obsolete Alternative Description of Alternative Command Command Command SET none Obsolete CLOSECURSOR SET DOCUMENT none Obsolete SET MAXDATA none Obsolete SET SCAN SET DEFINE on Sets the character used to prefix substitution page 13 114 variables SET SPACE SET COLSEP on Sets the text to be printed between SELECTed page 13 112 columns SET TRUNCATE SET WRAP on Controls whether SOL Plus truncates a SELECTed page 13 135 row if it is too long for the current line width SHOW LABEL none Obsolete TTITLE TTITLE on Places and formats a title at the top of each report old form page 13 155 page or lists the current TTITLE definition BTI TLE text obsolete old form Displays a title at the bottom of each report page The old form of BTITLE offers formatting features more limited than those of the new form but provides compatibility with UFI a predecessor of SQL Plus The old form defines the bottom title as an empty line followed by a line with centered text See TTI TLE text obsolete old form on page C 5 for more details COL UMN columnlexpr DEF AULT obsolete Resets the display attributes for a given column to default values Has the same effect as COLUMN CLEAR C 2 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference SET BUF FER bufferISQL obsolete DOC UMENT obsolete Begins a block
35. closing applications not required reducing the size of the command or statement or by recoding the query to select fewer records SP2 0023 String not found Cause The search string specified was not found Action Check the search string to make sure that it is valid 14 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0024 Nothing to change Cause There was nothing in the SQL buffer when using the CHANGE command Action Make sure the SQL buffer is not empty before using the CHANGE command SP2 0025 Invalid change string Cause An invalid option was used in the CHANGE command Action Check the syntax of the CHANGE command for the correct options SP2 0026 No lines to delete Cause There was nothing in the SQL buffer when using the DEL command Action Make sure the SQL buffer is not empty before using the DEL command SP2 0027 Input is too long gt max_characters characters line ignored Cause The input value specified was too long Action Re enter with fewer characters SP2 0029 command buffer space exhausted Cause A large SQL or PL SQL script is being executed from SQL Plus Action Reduce the size of the SQL statement or PL SQL block by one of the following a Remove extra white space and comments a Re code to use fewer commands and or shorter variable names a Place sections of the block into stored or packaged procedures and then call these procedures from the block
36. in addition to subtotals or sub averages and so on include a break column and an ON REPORT clause in your BREAK command Then enter one COMPUTE command for the break column and another to compute ON REPORT BREAK ON break_column ON REPORT COMPUTE function LABEL label_name OF column ON break_column COMPUTE function LABEL label_name OF column ON REPORT Formatting SQL Plus Reports 7 21 Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines Computing Multiple Summary Values and Lines You can compute and print the same type of summary value on different columns To do so enter a separate COMPUTE command for each column Example 7 15 Computing the Same Type of Summary Value on Different Columns To print the total of salaries and commissions for all sales people first enter the following COMPUTE command COMPUTE SUM OF SALARY COMMISSION_PCT ON REPORT You do not have to enter a BREAK command the BREAK you entered in Example 7 14 is still in effect Now change the first line of the select query to include COMMISSION_PCT 1 1 SELECT LAST_NAME SALARY APPEND COMMISSION_PCT Finally run the revised query to see the results LAST_NAME SALARY COMMISSION_PCT Russell 14000 4 Partners 13500 3 Errazuriz 12000 23 Cambrault 11000 3 Zlotkey 10500 2 sum 61000 1 5 You can also print multiple summary lines on the same break column To do so include the function for each summary line in the COMPUTE comma
37. its default value the employee names wrap to the next line after the fourth character as shown in Example 7 5 If WRAP is set to OFF the names are truncated cut off after the fourth character The system variable WRAP controls all columns you can override the setting of WRAP for a given column through the WRAPPED WORD_WRAPPED and TRUNCATED clauses of the COLUMN command See the COLUMN command on page 13 31 for more information on these clauses You will use the WORD_ WRAPPED clause of COLUMN later in this chapter Note The column heading is truncated regardless of the setting of WRAP or any COLUMN command clauses Now return the column to its previous format COLUMN LAST_NAME FORMAT A10 Formatting SQL Plus Reports 7 7 Formatting Columns Example 7 6 Formatting an XMLType Column Before illustrating how to format an XMLType column you must create a table with an XMLType column definition and insert some data into the table You can create an XMLType column like any other user defined column To create a table containing an XMLType column enter CREATE TABLE warehouses warehouse_id NUMBER 3 warehouse_spec SYS XMLTYPE warehouse_name VARCHAR2 35 location_id NUMBER 4 To insert a new record containing warehouse_id and warehouse_spec values into the new warehouses table enter INSERT into warehouses warehouse_id warehouse_spec VALUES 100 sys XMLTYPE createXML lt Warehouse whNo 100 gt
38. names packages and classes usernames and roles program units and parameter values Note Some programmatic elements use a mixture of UPPERCASE and lowercase Enter these elements as shown Lowercase italic monospace font represents placeholders or variables You can back up the database by using the BACKUP command tl vs Query the TABLE_NAME column in the US TABLES data dictionary view Use the DBMS_STATS GENERATE_STATS procedure Enter sqlplus to open SQL Plus The password is specified in the orapwd file Back up the datafiles and control files in the disk1 oracle dbs directory The department_id department_name and location_id columns are in the hr departments table Set the QUERY_REWRITE_ENABLED initialization parameter to true Connect as oe user The JRepUtil class implements these methods You can specify the paral lel_clause Run Uold_release SQL where old_release refers to the release you installed prior to upgrading XXV Conventions in Code Examples Code examples illustrate SOL PL SQL SQL Plus or other command line statements If users are expected to type them into the system they are displayed in a monospace fixed width font and separated from normal text as follows SELECT username FROM dba_users WHERE username MIGRATE Similarly output from an example is identified by boxed text as follows PAGESIZE 24 The following table de
39. or updated during the copy Then COPY lists the number of rows selected inserted and committed B 8 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Copying Data between Tables on One Database Specifying Another User s Table You can refer to another user s table in a COPY command by qualifying the table name with the username just as you would in your local database or in a query with a database link For example to make a local copy of a table named DEPARTMENT owned by the username ADAMS on the database associated with the Oracle Net connect identifier BOSTONDB you would enter COPY FROM HR your_password BOSTONDB CREATE EMPLOYEE_COPY2 USING SELECT FROM ADAMS DEPARTMENT Of course you could get the same result by instructing COPY to log in to the remote database as ADAMS You cannot do that however unless you know the password associated with the username ADAMS Copying Data between Tables on One Database You can copy data from one table to another in a single database local or remote To copy between tables in your local database specify your own username and password and the service name for your local database in either a FROM or a TO clause omit the other clause COPY FROM HR your_password MYDATABASE INSERT EMPLOYEE_COPY2 USING SELECT FROM EMPLOYEE_COPY To copy between tables on a remote database include the same username password and service name in the FROM and TO clauses COPY FROM HR your_password
40. salesman only BREAK ON DEPARTMENT_ID ON JOB_ID DUPLICATES COMPUTE SUM OF SALARY ON DEPARTMENT_ID COMPUTE AVG OF SALARY ON JOB_ID SELECT DEPARTMENT_ID JOB_ID LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE JOB_ID IN SH_CLERK SA_MAN AND DEPARTMENT_ID IN 50 80 ORDER BY DEPARTMENT_ID JOB_ID 13 22 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference BREAK DEPARTMENT_ID JOB_ID LAST_NAME SALARY 50 DEPARTMENT_ID SH_CLERK SH_CLERK SH_CLERK JOB_ID Gates LAST _NAME 2900 SALARY SH_CLERK SH_CLERK SH_CLERK KKKKKKKKKK avg DEPARTMENT_ID JOB_ID KREKKKKKKKKK KK sum 80 SA_MAN SA_MAN SA_MAN SA_MAN SA_MAN KKKKKKKKKK avg DEPARTMENT_ID JOB_ID KREKKKKKKKKKEKK sum 25 rows selected Perkins Bell Grant LAST_NAME Russell Partners Errazuriz Cambrault Zlotkey LAST_NAME SQL Plus Command Reference 13 23 BTITLE BTITLE Syntax Terms Usage BTI TLE printspec text variable ON OFF where printspec represents one or more of the following clauses used to place and format the text BOLD CE NTER COL n FORMAT text LE FT RIGHT S KIP n TABn Places and formats a specified title at the bottom of each report page or lists the current BTITLE definition Enter BTITLE with no clauses to list the current BTITLE definition For a description of the old form of BTITLE see BTI TLE text obsolete old form on pa
41. username in the Userid column ROLES in the Attribute column and the role name in the Char_Value column Note When you enter PUBLIC or for the Userid column you disable the role for all users You should only use or PUBLIC for roles which are granted to PUBLIC If you try to disable a role that has not been granted to a user none of the roles for that user are disabled The Scope Numeric_Value and Date_Value columns should contain NULL For example PRODUCT USERID ATTRIBUTE SCOPE NUMERIC CHAR DATE LONG VALUE VALUE VALUE VALUE SOL Plus HR ROLES ROLE1 SQL Plus PUBLIC ROLES ROLE2 During login these table rows are translated into the command SET ROLE ALL EXCEPT ROLE1 ROLE2 To ensure that the user does not use the SET ROLE command to change their roles after login you can disable the SET ROLE command See Disabling SET ROLE on page 10 7 for more information To re enable roles delete the row containing the restriction 10 8 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Disabling Commands with SQLPLUS RESTRICT Disabling Commands with SQLPLUS RESTRICT Like the Product User Profile table the RESTRICT option enables you to disable certain commands that interact with the operating system However commands disabled with the RESTRICT option are disabled even when no connection to a server exists and remain disabled until SOL Plus terminates The following table shows which commands are di
42. 1 Entering and Executing Commands Entering and Executing Commands Unless stated otherwise descriptions of commands are applicable to all user interfaces In the command line and Windows GUI type commands at the SQL Plus prompt and press Return to execute them In iSQL Plus type commands in the Workspace Input area and click Execute to execute them Usually you separate the words in a command with a space or a tab You can use additional spaces or tabs between words to make your commands more readable Case sensitivity is operating system specific For the sake of clarity all table names column names and commands in this guide appear in capital letters You can enter three kinds of commands SQL commands for working with information in the database PL SQL blocks also for working with information in the database SQL Plus commands for formatting query results setting options and editing and storing SQL commands and PL SQL blocks The manner in which you continue a command on additional lines end a command or execute a command differs depending on the type of command you wish to enter and run Examples of how to run and execute these types of commands are found on the following pages In iSQL Plus the Input area of the Workspace is where you write load save and execute scripts You can cut and paste statements in the Input area using your web browser s edit keys You can also cut or copy scripts or statement
43. 105 13 119 use in COLUMN command 7 2 help enabling or disabling iSQL Plus help 3 24 installing command line 3 10 iSQL Plus online 4 16 menu 2 8 online 13 74 HELP command command 13 74 help online 4 9 HIDE clause 13 12 History screen 2 18 HOST command 5 13 13 75 host string 4 10 HTML 8 2 clause 4 20 entities 3 24 8 7 option 4 20 running dynamic reports 8 8 spooling to file 4 22 tag 8 1 HTTP Application Server HTTP port 4 12 HTTPS security 10 11 security 10 10 hyphen continuing a long SQL Plus command 5 11 13 1 IMMEDIATE mode 13 142 infinity sign 13 36 initialization parameters displaying 13 137 INIT ORA file parameter file 13 148 input accepting Return 6 31 accepting values from the user 6 28 13 11 INPUT command 6 4 6 8 13 77 entering several lines 13 77 INSERT clause B 3 B 7 INSERT command disabling 10 5 INSTANCE variable 13 105 13 119 instances shutting down 13 142 starting 13 148 iSQL Plus access modes 10 11 Application Server running 3 14 Change Password screen 4 2 configuring Oracle Net 3 12 DBA Login screen 2 13 dynamic reports 8 8 enabling cookies 3 25 enabling javascript 3 25 enabling or disabling 3 24 enabling or disabling iSQL Plus help 3 24 enabling restricted database access 3 16 environment variables 3 1 error messages 14 45 exiting xlii 4 17 Expired Password screen 4 4 History screen 2 18 language support
44. 13 106 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary System Variable Page Description SET TAB ON OFF on Determines how SQL Plus formats white space in terminal page 13 134 output SET TERMOUT ON OFF on Controls the display of output generated by commands page 13 134 executed from a script SET TIME ON OFF on Controls the display of the current time page 13 134 SET TIMING ON OFF on Controls the display of timing statistics page 13 134 SET TRIMOUT ON OFF on Determines whether SQL Plus puts trailing blanks at the page 13 135 end of each displayed line SET TRIMSPOOL ON OFF on Determines whether SQL Plus puts trailing blanks at the page 13 135 end of each spooled line SET UNDERLINE c ON OFF on Sets the character used to underline column headings in page 13 135 SQL Plus reports to c SET VERIFY ON OFF on Controls whether SQL Plus lists the text of a SQL page 13 135 statement or PL SQL command before and after SQL Plus replaces substitution variables with values SET WRAP ON OFF on Controls whether SQL Plus truncates the display of a page 13 135 SELECTed row if it is too long for the current line width SET command not available in iSQL Plus SET APPI NFO ON OFF tex Sets automatic registering of scripts through the DBMS_APPLICATION_INFO package This enables the performance and resource usage of each script to be monitored by your DBA
45. 13 84 customizing prompts for value 6 29 prompts for value bypassing with parameters 6 26 customizing 6 29 through ACCEPT 6 28 through substitution variables 6 17 PUPBLD SQL 10 2 Q queries in COPY command B 3 B 6 show number of records retrieved 5 6 13 105 13 117 tracing 9 8 query execution path including in report 13 110 Index 15 query results displaying on screen 5 5 sending toa printer 7 36 13 144 storing ina file 7 36 13 144 QUIT command 13 70 See also EXIT R RAW column definition from DESCRIBE 13 59 record separators printing 7 10 13 106 13 125 RECOVER clause 13 149 RECOVER command 13 85 and database recovery 11 5 AUTOMATIC clause 13 86 CANCEL clause 13 87 13 91 CONTINUE clause 13 87 DATABASE clause 13 88 FROM clause 13 86 LOGFILE clause 13 87 NOPARALLEL clause 13 89 STANDBY DATABASE clause 13 88 STANDBY DATAFILE clause 13 89 STANDBY TABLESPACE clause 13 88 13 89 UNTIL CANCEL clause 13 88 UNTIL CONTROLEFILE clause 13 89 UNTIL TIME clause 13 88 USING BACKUP CONTROL FILE clause 13 88 recovery RECOVER command 13 85 RECSEP variable 7 10 13 106 13 125 RECSEPCHAR variable 7 10 13 106 13 125 redo Log Files ARCHIVE LOG command 13 14 REFCURSOR bind variables in a stored function 6 33 REFCURSOR clause VARIABLE command 13 161 REGEDIT EXE 3 29 REGEDT32 EXE 3 29 registry editor 2 8 3 29 3 30 REGEDIT EXE 3 29 REGEDT32 EXE 3 29 Index 16 regi
46. 2 2 FROM EMP_DETAILS VIEW INPUT 3 WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN 4 AND COMMISSION_PCT 25 5 INPUT prompts you for new lines until you enter an empty line or a period The SQL buffer now contains the following lines SELECT LAST_NAME DEPARTMENT_ID SALARY COMMISSION_PCT FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN AND COMMISSION_PCT 25 ORDER BY LAST_NAME 13 78 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference LIST LIST Syntax Terms Examples LIST n ami n n LAST nl LAST LAST Lists one or more lines of the SOL buffer The buffer has no command history list and does not record SQL Plus commands woe In SQL Plus command line you can also use to list all the lines in the SQL buffer Term Description n Lists line n nm Lists lines n through m n Lists line n through the current line nLAST Lists line n through the last line Lists the current line n Lists the current line through line n LAST Lists the current line through the last line LAST Lists the last line mn Enter LIST with no clauses or to list all lines The last line listed becomes the new current line marked by an asterisk To list the contents of the buffer enter LIST or enter 1 SQL Plus Command Reference 13 79 LIST 1 SELECT LAST_NAME DEPARTMENT_ID JOB_ID 2 FROM EMP_DETAILS VIEW 3 WHERE JOB_ID SH_CLERK 4 ORDER BY DEPARTMENT_ID The asterisk indicates t
47. 23 listing current settings 5 12 13 136 listing old and new values 13 106 13 128 screen buffer 2 7 Set Options area 2 7 setting 2 7 storing and restoring 3 8 summary of SET commands 13 104 value area 2 7 system maintained values displaying in headers and footers 13 97 displaying in titles 7 29 13 155 formatting in titles 7 30 T TAB clause 13 98 13 156 TAB variable 9 14 13 107 13 134 TABLE clause 4 20 TABLE option 4 20 tables access to sample 1 6 controlling destination when copying B 2 B 6 copying values between B 4 B 9 listing column definitions 5 4 13 59 referring to another user s when copying B 9 TABLESPACE clause 13 88 tablespaces recovering 13 86 Index 22 tag HTML 8 1 TERMOUT variable 9 14 13 107 13 134 using with SPOOL command 13 145 text 4 20 adding to current line with APPEND 6 7 13 13 changing old to new with CHANGE 6 5 13 26 clearing from buffer 6 3 13 29 text editor defining 2 6 invoking 2 6 operating system 6 2 13 67 three tier model 1 2 TIME variable 13 107 13 134 TIMING clause 13 30 TIMING command 9 8 13 153 deleting all areas created by 13 30 deleting current area 13 153 SHOW clause 13 153 START clause 13 153 STOP clause 13 153 TIMING variable 13 107 13 134 titles aligning elements 7 26 13 156 displaying at bottom of page 7 24 13 24 C 1 displaying at top of page 7 24 13 155 C 2 displaying column values 7 31 13 37 13 38 dis
48. 4400 AD_PRES 24000 24000 24000 24000 AD_VP 17000 17000 34000 17000 FI_ACCOUNT 9000 6900 39600 7920 FI_MGR 12000 12000 12000 12000 HR_REP 6500 6500 6500 6500 IT_PROG 9000 4200 28800 5760 MK_MAN 13000 13000 13000 13000 MK_REP 6000 6000 6000 6000 JOB_ID MAXIMUM MINIMUM TOTAL AVERAGE PR_REP 10000 10000 10000 10000 PU_CLERK 3100 2500 13900 2780 PU_MAN 11000 11000 11000 11000 SA_MAN 14000 10500 61000 12200 SA_REP 11500 6100 250500 8350 SH_CLERK 4200 2500 64300 3215 ST_CLERK 3600 2100 55700 2785 ST_MAN 8200 5800 36400 7280 19 rows selected Note that you were prompted for the values of NUMBER_COL and GROUP_COL only once If you were to run STATS2 again during the current session you would be prompted for TABLE because its name has a single ampersand and the variable 6 22 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Using Substitution Variables is therefore not DEFINEd but not for GROUP_COL or NUMBER_COL because their names have double ampersands and the variables are therefore DEFINEd Before continuing set the system variable VERIFY back to ON SET VERIFY ON Restrictions You cannot use substitution variables in the buffer editing commands APPEND CHANGE DEL and INPUT nor in other commands where substitution would be meaningless The buffer editing commands APPEND CHANGE and INPUT treat text beginning with amp or amp amp literally like any other text string System Variables and SQL Plus Preferences
49. 6 31 Clearing the Screensist sit e S esheets E EE EE 6 31 Using Bind Variables ec stsssecscstscssistievcaseck deceives beseasocks doves hie sote Bak cee axes devas Seeks tetas iv gids ae 6 32 Creating Bind Variables 2 2 4iaieinun adel tae aha ia hehe 6 32 Referencing Bind Variables isecsccscccctcacessescstcsccateedtecteeuechccedeesetaadetceutvttiaesensv s sl susevteelavesuugetesases 6 32 Displaying Bind Variables erren cece ra eE A E ea e a E A ANTE 6 33 Using REFCURSOR Bind Variables arsonsesisiniisosnteste tiera niai asiri riakina 6 33 Formatting SQL Plus Reports Formatting Colums aparin eieaa iaie roka E Einer ETE Rar rains le asthe o iiaea iia 7 1 Changing Column Headings ssiri ir isena u irsin 7 1 Formatting NUMBER Colums sersa e a a a 7 4 Formatting Datatypes scccccccsceedeccailha de ceaivcsd iceri osei aiii leia ia RRE TEENEST RETE EERE 7 5 Copying Column Display Attributes s ss ssesssesississesstesiestssesssessesiesresteniesinntestnsnenientesensnen ent 7 9 Listing and Resetting Column Display Attributes 0 0 0 0 cece cece ceeeeeneceeeceeeeene tees 7 9 Suppressing and Restoring Column Display Attributes 00 0 0 cece eenssseeeeeeeeneeneees 7 10 Printing a Line of Characters after Wrapped Column Values cceeccseseeeeseeeneseeees 7 10 Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines cccceceseteseeeeeeseneeeee teens 7 12 Suppressing Duplicate Values in Break Columns 0 cece cece eeee
50. 66 current user off Oracle Database but does not exit SQL Plus EDIT on Invokes an operating system text editor on the contents of page 13 67 the specified file or on the contents of the buffer EXECUTE on Executes a single PL SQL statement page 13 69 EXIT on Terminates SQL Plus and returns control to the operating page 13 70 system GET on Loads a operating system file into the buffer page 13 72 HELP on Accesses the SQL Plus command line help system page 13 74 HOST on Executes an operating system command without leaving page 13 75 SQL Plus INPUT on Adds one or more new lines after the current line in the page 13 77 buffer LIST on Lists one or more lines of the buffer page 13 79 PASSWORD on Enables a password to be changed without echoing the page 13 81 password on an input device PAUSE on Displays the specified text then waits for the user to press page 13 82 Return PRINT on Displays the current value of a bind variable page 13 83 PROMPT on Sends the specified message to the user s screen page 13 84 SQL Plus Command Reference 13 3 SQL Plus Command Summary Command Page Description QUIT on Terminates SQL Plus and returns control to the operating page 13 70 system QUIT is identical to EXIT RECOVER on Performs media recovery on one or more tablespaces one or page 13 85 more datafiles or the entire database REMARK on Begins a comment in a script page 13 94 REPFOOTER on Places and formats a speci
51. BOSTONDB TO HR your_password BOSTONDB INSERT EMPLOYEE_COPY2 USING SELECT FROM EMPLOYEE_COPY SQL Plus COPY Command B 9 Copying Data between Tables on One Database B 10 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference C Obsolete SQL Plus Commands This appendix covers earlier versions of some SQL Plus commands While these older commands still function within SQL Plus they are no longer supported It is recommended that you use the alternative SQL Plus commands listed in the following table SQL Plus Obsolete Command Alternatives Obsolete commands are available in current releases of SQL Plus In future releases they may only be available by setting the SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY variable You should modify scripts using obsolete commands to use the alternative commands Obsolete Alternative Description of Alternative Command Command Command BTITLE BTITLE on Places and formats a title at the bottom of each old form page 13 24 report page or lists the current BTITLE definition COLUMN DEFAULT COLUMNCLEAR on Resets column display attributes to default values page 13 31 DOCUMENT REMARK on Places a comment which SQL Plus does not page 13 94 interpret as a command NEWPAGE SET NEWPAGE on Sets the number of blank lines to be printed from page 13 123 the top of each page to the top title SET BUFFER EDIT on page 13 67 Enables the editing of the SQL Plus command buffer or the contents of a saved file Use the SQL Plus SAVE GET
52. C 4 NEWPAGE variable 7 33 13 105 13 123 NULL variable 13 105 13 124 NUMFORMAT clause 3 8 NUMFORMAT variable 13 106 13 124 NUMWIDTH variable 7 4 13 36 13 106 13 124 PAGESIZE clause 3 8 PAGESIZE variable 5 6 7 33 9 13 13 106 13 124 PAUSE variable 13 106 13 125 RECSEP variable 7 10 13 106 13 125 RECSEPCHAR variable 7 10 13 106 13 125 SCAN variable C 2 C 4 SERVEROUTPUT variable 13 126 SHIFTINOUT variable 13 106 13 128 SPACE variable C 2 C 4 SQLBLANKLINES variable 13 129 SQLCASE variable 13 106 13 129 SQLCONTINUE variable 13 106 13 130 SQLNUMBER variable 13 106 13 130 SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY variable 13 106 13 130 SQLPREFIX variable 13 106 13 132 SQLPROMPT variable 9 13 13 106 13 132 SQLTERMINATOR variable 13 106 13 133 substitution variable 13 114 SUFFIX variable 13 106 13 133 TAB variable 9 14 13 107 13 134 TERMOUT variable 9 14 13 107 13 134 TIME variable 13 107 13 134 TIMING variable 13 107 13 134 TRIMOUT variable 13 107 13 135 TRIMSPOOL variable 13 107 13 135 TRUNCATE variable C 2 C 5 UNDERLINE variable 13 107 13 135 used to format a REFCURSOR variable 13 163 VERIFY clause 6 18 VERIFY variable 6 23 13 107 13 135 WRAP variable 7 7 13 107 13 135 SET MARKUP BODY clause 4 20 ENTMAP clause 4 21 8 7 HEAD clause 4 20 HTML 4 20 interactive HTML example 8 2 8 4 PREFORMAT clause 4 22 See also SPOOL command TABLE cl
53. C HANGE sepchar old sepchar new sepchar Changes the first occurrence of the specified text on the current line in the buffer The buffer has no command history list and does not record SQL Plus commands sepchar Represents any non alphanumeric character such as or does not appear in old or new old Use a sepchar that Represents the text you wish to change CHANGE ignores case in searching for old For example CHANGE aq aw finds the first occurrence of aq AQ aQ or Aq and changes it to aw SQL Plus inserts the new text exactly as you specify it on If old is prefixed with it matches everything up to and including the first occurrence of old If it is suffixed with it matches the first occurrence of old and everything that follows on that line If it contains an embedded it matches everything from the preceding part of old through the following part of old new Represents the text with which you wish to replace old If you omit new and optionally the second and third sepchars CHANGE deletes old from the current line of the buffer CHANGE changes the first occurrence of the existing specified text on the current line of the buffer to the new specified text The current line is marked with an asterisk in the LIST output 13 26 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference CHANGE Examples You can also use CHANGE to modify a line in the buffer that has generated an
54. CLEAR COLUMN Communicating with the User Three SQL Plus commands PROMPT ACCEPT and PAUSE help you communicate with the end user These commands enable you to send messages to the screen and receive input from the user including a simple Return You can also use PROMPT and ACCEPT to customize the prompts for values SQL Plus automatically generates for substitution variables Receiving a Substitution Variable Value Through PROMPT and ACCEPT you can send messages to the end user and receive values from end user input PROMPT displays a message you specify on screen to give directions or information to the user ACCEPT prompts the user for a value and stores it in the substitution variable you specify Use PROMPT in conjunction with ACCEPT when a prompt spans more than one line Example 6 12 Prompting for and Accepting Input To direct the user to supply a report title and to store the input in the variable MYTITLE for use in a subsequent query first clear the buffer CLEAR BUFFER Next set up a script as shown and save this file as PROMPT1 PROMPT Enter a title of up to 30 characters ACCEPT MYTITLE PROMPT Title TTITLE LEFT MYTITLE SKIP 2 SELECT EMPLOYEE _ID FIRST_NAME LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS VIEW WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN SAVE PROMPT1 Created file PROMPT1 sql 6 28 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Communicating with the User The TTITLE command sets the top title for your report See De
55. COPY command Action Check the syntax of the COPY command for the correct options SP2 0540 File file_name already exists Use SAVE filename ext REPLACE Cause The file specified already exists Action Use the REPLACE option to overwrite the existing file or specify another file name SQL Plus Error Messages 14 19 SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0544 Command command_name disabled in Product User Profile Cause An attempt was made to use a command that has been explicitly disabled for your schema in this database Action Ask your System Administrator why the Product User Profile PUP table has been set to disable this command for your schema SP2 0545 SET command requires an argument Cause An argument was missing in the SET command Action Check the syntax of the SET command for the correct options SP2 0546 User requested Interrupt or EOF detected Cause Either end of file was reached or CTRL C was entered to cancel the process Action No action required SP2 0547 option_name option value out of range lower_value through upper_ value Cause The specified SET option was out of range Action Enter a value within the SET option range and re try the SET command SP2 0548 Usage VAR IABLE lt variable gt NUMBER CHAR CHAR n CHAR BYTE VARCHAR2 n CHAR BYTE NCHAR NCHAR n I NVARCHAR2 n CLOB NCLOB REFCURSOR BINARY_FLOAT BINARY_DOUBLE Cause Incorrect syntax for the VARIABLE com
56. Command Reference 13 125 SET SERVEROUT PUT ON OFF SIZE n FOR MAT WRA PPED WOR D_WRAPPED TRU NCATED SET SERVEROUT PUT ON OFF SIZE n FOR MAT WRA PPED WOR D_WRAPPED TRU NCATED Example Controls whether to display output that is DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_LINE of stored procedures or PL SQL blocks in SQL Plus OFF suppresses the output of DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_LINE ON displays the output SIZE sets the number of bytes of the output that can be buffered within the Oracle Database server The default for n is 2000 n cannot be less than 2000 or greater than 1 000 000 Every server output line begins on a new output line When WRAPPED is enabled SQL Plus wraps the server output within the line size specified by SET LINESIZE beginning new lines when required When WORD_WRAPPED is enabled each line of server output is wrapped within the line size specified by SET LINESIZE Lines are broken on word boundaries SQL Plus left justifies each line skipping all leading whitespace When TRUNCATED is enabled each line of server output is truncated to the line size specified by SET LINESIZE For more information on DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_LINE see your Oracle Database Application Developer s Guide Fundamentals To enable text display in a PL SQL block using DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_LINE enter SET SERVEROUTPUT ON The following example shows what happens when you execute an anonymous procedure with SET SERVEROUTPUT ON BEGIN
57. Conventions in Text a Conventions in Code Examples a Conventions for Windows Operating Systems xxiv Conventions in Text We use various conventions in text to help you more quickly identify special terms The following table describes those conventions and provides examples of their use Convention Meaning Example Bold Bold typeface indicates terms that are When you specify this clause you create an defined in the text or terms that appearin index organized table a glossary or both Italics Italic typeface indicates book titles or Oracle Database Concepts emphasis Ensure that the recovery catalog and target database do not reside on the same disk UPPERCASE Uppercase monospace typeface indicates You can specify this clause only for a NUMBER monospace elements supplied by the system Such column fixed width font lowercase monospace fixed width font lowercase italic monospace fixed width font elements include parameters privileges datatypes RMAN keywords SQL keywords SOL Plus or utility commands packages and methods as well as system supplied column names database objects and structures usernames and roles Lowercase monospace typeface indicates executables filenames directory names and sample user supplied elements Such elements include computer and database names net service names and connect identifiers as well as user supplied database objects and structures column
58. DEFAULT HOST connection In this COPY command the FROM clause directs COPY to connect you to the database with the specification BOSTONDB as HR with the password your_ password Notice that you do not need a semicolon at the end of the command COPY is a SQL Plus command not a SQL command even though it contains a query Since most COPY commands are longer than one line you must use a line continuation hyphen optionally preceded by a space at the end of each line except the last Interpreting the Messages that COPY Displays The first three messages displayed by COPY show the values of SET command variables that affect the COPY operation The most important one is LONG which limits the length of a LONG column s value LONG is a datatype similar to CHAR If the source table contains a LONG column COPY truncates values in that column to the length specified by the system variable LONG The variable ARRAYSIZE limits the number of rows that SQL Plus fetches from the database at one time This number of rows makes up a batch The variable COPYCOMMIT sets the number of batches after which COPY commits changes to the database If you set COPYCOMMIT to zero COPY commits changes only after all batches are copied For more information on SET variables including how to change their settings see the SET command on page 13 103 After listing the three system variables and their values COPY tells you if a table was dropped created
59. E E ER A E ET EE EATA XXXVI What 1s SQOU PIUS i auc cts iaseascts 3 oeescioncenica O E ES eet nasa AE XXXVI Before Starting SQL Plus or iSQL PIUS siea n cece cece E A E ceneeenenetieey XXXVii Starting SQL Plus Command line ccccceeecceccessssesesesesssesesesesesseesecesseeceseseseseseeeseneceseseeene cane XXXVii Starting SOL Plus Windows GUL enis aeran eaa iay p ae a A E xxxviii Starting and Stopping the iSQL Plus Application Server ss sssssessisssssississesssesiesiesesseeseesees XXX X Starting 19Q LA PIUSA d h a A A E E a Aa XXX X Connecting to a Different Database sesiet ae aieia alat easi xl Sample Schemas and SQL PIUS aie e e aee eT E ae peia aaeeio at Kr e a iaat xl R nning your TITS tOUETY r cre v ccced esi ised eta eae atv dca loev vik aaseesvbiets xli Exiting SOL PIUS meia aoaaa a batik Sate a lier a i xlii Part SQL Plus Getting Started 1 SQL Plus Overview Whatis SQL PLUS since cccctssstipctctacenedeatenne a a ode sfeeksvelsebabbasvecedealtaeseievabaveds denstend eodvestonedectesheds 1 1 SQL Plus Command line and Windows GUI Architecture 0 0 0 0 ccecceeceesceececeecneeeeeeneeeaeens 1 2 SOL Plus Cheenti esn dees assed eitesedtie ees ane itt a ened aie ned cee hie 1 2 Oracle Database mia neess iaie heb vecds Side ela Guth ode eho dete chet ieee Waa lees 1 2 ISOL Plas Architectule 2 3 2 cask eal atta lapels a eee alla nian peaks 1 2 Web Brow seb c20n snccacenk etn een ai nla lee Se eee ee ee ee 1 3 Applicati
60. FEEDBACK OFF SET MARKUP HTML ENTMAP OFF PROMPT lt H1 gt Employee Details for Employee s with Last Name like amp last_name lt H1 gt SET MARKUP HTML ENTMAP ON SELECT FROM EMPLOYEES WHERE UPPER last_name LIKE UPPER amp last_name Create an HTML file which contains lt HTML gt lt HEAD gt lt TITLE gt iSQL Plus Dynamic Report lt TITLE gt lt HEAD gt lt BODY gt lt H1 gt lt em gt i lt em gt SQL Plus Report lt H1 gt lt H2 gt Query by Last Name lt H2 gt lt FORM METHOD get ACTION http machine_name domain port isqlplus gt lt INPUT TYPE hidden NAME script VALUE http machine_ name domain port employee_name sql gt Enter last name of employee lt INPUT TYPE text NAME last_name SIZE 20 gt lt INPUT TYPE submit VALUE Run Report gt lt FORM gt lt BODY gt lt HTML gt The name of the INPUT TYPE should be the same as either a column or substitution variable in your script for example lt INPUT TYPE text NAME last_name SIZE 20 gt maps to the substitution variable amp last_name in the employee_name sql script Replace machine_name domain with the host and domain names and port with the iSQL Plus port number of your Application Server Save the HTML file on your Application Server 8 10 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Creating Reports using iSQL Plus Load the HTML file in your web browser Enter a name or partial name in the te
61. For more information about the COMPUTE command see Chapter 13 SOL Plus Command Reference The following table lists compute functions and their effects Table 7 1 Compute Functions Function Computes the SUM Sum of the values in the column MINIMUM Minimum value in the column MAXIMUM Maximum value in the column AVG Average of the values in the column STD Standard deviation of the values in the column VARIANCE Variance of the values in the column COUNT Number of non null values in the column NUMBER Number of rows in the column Formatting SQL Plus Reports 7 17 Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines The function you specify in the COMPUTE command applies to all columns you enter after OF and before ON The computed values print on a separate line when the value of the ordered column changes Labels for ON REPORT and ON ROW computations appear in the first column otherwise they appear in the column specified in the ON clause You can change the compute label by using COMPUTE LABEL If you do not define a label for the computed value SQL Plus prints the unabbreviated function keyword The compute label can be suppressed by using the NOPRINT option of the COLUMN command on the break column See the COMPUTE command on page 13 42 for more details If you use the NOPRINT option for the column on which the COMPUTE is being performed the COMPUTE result is also suppressed Example 7 13 Compu
62. JOB_ID MAXIMUM PR_REP 10000 PU_CLERK 3100 PU_MAN 11000 SA_MAN 14000 SA_REP 11500 SH_CLERK 4200 ST_CLERK 3600 ST_MAN 8200 19 rows selected If you wish to append characters immediately after a substitution variable use a period to separate the variable from the character For example SELECT SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS VIEW WHERE EMPLOYEE _ID amp X 5 Enter value for X 20 is interpreted as SELECT SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE EMPLOYEE_ID 205 Using Scripts in SQL Plus 6 19 Using Substitution Variables Avoiding Unnecessary Prompts for Values Suppose you wanted to expand the file STATS to include the minimum sum and average of the number column You may have noticed that SQL Plus prompted you twice for the value of GROUP_COL and once for the value of NUMBER_COL in Example 6 9 Using Substitution Variables and that each GROUP_COL or NUMBER_COL had a single ampersand in front of it If you were to add three more functions using a single ampersand before each to the script SQL Plus would prompt you a total of four times for the value of the number column You can avoid being re prompted for the group and number columns by adding a second ampersand in front of each GROUP_COL and NUMBER_COL in STATS SQL Plus automatically DEFINEs any substitution variable preceded by two ampersands but does not DEFINE those preceded by only one ampersand When you have defined a variable SQL Plus will not prompt for i
63. Kochhar 17000 De Haan 17000 6 rows selected Formatting SQL Plus Reports 7 13 Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines Inserting Space when a Break Column s Value Changes You can insert blank lines or begin a new page each time the value changes in the break column To insert blank lines use the BREAK command in the following form BREAK ON break_column SKIP n To skip a page use the command in this form BREAK ON break_column SKIP PAGE Example 7 11 Inserting Space when a Break Column s Value Changes To place one blank line between departments enter the following command BREAK ON DEPARTMENT_ID SKIP 1 Now rerun the query DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY 20 Hartstein 13000 80 Russell 14000 Partners 13500 90 King 24000 Kochhar 17000 De Haan 17000 6 rows selected 7 14 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines Inserting Space after Every Row You may wish to insert blank lines or a blank page after every row To skip n lines after every row use BREAK in the following form BREAK ON ROW SKIP n To skip a page after every row use BREAK ON ROW SKIP PAGE Note SKIP PAGE does not cause a physical page break character to be generated unless you have also specified NEWPAGE 0 Using Multiple Spacing Techniques Suppose you have more than one column in your ORDER BY clause and wish to insert space when eac
64. LE FT CE NTER R IGHT BOLD FORMAT text Places and formats a specified report header at the top of each report or lists the current REPHEADER definition Enter REPHEADER with no clauses to list the current REPHEADER definition These terms and clauses also apply to the REPFOOTER command PAGE Begins a new page after printing the specified report header or before printing the specified report footer text The report header or footer text Enter text in single quotes if you want to place more than one word on a single line The default is NULL variable A substitution variable or any of the following system maintained values SQL LNO is the current line number SQL PNO is the current page number SQL CODE is the current error code SQL RELEASE is the current Oracle Database release number and SOL USER is the current username To print one of these values reference the appropriate variable in the report header or footer You can use the FORMAT clause to format variable SQL Plus Command Reference 13 97 REPHEADER OFF Turns the report header or footer off suppresses its display without affecting its definition COL n Indents to column n of the current line backward if column n has been passed Column in this context means print position not table column S KIP n Skips to the start of a new line n times if you omit n one time if you enter zero for n backward to the start of the current line TA
65. LONG CLOB NCLOB or XMLType defaults to the value of SET LONGCHUNKSIZE or SET LONG whichever is the smaller The default width and format of unformatted DATE columns in SQL Plus is determined by the database NLS_DATE_FORMAT parameter Otherwise the default format width is A9 See the FORMAT clause of the COLUMN command on page 13 31 for more information on formatting DATE columns Left justification is the default for datatypes Changing the Default Display You can change the displayed width of a datatype or DATE by using the COLUMN command with a format model consisting of the letter A for alphanumeric followed by a number representing the width of the column in characters Within the COLUMN command identify the column you want to format and the model you want to use COLUMN column_name FORMAT model If you specify a width shorter than the column heading SQL Plus truncates the heading See the COLUMN command on page 13 31 for more details Example 7 5 Formatting a Character Column To set the width of the column LAST_NAME to four characters and rerun the current query enter COLUMN LAST_NAME FORMAT A4 7 6 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Formatting Columns LAST MONTHLY NAME SALARY COMMISSION Russ 14 000 4 ell Part 13 500 3 ners Erra 12 000 s3 zuri LAST MONTHLY NAME SALARY COMMISSION Camb 11 000 3 raul E Zlot 10 500 2 key If the WRAP variable of the SET command is set to ON
66. NOPRINT COMPUTE SUM OF SALARY ON DUMMY BREAK ON DUMMY SKIP 1 SELECT DEPARTMENT_ID DUMMY DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE DEPARTMENT_ID lt 20 ORDER BY DEPARTMENT_ID DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY ee wate ao 4 4400 20 Hartstein 13000 20 Fay 6000 ai 19000 13 46 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COMPUTE To total the salary at the end of the report without printing the compute label enter COLUMN DUMMY NOPRINT COMPUTE SUM OF REAK ON DUMMY O 3 HN w DEPARTMENT_ID 9 rows selecte SALARY ON DUMMY ELECT NULL DUMMY DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY ROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW HERE DEPARTMENT_ID lt 30 RDER BY DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY Whalen 4400 Hartstein 13000 Fay 6000 Raphaely 11000 Khoo 3100 Baida 2900 Tobias 2800 Himuro 2600 Colmenares 2500 48300 d SQL Plus Command Reference 13 47 CONNECT CONNECT Syntax Terms CONN ECT logon AS SYSOPER SYSDBA where logon has the syntax username password connect_identifier Connects a given username to the Oracle Database When you run a CONNECT command the site profile glogin sql and the user profile login sql are executed CONNECT does not reprompt for username or password if the initial connection does not succeed usernamel password The username and password you use to connect to Oracle Database If you omit usernam
67. ON displays the current time before each command prompt OFF suppresses the time display SET TIMI NG ON OFF Controls the display of timing statistics ON displays timing statistics on each SQL command or PL SQL block run OFF suppresses timing of each command See TIMING on page 13 153 for information on timing multiple commands 13 134 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET TRIM OUT ON OFF SET TRIMOUT is not supported in iSQL Plus Determines whether SQL Plus puts trailing blanks at the end of each displayed line ON removes blanks at the end of each line improving performance especially when you access SQL Plus from a slow communications device OFF enables SQL Plus to display trailing blanks TRIMOUT ON does not affect spooled output SET TRIMS POOL ON OFF SET TRIMSPOOL is not supported in iSQL Plus Determines whether SQL Plus puts trailing blanks at the end of each spooled line ON removes blanks at the end of each line OFF enables SQL Plus to include trailing blanks TRIMSPOOL ON does not affect terminal output SET UND ERLINE c ON OFF Sets the character used to underline column headings in reports The underline character cannot be an alphanumeric character or a white space ON or OFF turns n underlining on or off ON changes the value of c back to the default SET UNDERLINE is supported in iSQL Plus when SET MARKUP HTML PREFORMAT ON is set
68. ORA 00923 FROM keyword not found where expected To ensure that the statement is interpreted correctly reposition the hyphen from the end of the first line to the beginning of the second line SQL Plus Basics 5 11 System Variables that Affect How Commands Run System Variables that Affect How Commands Run The SQL Plus SET command controls many variables called SET variables or system variables which affect the way SQL Plus runs your commands System variables control a variety of conditions within SQL Plus including default column widths for your output whether SQL Plus displays the number of records selected by a command and your page size The examples in this guide are based on running SQL Plus with the system variables at their default settings Depending on the settings of your system variables your output may appear slightly different than the output shown in the examples Your settings might differ from the default settings if you have a SQL Plus LOGIN file on your computer See the SET command on page 13 103 for more information on system variables and their default settings See SQL Plus and iSQL Plus Configuration on page 3 4 and SQLPLUS Program Syntax on page 4 18 for details on the SQL Plus LOGIN file To list the current setting of a system variable enter SHOW followed by the variable name See the SHOW command on page 13 136 for information on other items you can list with SHOW Stopping a Command whi
69. Oracle Database error SQL Plus sets the buffer s current line to the line containing the error so that you can make modifications To reenter an entire line you can type the line number followed by the new contents of the line If you specify a line number larger than the number of lines in the buffer and follow the number with text SQL Plus adds the text in a new line at the end of the buffer If you specify zero 0 for the line number and follow the zero with text SOL Plus inserts the line at the beginning of the buffer that line becomes line 1 Enter 3 so the current line of the buffer contains the following text 3 3 WHERE JOB_ID IS IN CLERK SA_MAN Enter the following command CHANGE CLERK SH_CLERK The text in the buffer changes as follows 3 WHERE JOB_ID IS IN SH_CLERK SA_MAN Or enter the following command CHANGE CLERK SH_CLERK The original line changes to 3 WHERE JOB_ID IS IN SH_CLERK Or enter the following command CHANGE SA_MAN The original line changes to 3 WHERE JOB_ID IS IN SA_MAN SQL Plus Command Reference 13 27 CHANGE You can replace the contents of an entire line using the line number This entry 3 WHERE JOB_ID IS IN SH_CLERK causes the second line of the buffer to be replaced with WHERE JOB_ID IS IN SH_CLERK Note that entering a line number followed by a string will replace the line regardless of what
70. SET VER IFY ON OFF Controls whether to list the text of a SQL statement or PL SQL command before and after replacing substitution variables with values ON lists the text OFF suppresses the listing SET WRA P ON OFF Controls whether to truncate the display of a selected row if it is too long for the current line width OFF truncates the selected row ON enables the selected row to wrap to the next line Use the WRAPPED and TRUNCATED clauses of the COLUMN command to override the setting of WRAP for specific columns SQL Plus Command Reference 13 135 SHOW SHOW Syntax Terms SHO W option where option represents one of the following terms or clauses system_variable ALL BTI TLE ERR ORS FUNCTION PROCEDURE PACKAGE PACKAGE BODY TRIGGER VIEW TYPE TYPE BODY DIMENSION JAVA CLASS schema name LNO PARAMETERS parameter_name PNO RECYC LEBIN original_name REL EASE REPF OOTER REPH EADER SGA SPOO L Not available in SQL Plus SQLCODE TTI TLE USER Shows the value of a SQL Plus system variable or the current SQL Plus environment SHOW SGA requires a DBA privileged login system_variable Represents any system variable set by the SET command ALL Lists the settings of all SHOW options except ERRORS and SGA in alphabetical order BTI TLE Shows the current BTITLE definition ERR ORS FUNCTION PROCEDURE PACKAGE PACKAGE BODY TRIGGER VIEW TYPE
71. SILENT Option S ILENT Suppresses all SQL Plus information and prompt messages including the command prompt the echoing of commands and the banner normally displayed when you start SQL Plus If you omit username or password SQL Plus prompts for them but the prompts are not visible Use SILENT to invoke SQL Plus within another program so that the use of SQL Plus is invisible to the user SILENT is a useful mode for creating reports for the web using the SQLPLUS MARKUP command inside a CGI script or operating system script The SQL Plus banner and prompts are suppressed and do not appear in reports created using the SILENT option usernamel password Represent the username and password with which you wish to start SQL Plus and connect to Oracle Database If you enter your password on the command line as part of the SQLPLUS command in the form sqlplus username password it may be viewable by anyone on your system Some operating systems have monitoring tools that list all executing commands and their arguments If you omit username and password SQL Plus prompts you for them If you omit only password SQL Plus prompts you for password When prompting SQL Plus does not display password on your terminal screen In silent mode username and 4 24 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQLPLUS Program Syntax Start password prompts are not visible your username will appear when you type it but not your password con
72. SQL gt prompt Starting and Stopping the SQL Plus Application Server The iSQL Plus Application Server is started during Oracle Database installation It must be running to enable web based iSQL Plus sessions See Starting the iSQL Plus Application Server on page 4 11 Starting SSQL Plus To start an iSQL Plus session 1 Enter the iSQL Plus URL in your web browser s Location or Address field The iSQL Plus URL looks like http machine_name domain port isqlplus If you do not know the iSQL Plus URL ask your System Administrator or try one of the following on the machine running the iSQL Plus Application Server http 127 0 0 1 5560 isqlplus http localhost 5560 isqlplus iSQL Plus uses HTTP port 5560 by default If iSQL Plus is not available on port 5560 read the ORACLE_HOME install portlist ini file on the computer running the iSQL Plus Application Server to find the port on which iSQL Plus is running 2 Press Enter to go to the URL The iSQL Plus Login screen is displayed in your web browser 3 Enter your Oracle Database username and password in the Username and Password fields If you do not know your Oracle Database username and password ask your Database Administrator 4 Leave the Connection Identifier field blank to connect to the default database Enter an Oracle Database connection identifier in the Connection Identifier field to connect to a database other than the default You can connect to Oracle8i O
73. Steven King Neena Kochhar Alexander Khoo Janette King Sundita Kumar Exiting SQL Plus xlii It is recommended that you always use the Logout icon to exit iSQL Plus to free up system and server resources To exit SOL Plus command line enter EXIT To exit the Windows GUI enter EXIT or select Exit from the File menu In iSQL Plus the EXIT or QUIT command halts the script currently running it does not terminate your session Part SQL Plus Getting Started This section provides you with the information you need to get started with SQL Plus It provides an overview of SQL Plus describes the command line and iSQL Plus user interfaces provides configuration information and information you need to log in and run SQL Plus The following chapters are covered in this section a SQL Plus Overview a SQL Plus User Interface Configuring SQL Plus a Starting SQL Plus 1 SQL Plus Overview This chapter introduces you to some general aspects of SQL Plus It has the following topics What is SQL Plus SOL Plus Command line and Windows GUI Architecture iSOL Plus Architecture SOL Plus Installation Who Can Use SQL Plus How Can I Learn SQL Plus How to Use the SOL Plus Guide Oracle Database Sample Schemas and SQL Plus What is SQL Plus SQL Plus is an interactive and batch query tool that is installed with every Oracle Database Server or Client installation It has a command line user interface a
74. The following system variables specified with the SQL Plus SET command or in iSQL Plus preferences affect substitution variables System Variable Affect on Substitution Variables SET CONCAT SET DEFINE SET ESCAPE SET NUMFORMAT SET NUMWIDTH SET VERIFY ON Defines the character that separates the name of a substitution variable or parameter from characters that immediately follow the variable or parameter by default the period Defines the substitution character by default the ampersand amp and turns substitution on and off Defines an escape character you can use before the substitution character The escape character instructs SQL Plus to treat the substitution character as an ordinary character rather than as a request for variable substitution The default escape character is a backslash Sets the default format for displaying numbers including numeric substitution variables Sets the default width for displaying numbers including numeric substitution variables Lists each line of the script before and after substitution See SET on page 13 103 for more information about system variables Using Scripts in SQL Plus 6 23 Substitution Variables in iSQL Plus Substitution Variables in SQL Plus System variables specified in the Preferences screens can affect iSQL Plus behavior The Substitution Variable Prefix Display Substitution Variable Substitution Variable Reference Terminator
75. The registered name appears in the MODULE column of the VS SESSION and V SQLAREA virtual tables You can also read the registered name using the DBMS_APPLICATION_INFO READ_MODULE procedure ON registers scripts invoked by the or START commands OFF disables registering of scripts Instead the current value of text is registered text specifies the text to register when no script is being run or when APPINFO is OFF which is the default The default for text is SQL Plus If you enter multiple words for text you must enclose them in quotes The maximum length for text is limited by the DBMS_APPLICATION_INFO package The registered name has the format nn xfilename where nn is the depth level of script x is lt when the script name is truncated otherwise it is blank and filename SQL Plus Command Reference 13 107 SET APPI NFO ON OFF text Example is the script name possibly truncated to the length allowed by the DBMS_APPLICATION_INFO package interface For more information on the DBMS_APPLICATION_INFO package see the Oracle Database Performance Tuning Guide To display the value of APPINFO as it is SET OFF by default enter SET APPINFO ON SHOW APPINFO APPINFO is ON and set to SQL Plus To change the default text enter SET APPINFO This is SQL Plus To make sure that registration has taken place enter VARIABLE MOD VARCHAR2 50 VARIABLE ACT VARCHAR2 40 EXECUTE DBMS _APPLICATION_INFO READ_MO
76. User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0736 Command line overflow while substituting into line beginning string_ name Cause The maximum length of the command line was exceeded Action Reduce the length of the data in the substitution variables used in the command SP2 0737 Usage SET DESCRIBE DEPTH 11 n ALL LINENUM ON OFF INDENT ON OFF Cause An invalid option was used in the SET DESCRIBE command Action Check the syntax of the SET DESCRIBE command for the correct options SP2 0738 Restricted command command_name not available Cause For security reasons the command was restricted by the RESTRICT command line option Action Ask your Database Administrator why SQL Plus should be run with a RESTRICT option SP2 0745 Usage SET SOQLPLUSCOMPATIIBILITY version release update Cause An invalid option was used in the SET SQLPLUSCOMPAT IBLITY command Action Check the syntax of the SET SQLPLUSCOMPATIBLITY command for the correct options SP2 0746 command_option option out of range lower through upper Cause The specified value was not in the range Action Specify a value in the range SP2 0747 PAGESIZE must be at least max_page_size to run this query with LINESIZE line_size Cause The PAGESIZE setting was too small to display the specified LINESIZE Action Increase the PAGESIZE to at least match the specified LINESIZE SQL Plus Error Messages 14 31 SQL Plus Error Messages
77. Windows Graphical User Interface GUI and the iSQL Plus web based user interface SQL Plus has its own commands and environment and it provides access to the Oracle Database It enables you to enter and execute SQL PL SQL SQL Plus and operating system commands to perform the following Format perform calculations on store and print from query results Examine table and object definitions Develop and run batch scripts SQL Plus Overview 1 1 SQL Plus Command line and Windows GUI Architecture a Perform database administration You can use SQL Plus to generate reports interactively to generate reports as batch processes and to output the results to text file to screen or to HTML file for browsing on the Internet You can generate reports dynamically using the HTML output facility of SOL Plus or using the dynamic reporting capability of iSQL Plus to run a script from a web page SQL Plus Command line and Windows GUI Architecture SQL Plus command line and the Windows GUI use a two tier model comprising a Client command line user interface a Database Oracle Database The two tiers may or may not be on the same machine SQL Plus Client The command line user interface is the character based terminal implementation The Windows GUL is an alternate user interface available in Windows installations Oracle Database Oracle Database Net components provide communication between the SQL Plus Client and Oracle Database
78. a a Ya at TOTAL 12000 SA_MAN Zlotkey 10500 Cambrault 11000 Errazuriz 12000 Partners 13500 Russell 14000 RMRRRRERRER 8 Si i ee a TOTAL 61000 6 rows selected 13 44 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COMPUTE To calculate the total of salaries greater than 12 000 on a report enter COMPUTE SUM OF SALARY ON REPORT BREAK ON REPORT COLUMN DUMMY HEADING SELECT DUMMY SALARY EMPLOYEE_ID FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 ORDER BY SALARY SALARY EMPLOYEE ID 13000 201 13500 146 14000 145 17000 101 17000 102 24000 100 sum 98500 6 rows selected To calculate the average and maximum salary for the executive and accounting departments enter BREAK ON DEPARTMENT_NAME SKIP 1 COMPUTE AVG LABEL Dept Average MAX LABEL Dept Maximum OF SALARY ON DEPARTMENT_NAME SELECT DEPARTMENT_NAME LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_ VIEW WHERE DEPARTMENT_NAME IN Executive Accounting ORDER BY DEPARTMENT_NAME SQL Plus Command Reference 13 45 COMPUTE DEPARTMENT_NAME LAST_NAME SALARY Accounting Higgins 12000 Gietz 8300 KEKEEERREEKARERERRRARERERRERERS ss i i ct it ak a te Dept Average 10150 Dept Maximum 12000 Executive King 24000 Kochhar 17000 De Haan 17000 TREK KEREAERERRARERE ERR RERRRRRER ig i i Dept Average 19333 3333 Dept Maximum 24000 To sum salaries for departments lt 20 without printing the compute label enter COLUMN DUMMY
79. and Password Ensure a sample database is installed and that you have a login username and password for it during Oracle Database installation See Sample Schemas and SOL Plus Create a default database during installation or obtain the connection identifier for the Oracle Database you want to connect to from your Database Administrator See Connecting to a Database Ensure the database you want to connect to is started See the STARTUP command If using iSQL Plus ensure that you have the URL for the Application Server you want to connect to and that the Application Server is available and running See Starting the iSQL Plus Application Server and Testing if the iSQL Plus Application Server is Running Starting SQL Plus Command line The SQL Plus executable is usually installed in 0RACLE_HOME bin which is usually included in your operating system PATH environment variable You may need to change directory to the ORACLE_HOME bin directory to start SQL Plus To start SQL Plus and connect to the default database 1 Open a UNIX or a Windows terminal and enter the SQL Plus command sqlplus When prompted enter your Oracle Database username and password If you do not know your Oracle Database username and password ask your Database Administrator xxxvii Alternatively enter the SQL Plus command in the form sqlplus username password To hide your password enter the SQL Plus command in the form sqlplus username
80. and Reference Creating Reports using iSQL Plus For further information about the sample schemas included with Oracle Database see the Oracle Database Sample Schemas guide Example 8 3 Creating a Dynamic Report Create and save the following script to a file called script sql on your Application Server SET PAGESIZE 200 SELECT FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW ORDER BY LAST_NAME EMPLOYEE_ID Create an HTML file which contains lt HTML gt lt HEAD gt lt TITLE gt iSQL Plus Dynamic Report lt TITLE gt lt HEAD gt lt BODY gt lt H1 gt lt em gt i lt em gt SQL Plus Report lt H1 gt lt A HREF http machine_name domain port isqlplus dynamic script http machine_ name domain port script sql gt Run Employee Report lt A gt lt BODY gt lt HTML gt Replace machine_name domain with the host and domain names and replace port with the port number of your Application Server Save the HTML file on your Application Server Load the HTML file in your web browser and click Run Employee Report iSQL Plus requests your username and password Log in to iSQL Plus iSQL Plus executes the script and displays the results in your web browser Generating HTML Reports from SQL Plus 8 9 Creating Reports using iSQL Plus Example 8 4 Creating a Dynamic Report with Parameters Create and save the following script to a file called employee_name sql on your Application Server SET VERIFY OFF SET PAGESIZE 200 SET
81. and the user boot file in SQL Plus 10 1 The default location is ORACLE_HOME nls data In a system with both Oracle9i and 10g or a system under version upgrade you should set ORA_NLS10 for Oracle 10g and set ORA_NLS33 for 97 The default NLS location in 9i was ORACLE _ HOME common nls admin data Environment variable to specify the location of SQL scripts If SQL Plus cannot find the file in ORACLE_PATH or if ORACLE_PATH is not set it searches for the file in the current working directory Not applicable to Windows Environment variable to specify the database instance optional Environment variable to specify the path to search for executables and DLLs in Windows Typically includes ORACLE_HOME bin Environment variable or Windows registry entry to specify the location of SQL scripts SQL Plus searches for SQL scripts including login sql in the current directory and then in the directories specified by SQLPATH SQLPATH is a colon separated list of directories There is no default value set in UNIX installations In Windows SOLPATH is defined in a registry entry during installation For more information about the SQLPATH registry entry see SQLPATH Registry Entry on page 3 29 SQL Plus and iSQL Plus Environment Variables Table 3 1 Parameters or Environment Variables influencing SQL Plus and iSQL Plus Parameter or Variable Description SQLPLUS SQLPLUS_FONT SQLPLUS_FONT_SIZE TNS_ADMIN TWO_TASK
82. applied immediately DEFAULT DELAY Waits the default number of minutes specified in the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n initialization parameter before applying the archived redo logs DELAY integer Waits integer minutes before applying the archived redo logs NEXT integer Applies the specified number of archived redo logs as soon as possible after they have been archived It temporarily overrides any DELAY setting in the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n parameter on the primary database and any delay values set in an earlier SOL Plus RECOVER command or an ALTER DATABASE RECOVER command EXPIRE integer Specifies the number of minutes from the current time after which managed recovery terminates automatically NO EXPIRE Disables a previously specified EXPIRE integer option USING CURRENT LOGFILE Recovers redo from standby online logs as they are being filled without requiring them to be archived in the standby database first 13 90 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference RECOVER UNTIL CHANGE integer Processes managed recovery up to but not including the specified system change number SCN THROUGH THREAD integer SEQUENCE integer Terminates managed recovery based on archivelog thread number and sequence number Managed recovery terminates when the corresponding archivelog has been applied If omitted THREAD defaults to 1 THROUGH ALL ARCHIVELOG Continues managed standby until all archivelogs have been recovered You can use this stateme
83. argument at startup to set the compatibility mode of that session a You can use the SET SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY x y z command during a session to set the SQL Plus behavior you want for that session The following table shows the release of SQL Plus which introduced the behavior change and hence the minimum value of SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY to obtain that behavior For example to obtain the earlier behavior of the VARIABLE command you must either use a version of SQL Plus earlier than 9 0 1 or you must use a SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY value of less than 9 0 1 The lowest value that can be set for SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY is 7 3 4 Table 13 4 Compatibility Matrix Value Consequence When available gt 10 1 SHOW ERRORS sorts PL SQL error messages using new 10 1 columns only available in Oracle Database 10g gt 10 1 SPOOL Options CREATE REPLACE SAVE were added which 10 1 may affect filename parsing on some platforms gt 10 1 SET SQLPROMPT 10 1 gt 10 1 Whitespace characters are allowed in Windows file names that 10 1 are enclosed in quotes Some other special punctuation characters are now disallowed in Windows gt 10 1 Glogin login files are called for each reconnect 10 1 lt 10 1 Uses the obsolete DOC gt prompt when echoing comments 10 1 gt 9 2 A wide column defined FOLD_AFTER may be displayed at the 9 2 start of a new line Otherwise it is incorrectly put at the end of the preceding line with a smaller width than expected
84. as you try the examples in this guide To get your own copies of the HR tables see your DBA or see the Oracle Database Sample Schemas guide or you can create the HR tables with the script HR_ MAIN SQL which is located in the following directory on UNIX SORACLE_HOME DEMO SCHEMA HUMAN_RESOURCES HR_MAIN SQL And on the following directory on Windows SORACLE_HOME DEMO SCHEMA HUMAN_RESOURCES HR_MAIN SQL To create the HR tables from command line SQL Plus do the following 1 Ask your DBA for your Oracle Database account username and password 2 Login to SQL Plus 3 On UNIX enter the following command at the SQL Plus prompt SQL gt DEMO SCHEMA HUMAN_RESOURCES HR_MAIN SQL On Windows enter the following command at the SQL Plus prompt SQL gt DEMO SCHEMA HUMAN_RESOURCES HR_MAIN SQL To remove the sample tables perform the same steps but substitute HR_DROP SQL for HR_MAIN SOL 1 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference 2 SQL Plus User Interface This chapter describes the SQL Plus command line user interface the Windows Graphical User Interface GUI and the iSQL Plus web based user interface It contains the following topics a SQL Plus Command line User Interface a Windows Graphical User Interface a iSQL Plus User Interface a Preferences and Equivalent SET Commands SQL Plus Command line User Interface The SQL Plus command line interface is standard on all operating systems The Command line
85. card PAUSE Press RETURN to continue In iSQL Plus PAUSE displays a Next Page button Users must click Next Page to continue Clearing the Screen If you want to clear the screen before displaying a report or at any other time include the SQL Plus CLEAR command with its SCREEN clause at the appropriate point in your script using the following format CLEAR SCREEN In iSQL Plus click the Clear button Before continuing to the next section reset all columns to their original formats and headings by entering the following command CLEAR COLUMNS Using Scripts in SQL Plus 6 31 Using Bind Variables Using Bind Variables Bind variables are variables you create in SQL Plus and then reference in PL SQL or SQL If you create a bind variable in SQL Plus you can use the variable as you would a declared variable in your PL SQL subprogram and then access the variable from SQL Plus You can use bind variables for such things as storing return codes or debugging your PL SQL subprograms Because bind variables are recognized by SQL Plus you can display their values in SQL Plus or reference them in PL SQL subprograms that you run in SQL Plus Creating Bind Variables You create bind variables in SQL Plus with the VARIABLE command For example VARIABLE ret_val NUMBER This command creates a bind variable named ret_val with a datatype of NUMBER See the VARIABLE command on page 13 160 for more information To list all bind variable
86. command prompt containing messages similar to C isqlplusctl start iSQL Plus 10 1 0 2 0 Copyright c 2003 Oracle All rights reserved Starting iSQL Plus iSQL Plus started 3 14 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference iSQL Plus Application Server Configuration Setting the Level of SSQL Plus Logging The log4j rootLogger parameter determines whether logging of iSQL Plus Application Server messages is enabled It also sets the level to which messages are logged in the iSQL Plus Application Server error logs There should be no need to change its value unless instructed to do so by Oracle Support Logging is useful to help resolve user problems The log4j rootLogger parameter is in the log4j properties file located in the directory SORACLE_HOME o0c4j j2ee o0c4j_applications applications isqlplus isqlplus WEB INF Logging can be set to ALL errors and messages DEBUG messages INFO messages WARNing messages ERROR messages FATAL errors or to OFF The settings are changed by commenting or uncommenting the required lines in the log4j properties file The following example shows the default setting which is to log FATAL errors Set root logger level and its only appender to Al log4j rootLogger ALL A1 log4j rootLogger DEBUG A1 log4j rootLogger INFO A1 log4j rootLogger WARN A1 log4j rootLogger ERROR A1 log4j rootLogger FATAL Al log4j rootLogger OFF A1 The iSQL Plus log file is written to SORACLE_H
87. concatenation characters in the SELECT statement to create hyperlinks by concatenating string and variable elements View the report html source in your web browser or in a text editor to see that the table cells for the Department column contain fully formed hyperlinks as shown lt html gt lt head gt lt TITLE gt Department Report lt TITLE gt lt STYLE type text css gt lt BODY background FFFFC6 gt lt STYLE gt lt meta name generator content SQL Plus 10 1 0 1 gt lt head gt lt body TEXT FFOOFf gt SQL amp gt SELECT amp lt A HREF amp quot http oracle com DEPARTMENT_NAME html amp quot amp gt DEPARTMENT_NAME amp lt A amp gt DEPARTMENT_NAME CITY lt br gt 2 FROM EMP_DETAILS VIEW lt br gt 3 WHERE SALARY amp gt 12000 lt br gt lt p gt lt table WIDTH 90 BORDER 5 gt lt tr gt lt th gt DEPARTMENT lt th gt lt th gt CITY lt th gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td gt lt A HREF http oracle com Executive html gt Executive lt A gt lt td gt lt td gt Seattle lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td gt lt A HREF http oracle com Executive html gt Executive lt A gt lt td gt lt td gt Seattle lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td gt lt A HREF http oracle com Executive html gt Executive lt A gt lt td gt lt td gt Seattle lt td gt lt tr gt lt tr gt lt td gt lt A HREF http oracle com Sales html gt Sales lt A gt lt td gt
88. created with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL package has been created but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0832 Package altered with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL package has been altered but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0833 Package Body created with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL package body has been created but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0834 Package Body altered with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL package body has been altered but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SQL Plus Error Messages 14 41 SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0835 View created with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL view has been created but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0836 View altered with compilation errors SP2 SP2 SP2 SP2 Cause The PL SQL view has been altered but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages 0837 Trigger created with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL trigger has been
89. database make sure your Oracle Net software is installed and working properly For more information see the Oracle Net Services Administrator s Guide When you start a SQL Plus command line or Windows GUI session and after a CONNECT command in that session the site profile glogin sql and the user profile file login sql are processed a After SQL Plus starts and connects and prior to displaying the first prompt a After SQL Plus starts and connects and prior to running a script specified on the command line Prior to the first prompt when NOLOG is specified on the command line and no connection is made The site profile file glogin sql is processed first then the user profile file login sq When you start an iSQL Plus session and after a CONNECT command in that session the site profile glogin sql is processed a After iSQL Plus starts and connects After iSQL Plus starts and connects and prior to running a script specified in a dynamic URL Behavior in SQL Plus 10 1 may be unexpected depending on the setting of SET SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY For example processing glogin sql and login sql after a CONNECT command only occurs with the default SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY setting of 10 1 For more information see SET SQLPLUSCOMPATT IBILITY x y z on page 13 130 Starting SQL Plus 4 7 Starting SQL Plus Starting Command line SQL Plus To begin using SQL Plus you must first understand how to start and stop
90. default behavior when the HTML option is set ON You can generate output using HTML lt PRE gt tags by setting PREFORMAT ON In SQL Plus use the SHOW MARKUP command to view the status of MARKUP options The SQLPLUS MARKUP command has the same options and functionality as the SET MARKUP command These options are described in this section For other information on the SET MARKUP command see the SET command HTML ONIOFF HTML is a mandatory MARKUP argument which specifies that the type of output to be generated is HTML The optional HTML arguments ON and OFF specify whether or not to generate HTML output The default is OFF MARKUP HTML ON generates HTML output using the specified MARKUP options You can turn HTML output ON and OFF as required during a session The default is OFF HEAD text The HEAD text option enables you to specify content for the lt HEAD gt tag By default text includes a default in line cascading style sheet and title If text includes spaces it must be enclosed in quotes SQL Plus does not test this free text entry for HTML validity You must ensure that the text you enter is valid for the HTML lt HEAD gt tag This gives you the flexibility to customize output for your browser or special needs BODY text The BODY text option enables you to specify attributes for the lt BODY gt tag By default there are no attributes If text includes spaces it must be enclosed in quotes SQL Plus does not te
91. destination table B 3 B 5 determining actions B 5 determining source rows and columns B 3 B 6 error messages 14 54 FROM clause B 5 INSERT clause B 3 B 7 inserting datainatable B 3 B 7 interpreting messages B 8 mandatory connect identifier B 2 naming the source table with SELECT B 3 B 6 query B 3 B 6 referring to another user s table B 9 REPLACE clause B 3 B 6 replacing data in a table B 3 B 6 sample command B 5 B 6 service name B 5 B 7 B 9 specifying columns for destination B 3 B 5 specifying the data to copy B 3 B 6 TO clause B 5 username password B 2 B 5 B 7 B 9 USING clause B 3 B 6 COPYCOMMIT variable 13 104 13 114 relationship to COPY command B 3 B 8 copying text 2 3 2 6 COPYTYPECHECK variable 13 104 13 114 CREATE clause in COPY command B 2 B 6 CREATE command disabling 10 5 entering PL SQL 5 9 creating aPLAN_TABLE 9 2 creating flat files 7 35 Index 7 creating PLUSTRACE role 9 3 creating sample tables 1 6 creating the PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE table 10 2 cursor variables 13 162 D database administrator 11 1 connect identifier 13 48 mounting 13 149 opening 13 149 database changes saving automatically 13 104 13 109 DATABASE clause 13 88 database files recovering 13 86 database name at startup 13 148 database schema 9 2 default 13 49 DESCRIBE parameter 13 59 SHOW 13 136 database tier 1 2 1 3 databases connecting to default 13 48 connecti
92. enter SET LONG 500 The LONG data will wrap on your screen SQL Plus will not truncate until the 501st byte The default for LONG is 80 bytes SET LONGC HUNKSIZE 80 n Sets the size in bytes of the increments SQL Plus uses to retrieve a CLOB LONG NCLOB or XMLType value LONGCHUNKSIZE is not used for object relational queries such as CLOB or NCLOB SQL Plus Command Reference 13 121 SET MARK UP HTML ON OFF HEAD text BODY text TABLE text ENTMAP ON OFF SPOOL ON OFF Example To set the size of the increments in which SQL Plus retrieves LONG values to 100 bytes enter SET LONGCHUNKSIZE 100 The LONG data will be retrieved in increments of 100 bytes until the entire value is retrieved or the value of SET LONG is reached whichever is the smaller SET MARK UP HTML ON OFF HEAD text BODY text TABLE text ENTMAP ON OFF SPOOL ON OFF PRE FORMAT ON OFF Example Outputs HTML marked up text which is the output used by iSQL Plus Beware of using options which generate invalid HTML output in iSQL Plus as it may corrupt the browser screen The HEAD and BODY options may be useful for dynamic reports and for reports saved to local files To be effective SET MARKUP commands that change values in dynamic report output must occur before statements that produce query output The first statement that produces query output triggers the output of information affected by SET MARKUP such
93. exceeded the maximum name length Action Reduce the size of the symbol name and re enter SP2 0323 no room to add timing element request denied Cause Unable to allocate memory while trying to run the TIMING command Action Free up additional memory by closing applications not required reducing the size of the command or statement or by recoding the query to select fewer records SP2 0324 operating system timing error error_option_number request denied Cause The TIMING command failed to initialize due to a possible operating system error Action Resolve the operating system error and try again SP2 0325 no timing elements to option_name Cause There are no timers recorded to SHOW or STOP Action Check that timers were created with the TIMING command SP2 0328 no room to allocate title buffer Cause Unable to allocate memory while trying to run the TTITLE or BTITLE command Action Free up additional memory by closing applications not required reducing the size of the command or statement or by recoding the query to select fewer records SQL Plus Error Messages 14 15 SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0331 SPOOL OUT disabled Cause An attempt was made to use SPOOL OUT where it is not supported Action No action possible SPOOL OUT has been disabled possibly because of lack of printing support at the operating system level SP2 0332 Cannot create spool file Cause Possible causes a Insufficient privileges
94. following ways Electronic mail sqlplus oracle com FAX 61 3 9690 0043 Attn Oracle SOL Plus Postal service Oracle Corporation Australia Pty Ltd Oracle SQL Plus Documentation 324 St Kilda Road Melbourne VIC 3004 Australia If you would like a reply please give your name address telephone number and electronic mail address optional If you have problems with the software please contact your local Oracle Support Services xvii xviii Preface The SQL Plus pronounced sequel plus User s Guide and Reference introduces the SQL Plus program and its uses It also provides a detailed description of each SOL Plus command Throughout this document unless explicitly stated otherwise SQL Plus is used to refer to SQL Plus behavior available through all its user interfaces command line Windows Graphical User Interface and the iSQL Plus web based user interface This preface contains these topics a Intended Audience a Documentation Accessibility a Structure a Related Documents a Conventions xix Intended Audience The SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference is intended for business and technical users and system administrators who perform the following tasks Develop and run batch scripts a Format calculate on store print and create web output from query results a Examine table and object definitions a Perform database administration This document requires a basic understanding of the SQL lang
95. for your changes to take effect Connection identifiers are case insensitive and each connection identifier listed in the argument should be identical to an alias in the tnsnames ora file Once set all connections made through the Login screen all dynamic reports and any connections attempted with the CONNECT command are refused unless the connection is to one of the databases in the restricted list Similarly if SET INSTANCE is used the connection identifier defined must match an entry in iSOLPlusConnectIdList or the connection is refused If no connection identifier is given or if the one given does not match an entry in iSQLPlusConnectIdList the database connection is refused and the following error occurs SP2 0884 Connection to database database_name is not allowed Enabling iSQL Plus DBA Access To access the iSQL Plus DBA URL you must set up the OC4J user manager You can set up OC4J to use The XML based provider type jazn data xml The LDAP based provider type Oracle Internet Directory This document discusses how to set up the iSQL Plus DBA URL to use the XML based provider For information on how to set up the LDAP based provider see the Oracle9iAS Containers for J2EE documentation To set up the SQL Plus DBA URL 1 Create users for the iSQL Plus DBA URL 2 Grant the webDba role to users 3 Test iSQL Plus DBA Access The Oracle JAAS Provider otherwise known as JAZN Java AuthoriZatioN is Oracle s impl
96. from a remote database to your local database Copy data from your local default database to a remote database most systems Copy data from one remote database to another remote database most systems B 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Copying Data from One Database to Another Note In general the COPY command was designed to be used for copying data between Oracle and non Oracle databases You should use SQL commands CREATE TABLE AS and INSERT to copy data between Oracle databases Understanding COPY Command Syntax You enter the COPY command in the following form COPY FROM database TO database action destination_table column_name column_name column_name USING query Here is a sample COPY command COPY FROM HR your_password BOSTONDB TO TODD your_password CHICAGODB CREATE NEWDEPT DEPARTMENT_ID DEPARTMENT_NAME CITY USING SELECT FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW To specify a database in the FROM or TO clause you must have a valid username and password for the local and remote databases and know the appropriate Oracle Net service names COPY obeys Oracle Database security so the username you specify must have been granted access to tables for you to have access to tables For information on what databases are available to you contact your DBA When you copy to your local database from a remote database you can omit the TO clause When you copy to a remote database from your loca
97. history size SQL Plus Error Messages 14 49 iSQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0889 The value specified for the keyword type must be either URL or TEXT Cause The value entered for the specified keyword was invalid Action Re enter the command using a valid value for the specified keyword Valid values for the keyword type are URL or TEXT SP2 0890 Instance not set or connect identifier not specified Cause No connect identifier or database instance was specified for the connect command or the SET INSTANCE command Action Re enter the command and specify a valid connect identifier or database instance SP2 0892 Error expiring session Cause iSQL Plus could not close the timed out session identified by the user session Id Action No action required SP2 0893 Expired session Cause iSQL Plus has expired the timed out session identified by the user session Id Action No action required SP2 0894 Unsuccessful log in for username from URL to connect_id Cause iSQL Plus failed to log in user with the given username URL and connect identifier Action No action required SP2 0896 Failed to log out username Cause iSQL Plus failed to log out user with given user session Id Action No action required SP2 0911 Only a password is allowed in the password field Cause An attempt was made to enter a value other than a password in the iSQL Plus Login screen Password field Action Only a valid password is allowe
98. hyphen SQL Plus displays a right angle bracket gt as a prompt for each additional line You do not need to end a SQL Plus command with a semicolon When you finish entering the command you can press Return If you wish however you can enter a semicolon at the end of a SQL Plus command SQL Plus Command Reference 13 1 SQL Plus Command Summary SQL Plus Command Summary Command Page Description on Runs SQL Plus statements in the specified script The script page 13 6 can be called from the local file system or from a web server on Runs a script This command is similar to the at sign page 13 8 command It is useful for running nested scripts because it has the additional functionality of looking for the specified script in the same path as the calling script slash on Executes the SQL command or PL SQL block page 13 10 ACCEPT on Reads a line of input and stores it in a given substitution page 13 11 variable APPEND on Adds specified text to the end of the current line in the page 13 13 buffer ARCHIVE LOG on Starts or stops the automatic archiving of online redo log page 13 14 files manually explicitly archives specified redo log files or displays information about redo log files ATTRIBUTE on Specifies display characteristics for a given attribute of an page 13 17 Object Type column and lists the current display characteristics for a single attribute or all attributes BREAK on Specifies
99. in the same way as it affects the START command To see the commands as SQL Plus enters them you can SET ECHO ON The ECHO system variable controls the listing of the commands in scripts run with the START and commands Setting the ECHO variable OFF suppresses the listing START and leave the last SQL command or PL SQL block of the script in the buffer Running a Script as You Start SQL Plus To run a script as you start SQL Plus use one of the following options a Follow the SQLPLUS command with your username a slash your password a space and the name of the file SQLPLUS HR your_password SALES SQL Plus starts and runs the script 6 14 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Exiting from a Script with a Return Code a Include your username a slash and your password as the first line of the file Follow the SQLPLUS command with and the filename SQL Plus starts and runs the file Please consider the security risks of exposing your password in the file before using this technique If you omit the slash and password SQL Plus prompts for it Nesting Scripts To run a series of scripts in sequence first create a script containing several START commands each followed by the name of a script in the sequence Then run the script containing the START commands For example you could include the following START commands in a script named SALESRPT START Q1SALES START Q2SALES START Q3SALES START Q
100. ina CHAR variable named LASTNAME enter ACCEPT lastname CHAR FORMAT A20 PROMPT Enter employee lastname 13 12 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference APPEND APPEND Syntax Examples APPEND is not available in iSQL Plus A PPEND text where text represents the text to append Adds specified text to the end of the current line in the SQL buffer The buffer has no command history list and does not record SQL Plus commands To separate text from the preceding characters with a space enter two spaces between APPEND and text To APPEND text that ends with a semicolon end the command with two semicolons SQL Plus interprets a single semicolon as an optional command terminator To append a comma delimiter a space and the column name CITY to the first line of the buffer make that line the current line by listing the line as follows 1 1 SELECT DEPARTMENT_ID Now enter APPEND APPEND CITY 1 1 SELECT DEPARTMENT_ID CITY To append a semicolon to the line enter APPEND SQL Plus appends the first semicolon to the line and interprets the second as the terminator for the APPEND command SQL Plus Command Reference 13 13 ARCHIVE LOG ARCHIVE LOG Syntax Terms ARCHIVE LOG LIST STOP START NEXT ALL integer TO destination Starts or stops automatic archiving of online redo log files manually explicitly archives specified redo log files or displays information abou
101. it Otherwise COPY drops the existing table and replaces it with a table containing the copied data destination_table Represents the table you wish to create or to which you wish to add data column column column Specifies the names of the columns in destination_table You must enclose a name in double quotes if it contains lowercase letters or blanks If you specify columns the number of columns must equal the number of columns selected by the query If you do not specify any columns the copied columns will have the same names in the destination table as they had in the source if COPY creates destination_table USING query Specifies a SQL query SELECT command determining which rows and columns COPY copies To enable the copying of data between Oracle and non Oracle databases NUMBER columns are changed to DECIMAL columns in the destination table Hence if you are copying between Oracle databases a NUMBER column with no precision will be changed to a DECIMAL 38 column When copying between Oracle databases you should use SQL commands CREATE TABLE AS and INSERT or you should ensure that your columns have a precision specified The SQL Plus SET LONG variable limits the length of LONG columns that you copy If any LONG columns contain data longer than the value of LONG COPY truncates the data SQL Plus performs a commit at the end of each successful COPY If you set the SQL Plus SET COPYCOMMIT variable to a positive
102. line backward if column n has been passed Here column means print position not table column S KIP n Skips to the start of a new line n times if you omit n one time if you enter zero for n backward to the start of the current line TAB n Skips forward n columns backward if you enter a negative value for n Column in this context means print position not table column LE FT CE NTER R IGHT Left align center and right align data on the current line respectively SQL Plus aligns following data items as a group up to the end of the printspec or the next LEFT CENTER RIGHT or COL command CENTER and RIGHT use the SET LINESIZE value to calculate the position of the data item that follows 13 156 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference TTITLE Usage BOLD Prints data in bold print SQL Plus represents bold print on your terminal by repeating the data on three consecutive lines On some operating systems SQL Plus may instruct your printer to print bold text on three consecutive lines instead of bold FORMAT text Specifies a format model that determines the format of following data items up to the next FORMAT clause or the end of the command The format model must be a text constant such as A10 or 999 See the COLUMN command on page 13 31 for more information on formatting and valid format models If the datatype of the format model does not match the datatype of a given data item the FORMAT claus
103. make sure that SQL statements conform to the ANSI ISO SQL92 standard If any non standard constructs are found the Oracle Database Server flags them as errors and displays the violating syntax This is the equivalent of the SQL language ALTER SESSION SET FLAGGER command You may execute SET FLAGGER even if you are not connected to a database FIPS flagging will remain in effect across SOL Plus sessions until a SET FLAGGER OFF or ALTER SESSION SET FLAGGER OFF command is successful or you exit SOL Plus When FIPS flagging is enabled SQL Plus displays a warning for the CONNECT DISCONNECT and ALTER SESSION SET FLAGGER commands even if they are successful SET FLU SH ON OFF SET FLUSH is not supported in iSQL Plus Controls when output is sent to the user s display device OFF enables the operating system to buffer output ON disables buffering FLUSH only affects display output it does not affect spooled output Use OFF only when you run a script non interactively that is when you do not need to see output and or prompts until the script finishes running The use of FLUSH OFF may improve performance by reducing the amount of program I O SET HEA DING ON OFF Example Controls printing of column headings in reports ON prints column headings in reports OFF suppresses column headings The SET HEADING OFF command does not affect the column width displayed it only suppresses the printing of the column header itself
104. message sending to screen 6 28 13 84 middle tier 1 2 MOUNT clause 13 149 mounting a database 13 149 mouse using to copy command 2 3 multiple Oracle Database homes specifying font 2 9 N national language support See also globalization support NCHAR clause VARIABLE command 13 160 NCHAR columns changing format 13 33 default format 7 6 13 33 NCLOB clause VARIABLE command 13 161 NCLOB columns changing format 13 33 default format 13 33 setting maximum width 13 105 13 121 setting retrieval position 13 105 13 120 setting retrieval size 9 13 13 105 13 121 negative infinity sign 13 36 net service name 4 5 4 6 See also connection identifier new password field 4 3 NEW_VALUE clause 7 31 13 37 storing current date in variable for titles 13 37 NEWLINE clause 13 37 NEWPAGE command C 1 C 3 NEWPAGE variable 7 33 13 105 13 123 NEXT clause 13 15 NLS NLS_DATE_FORMAT 13 12 13 40 NLS_LANG environment variables 3 2 NOAUDIT command disabling 10 5 NOLIST clause 13 72 NOLOG 4 6 4 25 NOMOUNT clause 13 149 NONE clause WHENEVER OSERROR 13 168 WHENEVER SQLERROR 13 170 NOPARALLEL clause 13 89 NOPRINT clause 7 18 7 31 9 12 13 37 NOPROMPT clause 13 12 NORMAL mode 13 142 Notepad on Windows 13 54 NULL clause 13 37 null values setting text displayed 13 37 13 105 13 124 ULL variable 13 105 13 124 UMBER column definition from DESCRIBE 13 59 NUMBER clause 6 30 VARIABLE command
105. mm yy are valid when the datatype is DATE DATE without a specified format defaults to the NLS_DATE_FORMAT of the current session See the Oracle Database Administrator s Guide and the Oracle Database SQL Reference for information on Oracle Database date formats DEF AULT Sets the default value if a reply is not given The reply must be in the specified format if defined PROMPT text Displays text on screen before accepting the value of variable from the user NOPR OMPT Skips a line and waits for input without displaying a prompt ACCEPT NOPR OMPT is not applicable in iSQL Plus HIDE Suppresses the display as you type the reply To display or reference variables use the DEFINE command See the DEFINE command on page 13 51 for more information To display the prompt Password place the reply in a CHAR variable named PSWD and suppress the display enter ACCEPT pswd CHAR PROMPT Password HIDE To display the prompt Enter weekly salary and place the reply in a NUMBER variable named SALARY with a default of 000 0 enter ACCEPT salary NUMBER FORMAT 999 99 DEFAULT 000 0 PROMPT Enter weekly salary To display the prompt Enter date hired and place the reply in a DATE variable HIRED with the format dd mm yyyy and a default of 01 01 2003 enter ACCEPT hired DATE FORMAT dd mm yyyy DEFAULT 01 01 2003 PROMPT Enter date hired To display the prompt Enter employee lastname and place the reply
106. n variable BindVariable Directs SQL Plus to perform the specified action as soon as an operating system error is detected You can also specify that SQL Plus return a success or failure code the operating system failure code or a number or variable of your choice EXIT SUCCESS FAILURE n variable BindVariable Directs SQL Plus to exit as soon as an operating system error is detected You can also specify that SQL Plus return a success or failure code the operating system failure code or a number or variable of your choice See EXIT on page 13 70 for more information CONTINUE Turns off the EXIT option COMMIT Directs SQL Plus to execute a COMMIT before exiting or continuing and save pending changes to the database ROLLBACK Directs SQL Plus to execute a ROLLBACK before exiting or continuing and abandon pending changes to the database NONE Directs SQL Plus to take no action before continuing 13 168 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference WHENEVER OSERROR Usage Examples If you do not enter the WHENEVER OSERROR command the default behavior of SQL Plus is to continue and take no action when an operating system error occurs If you do not enter the WHENEVER SQLERROR command the default behavior of SQL Plus is to continue and take no action when a SQL error occurs The commands in the following script cause iSQL Plus to stop processing the current script and return focus to the Input area on the Wo
107. now prompts you with the SQL Plus command prompt not in iSQL Plus SQL Plus does not execute the command but stores it in the SOL buffer See The SOL Buffer on page 5 3 for SQL Plus Basics 5 7 Running PL SQL Blocks details If you subsequently enter another SOL command SQL Plus overwrites the previous command in the buffer Running PL SQL Blocks You can also use PL SQL subprograms called blocks to manipulate data in the database See your PL SQL User s Guide and Reference for information on individual PL SQL statements SQL Plus treats PL SQL subprograms in the same manner as SQL commands except that a semicolon or a blank line does not terminate and execute a block Terminate PL SQL subprograms by entering a period by itself on a new line You can also terminate and execute a PL SQL subprogram by entering a slash by itself on a new line You enter the mode for entering PL SQL statements when a You type DECLARE or BEGIN After you enter PL SQL mode in this way type the remainder of your PL SQL subprogram You type a SQL command such as CREATE PROCEDURE that creates a stored procedure After you enter PL SQL mode in this way type the stored procedure you want to create SQL Plus stores the subprograms you enter in the SQL buffer Execute the current subprogram with a RUN or slash command A semicolon is treated as part of the PL SQL subprogram and will not execute the command SQL Plus se
108. of documentation in a script For information on the current method of inserting comments in a script see the section Placing Comments in Scripts on page 6 9 and the REMARK command on page 13 94 After you type DOCUMENT and enter Return SQL Plus displays the prompt DOC gt in place of SQL gt until you end the documentation The pound character on a line by itself ends the documentation If you have set DOCUMENT to OFF SQL Plus suppresses the display of the block of documentation created by the DOCUMENT command See SET DOC UMENT ON OFF obsolete on page C 4 NEWPAGE 1In obsolete Advances spooled output n lines beyond the beginning of the next page See SET NEWP AGE 1 n NONE on page 13 123 for information on the current method for advancing spooled output SET BUF FER bufferiSQL obsolete Makes the specified buffer the current buffer Initially the SQL buffer is the current buffer SQL Plus does not require the use of multiple buffers the SQL buffer alone should meet your needs If the buffer name you enter does not already exist SET BUFFER defines creates and names the buffer SQL Plus deletes the buffer and its contents when you exit SOL Plus Running a query automatically makes the SQL buffer the current buffer To copy text from one buffer to another use the GET and SAVE commands To clear text from the current buffer use CLEAR BUFFER To clear text from the SQL buffer while using a d
109. of the ARCHIVE LOG command cannot be used simultaneously Action Check the syntax of the ARCHIVE LOG command for the correct usage SP2 0717 Illegal SHUTDOWN option Cause An invalid option was used in the SHUTDOWN command Action Check the syntax of the SHUTDOWN command for the correct options SP2 0718 Illegal ARCHIVE LOG option Cause An invalid option was used in the ARCHIVE LOG command Action Check the syntax of the ARCHIVE LOG command for the correct options SP2 0728 Specify log lt RET gt suggested filename AUTO CANCEL Cause This isa RECOVER DATABASE command prompt prompting for the redo log files to be applied Action Enter one of the redo log file options SP2 0729 Cannot SET INSTANCE while connected to a database Cause There was a problem with the connection instance while issuing the SET INSTANCE command Action Disconnect from the instance before re issuing the command SP2 0733 Invalid connect string Cause An invalid connect string was specified Action Check that the connect string is correct SP2 0734 Unknown command beginning command_name rest of line ignored Cause The command entered was invalid Action Check the syntax of the command you used for the correct options SP2 0735 Unknown command_name option beginning option_name Cause An invalid option was specified for a given command Action Check the syntax of the command you used for the correct options 14 30 SQL Plus
110. of the bind variable datatype SP2 0678 Column or attribute type can not be displayed by SQL Plus Cause The type specified is not supported Action Rewrite the query to select the data with types that SQL Plus supports SP2 0685 The date entered_variable is invalid or format mismatched format Cause An invalid date was entered or does not match the format Action Enter a valid date or a date in the required format SP2 0686 Usage DESCRIBE schema object db_link Cause An invalid option was used in the DESCRIBE command Action Check the syntax of the DESCRIBE command for the correct options SP2 0692 Usage CONNIECT logon AS SYSDBA SYSOPER Where lt logon gt lt username gt lt password gt lt connect_string gt Cause An invalid option was entered for the SQL Plus CONNECT command Action Check the syntax for the CONNECT command for the correct usage SP2 0714 Invalid combination of STARTUP options Cause The specified options of the STARTUP command cannot be used simultaneously Action Check the syntax of the STARTUP command for the correct usage SP2 0715 Invalid combination of SHUTDOWN options Cause The specified options of the SHUTDOWN command cannot be used simultaneously Action Check the syntax of the SHUTDOWN command for the correct usage SQL Plus Error Messages 14 29 SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0716 Invalid combination of ARCHIVE LOG options Cause The specified options
111. on was not defined Action Use the COLUMN command to make sure the column the format is based on is defined first SP2 0054 no room to allocate definition_name definition Ignored Cause Unable to allocate memory to process the COLUMN command Action Free up additional memory by closing applications not required reducing the size of the command or statement or by recoding the query to select fewer records 14 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0055 out of room while allocating portion of new definition_name Old definition if any retained Cause Unable to allocate memory to store the new definition Action Free up additional memory by closing applications not required reducing the size of the command or statement or by recoding the query to select fewer records SP2 0080 no COMPUTES currently defined Cause No COMPUTE definition Action Define a COMPUTE Check the syntax of the COMPUTE command for the correct options SP2 0081 maximum of number COMPUTE functions allowed at a time Cause The maximum number of COMPUTE functions has been exceeded Action Reduce the number of COMPUTE functions SP2 0082 no COMPUTE functions requested Cause No COMPUTE functions requested Action No action required SP2 0083 warning COMPUTE option function_name specified number times Cause A label or a function was specified more than once Action Remove the unnecessary labels or fun
112. one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL type Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages 0817 Type altered with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL type has been altered but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL type Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages 14 38 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0818 Type Body created with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL type body has been created but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL type body Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0819 Type Body altered with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL type body has been altered but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL type body Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0820 Library created with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL library has been created but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL library Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW E
113. options SP2 0262 no room to allocate CCBDEF pointer array Cause An internal memory error occurred Action Free up additional memory by closing applications not required reducing the size of the command or statement or by recoding the query to select fewer records SP2 0263 no room to allocate COMPUTE block for column_name ON page report column_name Cause Insufficient memory allocated to the COMPUTE block Action Allocate more memory by closing other applications SP2 0265 option_name must be set ON or OFF Cause An invalid SET option name was specified Action Re enter with either ON or OFF as one of the SET options 14 12 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0266 internal error buffer buffer_size smaller than 1 buffer_limit Cause An internal error occurred Action Free up additional memory by closing applications not required reducing the size of the command or statement or by recoding the query to select fewer records SP2 0267 option_name option parameter_number out of range lower_range through upper_range Cause A value for a parameter was out of the specified range Action Check the limits of the parameter and enter a value that is within the range SP2 0268 option_name option not a valid number Cause Non numeric value integer was entered for a parameter Action Enter a valid numeric value integer SP2 0270 unknown flag in afiset number ignored Cause A
114. output at the beginning of each PAGESIZE number of lines of report output Press Return to view more output SET PAUSE text specifies the text to be displayed each time SQL Plus pauses Multiple words in text must be enclosed in single quotes You can embed terminal dependent escape sequences in the PAUSE command These sequences allow you to create inverse video messages or other effects on terminals that support such characteristics In iSQL Plus SET PAUSE ON displays the value of text then pauses output and displays a Next Page button after PAGESIZE number of rows of report output Click the Next Page button to view more report output The Next Page button is not displayed on the final page of output SET RECSEP WR APPED EA CH OFF RECSEP tells SQL Plus where to make the record separation For example if you set RECSEP to WRAPPED SQL Plus prints a record separator only after wrapped lines If you set RECSEP to EACH SQL Plus prints a record separator following every row If you set RECSEP to OFF SQL Plus does not print a record separator The Display Record Separator preference SET RECSEP is only supported in iSQL Plus when Preformatted Output is On SET MARKUP HTML PREFORMAT SET RECSEPCHAR c Defines the character to display or print to separate records A record separator consists of a single line of the RECSEPCHAR record separating character repeated LINESIZE times The default is a single space SQL Plus
115. platform specific documentation to make sure SQL Plus is installed correctly This may occur because the ORACLE_HOME environment variable or registry equivalent is not set to the location of the Oracle software Make sure this value is set correctly Check that the SQL Plus binary message files exist in the SQL Plus message directory for example ORACLE_HOME sgqlplus mesg Check the value of NLS_LANG environment variable or registry equivalent is correct SP2 0668 Invalid variable name Cause An invalid character was specified as part of the variable name Action Specify the variable with valid characters SP2 0669 Valid characters are alphanumerics and _ Cause An invalid character was specified as part of the variable name Action Specify the variable with alphanumeric characters and _ SP2 0670 Internal number conversion failed Cause A conversion request could not be performed because the string contained alphanumeric characters Action Make sure that the string only contains numeric digits 14 28 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0675 COPY command not available Cause The COPY command is not available in this version of SQL Plus Action Make a note of the message and the number then contact Oracle Support Services SP2 0676 Bind variable length cannot exceed variable_length units_of_variable Cause The length of the bind variable datatype was exceeded Action Reduce the length
116. query results to a file when you want to edit them with a word processor before printing or include them in a letter email or other document To store the results of a query in a file and still display them on the screen enter the SPOOL command in the following form SPOOL file_name If you do not follow the filename with a period and an extension SPOOL adds a default file extension to the filename to identify it as an output file The default varies with the operating system on most hosts it is LST or LIS See the platform specific Oracle documentation provided for your operating system for more information SQL Plus continues to spool information to the file until you turn spooling off using the following form of SPOOL SPOOL OFF Creating a Flat File When moving data between different software products it is sometimes necessary to use a flat file an operating system file with no escape characters headings or extra characters embedded For example if you do not have Oracle Net you need to create a flat file for use with SQL Loader when moving data from Oracle9i to Oracle Database 10g Formatting SQL Plus Reports 7 35 Storing and Printing Query Results To create a flat file with SQL Plus you first must enter the following SET commands SET NEWPAGE 0 SET SPACE 0 SET LINESIZE 80 SET PAGESIZE 0 SET ECHO OFF SET FEEDBACK OFF SET VERIFY OFF SET HEADING OFF SET MARKUP HTML OFF SPOOL OFF After e
117. recently executed script The History screen shows the first 80 characters of the script When the history limit is reached the oldest scripts are removed When you exit a session the history is discarded and history is not shared between sessions You can change the default number of entries stored in the history list in the Interface Options screen which you access from the Preferences screen ORACLE A A LSQ PEE ki mim Logout Preferences Help Connected as HR ORCL History The scripts listed are for the current session Script history is not available for previous sessions Select All Select None 0 select employee _id first_name last_name from emp_details_view oO select employee_id first name last_name from lemp_details view describe emp_details_view select from emp details view Workspace History Logout Preferences Help Copytigh 2003 Oracle All ght reserved Script Shows the current list of scripts in the history They are in most recently executed order with the most recent at the top Click the checkbox of one or more scripts that you want to load into the Input area 2 18 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference iSQL Plus User Interface Scripts are displayed verbatim so be careful if you have included items like CONNECT commands which include passwords Load Loads the selected
118. replace WRAP with WORD_WRAP REMARKS looks like this CUSTOMER DATE QUANTITY REMARKS 123 25 AUG 2001 144 This order must be shipped by air freight to ORD If you specify TRUNCATE REMARKS looks like this CUSTOMER DATE QUANTITY REMARKS 123 25 AUG 2001 144 This order must be s To print the current date and the name of each job in the top title enter the following Use the EMPLOYEES table of the HR schema instead of EMP_DETAILS_VIEW For details on creating a date variable see Displaying the Current Date in Titles on page 7 32 Your two page report would look similar to the following report with Job Report centered within your current linesize COLUMN JOB_ID NOPRINT NEW_VALUE JOBVAR COLUMN TODAY NOPRINT NEW_VALUE DATEVAR BREAK ON JOB_ID SKIP PAGE ON TODAY TTITLE CENTER Job Report RIGHT DATEVAR SKIP 2 LEFT Job JOBVAR SKIP 2 SELECT TO_CHAR SYSDATE MM DD YYYY TODAY LAST_NAME JOB_ID MANAGER_ID HIRE_DATE SALARY DEPARTMENT_ID FROM EMPLOYEES WHERE JOB_ID IN MK_MAN SA_MAN ORDER BY JOB_ID LAST_NAME To change the default format of DATE columns to YYYY MM DD you can enter ALTER SESSION SET NLS_DATE_FORMAT YYYY MM DD Session altered 13 40 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COLUMN To display the change enter a SELECT statement such as SELECT HIRE_DATE FROM EMPLOYEES WHERE EMPLOYEE_ID 206 Job Report 04 19 01 Job SA_MAN HIRE_DAT
119. reset the column s format with COLUMN column_name CLEAR or exit from SQL Plus Default Display A NUMBER column s width equals the width of the heading or the width of the FORMAT plus one space for the sign whichever is greater If you do not explicitly use FORMAT then the column s width will always be at least the value of SET NUMWIDTH SQL Plus normally displays numbers with as many digits as are required for accuracy up to a standard display width determined by the value of the NUMWIDTH variable of the SET command normally 10 If a number is larger than the value of SET NUMWIDTH SQL Plus rounds the number up or down to the maximum number of characters allowed if possible or displays hashes if the number is too large You can choose a different format for any NUMBER column by using a format model ina COLUMN command A format model is a representation of the way you want the numbers in the column to appear using 9s to represent digits Changing the Default Display The COLUMN command identifies the column you want to format and the model you want to use as shown COLUMN column_name FORMAT model Use format models to add commas dollar signs angle brackets around negative values and leading zeros to numbers in a given column You can also round the 7 4 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Formatting Columns values to a given number of decimal places display minus signs to the right of negative values instead of
120. scripts into the Input area of the Workspace Delete Deletes the selected scripts from the history Click the Workspace tab to return to the Input area without loading or deleting any scripts from the history iSQL Plus Input Required Screen When iSQL Plus executes a script containing substitution variables the Input Required screen is displayed for each substitution variable For example enter BREAK ON amp amp SORTCOL SELECT amp SORTCOL SALARY FROM amp MYTABLE WHERE SALARY gt 12000 ORDER BY amp SORTCOL iSQL Plus displays ORACLE SOLT D sata Logout Preferences Help History Connected as SYSTEM inst1 T Input Required Cancel Continue Enter value for sortcal Jlast_name Cancel Continue Workspace History Logout Preferences Help Copytigh 2003 Oracle All right reserved SQL Plus User Interface 2 19 iSQL Plus User Interface Enter Value for sortcol Enter a value for the sortcol variable For example enter LAST_NAME Remember that if a substitution variable is currently undefined then when it is referenced with a single ampersand you are prompted for its value at every occurrence of the reference If you reference the variable with a double ampersand the value is retained for the session and you will only be prompted for it once When prompted enter a value for the mytable variable For example enter EMP_ DETAILS_VIEW Continue Cl
121. standby site they become available for use by a managed standby recovery operation Sustained standby recovery is restricted to media recovery For more information on the parameters of this clause see the Oracle Database Backup and Recovery Advanced User s Guide DISCONNECT Indicates that the managed redo process MRP should apply archived redo files as a detached background process Doing so leaves the current session available TIMEOUT Specifies in minutes the wait period of the sustained recovery operation The recovery process waits for integer minutes for a requested archived log redo to be SQL Plus Command Reference 13 89 RECOVER available for writing to the standby database If the redo log file does not become available within that time the recovery process terminates with an error message You can then issue the statement again to return to sustained standby recovery mode If you do not specify this clause or if you specify NOTIMEOUT the database remains in sustained standby recovery mode until you reissue the statement with the RECOVER CANCEL clause or until instance shutdown or failure NODELAY Applies a delayed archivelog immediately to the standby database overriding any DELAY setting in the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_n parameter on the primary database If you omit this clause application of the archivelog is delayed according to the parameter setting If DELAY was not specified in the parameter the archivelog is
122. statistics SET AUTOTRACE ON The AUTOTRACE report includes both the optimizer execution path and the SQL statement execution statistics SET AUTOTRACE TRACEONLY Like SET AUTOTRACE ON but suppresses the printing of the user s query output if any If STATISTICS is enabled query data is still fetched but not printed To use this feature you must create a PLAN_TABLE table in your schema and then have the PLUSTRACE role granted to you DBA privileges are required to grant the PLUSTRACE role For information on how to grant a role and how to create the PLAN_TABLE table see the Oracle Database SQL Reference For more information about the roles and the PLAN_TABLE see the Oracle Database SQL Reference and the AUTOTRACE variable of the SET command on page 13 103 Example 9 1 Creating a PLAN_TABLE Run the following commands from your SQL Plus session to create the PLAN_ TABLE in the HR schema CONNECT HR your_password SORACLE_HOME RDBMS ADMIN UTLXPLAN SQL Table created 9 2 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Tracing Statements Example 9 2 Creating the PLUSTRACE Role Run the following commands from your SQL Plus session to create the PLUSTRACE role and grant it to the DBA CONNECT AS SYSDBA SORACLE_HOME SQLPLUS ADMIN PLUSTRCE SQL drop role plustrace Role dropped create role plustrace Role created grant plustrace to dba with admin option Grant succeeded Example 9 3 Granting the PLUSTR
123. system The script must be run as user SYSTEM 0625 Error printing variable variable_name Cause Error encountered while printing the specified variable Action Check that the specified variable is correct and try again 0626 Error accessing package DBMS_APPLICATION_INFO You may need to install the Oracle Procedural option SET APPINFO requires Oracle Server Release 7 2 or later Cause This message is followed by a successful login to the Oracle Server The DBMS_APPLICATION package is used to maintain on line information about a 14 26 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages particular application logged onto Oracle SET APPINFO could not be initialized Action This package is created during the running of the CATPROC SQL and should be available on all databases from Oracle 7 2 Check that your database is correctly installed SP2 0631 String beginning string name is too long Maximum size is 1 characteror Maximum size is string_length characters Cause The string specified was too long Action Reduce the size of the specified string and re try the operation SP2 0640 Not connected Cause The PASSWORD command was issued when there was no connection to the Oracle instance Action Connect to the Oracle database before re issuing the PASSWORD command SP2 0641 command_name requires connection to server Cause SQL Plus was unable to execute the command because there was no connection to a dat
124. that it only waits on local transactions to complete not all transactions This is useful for example for scheduled outage maintenance SHUTDOWN with no arguments is equivalent to SHUTDOWN NORMAL You must be connected to a database as SYSOPER or SYSDBA You cannot connect through a multi threaded server See CONNECT on page 13 48 for more information about connecting to a database To shutdown the database in normal mode enter SHUTDOWN Database closed Database dismounted Oracle instance shut down SQL Plus Command Reference 13 143 SPOOL SPOOL Syntax Terms SPOOL is not available in iSQL Plus SPO OL file_name exf CRE ATE REP LACE APP END OFF OUT Stores query results in a file or optionally sends the file to a printer In iSQL Plus use the preference settings to direct output to a file file_name ex Represents the name of the file to which you wish to spool SPOOL followed by file_name begins spooling displayed output to the named file If you do not specify an extension SPOOL uses a default extension LST or LIS on most systems CRE ATE Creates a new file with the name specified REP LACE Replaces the contents of an existing file If the file does not exist REPLACE creates the file This is the default behavior APP END Adds the contents of the buffer to the end of the file you specify OFF Stops spooling OUT Stops spooling and sends the file to your comp
125. the REPHEADER command on page 13 97 for additional information on terms and clauses in the REPFOOTER command syntax If you do not enter a printspec clause before the text or variables REPFOOTER left justifies the text or variables You can use any number of constants and variables in a printspec SQL Plus displays the constants and variables in the order you specify them positioning and formatting each constant or variable as specified by the printspec clauses that precede it Note If SET EMBEDDED is ON the report footer is suppressed SQL Plus Command Reference 13 95 REPFOOTER Examples To define END EMPLOYEE LISTING REPORT as a report footer on a separate page and to center it enter REPFOOTER PAGE CENTER END EMPLOYEE LISTING REPORT TTITLE RIGHT Page FORMAT 999 SQL PNO SELECT LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 LAST_NAME SALARY King 24000 Kochhar 17000 De Haan 17000 Russell 14000 Partners 13500 Hartstein 13000 sum 98500 Page END EMPLOYEE LISTING REPORT 6 rows selected To suppress the report footer without changing its definition enter REPFOOTER OFF 13 96 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference REPHEADER REPHEADER Syntax Terms REPH EADER PAGE printspec text variable ON OFF where printspec represents one or more of the following clauses used to place and format the text COL n SIKIP n TAB n
126. the column in a SELECT command a EXIT SQL Plus Whenever you run a stored query or script SQL Plus substitutes the value of variable for each substitution variable referencing variable in the form amp variable or amp amp variable SQL Plus will not prompt you for the value of variable in this session until you UNDEFINE variable SQL Plus Command Reference 13 51 DEFINE If the value of a defined variable extends over multiple lines using the SQL Plus command continuation character SQL Plus replaces each continuation character and carriage return with a space For example SQL Plus interprets DEFINE TEXT ONE TWO THREE as DEFINE TEXT ONE TWO THREE You should avoid defining variables with names that may be identical to values that you will pass to them as unexpected results can occur If a value supplied for a defined variable matches a variable name then the contents of the matching variable are used instead of the supplied value Some variables are predefined when SQL Plus starts Enter DEFINE to see their definitions Examples To assign the value MANAGER to the variable POS type DEFINE POS MANAGER If you execute a command containing a reference to amp POS SQL Plus substitutes the value MANAGER for amp POS and will not prompt you for a POS value To assign the CHAR value 20 to the variable DEPARTMENT_ID type DEFINE DEPARTMENT_ID 20 Even though you enter the number 20 SQL Plus assign
127. the default value for your operating system you can either enter SET INSTANCE with no instance_path or SET INSTANCE LOCAL Note you can only change the instance when you are not currently connected to any instance That is you must first make sure that you have disconnected from the current instance then set or change the instance and reconnect to an instance in order for the new setting to be enabled SQL Plus Command Reference 13 119 SET LIN ESIZE 80 n SET LIN ESIZE 150 n in iSQL Plus Example This command may only be issued when Oracle Net is running You can use any valid Oracle Net connect identifier as the specified instance path See your operating system specific Oracle Database documentation for a complete description of how your operating system specifies Oracle Net connect identifiers The maximum length of the instance path is 64 characters To set the default instance to PROD1 enter DISCONNECT SET INSTANCE PROD1 To set the instance back to the default of local enter SET INSTANCE local You must disconnect from any connected instances to change the instance SET LIN ESIZE 80 n SET LIN ESIZE 150 n in SQL Plus Sets the total number of characters that SQL Plus displays on one line before beginning a new line It also controls the position of centered and right aligned text in TTITLE BTITLE REPHEADER and REPFOOTER Changing the linesize setting can affect text wrapping in output from t
128. this way you can control who has access to the privileges associated with the role a To access roles you use the SET ROLE command If you created the role with a password the user must know the password in order to access the role For more information about roles see your Oracle Database SQL Reference your Oracle Database Administrator s Guide and your Oracle Database Concepts manual Disabling SET ROLE From SQL Plus users can submit any SQL command In certain situations this can cause security problems Unless you take proper precautions a user could use SET ROLE to access privileges obtained through an application role With these privileges they might issue SQL statements from SQL Plus that could wrongly change database tables To prevent application users from accessing application roles in SQL Plus you can use the PUP table to disable the SET ROLE command You also need to disable the BEGIN and SQL Plus EXECUTE commands to prevent application users setting SQL Plus Security 10 7 Creating and Controlling Roles application roles through a PL SQL block This gives a SQL Plus user only those privileges associated with the roles enabled when they started SQL Plus For more information about the creation and usage of user roles see your Oracle Database SQL Reference and Oracle Database Administrator s Guide Disabling User Roles To disable a role for a given user insert a row in the PUP table containing the user s
129. to client 503 bytes received through SQL Net from client SQL Net round trips to from client sorts memory sorts disk rows processed noo amp Example 9 5 Tracing Statements Without Displaying Query Data To trace the same statement without displaying the query data enter SET AUTOTRACE TRACEONLY 9 6 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Tracing Statements 6 rows selected Execution Plan 0 SELECT STATEMENT Optimizer CHOOSE 1 0 TABLE ACCESS BY INDEX ROWID OF EMPLOYEES 2 1 NESTED LOOPS 3 2 TABLE ACCESS FULL OF JOBS 4 2 INDEX RANGE SCAN OF EMP_JOB_IX NON UNIQUE recursive calls 2 db block gets 34 consistent gets 0 physical reads 0 redo size 848 bytes sent through SQL Net to client 503 bytes received through SQL Net from client SQL Net round trips to from client sorts memory sorts disk rows processed noo amp This option is useful when you are tuning a large query but do not want to see the query report Example 9 6 Tracing Statements Using a Database Link To trace a statement using a database link enter SET AUTOTRACE TRACEONLY EXPLAIN SELECT FROM EMPLOYEES MY_LINK Execution Plan 0 SELECT STATEMENT REMOTE Optimizer CHOOSE 1 0 TABLE ACCESS FULL OF EMPLOYEES MY_LINK DB_DOMAIN The Execution Plan shows that the table being accessed on line 1 is through the database link MY_LINK DB_DOMAIN Tuning SQL Plus 9 7 Collecting Timing Statistics
130. to create a file a A system error made it impossible to create a file Action Take the following actions a Change privileges to allow creation of the file Consult the operating system documentation or contact the System Administrator SP2 0333 Illegal spool file name spool_name bad character character_name Cause An invalid filename was entered in the SPOOL command Action Correct the filename and re enter SP2 0341 line overflow during variable substitution gt number_of_characters characters at line line_number Cause The maximum number of characters was exceeded in the SQL buffer after the substitution variable was expanded Action Reduce the length in the substitution variable and try again SP2 0357 Out of temporary storage Cause Unable to allocate memory while trying to run the command Action Free up additional memory by closing applications not required reducing the size of the command or statement or by recoding the query to select fewer records SP2 0359 memory exhausted Cause Unable to allocate memory while trying to run the command Action Free up additional memory by closing applications not required reducing the size of the command or statement or by recoding the query to select fewer records 14 16 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0381 command_name is not available Cause The command specified is not implemented Action Use the appropriate S
131. to execute it by pressing the Return key SQL Plus processes the command and re displays the command prompt when ready for another command In iSQL Plus you type a command or a script into the Input area and click the Execute button to execute the contents of the Input area The results of your script are displayed below the Input area by default Use the History screen to access and rerun commands previously executed in the current session iSQL Plus executes the last SOL or PL SQL statement even if it is incomplete or does not have a final or If you intend to run iSQL Plus scripts in the command line or Windows GUI you should make sure you use a or to terminate your final statement iSQL Plus retains the state of your current system variables and other options throughout your session If you use the History screen to re execute a script you may get different results from those previously obtained depending on the current system variable values Some SQL Plus commands have no logical sense or are not applicable in iSQL Plus See Appendix D Commands Not Supported in iSQL Plus SQL Plus Basics 5 3 Listing a Table Definition Listing a Table Definition To see the definitions of each column in a given table or view use the SQL Plus DESCRIBE command Example 5 1 Using the DESCRIBE Command To list the column definitions of the columns in the sample view EMP_DETAILS_ VIEW enter DESCRIBE EMP_DETAILS_VIEW
132. to the left and display values in exponential notation To use more than one format model for a single column combine the desired models in one COLUMN command see Example 7 4 See COLUMN on page 13 31 for a complete list of format models and further details Example 7 4 Formatting a NUMBER Column To display SALARY with a dollar sign a comma and the numeral zero instead of a blank for any zero values enter the following command COLUMN SALARY FORMAT 99 990 Now rerun the current query LAST MONTHLY NAME SALARY COMMISSION Russell 14 000 4 Partners 13 500 3 Errazuriz 12 000 3 Cambrault 11 000 3 Zlotkey 10 500 2 Use a zero in your format model as shown when you use other formats such as a dollar sign and wish to display a zero in place of a blank for zero values Formatting Datatypes When displaying datatypes you can either accept the SQL Plus default display width or you can change it using the COLUMN command The format model will stay in effect until you enter a new one reset the column s format with COLUMN column_name CLEAR or exit from SQL Plus Datatypes in this manual include the following types CHAR a NCHAR a VARCHAR2 VARCHAR Formatting SQL Plus Reports 7 5 Formatting Columns a NVARCHAR2 NCHAR VARYING DATE a LONG a CLOB a NCLOB a XMLType Default Display The default width of datatype columns is the width of the column in the database The column width of a
133. use COLSEP because the SHOW command recognizes COLSEP and does not recognize SPACE C 4 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference TTI TLE text obsolete old form SET TRU NCATE ONIOFF obsolete Controls whether SQL Plus truncates or wraps a data item that is too long for the current line width ON functions in the same manner as SET WRAP OFF and vice versa You may prefer to use WRAP because the SHOW command recognizes WRAP and does not recognize TRUNCATE SHO W LABEL obsolete Shows the security level for the current session TTI TLE text obsolete old form Displays a title at the top of each report page The old form of TTITLE offers formatting features more limited than those of the new form but provides compatibility with UFI a predecessor of SQL Plus The old form defines the top title as a line with the date left aligned and the page number right aligned followed by a line with centered text and then a blank line The text you enter defines the title TTITLE displays SQL Plus centers text based on the size of a line as determined by SET LINESIZE A separator character begins a new line two line separator characters in a row insert a blank line You can change the line separator character with SET HEADSEP You can control the formatting of page numbers in the old forms of TTITLE and BTITLE by defining a variable named _page The default value of _page is the formatting string page amp P4 To al
134. values for a substitution variables a ACCEPT commands a RECOVER commands a CONNECT commands iSQL Plus pauses script execution and displays a Next Page button when a PAUSE command is executed Select the Next Page button to continue script execution Dynamic report output can be displayed over multiple pages or as a single page The default is multiple page output with pages of 24 lines Use the SET PAGESIZE and SET PAUSE commands in your scripts to set single or multiple page output for dynamic reports For example To set dynamic report output to a single page use SET PAUSE OFF To set dynamic report output to multiple pages of 40 lines use SET PAUSE ON SET PAGESIZE 40 You can include username and password information in the request You should carefully consider the security implications of including usernames and passwords in HTML files If you do not include a username or password iSQL Plus prompts you to enter login information when you run the script If you want to use the SET MARKUP command to change the HEAD or BODY options for a report put the SET MARKUP command before the first command that generates output The following examples use the EMP_DETAILS_VIEW view of the Human Resources HR sample schema This schema contains personnel records for a fictitious company It may be installed as part of the default Oracle Database installation using the Oracle Database Configuration Assistant 8 8 SQL Plus Users Guide
135. where and how formatting will change in a report page 13 19 or lists the current break definition BTITLE on Places and formats a specified title at the bottom of each page 13 24 report page or lists the current BTITLE definition CHANGE on Changes text on the current line in the buffer page 13 26 CLEAR on Resets or erases the current clause or setting for the specified page 13 29 option such as BREAKS or COLUMNS COLUMN on Specifies display characteristics for a given column or lists page 13 31 the current display characteristics for a single column or for all columns COMPUTE on Calculates and prints summary lines using various standard page 13 42 computations on subsets of selected rows or lists all COMPUTE definitions CONNECT on Connects a given user to Oracle Database page 13 48 13 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Command Summary Command Page Description COPY on Copies results from a query to a table in the same or another page 13 50 database DEFINE on Specifies a substitution variable and assigns it a CHAR page 13 51 value or lists the value and variable type of a single variable or all variables DEL on Deletes one or more lines of the buffer page 13 53 DESCRIBE on Lists the column definitions for the specified table view or page 13 59 synonym or the specifications for the specified function or procedure DISCONNECT on Commits pending changes to the database and logs the page 13
136. will only be prompted for it once When prompted enter a value for the mytable variable For example enter EMP_ DETAILS_VIEW Using Scripts in SQL Plus 6 25 Passing Parameters through the START Command Continue Click the Continue button to execute the script in the Input area with the input values you entered Cancel Click the Cancel button to cancel execution of the script and return to the Workspace Passing Parameters through the START Command You can bypass the prompts for values associated with substitution variables by passing values to parameters in a script through the START command You do this by placing an ampersand amp followed by a numeral in the script in place of a substitution variable Each time you run this script START replaces each amp 1 in the file with the first value called an argument after START filename then replaces each amp 2 with the second value and so forth For example you could include the following commands in a script called MYFILE SELECT FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE JOB_ID amp 1 AND SALARY amp 2 In the following START command SQL Plus would substitute PU_CLERK for amp 1 and 3100 for amp 2 in the script MYFILE START MYFILE PU_CLERK 3100 When you use arguments with the START command SQL Plus DEFINEs each parameter in the script with the value of the appropriate argument Example 6 11 Passing Parameters through START To create a new script based on SAL
137. 00 bytes still retained CLOB Creates a variable of type CLOB NCLOB Creates a variable of type NCLOB REFCURSOR Creates a variable of type REF CURSOR BINARY_FLOAT Creates a variable of type BINARY_FLOAT SQL Plus Command Reference 13 161 VARIABLE Usage BINARY_DOUBLE Creates a variable of type BINARY_DOUBLE Bind variables may be used as parameters to stored procedures or may be directly referenced in anonymous PL SQL blocks To display the value of a bind variable created with VARIABLE use the PRINT command See PRINT on page 13 83 for more information To automatically display the value of a bind variable created with VARIABLE use the SET AUTOPRINT command See SET AUTOP RINT ON OFF on page 13 109 for more information Bind variables cannot be used in the COPY command or SQL statements except in PL SQL blocks Instead use substitution variables When you execute a VARIABLE CLOB or NCLOB command SQL Plus associates a LOB locator with the bind variable The LOB locator is automatically populated when you execute a SELECT clob_column INTO cv statement in a PL SQL block SQL Plus closes the LOB locator when you exit SQL Plus To free resources used by CLOB and NCLOB bind variables you may need to manually free temporary LOBs with EXECUTE DBMS_LOB FREETEMPORARY cv All temporary LOBs are freed when you exit SQL Plus SOL Plus SET commands such as SET LONG and SET LONGCHUNKSIZE and SET LOBO
138. 1 amp 2 and so forth in the script The first argument replaces each occurrence of amp 1 the second replaces each occurrence of amp 2 and so on The START command defines the parameters with the values of the arguments if you START the script again in this session you can enter new arguments or omit the arguments to use the old values 13 146 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference START Usage Examples See Defining Substitution Variables on page 6 16 and Substitution Variables in iSQL Plus on page 6 24 for more information on using parameters All previous settings like COLUMN command settings stay in effect when the script starts If the script changes any setting then this new value stays in effect after the script has finished The at sign and double at sign commands function similarly to START Disabling the START command in the Product User Profile also disables the and commands See at sign on page 13 6 and double at sign on page 13 8 for further information on these commands See Disabling SOL Plus SQL and PL SQL Commands on page 10 4 for more information The EXIT or QUIT command in a script terminates SQL Plus A file named PROMOTE with the extension SQL used to promote employees might contain the following command SELECT FIRST_NAME LAST_NAME JOB_ID SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE JOB_ID amp 1 AND SALARY gt amp 2 To run this script enter START PROMOT
139. 13 42 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COMPUTE LABJ EL text Defines the label to be printed for the computed value If no LABEL clause is used text defaults to the unabbreviated function keyword You must place single quotes around text containing spaces or punctuation The label prints left justified and truncates to the column width or linesize whichever is smaller The maximum label length is 500 characters The label for the computed value appears in the break column specified To suppress the label use the NOPRINT option of the COLUMN command on the break column If you repeat a function ina COMPUTE command SQL Plus issues a warning and uses the first occurrence of the function With ON REPORT and ON ROW computations the label appears in the first column listed in the SELECT statement The label can be suppressed by using a NOPRINT column first in the SELECT statement When you compute a function of the first column in the SELECT statement ON REPORT or ON ROW then the computed value appears in the first column and the label is not displayed To see the label select a dummy column first in the SELECT list OF expr column alias In the OF clause you can refer to an expression or function reference in the SELECT statement by placing the expression or function reference in double quotes Column names and aliases do not need quotes ON expr column alias REPORT ROW If multiple COMPUTE commands r
140. 161 line line_number truncated Cause The line in the file was too long Action No action required or reduce the length of the line SP2 0162 unable to close file_name Cause Unable to close the specified file as it was being used Action Release the file from the other process SP2 0171 HELP system not available Cause Command line SQL Plus help is not installed in this Oracle instance Action Command line SQL Plus help is not installed in this Oracle instance Use the sqlplus admin help hlpbld sql script to install HELP on this database sqlplus system lt system_password gt hlpbld sql helpus sql SP2 0172 No HELP matching this topic was found Cause There is no help information available for the specified command Action Enter HELP INDEX for a list of topics SP2 0176 Option Is invalid Cause The option is not valid in this command Action Check the syntax of the command you used for the correct options SP2 0187 error in variable assignment Cause The assignment for the specified variable was incorrect Action Check the syntax of the ACCEPT command for the correct options SP2 0223 No lines in buffer_name buffer Cause There are no lines stored in the buffer Action Enter SQL statements into the buffer SP2 0224 invalid starting line number Cause The line number specified was incorrect Action Check that the line number is correct and try again SP2 0225 invalid ending line number Cause The line nu
141. 2 8 4 onthe web 8 1 running froma URL 8 8 SILENT mode 8 6 starting on anew page 13 116 title 13 155 C 2 RESTRICT 4 23 10 9 13 148 restricted database access 3 16 return code specifying 6 15 13 71 13 171 REVOKE command 10 1 disabling 10 5 RIGHT clause 7 27 13 98 13 156 roles 10 7 disabling 10 8 re enabling 10 8 ROLLBACK clause 13 71 WHENEVER OSERROR 13 168 WHENEVER SQLERROR 13 170 ROWID column definition from DESCRIBE 13 59 rows performing computations on 7 17 13 42 setting number retrieved at one time 9 12 13 104 13 109 setting the number after which COPY commits 13 114 RUN command 13 100 executing current PL SQL block 5 8 making last line current 6 5 similar to slash command 13 100 Run menu command 2 5 S sample schemas xxiv xl 1 5 1 6 8 8 see Oracle Database Sample Schemas guide xl see Oracle9i Sample Schemas guide 1 5 using HR in COLUMN example 13 40 using HR in examples 6 1 7 1 sample tables access to 1 6 creating 1 6 removing 1 6 unlocking xl 1 6 SAVE command 13 101 APPEND clause 13 101 CREATE clause 13 101 REPLACE clause 13 101 storing commands in scripts 13 101 using with INPUT to create scripts 6 3 save script button 2 17 saving environment attributes 13 152 saving command files 2 4 SCAN variable C 2 C 4 schemas command 14 15 database 9 2 database default 13 49 DESCRIBE parameter 13 59 disabled commands 14 20 HR sample xl 1 5
142. 2 De Haan AD_VP 17 000 145 Russell SA_MAN 14 000 146 Partners SA_MAN 13 500 201 Hartstein MK_MAN 13 000 6 rows selected The COLUMN command formatted the column SALARY with a dollar sign and a comma and gave it a new heading 5 10 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Running SQL Plus Commands Understanding SQL Plus Command Syntax SQL Plus commands have a different syntax from SQL commands or PL SQL blocks You do not need to end a SQL Plus command with a semicolon When you finish entering the command you can just press Return or click Execute There is no need to end a SOL Plus command with a semicolon Continuing a Long SQL Plus Command on Additional Lines You can continue a long SQL Plus command by typing a hyphen at the end of the line and pressing Return If you wish you can type a space before typing the hyphen SQL Plus displays a right angle bracket gt as a prompt for each additional line not in iSQL Plus For example COLUMN SALARY FORMAT 99 999 HEADING MONTHLY SALARY Since SQL Plus identifies the hyphen as a continuation character entering a hyphen within a SQL statement is ignored by SQL Plus SQL Plus does not identify the statement as a SQL statement until after the input processing has joined the lines together and removed the hyphen For example entering the following SELECT 200 100 FROM DUAL returns the error SELECT 200 100 FROM DUAL ERROR at line 1
143. 25 Setting Page Dimensions To set the page size to 66 lines clear the screen or advance the printer to a new sheet of paper at the start of each page and set the line size to 70 enter the following commands SET PAGESIZE 66 SET NEWPAGE 0 SET LINESIZE 70 Now enter and run the following commands to see the results TTITLE CENTER ACME WIDGET PERSONNEL REPORT SKIP 1 CENTER 01 JAN 2001 SKIP 2 Now run the following query COLUMN FIRST_NAME HEADING FIRST NAME COLUMN LAST_NAME HEADING LAST NAME COLUMN SALARY HEADING MONTHLY SALARY FORMAT 99 999 SELECT DEPARTMENT_ID FIRST_NAME LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 ACME WIDGET PERSONNEL REPORT 01 JAN 2001 FIRST LAST MONTHLY DEPARTMENT_ID NAME NAME SALARY 90 Steven King 24 000 90 Neena Kochhar 17 000 90 Lex De Haan 17 000 80 John Russell 14 000 80 Karen Partners 13 500 20 Michael Hartstein 13 000 6 rows selected 7 34 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Storing and Printing Query Results Now reset PAGESIZE NEWPAGE and LINESIZE to their default values SET PAGESIZE 14 SET NEWPAGE 1 SET LINESIZE 80 To list the current values of these variables use the SHOW command SHOW PAGESIZE SHOW NEWPAGE SHOW LINESIZE Through the SQL Plus command SPOOL you can store your query results in a file or print them on your computer s default printer Storing and Printing Query Results Send your
144. 3 29 SKIP clause 7 15 13 21 SKIP PAGE clause 7 14 7 15 13 21 specifying multiple break columns 7 15 13 19 suppressing duplicate values 7 13 used in conjunction with COMPUTE 7 17 used in conjunction with SET COLSEP 13 112 used to format a REFCURSOR variable 13 163 used with COMPUTE 13 19 13 21 13 44 break definition listing current 7 16 13 22 removing current 7 16 13 29 BREAKS clause 7 16 13 29 browser web 8 2 BTITLE clause 13 136 BTITLE command 7 24 13 24 aligning title elements 13 156 BOLD clause 13 157 CENTER clause 13 156 COL clause 13 156 FORMAT clause 13 157 indenting titles 13 156 LEFT clause 13 156 OFF clause 13 156 old form C 2 printing blank lines before bottom title 7 27 referencing column value variable 13 38 RIGHT clause 13 156 SKIP clause 13 156 suppressing current definition 13 156 TAB clause 13 156 TTITLE command 13 24 Index 3 buffer 5 3 appending text toalinein 6 7 13 13 clearing your screen 2 6 delete a single line 6 4 delete the current line 6 4 delete the last line 6 4 deleting a range of lines 6 4 13 57 deleting a single line 13 57 deleting alllines 6 3 13 29 13 57 deleting lines from 6 9 13 57 deleting the current line 13 57 deleting the last line 13 57 executing contents 13 10 13 100 inserting new line in 6 8 13 77 listing a range of lines 6 4 13 79 listing a single line 6 4 13 79 listing all lines 6 4 13 79 listing contents 6 4 13
145. 4 16 logging 3 15 Login screen 2 12 4 13 online help 4 16 port conflict 3 12 Preferences screen 2 20 retained session settings 3 25 security 10 10 session timeout 3 15 setting up SSL 3 21 starting 4 11 4 14 starting froma URL 4 14 stopping 4 13 substitution variables 6 24 three tier model 1 2 user access 10 11 user interface 1 2 1 3 Workspace 2 16 Index 11 iSQL Plus DBA URL 3 17 iSQLPlusAllowUserMarkup configuration parameter 3 4 3 24 iSOLPlusConnectIdList configuration parameter 3 4 3 16 isqlplusctl starting Application Server 4 11 J JAAS 3 17 Japanese Java Authentication and Authorization Service JAAS 3 17 Java AuthoriZatioN JAZN 3 17 javascript configuring for iSQL Plus 3 25 JAZN 3 17 10 11 Server authentication 10 11 JUSTIFY clause 13 36 L LABEL variable SHOW command C 2 C 5 labels in COMPUTE command 7 18 13 43 language support iniSQL Plus 4 16 LD_LIBRARY_PATH environment variables 3 1 LEFT clause 7 27 13 98 13 156 LIKE clause 7 9 13 18 13 36 limits SQL Plus A 1 line numbers for SQL commands 5 5 lines adding at beginning of buffer 13 77 adding at end of buffer 13 77 adding new after current 6 8 13 77 appending text to 6 7 13 13 changing width 7 34 9 13 13 105 13 120 deleting allin buffer 13 57 deleting from buffer 6 9 13 57 determining which is current 6 5 editing current 6 5 listing allin buffer 6 4 13 79 removing
146. 4 9 Changing the Windows GUI Font and Font Size There are two registry entries that set the font and font size used in the SQL Plus Windows GUI SOLPLUS_FONT sets the font face and SOQLPLUS_FONT_SIZE sets the font size in pixels You use the Windows Registry Editor to create these two registry entries and define values for them Ensure that you create the correct entries in uppercase and that the values font names sizes you enter are correct Warning Microsoft does not recommend modifying the registry Editing the registry may affect your operating system and software installation Only advanced users should edit the registry Oracle takes no responsibility for problems arising from editing the Windows registry You can choose any fixed pitch TrueType font available in your Windows system such as Courier New or Lucida Console If you choose a proportional pitch font such as Arial or Times New Roman or if you enter an unavailable font the registry entry is ignored and the default font and size Fixedsys 16 are used If you choose an unavailable font size the default font size 16 is used If you do not create the SQLPLUS_FONT registry entry or if you do not specify a value for SQLPLUS_FONT the default font and size Fixedsys 16 are used 2 8 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Windows Graphical User Interface If you want to use particular characters such as the Euro sign you should make sure that the fi
147. 4SALES START YRENDSLS Note The command may be useful in this example See the double at sign command in Chapter 13 SQL Plus Command Reference for more information Exiting from a Script with a Return Code You can include an EXIT command in a script to return a value when the script finishes See the EXIT command on page 13 70 for more information You can include a WHENEVER SQLERROR command in a script to automatically exit SQL Plus with a return code should your script generate a SQL error Similarly you can include a WHENEVER OSERROR command to automatically exit should an operating system error occur In iSQL Plus the script is stopped and focus is returned to the Workspace See the WHENEVER SQLERROR command on page 13 170 and the WHENEVER OSERROR command on page 13 168 for more information Using Scripts in SQL Plus 6 15 Defining Substitution Variables Defining Substitution Variables You can define variables called substitution variables for repeated use in a single script by using the SQL Plus DEFINE command Note that you can also define substitution variables to use in titles and to save your keystrokes by defining a long string as the value for a variable with a short name Example 6 8 Defining a Substitution Variable To define a substitution variable L_NAME and give it the value SMITH enter the following command DEFINE L_NAME SMITH To confirm the variable definition enter DE
148. 68 Production on Mon Oct 3 17 37 16 2663 Copyright c 1982 2063 Oracle Corporation All rights reserved Connected to Oracle Database 16g Enterprise Edition Release 10 1 0 2 6 Production With the Partitioning and Data Mining options SQL gt When the Windows GUI starts it displays the same information as the command line user interface and has the same default prompt SQL gt Using the Mouse to Copy Text to the Command Prompt You can use the mouse to copy text from anywhere in the Windows GUI to the SQL Plus prompt Left click and drag to select the text you want to copy While still holding down the left button right click to copy the selected text to the SQL Plus prompt You can also use Ctrl C and Ctrl V to cut and copy text SQL Plus User Interface 2 3 Windows Graphical User Interface Using Command Keys The following command keys have special functions in the Windows GUI Using the Windows GUI Menus Key Function Home Top of screen buffer End Bottom of screen buffer Page Up Previous screen page Page Down Next screen page Ctrl Page Up Show page on left of current screen page Ctrl Page Down Show page on right of current screen page Alt F3 Find F3 Find next Ctrl C Cancels the data fetch operation following command execution Ctrl C Copies text when no operations are running Ctrl V Paste text Shift Del Clear the screen and the screen buffer There are menus in the SQL Plus Windows
149. 79 listing the current line 6 4 13 79 listing the last line 6 4 13 79 loading into system editor 13 67 saving contents 13 101 screen area 2 7 SQL 2 5 BUFFER clause 6 3 13 29 BUFFER variable C 3 buttons cancel 2 20 4 3 6 26 clear screen 2 17 execute 2 17 load script 2 17 login 2 13 2 15 save script 2 17 C cancel button 2 20 4 3 6 26 CANCEL clause 13 87 13 91 cancel query 5 12 cancelling an in progress operation 2 5 CENTER clause 7 27 13 98 13 156 CHANGE command 6 3 6 5 13 26 Change Password screen 4 2 CHAR clause VARIABLE command 13 160 Index 4 CHAR columns changing format 13 33 default format 7 6 definition from DESCRIBE 13 59 Character Map Windows utility choosing a font 2 2 2 10 CLEAR clause 7 9 13 32 in ATTRIBUTE command 13 17 CLEAR command 13 29 BREAKS clause 7 16 13 29 BUFFER clause 6 3 13 29 COLUMNS clause 13 29 COMPUTES clause 13 29 SCREEN clause 6 31 13 30 SQL clause 13 30 TIMING clause 13 30 clear screen button 2 17 clearing your screen 2 6 client tier 1 2 CLOB clause VARIABLE command 13 161 CLOB columns changing format 13 33 default format 13 33 setting maximum width 13 105 13 121 setting retrieval position 13 105 13 120 setting retrieval size 9 13 13 105 13 121 CLOSECURSOR variable C 2 C 4 CMDSEP variable 13 104 13 111 COL clause 7 28 13 98 13 156 colons bind variables 6 32 COLSEP variable 13 104 13 112 COLUMN c
150. ACE Role Run the following commands from your SQL Plus session to grant the PLUSTRACE role to the HR user CONNECT AS SYSDBA GRANT PLUSTRACE TO HR Grant succeeded Tuning SQL Plus 9 3 Tracing Statements Execution Plan Statistics The Execution Plan shows the SQL optimizer s query execution path Each line of the Execution Plan has a sequential line number SQL Plus also displays the line number of the parent operation The Execution Plan consists of four columns displayed in the following order Column Name Description ID_PLUS_EXP Shows the line number of each execution step PARENT_ID_PLUS_EXP Shows the relationship between each step and its parent This column is useful for large reports PLAN_PLUS_EXP Shows each step of the report OBJECT_NODE_PLUS_EXP Shows database links or parallel query servers used The format of the columns may be altered with the COLUMN command For example to stop the PARENT_ID_PLUS_EXP column being displayed enter COLUMN PARENT_ID_PLUS_EXP NOPRINT The default formats can be found in the site profile for example glogin sq The Execution Plan output is generated using the EXPLAIN PLAN command For information about interpreting the output of EXPLAIN PLAN see the Oracle Database Performance Tuning Guide The statistics are recorded by the server when your statement executes and indicate the system resources required to execute your st
151. AUTOCOMMIT command SET AUTOCOMMIT does not alter the commit behavior when SQL Plus exits Any uncommitted data is committed by default Note For this feature a PL SQL block is considered one transaction regardless of the actual number of SQL commands contained within it SET AUTOP RINT ON OFF Sets the automatic printing of bind variables ON or OFF controls whether SQL Plus automatically displays bind variables referenced in a successful PL SQL block or used in an EXECUTE command See PRINT on page 13 83 for more information about displaying bind variables SQL Plus Command Reference 13 109 SET AUTORECOVERY ON OFF SET AUTORECOVERY ON OFF Example ON sets the RECOVER command to automatically apply the default filenames of archived redo log files needed during recovery No interaction is needed provided the necessary files are in the expected locations with the expected names The filenames used are derived from the values of the initialization parameters LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST and LOG_ARCHIVE_FORMAT OFF the default option requires that you enter the filenames manually or accept the suggested default filename given See RECOVER on page 13 85 for more information about database recovery To set the recovery mode to AUTOMATIC enter SET AUTORECOVERY ON RECOVER DATABASE SET AUTOT RACE ON OFF TRACE ONLY EXP LAIN STAT ISTICS Displays a report on the execution of successful SQL D
152. Apply Usemame jbloggs Old Password m New Password ferret Retype New Password rrrrrrrrrr Cancel Apply Help gt Copyright 2002 Oracle Corporation All rights reserved Connecting to a Database You must connect to an Oracle Database instance before you can query or modify data in that database You can connect to the default database and to other databases accessible through your network To connect to another database over a network both databases must have Oracle Net configured and have compatible network drivers You must enter either a connection identifier or a net service name to connect to a database other than the default The connection identifier or net service name is entered 4 4 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Connecting to a Database asan argument to the SQLPLUS Program Syntax when starting a command line session a inthe Connection Identifier field in the iSQL Plus Login Screen when starting iSQL Plus a inthe Host String field in the Log On dialog when Starting the Windows Graphical User Interface asan argument to the CONNECT command from a current session Net Service Name Your DBA is responsible for creating the databases you use and defining net service names for them in the tnsnames ora file In iSQL Plus your DBA can also restrict the databases available to those shown in a dropdown list of net service names A net service name definition in the tnsnam
153. B n Skips forward n columns backward if you enter a negative value for n Column in this context means print position not table column LE FT CE NTER R IGHT Left align center and right align data on the current line respectively SQL Plus aligns following data items as a group up to the end of the printspec or the next LEFT CENTER RIGHT or COL command CENTER and RIGHT use the SET LINESIZE value to calculate the position of the data item that follows BOLD Prints data in bold print SQL Plus represents bold print on your terminal by repeating the data on three consecutive lines On some operating systems SQOL Plus may instruct your printer to print bold text on three consecutive lines instead of bold FORMAT text Specifies a format model that determines the format of data items up to the next FORMAT clause or the end of the command The format model must be a text constant such as A10 or 999 See COLUMN on page 13 31 for more information on formatting and valid format models If the datatype of the format model does not match the datatype of a given data item the FORMAT clause has no effect on that item If no appropriate FORMAT model precedes a given data item SQL Plus prints NUMBER values according to the format specified by SET NUMFORMAT or if you have not used SET NUMFORMAT the default format SQL Plus prints DATE values using the default format 13 98 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference REPHEADER U
154. BINARY_FLOAT clause 13 161 CHAR clause 13 160 CLOB clause 13 161 NCHAR clause 13 160 NCLOB clause 13 161 NUMBER clause 13 160 REFCURSOR clause 13 161 VARCHAR clause 13 161 variable clause 13 160 variables bind variables 6 32 substitution variables 13 51 system variables 5 12 VERIFY clause 6 18 VERIFY variable 6 23 13 107 13 135 W WARNING clause 13 70 web browser 1 2 8 2 web outputting reports 8 1 WHENEVER OSERROR command 13 168 COMMIT clause 13 168 CONTINUE clause 13 168 EXIT clause 13 168 NONE clause 13 168 ROLLBACK clause 13 168 WHENEVER SQLERROR command 13 170 COMMIT clause 13 170 CONTINUE clause 13 170 EXIT clause 13 170 NONE clause 13 170 ROLLBACK clause 13 170 Windows notepad 13 54 Windows GUI application window 2 3 4 10 cancelling 2 5 Index 24 changing face and size 2 8 2 9 changing font 2 8 command keys 2 4 configuring 3 26 exiting 2 5 File menu 2 4 Log On dialog 4 9 menus 2 4 starting SQL Plus 4 9 Windows service starting iSQL Plus Application Server 4 11 WORD_WRAPPED clause 7 7 7 10 13 38 Workspace 2 16 WRAP variable 7 7 13 107 13 135 WRAPPED clause 7 7 13 38 X XMLType column definition from DESCRIBE 13 59 column formatting 7 8 column width 7 6 creating 7 8 formatting in reports 7 6 inserting values 7 8 selecting data 7 8 setting column retrieval size 9 13 13 121 setting maximum column width 13 121
155. COPY command B 5 B 7 B 9 session identification 4 13 settings 3 25 stateful behavior 3 25 session timeout parameter 3 15 SET AUTOTRACE 9 2 SET clause 13 152 SET command 3 8 5 12 13 103 APPINFO variable 9 12 13 107 ARRAYSIZE variable 9 12 13 104 13 109 B 8 AUTOCOMMIT variable 13 104 13 109 AUTOPRINT variable 13 104 13 109 13 162 AUTORECOVERY variable 13 104 13 110 AUTOTRACE variable 13 104 13 110 BLOCKTERMINATOR variable 13 104 13 111 BUFFER variable C 3 CLOSECURSOR variable C 2 C 4 CMDSEP variable 13 104 13 111 COLSEP variable 7 36 13 104 13 112 COMPATIBILITY variable 13 104 13 113 CONCAT variable 6 23 13 104 13 114 COPYCOMMIT variable 13 104 13 114 B 8 COPYTYPECHECK variable 13 104 13 114 DEFINE clause 6 23 DEFINE variable 13 104 DESCRIBE variable 13 104 13 115 DOCUMENT variable C 2 C 4 ECHO variable 13 105 13 116 EDITFILE variable 13 105 13 116 EMBEDDED variable 13 105 13 116 ESCAPE variable 6 23 13 105 13 117 FEEDBACK variable 13 105 13 117 FLAGGER variable 13 105 13 118 FLUSH variable 9 12 13 105 13 118 HEADING variable 13 118 HEADSEP variable 7 2 13 105 13 119 INSTANCE variable 13 105 13 119 LINESIZE variable 7 26 7 34 13 105 13 120 LOBOFFSET variable 13 105 13 120 LOGSOURCE variable 13 105 13 121 LONG variable 13 105 13 121 B 8 LONGCHUNKSIZE variable 13 105 13 121 MARKUP clause 13 122 SET command continued MAXDATA variable C 2
156. DULE MOD ACT PL SQL procedure successfully completed PRINT MOD This is SQL Plus To change APPINFO back to its default setting enter SET APPINFO OFF 13 108 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET ARRAY SIZE 15 n Sets the number of rows that SOL Plus will fetch from the database at one time Valid values are 1 to 5000 A large value increases the efficiency of queries and subqueries that fetch many rows but requires more memory Values over approximately 100 provide little added performance ARRAYSIZE has no effect on the results of SQL Plus operations other than increasing efficiency SET AUTO COMMIT ON OFF IMM EDIATE n Controls when Oracle Database commits pending changes to the database after SQL or PL SQL commands ON commits pending changes to the database after Oracle Database executes each successful INSERT UPDATE or DELETE or PL SQL block OFF suppresses automatic committing so that you must commit changes manually for example with the SQL command COMMIT IMMEDIATE functions in the same manner as ON n commits pending changes to the database after Oracle Database executes n successful SOL INSERT UPDATE or DELETE commands or PL SQL blocks n cannot be less than zero or greater than 2 000 000 000 The statement counter is reset to zero after successful completion of n INSERT UPDATE or DELETE commands or PL SQL blocks a commit a rollback or a SET
157. E 1994 06 07 See the Oracle Database SQL Reference for information on the ALTER SESSION command SQL Plus Command Reference 13 41 COMPUTE COMPUTE Syntax Terms COMP UTE function LABEL tex OF expr column alias ON expr column alias REPORT ROW In combination with the BREAK command calculates and prints summary lines using various standard computations on subsets of selected rows It also lists all COMPUTE definitions For details on how to create summaries see Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines on page 7 12 function Represents one of the functions listed in Table 13 2 COMPUTE Functions If you specify more than one function use spaces to separate the functions COMPUTE command functions are always executed in the sequence AVG COUNT MINIMUM MAXIMUM NUMBER SUM STD VARIANCE regardless of their order in the COMPUTE command Table 13 2 COMPUTE Functions Function Computes Applies to Datatypes AVG Average of non null values NUMBER COU NT Count of non null values all types MIN IMUM Minimum value NUMBER CHAR NCHAR VARCHAR2 VARCHAR NVARCHAR2 NCHAR VARYING MAX IMUM Maximum value NUMBER CHAR NCHAR VARCHAR2 VARCHAR NVARCHAR2 NCHAR VARYING NUM BER Count of rows all types SUM Sum of non null values NUMBER STD Standard deviation of non null values NUMBER VAR IANCE Variance of non null values NUMBER
158. E PACKAGE apack AS PROCEDURE aproc P1 CHAR P2 NUMBER PROCEDURE bproc P1 CHAR P2 NUMBER END apack Package created DESCRIBE apack PROCEDURE APROC Argument Name Type In Out Default P1 CHAR IN P2 NUMBER IN PROCEDURE BPROC Argument Name Type In Out Default P1 CHAR IN P2 NUMBER IN SQL Plus Command Reference 13 61 DESCRIBE To create and describe the object type ADDRESS that contains the attributes STREET and CITY enter CREATE TYPE ADDRESS AS OBJECT STREET VARCHAR2 20 CITY VARCHAR2 20 Jas Type created DESCRIBE address STREET VARCHAR2 20 CITY VARCHAR2 20 To create and describe the object type EMPLOYFE that contains the attributes LAST_NAME EMPADDR JOB_ID and SALARY enter CREATE TYPE EMPLOYEE AS OBJECT LAST_NAME VARCHAR2 30 EMPADDR ADDRESS JOB_ID VARCHAR2 20 SALARY NUMBER 7 2 i Type created DESCRIBE employee LAST_NAME VARCHAR2 30 EMPADDR ADDRESS JOB_ID VARCHAR2 20 SALARY NUMBER 7 2 13 62 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference DESCRIBE To create and describe the object type addr_type as a table of the object type ADDRESS enter CREATE TYPE addr_type IS TABLE OF ADDRESS Type created DESCRIBE addr_type addr_type TABLE OF ADDRESS Name Null Type STREET VARCHAR2 20 CITY VARCHAR2 20 To create and describe the object type addr_varray as a varray of the object type ADDRESS ente
159. E ST_MAN 7000 or if it is located on a web server enter a command in the form START HTTP machine_name domain port PROMOTE SQL ST_MAN 7000 Where machine_name domain must be replaced by the host domain name and port by the port number used by the web server where the script is located The following command is executed SELECT LAST_NAME LAST_NAME FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE JOB_ID ST_MAN AND SALARY gt 7000 and the results displayed SQL Plus Command Reference 13 147 STARTUP STARTUP Syntax Terms STARTUP options upgrade_options where options has the following syntax FORCE RESTRICT PFILE filename QUIET MOUNT dbname OPEN open_options dbname NOMOUNT where open_options has the following syntax READ ONLY WRITE RECOVER RECOVER and where upgrade_options has the following syntax PFILE filename UPGRADE DOWNGRADE QUIET Starts an Oracle Database instance with several options including mounting and opening a database FORCE Shuts down the current Oracle Database instance if it is running with SHUTDOWN mode ABORT before restarting it If the current instance is running and FORCE is not specified an error results FORCE is useful while debugging and under abnormal circumstances It should not normally be used RESTRICT Only enables Oracle Database users with the RESTRICTED SESSION system privilege to connect to the database Later you can use the ALTER SYSTEM
160. ECUTE command EXECUTE runs the PL SQL statement that you enter immediately after the command For example EXECUTE EMPLOYEE_MANAGEMENT NEW_EMP BLAKE See EXECUTE on page 13 69 for more information SQL Plus Basics 5 9 Running SQL Plus Commands Running SQL Plus Commands You can use SQL Plus commands to manipulate SQL commands and PL SQL blocks and to format and print query results SOL Plus treats SQL Plus commands differently than SQL commands or PL SQL blocks To speed up command entry you can abbreviate many SQL Plus commands For information on and abbreviations of all SQL Plus commands see Chapter 13 SOL Plus Command Reference Example 5 4 Entering a SQL Plus Command not in iSQL Plus This example shows how you might enter a SQL Plus command to change the format used to display the column SALARY of the sample view EMP_DETAILS_ VIEW 1 Enter this SQL Plus command COLUMN SALARY FORMAT 99 999 HEADING MONTHLY SALARY If you make a mistake use Backspace to erase it and re enter When you have entered the line press Return SQL Plus notes the new format and displays the SQL Plus command prompt again ready for anew command 2 Enter the following query and press Return or click Execute in iSQL Plus to run it SELECT EMPLOYEE_ID LAST_NAME JOB_ID SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 EMPLOYEE_ID LAST_NAME JOB_ID MONTHLY SALARY 100 King AD_PRES 24 000 101 Kochhar AD_VP 17 000 10
161. EP text Sets the column separator character printed between columns in output If the COLSEP variable contains blanks or punctuation characters you must enclose it with single quotes The default value for text is a single space In multi line rows the column separator does not print between columns that begin on different lines The column separator does not appear on blank lines produced by BREAK SKIP n and does not overwrite the record separator See SET RECSEP WR APPED EA CH OFF on page 13 125 for more information The Column Separator SET COLSEP is only used in iSQL Plus when Preformatted Output is ON SET MARKUP HTML PREFORMAT 13 112 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary Example To set the column separator to enter SET MARKUP HTML PREFORMAT ON SET COLSEP SELECT LAST_NAME JOB_ID DEPARTMENT_ID FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE DEPARTMENT_ID 20 LAST_NAME JOB_ID DEPARTMENT_ID SE E EEA NEE ss tisini eain Hartstein MK_MAN 20 Fay MK_REP 20 SET COM PATIBILITY V7 V8 NATIVE Example Specifies the version of Oracle Database SQL syntax to use Set COMPATIBILITY to V7 for Oracle7 or to V8 for Oracle8 or later COMPATIBILITY always defaults to NATIVE Set COMPATIBILITY for the version of Oracle Database SQL syntax you want to use on the connected database otherwise you may be unable to run any SQL commands To run a script SALAR
162. ES that takes a parameter specifying the job to be displayed enter GET SALES 6 26 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Passing Parameters through the START Command COLUMN LAST_NAME HEADING LAST NAME COLUMN SALARY HEADING MONTHLY SALARY FORMAT 99 999 COLUMN COMMISSION_PCT HEADING COMMISSION FORMAT 90 90 SELECT LAST_NAME SALARY COMMISSION_PCT FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN CHANGE SA_MAN amp 1 6 WHERE JOB_ID amp 1 SAVE ONEJOB Created file ONEJOB Now run the command with the parameter SA_MAN START ONEJOB SA_MAN SQL Plus lists the line of the SQL command that contains the parameter before and after replacing the parameter with its value and then displays the output old 3 WHERE JOB_ID amp 1 new 3 WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN LAST NAME MONTHLY SALARY COMMISSION Russell 14 000 0 40 Partners 13 500 0 30 Errazuriz 12 000 0 30 Cambrault 11 000 0 30 Zlotkey 10 500 0 20 You can use many parameters in a script Within a script you can refer to each parameter many times and you can include the parameters in any order Using Scripts in SQL Plus 6 27 Communicating with the User While you cannot use parameters when you run a command with RUN or slash you could use substitution variables instead Before continuing return the columns to their original heading by entering the following command
163. EXPAND USE_NL A3 INDEX A3 D2_I_UNIQUE1 A2 C0 C0 A3 ROWID C1 A3 UNIQUE1 C2 FROM SELECT N O_EXPAND ROWID A4 A4 UNIQUE1 CO FROM D2_T2 PX_GRANULE 0 BLOCK_RANGE DYNAMIC A4 A2 D2_T1 A3 WHERE A2 C0 A3 UNIQUE1 A1 3 PARALLEL_COMBINED_WITH_PARENT 4 PARALLEL_COMBINED_WITH_PARENT 5 PARALLEL_COMBINED_WITH_PARENT Line 0 of the Execution Plan shows the cost based optimizer estimates the number of rows at 1 taking 26 bytes The total cost of the statement is 1 Lines 2 3 4 and 5 are marked with asterisks denoting parallel operations For example the NESTED LOOPS step line 3 is a PARALLEL_TO_SERIAL operation PARALLEL_TO_SERIAL operations execute a SQL statement to produce output serially Line 2 also shows that the parallel query server had the identifier Q2000 Numbers identifying parallel report lines cross reference the line of the parent report For example in the last line of the above example 5 PARALLEL_COMBINED_WITH_PARENT The 5 refers to the 5 3 TABLE ACCESS line in the parent report 9 10 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Script Tuning Example 9 8 To monitor disk reads and buffer gets SET AUTOTRACE TRACEONLY STATISTICS The following shows typical results Statistics 70 recursive calls 0 db block gets 591 consistent gets 404 physical reads 0 redo size 315 bytes sent through SQL Net to client 850 bytes received through SQL Net from client 3 SQL Net r
164. FF INDENT ON OFF pagele is 13 104 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference during recovery Displays a report on the execution of successful SQL DML statements SELECT INSERT UPDATE or DELETE Sets the non alphanumeric character used to end PL SQL blocks to c Sets the non alphanumeric character used to separate multiple SQL Plus commands entered on one line to c In iSQL Plus SET COLSEP determines the column separator character to be printed between column output that is rendered inside lt PRE gt tags Sets the text to be printed between selected columns Specifies the version of Oracle Database to which you are currently connected Sets the character you can use to terminate a substitution variable reference if you wish to immediately follow the variable with a character that SQL Plus would otherwise interpret as a part of the substitution variable name Controls the number of batches after which the COPY command commits changes to the database Sets the suppression of the comparison of datatypes while inserting or appending to tables with the COPY command Sets the character used to prefix variables to c Sets the depth of the level to which you can recursively describe an object SET System Variable Summary System Variable Page Description SET ECHO ON OFF on Controls whether the START command lists each page 13 116 command ina script as the command is executed SET EDITFILE file_namel
165. FFSET may be used to control the size of the buffer while PRINTing CLOB or NCLOB bind variables SQL Plus REFCURSOR bind variables may be used to reference PL SQL 2 3 or higher Cursor Variables allowing PL SQL output to be formatted by SQL Plus For more information on PL SQL Cursor Variables see your PL SQL User s Guide and Reference When you execute a VARIABLE REFCURSOR command SQL Plus creates a cursor bind variable The cursor is automatically opened by an OPEN FOR SELECT statement referencing the bind variable in a PL SQL block SQL Plus closes the cursor after completing a PRINT statement for that bind variable or on exit 13 162 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference VARIABLE Examples SQL Plus formatting commands such as BREAK COLUMN COMPUTE and SET may be used to format the output from PRINTing a REFCURSOR A REFCURSOR bind variable may not be PRINTed more than once without re executing the PL SQL OPEN FOR statement The following example illustrates creating a bind variable changing its value and displaying its current value To create a bind variable enter VARIABLE ret_val NUMBER To change this bind variable in SQL Plus you must use a PL SQL block BEGIN ret_val 4 END PL SQL procedure successfully completed To display the value of the bind variable in SQL Plus enter PRINT ret_val RET_VAL The following example illustrates creating a bind variable and then se
166. FINE followed by the variable name DEFINE L_NAME DEFINE L_NAME SMITH CHAR To list all substitution variable definitions enter DEFINE by itself Note that any substitution variable you define explicitly through DEFINE takes only CHAR values that is the value you assign to the variable is always treated as a CHAR datatype You can define a substitution variable of datatype NUMBER implicitly through the ACCEPT command You will learn more about the ACCEPT command later in this chapter To delete a substitution variable use the SOL Plus command UNDEFINE followed by the variable name Using Predefined Variables 6 16 There are eight variables containing SQL Plus information that are defined during SQL Plus installation These variables can be redefined referenced or removed the same as any other variable They are always available from session to session unless you explicitly remove or redefine them See Also Predefined Variables on page 13 53 for a list of the predefined variables and examples of their use SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Using Substitution Variables Using Substitution Variables Suppose you want to write a query like the one in SALES see Example 6 1 Using a System Editor to Write a SQL Script to list the employees with various jobs not just those whose job is SA_LMAN You could do that by editing a different value into the WHERE clause each time you run the command but there is
167. GUI menu bar In the Option column entries in parentheses show keyboard shortcuts The Command line column shows equivalent command line commands File Menu The File menu has the following options Command line GET filename Option Description of File Menu Option Open The Open option retrieves a previously stored script If you supply no file extension SQL Plus looks for scripts with the SQL extension The script should contain a single SQL or PL SQL statement such as SELECT It should not contain multiple statements and it should not contain SQL Plus commands such as SET Save The Save option has three alternatives Save Create Save Replace and Save SAVE Append 2 4 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Windows Graphical User Interface Option Description of File Menu Option Command line Save Create saves the contents of the SQL Plus buffer in a script By SAVE filename default SOL Plus assigns the SQL extension to scripts You can specify a CREATE different extension in the File name text box Save Replace replaces the contents of an existing file with the contents SAVE filename of the SQL Plus buffer SQL Plus creates the file if it does not exist REPLACE Save Append adds the contents of the SQL Plus buffer to the end of the SAVE filename file you specify APPEND After you save a script you can a Retrieve the file using the Open option on the File menu a Edit the file using the Editor option on the E
168. HIS amp THAT new 2 AE THATS A REGION_NAME CITY Americas Seattle Americas Seattle Americas Seattle Europe Oxford Europe Oxford Americas Toronto 6 rows selected You can SET DEFINE OFF to prevent scanning for the substitution character For more information on substitution and termination characters see DEFINE SQLTERMINATOR and SQLBLANKLINES in the SET command on page 13 103 Running Scripts The START command retrieves a script and runs the commands it contains Use START to run a script containing SQL commands PL SQL blocks and SQL Plus commands You can have many commands in the file Follow the START command with the name of the file START file_name SQL Plus assumes the file has a SQL extension by default Using Scripts in SQL Plus 6 13 Running Scripts Example 6 7 Running a Script To retrieve and run the command stored in SALES SOL enter START SALES SQL Plus runs the commands in the file SALES and displays the results of the commands on your screen formatting the query results according to the SQL Plus commands in the file LAST NAME MONTHLY SALARY COMMISSION Russell 14 000 0 40 Partners 13 500 0 30 Errazuriz 12 000 0 30 Cambrault 11 000 0 30 Zlotkey 10 500 0 20 You can also use the at sign command to run a script SALES The and commands list and run the commands in the specified script in the same manner as START SET ECHO affects the and commands
169. However because these terms are not case sensitive you can enter them in lowercase Lowercase typeface indicates programmatic elements that you supply For example lowercase indicates names of tables columns or files Note Some programmatic elements use a mixture of UPPERCASE and lowercase Enter these elements as shown SQL gt SELECT NAME FROM VSDATAFILE NAME fs1 dbs tbs_01 dbf fs1 dbs tbs_02 dbf f sl1 dbs tbs_09 dbf 9 rows selected acctbal NUMBER 11 2 acct CONSTANT NUMBER 4 3 CONNECT SYSTEM system_password DB_NAME database_name SELECT last_name employee_id FROM employees SELECT FROM USER_TABLES DROP TABLE hr employees SELECT last_name employee_id FROM employees sqlplus hr your_password CREATE USER mjones IDENTIFIED BY ty3MU9 xxvii Conventions for Windows Operating Systems The following table describes conventions for Windows operating systems and provides examples of their use Convention Meaning Example Choose Start gt How to start a program To start the Database Configuration Assistant choose Start gt Programs gt Oracle HOME_NAME gt Configuration and Migration Tools gt Database Configuration Assistant File and directory File and directory names are not case c winnt system32 names sensitive The following special characters is the same as are not allowed left angle bracket lt C WINNT SYSTEM32 right angle bracket gt colon
170. IBUTE commands for the same attribute SQL Plus applies their clauses collectively If several ATTRIBUTE commands apply the same clause to the same attribute the last one entered will control the output To make the LAST_NAME attribute of the Object Type EMPLOYEE_TYPE 20 characters wide enter ATTRIBUTE EMPLOYEE_TYPE LAST_NAME FORMAT A20 To format the SALARY attribute of the Object Type EMPLOYEE_TYPE so that it shows millions of dollars rounds to cents uses commas to separate thousands and displays 0 00 when a value is zero enter ATTRIBUTE EMPLOYEE_TYPE SALARY FORMAT 9 999 990 99 13 18 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference BREAK BREAK Syntax Terms BRE AK ON report_element action action where report_element has the syntax column expr ROW REPORT and action has the syntax SKI P n SKI P PAGE NODUP LICATES DUP LICATES Specifies where changes occur in a report and the formatting action to perform such as suppressing display of duplicate values for a given column skipping a line each time a given column value changes In iSQL Plus only when Preformatted Output is ON printing computed figures each time a given column value changes or at the end of the report See the COMPUTE command on page 13 42 Enter BREAK with no clauses to list the current BREAK definition ON column action action When you include actions specifies actions for SQL Plus to take whenever a b
171. ID and place blank lines or begin a new page between departments You could use BREAK in conjunction with COMPUTE to calculate and print summary lines containing the total salary for each department and for all departments You could also print summary lines containing the average maximum minimum standard deviation variance or row count 7 12 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines Suppressing Duplicate Values in Break Columns The BREAK command suppresses duplicate values by default in the column or expression you name Thus to suppress the duplicate values in a column specified in an ORDER BY clause use the BREAK command in its simplest form BREAK ON break_column Note Whenever you specify a column or expression in a BREAK command use an ORDER BY clause specifying the same column or expression If you do not do this breaks occur every time the column value changes Example 7 10 Suppressing Duplicate Values in a Break Column To suppress the display of duplicate department numbers in the query results shown enter the following commands BREAK ON DEPARTMENT_ID For the following query which is the current query stored in the buffer SELECT DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 ORDER BY DEPARTMENT_ID DEPARTMENT_ID LAST _NAME SALARY 20 Hartstein 13000 80 Russell 14000 Partners 13500 90 King 24000
172. INT clause you entered above tells SQL Plus not to print the column MANAGER _ID Next include a label and the value in your page title enter the proper BREAK command and suppress the bottom title from the last example TTITLE LEFT Manager MGRVAR SKIP 2 BREAK ON MANAGER_ID SKIP PAGE BTITLE OFF Finally enter and run the following query SELECT MANAGER_ID DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE MANAGER_ID IN 101 201 ORDER BY MANAGER_ID DEPARTMENT_ID Formatting SQL Plus Reports 7 31 Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions Manager 101 DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY 10 Whalen 4400 40 Mavris 6500 70 Baer 10000 100 Greenberg 12000 110 Higgins 12000 Manager 201 DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY 20 Fay 6000 6 rows selected If you want to print the value of a column at the bottom of the page you can use the COLUMN command in the following form COLUMN column_name OLD_VALUE variable_name SQL Plus prints the bottom title as part of the process of breaking to a new page after finding the new value for the master column Therefore if you simply referenced the NEW_VALUE of the master column you would get the value for the next set of details OLD_VALUE remembers the value of the master column that was in effect before the page break began Displaying the Current Date in Titles You can of course date your reports by simply typing a value in the title This is satisfact
173. IT before exiting or continuing and save pending changes to the database ROLLBACK Directs SQL Plus to execute a ROLLBACK before exiting or continuing and abandon pending changes to the database NONE Directs SQL Plus to take no action before continuing 13 170 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference WHENEVER SQLERROR Usage Examples The WHENEVER SQLERROR command is triggered by SQL command or PL SQL block errors and not by SQL Plus command errors The commands in the following script cause iSQL Plus to stop processing the current script and return focus to the Input area on the Workspace The commands in the following script cause SQL Plus to exit and return the SQL error code if the SQL UPDATE command fails WHENEVER SQLERROR EXIT SQL SQLCODE UPDATE EMP_DETAILS_VIEW SET SALARY SALARY 1 1 The following SQL command error causes iSQL Plus to stop processing the current script and return focus to the Input area on the Workspace WHENEVER SQLERROR EXIT SQL SQLCODE select column_does_not_exiSt from dual select column_does_not_exist from dual ERROR at line 1 ORA 00904 invalid column name Disconnected from Oracle The following examples show that the WHENEVER SQLERROR command is not executed after errors with SQL Plus commands but it is executed if SOL commands or PL SQL blocks cause errors WHENEVER SQLERROR EXIT SQL SQLCODE column LAST_name headIing Employee Name Unknown COLUMN optio
174. ITLE commands Use NEW_VALUE to display column values or the date in the top title You must include the column in a BREAK command with the SKIP PAGE action The variable name cannot contain a pound sign NEW_VALUE is useful for master detail reports in which there is a new master record for each page For master detail reporting you must also include the column in the ORDER BY clause See the example at the end of this command description Variables specified with NEW_V ALUE are expanded before TTITLE is executed The resulting string is stored as the TTITLE text During subsequent execution for each page of the report the expanded value of a variable may itself be interpreted as a variable with unexpected results You can avoid this double substitution in a TTITLE command by not using the amp prefix for NEW_V ALUE variables that are to be substituted on each page of the report If you want to use a substitution variable to insert unchanging text in a TTITLE enclose it in quotes so that it is only substituted once For information on displaying a column value in the bottom title see OLD_V ALUE variable below For more information on referencing variables in titles see the TTITLE on page 13 155 command later in this chapter For information on formatting and valid format models see FOR MAT format above NOPRI NT PRI NT Controls the printing of the column the column heading and all the selected values NOPRINT turns off
175. KUP HEAD and BODY options If entities are not mapped web browsers may treat data as invalid HTML and all subsequent output may display incorrectly ENTMAP OFF enables users to write their own HTML tags to customize output Note ENTMAP only takes effect when the HTML option is set ON For more information about using entities in your output see the COLUMN command on page 13 31 SPOOL ONIOFF SPOOL ON or OFF specifies whether or not SQL Plus writes the HTML opening tags lt HTML gt and lt BODY gt and the closing tags lt BODY gt and lt HTML gt to the start and end of each file created by the SQL Plus SPOOL filename command The default is OFF You can turn SPOOL ON and OFF as required during a session Starting SQL Plus 4 21 SQLPLUS Program Syntax Note It is important to distinguish between the SET MARKUP HTML SPOOL option and the SQLPLUS SPOOL filename command The SET MARKUP HTML SPOOL ON option enables the writing of the lt HTML gt tag to the spool file The spool file is not created and the header and footer tags enabled by the SET MARKUP HTML SPOOL ON option are not written to the spool file until you issue the SQLPLUS SPOOL filename command See SPOOL command in Chapter 13 SQL Plus Command Reference for more information SQL Plus writes several HTML tags to the spool file when you issue the SPOOL filename command When you issue any of the SQL Plus commands EXIT SPOOL
176. L PNO the current page number See TTITLE on page 13 155 for a list of system maintained values you can display in titles Example 7 22 Displaying the Current Page Number in a Title To display the current page number at the top of each page along with the company name enter the following command TTITLE LEFT ACME WIDGET RIGHT PAGE SQL PNO SKIP 2 Now rerun the current query ACMEWIDGET PAGE 1 DEPARTMENT_ID LAST _NAME SALARY 30 Colmenares 2500 30 Himuro 2600 30 Tobias 2800 30 Baida 2900 30 Khoo 3100 30 Raphaely 11000 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL 6 rows selected Formatting SQL Plus Reports 7 29 Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions Note that SQL PNO has a format ten spaces wide You can change this format with the FORMAT clause of TTITLE or BTITLE Example 7 23 Formatting a System Maintained Value in a Title To close up the space between the word PAGE and the page number reenter the TTITLE command as shown TTITLE LEFT ACME WIDGET RIGHT PAGE FORMAT 999 SQL PNO SKIP 2 Now rerun the query ACME WIDGET PAGE T DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY 30 Colmenares 2500 30 Himuro 2600 30 Tobias 2800 30 Baida 2900 30 Khoo 3100 30 Raphaely 11000 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL 6 rows selected Listing Suppressing and Restoring Page Title Definitions To list a page title definition enter the appropriate title command with no clauses TTITLE BTITLE To
177. LANKLINES is set ON you must use the BLOCKTERMINATOR to terminate a SQL command ON resets the terminator to the default semicolon SET SUF FIX SQL texf Example SET SUFFIX is not supported in iSQL Plus Sets the default file extension that SQL Plus uses in commands that refer to scripts SUFFIX does not control extensions for spool files To change the default command file extension from the default SQL to TXT enter SET SUFFIX TXT SQL Plus Command Reference 13 133 SET TAB ON OFF If you then enter GET EXAMPLE SQL Plus will look for a file named EXAMPLE TXT instead of EXAMPLE SQL SET TAB ON OFF SET TAB is not supported in iSQL Plus Determines how SQL Plus formats white space in terminal output OFF uses spaces to format white space in the output ON uses the TAB character TAB settings are every eight characters The default value for TAB is system dependent SET TERM OUT ON OFF SET TERMOUT is not supported in iSQL Plus Controls the display of output generated by commands in a script that is executed with or START OFF suppresses the display so that you can spool output to a file without displaying the output on screen ON displays the output on screen TERMOUT OFF does not affect output from commands you enter interactively or redirect to SOL Plus from the operating system SET TI ME ON OFF SET TIME is not supported in iSQL Plus Controls the display of the current time
178. ML statements SELECT INSERT UPDATE or DELETE The report can include execution statistics and the query execution path OFF does not display a trace report ON displays a trace report TRACEONLY displays a trace report but does not print query data if any EXPLAIN shows the query execution path by performing an EXPLAIN PLAN STATISTICS displays SOL statement statistics Information about EXPLAIN PLAN is documented in the Oracle Database SQL Reference Using ON or TRACEONLY with no explicit options defaults to EXPLAIN STATISTICS The TRACEONLY option may be useful to suppress the query data of large queries If STATISTICS is specified SQL Plus still fetches the query data from the server however the data is not displayed The AUTOTRACE report is printed after the statement has successfully completed Information about Execution Plans and the statistics is documented in the Oracle Database Performance Tuning Guide 13 110 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary When SQL Plus produces a STATISTICS report a second connection to the database is automatically created This connection is closed when the STATISTICS option is set to OFF or you log out of SQL Plus The formatting of your AUTOTRACE report may vary depending on the version of the server to which you are connected and the configuration of the server AUTOTRACE is not available when FIPS flagging is enabled See Tracing Statements for mor
179. N OUT cv_types EmpInfoTyp AS BEGIN OPEN emp_cv FOR SELECT EMPLOYEE_ID SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS VIEW WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN END 6 34 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Using REFCURSOR Bind Variables Procedure created Execute the procedure with a SQL Plus bind variable as the parameter VARIABLE odcv REFCURSOR EXECUTE EmpInfo_rpt odcv PL SQL procedure successfully completed Now print the bind variable PRINT odcv EMPLOYEE_ID SALARY 145 14000 146 13500 147 12000 148 11000 149 10500 The procedure can be executed multiple times using the same or a different REFCURSOR bind variable VARIABLE pcv REFCURSOR EXECUTE EmpInfo_rpt pcv PL SQL procedure successfully completed PRINT pcv EMPLOYEE_ID SALARY 145 14000 146 13500 147 12000 148 11000 149 10500 Using Scripts in SQL Plus 6 35 Using REFCURSOR Bind Variables Example 6 16 Using REFCURSOR Variables in Stored Functions Create a stored function containing an OPEN FOR SELECT statement CREATE OR REPLACE FUNCTION EmpInfo_fn RETURN cv_types EmpInfo IS resultset cv_types EmpInfoTyp BEGIN OPEN resultset FOR SELECT EMPLOYEE_ID SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS VIEW WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN RETURN resultset END Function created Execute the function VARIABLE rc REFCURSOR EXECUTE rc EmpInfo_fn PL SQL procedure successfully completed Now print the bind variable PRI
180. N SALARY HEADING MONTHLY SALARY FORMAT 99 999 BREAK ON DEPARTMENT_ID SKIP 1 ON REPORT COMPUTE SUM OF SALARY ON DEPARTMENT_ID COMPUTE SUM OF SALARY ON REPORT SET PAGESIZE 24 SET NEWPAGE 0 SET LINESIZE 70 TTITLE CENTER A CME WIDGET SKIP 2 LEFT EMPLOYEE REPORT RIGHT PAGE FORMAT 999 SQL PNO SKIP 2 BTITLE CENTER COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL SELECT DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 ORDER BY DEPARTMENT_ID SPOOL OFF If you do not want to see the output on your screen you can also add SET TERMOUT OFF to the beginning of the file and SET TERMOUT ON to the end of the file Save and close the file in your text editor you will automatically return to SQL Plus Now run the script EMPRPT EMPRPT SQL Plus displays the output on your screen unless you set TERMOUT to OFF and spools it to the file TEMP Formatting SQL Plus Reports 7 37 Storing and Printing Query Results DEPARTMENT 20 KORO OK Kk sum 80 KEKKKKKKKK sum 90 KKKKKKKKKE sum sum EMPLOYEE REPORT LAST NAME Hartstein Russell Partners King Kochhar De Haan 6 rows selected ACME WIDGET MONTHLY SALARY 13 000 14 000 13 500 27 500 24 000 17 000 17 000 98 500 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL PAGE 1 7 38 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference 8 Generating HTML Reports from SQL Plus This chapter explains how to generat
181. NCLOB and XMLType values and for copying LONG values SET LONGCHUNKSIZE 80 n on Sets the size in bytes of the increments in which SQL Plus page 13 121 retrieves a LONG CLOB NCLOB or XMLType value SET MARKUP HTML ON OFF HEAD tex on Outputs HTML marked up text which is the output used iSOL BODY text TABLE texi ENTMAP ON OFF Page 13 122 by SQL Plus SPOOL ON OFF PREFORMAT ON OFF SET NEWPAGE 1 n NONE on Sets the number of blank lines to be printed from the top of page 13 123 each page to the top title SET NULL text on Sets the text that represents a null value in the result of a page 13 124 SQL SELECT command SQL Plus Command Reference 13 105 SET System Variable Summary System Variable Page Description SET NUMFORMAT format on Sets the default format for displaying numbers page 13 124 SET NUMWIDTH 10 n on Sets the default width for displaying numbers page 13 124 SET PAGESIZE 14 n on Sets the number of lines in each page page 13 124 SET PAUSE ON OFF tex on Enables you to control scrolling of your terminal when page 13 125 running reports SET RECSEP WRAPPED EACH OFF on RECSEP tells SQL Plus where to make the record page 13 125 separation SET RECSEPCHAR _ c on Display or print record separators page 13 125 SET SERVEROUTPUT ON OFF SIZE n on Controls whether to display the output that is page 13 126 DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_LINE of stored procedure
182. NG columns is the width of the column in the database SQL Plus formats these datatypes left justified If a value does not fit within the column width SQL Plus wraps or truncates the character string depending on the setting of SET WRAP A LONG CLOB NCLOB or XMLType column s width defaults to the value of SET LONGCHUNKSITZE or SET LONG whichever one is smaller To change the width of a datatype to n use FORMAT An A stands for alphabetic If you specify a width shorter than the column heading SQL Plus truncates the heading DATE Columns The default width and format of unformatted DATE columns in SQL Plus is derived from the NLS_DATE_FORMAT parameter The NLS_DATE_FORMAT setting is determined by the NLS territory parameter For example the default format for the NLS territory America is DD Mon RR and the default width is A9 The NLS parameters may be set in your database parameter file in environment variables or an equivalent platform specific mechanism They may also be specified for each session with the ALTER SESSION command For SQL Plus Command Reference 13 33 COLUMN more information about DATE formats and about NLS parameters see the Oracle Database SQL Reference You can change the format of any DATE column using the SQL function TO_CHAR in your SQL SELECT statement You may also wish to use an explicit COLUMN FORMAT command to adjust the column width When you use SQL functions like TO_CHAR Oracle Database au
183. NT rc EMPLOYEE_ID SALARY 145 14000 146 13500 147 12000 148 11000 149 10500 The function can be executed multiple times using the same or a different REFCURSOR bind variable EXECUTE rc EmpInfo_fn PL SQL procedure successfully completed 6 36 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Formatting SQL Plus Reports This chapter explains how to format your query results to produce a finished report This chapter does not discuss HTML output but covers the following topics a Formatting Columns a Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines a Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions a Storing and Printing Query Results Read this chapter while sitting at your computer and try out the examples shown Before beginning make sure you have access to the HR sample schema described in Chapter 1 SQL Plus Overview Formatting Columns Through the SQL Plus COLUMN command you can change the column headings and reformat the column data in your query results Changing Column Headings When displaying column headings you can either use the default heading or you can change it using the COLUMN command The following sections describe how default headings are derived and how to alter them using the COLUMN command See the COLUMN command on page 13 31 for more details Default Headings SQL Plus uses column or expression names as default column headings when displaying query results Column names are ofte
184. OFF or SPOOL filename SQL Plus appends the following end tags and closes the file lt BODY gt lt HTML gt You can specify lt HEAD gt tag contents and lt BODY gt attributes using the HEAD and BODY options PRE FORMAT ONIOFF PREFORMAT ON or OFF specifies whether or not SQL Plus writes output to the lt PRE gt tag or to an HTML table The default is OFF so output is written to a HTML table by default You can turn PREFORMAT ON and OFF as required during a session Notes To produce report output using the HTML lt PRE gt tag you must set PREFORMAT ON For example SQLPLUS M HTML ON PREFORMAT ON or SET MARKUP HTML ON PREFORMAT ON 4 22 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQLPLUS Program Syntax MARKUP Usage Notes When MARKUP HTML ON PREFORMAT OFF is used commands originally intended to format paper reports have different meaning for reports intended for web tables a PAGESIZE is the number of rows in an HTML table not the number of lines Each row may contain multiple lines The TTITLE BTITLE and column headings are repeated every PAGESIZE rows a LINESIZE may have an effect on data if wrapping is on or for very long data Depending on data size output may be generated on separate lines which a browser may interpret as a space character a TTITLE and BTITLE content is output to three line positions left center and right and the maximum line width is preset to 90 of the
185. OME o0c4j j2ee isqlplus application deployments isqlplus application log The iSQL Plus Help log file is written to SORACLE_ HOME 0c4j j2ee isqlplus application deployments isqlplushelp application log Setting the Session Time Out Timing out iSQL Plus sessions helps to reduce machine load and to maximize resources The time out interval is set by the session timeout element It defines the time a session can be idle before it is expired You can edit the web xml configuration file to change the timeout interval The web xml file is located in the directory SORACLE_HOME o0c4j j2ee o0c4j_applications applications isqlplus isqlplus WEB INF Configuring SQL Plus 3 15 iSQL Plus Application Server Configuration In the web xml file search for the lt session timeout gt element inside lt session config gt The syntax of the line to change in the configuration file is lt session config gt lt session timeout gt 15 lt session timeout gt lt session config gt Where the value is the number of whole minutes of idle time before the session times out It has a default value of 15 minutes It can be set to any value from 1 to 1440 minutes It should not be set so small that users do not get a chance to enter their scripts When a user tries to use a timed out iSQL Plus session the Login screen is displayed and the user is prompted to log in again The following error is displayed SP2 0864 Session has expired Please log in a
186. ONFIDENTIAL 6 rows selected The LEFT RIGHT and CENTER clauses place the following values at the beginning end and center of the line The SKIP clause tells SQL Plus to move down one or more lines Note that there is no longer any space between the last row of the results and the bottom title The last line of the bottom title prints on the last line of the page The amount of space between the last row of the report and the bottom title depends on the overall page size the number of lines occupied by the top title and the number of rows in a given page In the above example the top title occupies three more lines than the top title in the previous example You will learn to set the number of lines per page later in this chapter To always print n blank lines before the bottom title use the SKIP n clause at the beginning of the BTITLE command For example to skip one line before the bottom title in the example above you could enter the following command BTITLE SKIP 1 CENTER COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL Formatting SQL Plus Reports 7 27 Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions Indenting a Title Element You can use the COL clause in TTITLE or BTITLE to indent the title element a specific number of spaces For example COL 1 places the following values in the first character position and so is equivalent to LEFT or an indent of zero COL 15 places the title element in the 15th character position indenting it 14 sp
187. OOL employee htm SELECT FIRST_NAME LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 SPOOL OFF SET MARKUP HTML OFF SET ECHO ON As this script contains SOL Plus commands do not attempt to run it with slash from the buffer because it will fail Save the script in your text editor and use START to execute it START employee sql As well as writing the HTML spool file employee htm the output is also displayed on screen because SET TERMOUT defaults to ON You can view the spool file employee htm in your web browser It should appear something like the following 6 rows selected SET NEWP AGE 1 n NONE FIRST_NAME LAST_NAME SALARY Steven King 24000 Neena Kochhar 17000 Lex De Haan 17000 Michael Hartstein 13000 Hohn Russell 14000 Karen Partners 13500 Sets the number of blank lines to be printed from the top of each page to the top title A value of zero places a formfeed at the beginning of each page including the SQL Plus Command Reference 13 123 SET NULL text first page and clears the screen on most terminals If you set NEWPAGE to NONE SQL Plus does not print a blank line or formfeed between the report pages SET NULL text Sets the text displayed whenever a null value occurs in the result of a SQL SELECT command Use the NULL clause of the COLUMN command to override the setting of the NULL variable for a given column The default output for a null is blan
188. ORACLE SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Release 10 1 Part No B12170 01 December 2003 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Release 10 1 Part No B12170 01 Copyright 1996 2003 Oracle Corporation All rights reserved Primary Author Simon Watt Contributor Alison Goggin Alison Holloway Christopher Jones Luan Nim Richard Rendell Andrei Souleimanian Ian Wu The Programs which include both the software and documentation contain proprietary information they are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are also protected by copyright patent and other intellectual and industrial property laws Reverse engineering disassembly or decompilation of the Programs except to the extent required to obtain interoperability with other independently created software or as specified by law is prohibited The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice If you find any problems in the documentation please report them to us in writing This document is not warranted to be error free Except as may be expressly permitted in your license agreement for these Programs no part of these Programs may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose If the Programs are delivered to the United States Government or anyone licensing or using the Programs on behalf of the United States Government the following not
189. PEND command Action Re enter the APPEND command with the specified text SQL Plus Error Messages 14 1 SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0006 not enough room to format computations Cause Unable to allocate memory to format computations Action Free up additional memory by closing applications not required reducing the size of the command or statement or by recoding the query to select fewer records SP2 0015 no break s defined Cause There was no break defined Action Define a break Check the syntax of the BREAK command for the correct options SP2 0016 break specification must start with ON BY or ACROSS keyword Cause An invalid option was used in the BREAK command Action Check the syntax of the BREAK command for the correct options SP2 0017 missing column name after keyword_name keyword Cause There was no column name after the specified keyword Action Enter a column name after the specified keyword SP2 0019 invalid numeric argument to option_name option Cause An invalid numeric argument was used in the specified option Action Correct the argument and try again SP2 0020 no storage available for column_name Cause An error has occurred SQL Plus was unable to allocate memory for a BREAK command Action Allocate more memory by closing some applications SP2 0022 cannot allocate space to modify the buffer_name buffer variable Cause An internal error occurred Action Free up additional memory by
190. QL See SET SUF FIX SQL text on page 13 133 for information on changing this default extension SQL Plus Command Reference 13 101 SAVE If you wish to SAVE a file under a name identical to a SAVE command clause CREATE REPLACE or APPEND you must specify a file extension When you SAVE the contents of the SQL buffer SAVE adds a line containing a slash to the end of the file Examples To save the contents of the buffer in a file named DEPTSALRPT with the extension SQL enter SAVE DEPTSALRPT To save the contents of the buffer in a file named DEPTSALRPT with the extension OLD enter SAVE DEPTSALRPT OLD 13 102 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET SET Syntax Usage Sets a system variable to alter the SQL Plus environment settings for your current session for example to customize HTML formatting a enable or disable the printing of column headings set the number of lines per page a set the display width for data You also use the Preferences screens in iSQL Plus to set system variables SET system_variable value where system_variable and value represent one of the clauses shown in the SET System Variable Summary table following SQL Plus maintains system variables also called SET command variables to enable you to set up a particular environment for a SQL Plus session You can change these system variables with the SET command and list them with the SHOW command SET ROLE
191. QL Plus To execute a script that is located at a URL pass the username and password login to a database and pass parameters to the script to provide values for substitution variables enter http machine_name domain 5560 isqlplus dba dynamic userid hr your_ password oraclel0g 20as 20sysdba amp script ftp machine_ name2 domain script sql amp name amp salary 12000 As the iSQL Plus DBA URL is used Application Server authentication is also required As spaces are not supported they have been encoded as 20 in this example To load a script into iSQL Plus without passing the username and password enter http machine_name domain 5560 isqlplus dynamic script select 20 20from 20emp_ details view amp type text amp action load Getting Help in SQL Plus To access iSQL Plus Online Help click the Help icon Help specific to iSQL Plus is displayed in a new browser window It is available in eight languages Brazilian Portuguese French German Italian Japanese Korean Simplified Chinese Spanish English is installed by default and where a language is unavailable For more information about language support in SQL Plus see Chapter 12 SQL Plus Globalization Support Exiting SQL Plus The way you exit SQL Plus from each of the three user interfaces is described in the following sections If you fail to log in to SQL Plus successfully because your username or password is invalid or some other error SQL Plus w
192. QL Plus on page 1 5 The conventions used in command examples are described in Conventions on page xxiv Oracle Database Sample Schemas and SQL Plus Sample schemas are included with Oracle Database The tutorial and examples in this guide use the EMP_DETAILS_VIEW view of the Human Resources HR sample schema This schema contains personnel records for a fictitious company To view column details for the view EMP_DETAILS_VIEW enter DESCRIBE EMP_DETAILS_VIEW For more information about the sample schemas see the Oracle Database Sample Schemas guide SQL Plus Overview 1 5 Oracle Database Sample Schemas and SQL Plus Unlocking the Sample Tables The Human Resources HR Sample Schema is installed as part of the default Oracle Database installation The HR account is locked by default You need to unlock the HR account before you can use the HR sample schema To unlock the HR account log in as the SYSTEM user and enter the following command where your_password is the password you want to define for the user HR ALTER USER HR IDENTIFIED BY your_password ACCOUNT UNLOCK For further information about unlocking the HR account see the Oracle Database Sample Schemas guide The HR user is primarily to enable you to access the HR sample schema and is necessary to enable you to run the examples in this guide Each table in the database is owned by a particular user You may wish to have your own copies of the sample tables to use
193. QL Plus command See the documentation for a list of commands and their correct syntax SP2 0382 The command_name command is not available Cause The command was not recognized or it is disabled This occurs if it is a command that does not have any meaning in SQL Plus such as a SQL buffer editing command or it is not allowed for security reasons Action Remove the command from the script See the documentation for a list of commands and their correct syntax SP2 0392 Cannot UNDEFINE the current edit buffer Cause The current edit buffer cannot be undefined Action No action required SP2 0394 Illegal buffer name buffer_name Cause A buffer name contained an illegal character for example hyphen Action Correct and remove the illegal character from the buffer name SP2 0423 Illegal GET command Cause An invalid option was used in the GET command Action Check the syntax of the command you used for the correct options SP2 0425 value is not a valid datatype Cause The value entered in the ACCEPT command was not valid for the specified datatype Action Enter a valid value e g 123 for a NUMBER variable SP2 0426 Input truncated to number_of_characters characters Cause There was no carriage return at the last line of the SOL statement Action Insert a carriage return SP2 0495 FROM and TO clauses both missing specify at least one Cause The FROM and TO clauses were missing from the COPY statement Action
194. R your_password SELECT LAST_NAME DEPARTMENT_NAME FROM EMP_DETAILS VIEW DISCONNECT SET INSTANCE FIN2 CONNECT HR2 your_password 13 66 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference EDIT EDIT Syntax Usage EDIT is not available in iSQL Plus ED IT file_name ext where file_name ext represents the file you wish to edit typically a script Invokes an operating system text editor on the contents of the specified file or on the contents of the buffer The buffer has no command history list and does not record SQL Plus commands Enter EDIT with no filename to edit the contents of the SOL buffer with the operating system text editor If you omit the file extension SOL Plus assumes the default command file extension normally SQL For information on changing the default extension see the SUFFIX variable of the SET command in this chapter If you specify a filename SQL Plus searches for the file in the directory set by ORACLE_PATH If SOL Plus cannot find the file in ORACLE_PATH or if ORACLE_PATH is not set it searches for the file in the current working directory If SQL Plus cannot find the file in either directory it creates a file with the specified name The substitution variable EDITOR contains the name of the text editor invoked by EDIT You can change the text editor by changing the value of EDITOR For information about changing the value of a substitution variable see DEFINE on page 13 51 EDIT attempts to ru
195. RR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0821 Library altered with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL library has been altered but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL library Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0822 Java created with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL java has been created but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL java Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SQL Plus Error Messages 14 39 SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0823 Java altered with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL java has been altered but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL java Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0824 PL SQL compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL block has been created but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL block Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0825 Dimension created with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL dimension has been created but has one or more warnings informationa
196. Reference for more information about PL SQL variable Represents the name of the bind variable you wish to create NUMBER Creates a variable of type NUMBER with fixed length CHAR Creates a variable of type CHAR character with length one CHAR n CHAR BYTE Creates a variable of type CHAR with length n bytes or n characters The maximum that n can be is 2000 bytes and the minimum is 1 byte or 1 character The maximum n for a CHAR variable with character semantics is determined by the number of bytes required to store each character for the chosen character set with an upper limit of 2000 bytes The length semantics are determined by the length qualifiers CHAR or BYTE and if not explicitly stated the value of the NLS_LENGTH_SEMANTICS environment variable is applied to the bind variable Explicitly stating the length semantics at variable definition stage will always take precedence over the NLS_LLENGTH_SEMANTICS setting NCHAR Creates a variable of type NCHAR national character with length one 13 160 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference VARIABLE NCHAR n Creates a variable of type NCHAR with length n characters The maximum that n can be is determined by the number of bytes required to store each character for the chosen national character set with an upper limit of 2000 bytes The only exception to this is when a SQL Plus session is connected to a pre Oracle9i server or the SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY system variable is
197. SET LOGSOURCE full_database_recovery Enables you to specify the recovery of a full database partial_database_recovery Enables you to specify the recovery of individual tablespaces and datafiles LOGFILE Continues media recovery by applying the specified redo log file In interactive recovery mode AUTORECOVERY OFF if a bad log name is entered errors for the bad log name are displayed and you are prompted to enter a new log name TEST Specifies a trial recovery to detect possible problems Redo is applied normally but no changes are written to disk and changes are rolled back at the end of the trial recovery You can only use the TEST clause for a trial recovery if you have restored a backup In the event of logfile corruption specifies the number of corrupt blocks that can be tolerated while allowing recovery to proceed During normal recovery integer cannot exceed 1 ALLOW integer CORRUPTION In the event of logfile corruption specifies the number of corrupt blocks that can be tolerated while allowing recovery to proceed During normal recovery integer cannot exceed 1 parallel clause Enables you to specify the degree of parallel processing to use during the recovery operation CONTINUE Continues multi instance recovery after it has been interrupted to disable a thread CONTINUE DEFAULT Continues recovery using the redo log file generated automatically by Oracle Database if no other logfile is specified This is equi
198. SOL Plus Example 4 7 Starting SQL Plus This example shows you how to start SQL Plus 1 Make sure that SQL Plus has been installed on your computer 2 Log on to the operating system if required 3 Enter the command SOLPLUS and press Return Note Some operating systems expect you to enter commands in lowercase letters If your system expects lowercase enter the SQLPLUS command in lowercase SQLPLUS SQL Plus displays its version number the current date and copyright information and prompts you for your username the text displayed on your system may differ slightly SQL Plus Release 10 1 0 2 0 Production on Thu Oct 5 16 29 01 2003 c Copyright 1982 2003 Oracle Corporation All rights reserved Enter user name 4 Enter your username and press Return SQL Plus displays the prompt Enter password 5 Enter your password and press Return again For your protection your password does not appear on the screen The process of entering your username and password is called logging in SQL Plus displays the version of Oracle Database to which you connected and the versions of available tools such as PL SQL Next SQL Plus displays the SQL Plus command prompt SQL gt 4 8 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Starting SQL Plus The SQL Plus command prompt indicates that SQL Plus is ready to accept your commands If SQL Plus does not start you should see a message to help you correct the prob
199. SP2 0030 no room for another line Cause The maximum number of lines in a SQL statement or PL SQL block has been exceeded Action Reduce the number of lines and try again SP2 0038 Command too long max_characters characters Cause The specified command entered was too long Action Check the command syntax for the limitation SQL Plus Error Messages 14 3 SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0039 command line overflow while substituting into command_name Cause The maximum length of the command line has been exceeded Action Reduce the length of the data in the substitution variables used in the command SP2 0042 unknown command command_name rest of line ignored Cause The command entered was not valid Action Check the syntax of the command you used for the correct options SP2 0044 For a list of known commands enter HELP and to leave enter EXIT Cause An unknown command was entered Action Check the syntax of the command you used for the correct options SP2 0045 no column_name defined Cause No columns have been defined Action No action required SP2 0046 column_name not defined Cause The column name specified was not defined Action Retry with a valid column name SP2 0047 Invalid number for option_name option Cause An invalid number was used for this option Action Re try the operation with a valid number SP2 0052 like column_name column_name not defined Cause The column which the format is based
200. SQL Plus Application Server 4 13 STORE command 3 8 13 152 SET clause 13 152 stored functions 6 33 stored procedures creating 5 9 subkey registry 3 29 3 30 substitution variables 6 16 6 17 6 23 13 104 13 114 _EDITOR 13 54 appending characters immediately after 6 19 avoiding unnecessary prompts for value 6 20 concatenation character 13 104 13 114 DEFINE command 13 51 defining 6 16 6 20 13 51 deleting 6 16 13 159 displaying in headers and footers 13 97 displaying in titles 13 155 in ACCEPT command 6 28 13 11 iSQL Plus 6 24 listing definitions 6 16 13 51 parsing 9 12 prefixing 13 114 C 2 related system variables 6 23 restrictions 6 23 single and double ampersands 6 20 system variables used with 6 23 undefined 6 17 where and how to use 6 17 SUFFIX variable 13 106 13 133 used with EDIT command 13 67 used with GET command 13 72 used with SAVE command 13 101 used with START command 13 146 SUM function 7 17 Index 21 summary lines computing and printing 7 17 13 42 computing and printing at ends of reports 7 21 computing same type on different columns 7 22 printing grand and sub summaries totals 7 21 printing multiple on same break column 7 22 syntax COPY command B 5 syntax rules SQL commands 5 6 SQL Plus commands 5 11 SYSDBA clause 13 49 SYSOPER clause 4 25 13 49 system variables 5 12 13 103 affecting SQL Plus performance 9 11 affecting substitution variables 6
201. SQL Plus Application Server Configuration Create Users You can create multiple users who have access to the SQL Plus DBA URL To create a user from the JAZN shell enter JAZN gt adduser iSQL Plus DBA username password To create a user from the command line enter SJAVA_HOME bin java Djava security properties SORACLE_ HOME sqlplus admin iplus provider jar SORACLE_HOME oc4j j2ee home jazn jar user iSQL Plus DBA admin password admin_password adduser iSQL Plus DBA username password username and password are the username and password used to log into the iSQL Plus DBA URL To create multiple users repeat the above command for each user List Users You can confirm that users have been created and added to the iSQL Plus DBA realm To confirm the creation of a user using the JAZN shell enter JAZN gt listusers iSQL Plus DBA To confirm the creation of a user using the command line enter SJAVA_HOME bin java Djava security properties SORACLE_ HOME sqlplus admin iplus provider jar SORACLE_HOME oc4j j2ee home jazn jar user iSQL Plus DBA admin password admin_password listusers iSQL Plus DBA The usernames you created are displayed Grant Users the webDba Role Each user you created above must be granted access to the webDba role To grant a user access to the webDba role from the JAZN shell enter JAZN gt grantrole webDba iSQL Plus DBA username To grant a user access to the webDba role from the
202. SQL Plus client environment is configured by setting the NLS_LANG environment variable which is read by SQL Plus at startup Oracle Database The Oracle Database environment is configured by creating the database with the required character set Configuring Multiple Language Support in SSQL Plus iSQL Plus supports multiple languages through the Unicode UTF 8 character encoding in the web browser you use for the iSQL Plus session and through the AL32UTF8 encoding Oracle s implementation of Unicode in the SQL Plus Application Server serving the session If your Oracle Database also uses AL32UTF8 then there is a one for one correspondence between the character sets in the database and in iSQL Plus Otherwise some character mapping may occur Web Browser No changes are necessary to have multilingual support in your iSQL Plus web browser However your browser must support UTF 8 character encoding Most current web browsers support UTF 8 The character encoding in the iSQL Plus browser is set to UTF 8 by the charset attribute in the header of HTML pages returned from the iSQL Plus Application Server 12 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference NLS_LANG Environment Variable Application Server The language and territory values of the NLS_LANG environment variable in effect when the iSQL Plus Application Server starts specifies behavior for the iSQL Plus Application Server The character set value is ignored The language and t
203. SYSDBA or SYSOPER privileged connections database Specifies username password connect_identifier of the Oracle Database source or destination database you wish to COPY FROM or COPY TO The COPY command does not support SYSDBA or SYSOPER privileged connections You must include a username If you do not specify password in either the COPY FROM clause or the COPY TO clause SQL Plus will prompt you for it SQL Plus suppresses the display of your password response You must include the connect_identifier clause to specify the source or destination database The exact syntax depends on the Oracle Net communications protocol in use For more information refer to the Oracle Net manual appropriate for your protocol or contact your DBA APPEND Inserts the rows from query into destination_table if the table exists If destination_ table does not exist COPY creates it CREATE Inserts the rows from query into destination_table after first creating the table If destination_table already exists COPY returns an error B 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COPY Command Syntax Usage INSERT Inserts the rows from query into destination_table If destination_table does not exist COPY returns an error When using INSERT the USING query must select one column for each column in destination_table REPLACE Replaces destination_table and its contents with the rows from query If destination_ table does not exist COPY creates
204. Screen The following image shows the SQL Plus command line interface running in an X terminal SOL Plus Release 10 1 0 2 0 Production on Tue Nov 25 17329319 2003 Copyright lt c 1982 2003 Oracle All rights reserved Enter user name hr Enter password Connected to Oracle Database 10g Enterprise Edition Release 10 1 0 2 0 Production With the Partitioning and Data Mining options SQL gt SQL Plus User Interface 2 1 SQL Plus Command line User Interface When SQL Plus starts it displays the date and time the SQL Plus version and copyright information before the SQL Plus prompt appears The default prompt for SOL Plus command line is SQL gt Changing the Command line Font and Font Size In Windows from a Command Prompt open the Command Prompt Properties dialog to set the font and font size used in the SQL Plus command line interface To Change the Command line Interface Font and Font Size 1 Right click in the command line interface title bar 2 Click Properties The Window Preview box displays the current window s relative size on your monitor based on your font and font size selections The Selected Font box displays a sample of the current font 3 Click the Font tab 4 Select the font size to use from the Size box Raster font sizes are shown as width by height in pixels TrueType font sizes are shown as height in pixels 5 Select the font to use from the Font box 6 Select the Bold Fonts check
205. Script Displays the File gt Save As dialog where you enter a file name for the script you want to save from the Input area as a plain text file It may be useful to identify scripts with an extension of SQL Cancel Cancels any script that is currently running but does not clear the Input or Output areas A message saying that the script was cancelled is displayed Next Page Displays the next page of report output The Next Page button is displayed when there are more results to display than can fit on the current output page or the script contains a PAUSE command You can configure whether pages are displayed on a single page or multiple pages using Preferences gt Interface Configuration gt Output Page Setup or by executing the SET PAUSE ON or SET PAUSE OFF command iSQL Plus DBA Workspace If you log in with SYSDBA or SYSOPER privileges the iSQL Plus DBA Workspace is displayed to remind you of the privileged connection It is otherwise identical to the iSQL Plus Workspace described earlier SQL Plus User Interface 2 17 iSQL Plus User Interface Fill out the fields on the DBA Workspace as you would for the iSQL Plus Workspace iSQL Plus History Screen Click the History tab to display the History screen The History screen enables you to reload scripts that you have previously executed in the same session A history entry is created each time you execute a script in the Workspace if it is not the same as the most
206. Specify at least one clause Check the syntax of the command you used for the correct options SQL Plus Error Messages 14 17 SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0496 Misplaced FROM clause Cause The FROM keyword was in the wrong position in the COPY command Action Check the syntax of the COPY command for the correct options SP2 0497 Misplaced TO clause Cause The TO keyword was in the wrong position in the COPY command Action Check the syntax of the COPY command for the correct options SP2 0498 Missing parenthetical column list or USING keyword Cause A parenthetical list was missing in the column list or the USING keyword is missing in the COPY command Action Check the syntax of the COPY command for the correct options SP2 0499 Misplaced APPEND keyword Cause The APPEND keyword was in the wrong position in the COPY command Action Check the syntax of the COPY command for the correct options SP2 0501 Error in SELECT statement Oracle_database_error_message Cause Invalid SELECT statement found in the COPY command Action Check the syntax of the COPY command for the correct options SP2 0513 Misplaced CREATE keyword Cause The CREATE keyword was in the wrong position in the COPY command Action Check the syntax of the COPY command for the correct options SP2 0514 Misplaced REPLACE keyword Cause The REPLACE keyword was in the wrong position in the COPY command Action Check the syntax of the COPY com
207. T DEPARTMENT_ID LAST _NAME SALARY 30 Colmenares 2500 30 Himuro 2600 30 Tobias 2800 30 Baida 2900 30 Khoo 3100 30 Raphaely 11000 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL 6 rows selected To suppress the report header without changing its definition enter REPHEADER OFF Positioning Title Elements The report in the preceding exercises might look more attractive if you give the company name more emphasis and place the type of report and the department name on either end of a separate line It may also help to reduce the line size and thus center the titles more closely around the data You can accomplish these changes by adding some clauses to the TTITLE command and by resetting the system variable LINESIZE as the following example shows You can format report headers and footers in the same way as BTITLE and TTITLE using the REPHEADER and REPFOOTER commands 7 26 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions Example 7 20 Positioning Title Elements To redisplay the personnel report with a repositioned top title enter the following commands TTITLE CENTER A CME WIDGET SKIP 1 CENTER SKIP 1 LEFT PERSONNEL REPORT RIGHT SALES DEPARTMENT SKIP 2 SET LINESIZE 60 ACME WIDGET PERSONNEL REPORT SALES DEPARTMENT DEPARTMENT_ID LAST _NAME SALARY 30 Colmenares 2500 30 Himuro 2600 30 Tobias 2800 30 Baida 2900 30 Khoo 3100 30 Raphaely 11000 COMPANY C
208. T url file_name exd arg Runs the SQL Plus statements in the specified script The script can be called from the local file system or from a web server Only the url form is supported in iSQL Plus You can pass values to script variables in the usual way url Specifies the Uniform Resource Locator of a script to run on the specified web server SOL Plus supports HTTP and FTP protocols but not HTTPS HTTP authentication in the form http username password machine_name domain is not supported in this release file_name ex The script you wish to execute The file can contain any command that you can run interactively If you do not specify an extension SOL Plus assumes the default command file extension normally SQL See SET SUF FIX SQL text on page 13 133 for information on changing this default extension When you enter START file_name ext SQL Plus searches for a file with the filename and extension you specify in the current default directory If SOL Plus does not find such a file SQL Plus will search a system dependent path to find the file Some operating systems may not support the path search See the platform specific Oracle documentation provided for your operating system for specific information related to your operating system environment arg Data items you wish to pass to parameters in the script If you enter one or more arguments SQL Plus substitutes the values into the parameters amp
209. T EDITFILE SET SQLCONTINUE SET TAB SET FLUSH SET SOLNUMBER SET TERMOUT SET SHIFTINOUT SET SQLPREFIX SET TIME SET SHOWMODE SET SQLPROMPT SET TRIMOUT SET SOLBLANKLINES SET SUFFIX SET TRIMSPOOL CLEAR SCREEN na na SQL Plus Commands with Security Issues on the SSQL Plus Middle Tier GET SPOOL HOST STORE SQL Buffer Editing Commands Not Relevant in SQL Plus APPEND DEL INPUT CHANGE EDIT SAVE Commands Not Supported in iSQL Plus_ D 1 D 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Symbols comment delimiter 6 10 hyphen clause 4 19 continuing a long SQL Plus command 5 11 13 1 period 5 8 slash command default logon 4 25 13 48 entered at buffer line number prompt 5 7 13 10 entered at command prompt 13 10 executing current PL SQL block 5 8 similar to RUN 13 10 13 100 usage 13 10 6 4 listing alllines 6 4 listcommand 6 4 pound sign overflow indication 13 36 SET SQLPREFIX character 13 132 number format 7 5 amp ampersand disabling substitution variables 6 23 substitution variables 6 17 amp amp 6 20 asterisk in DEL command 6 4 13 57 in LIST command 6 4 13 79 comment delimiters 6 10 colon bind variables 6 32 BindVariable clause index EXIT command 13 71 semicolon 5 5 at sign command 3 9 6 14 13 6 command arguments 13 6 in CONNECT command 13 48 in COPY command B 1 B 5 in SQLPLUS command 4 18 passing paramete
210. T clause 7 36 13 144 REPLACE clause 13 144 to HTML file 4 22 turning spooling off 7 35 13 144 use with SET MARKUP 8 2 spool menu command 2 5 SQL buffer 2 5 SQL clause 13 30 SQL DML statements reporting on 13 104 13 110 SQL optimizer 9 4 SQL Plus application window 2 3 4 10 command prompt 4 8 command summary 13 2 configuring globalization support 12 2 database administration 11 1 environment variables 3 1 error messages 14 1 execution plan 9 4 exiting 4 17 13 70 exiting conditionally 13 168 limits A 1 menus 2 4 Index 20 obsolete command alternatives C 1 setting up environment 3 4 shortcuts to starting 4 9 starting 4 7 4 8 4 18 statistics 9 4 system variables affecting performance 9 11 tuning 9 1 who can use 1 4 SQL Plus Windows GUI changing face and size 2 8 2 9 changing font 2 8 SQLBLANKLINES variable 13 106 13 129 SQLCASE variable 13 106 13 129 SQLCODE clause 13 139 SHOW command 13 139 SQLCONTINUE variable 13 106 13 130 SQL PNO referencing in report titles 7 29 SQL SQLCODE using in EXIT command 13 70 SQLNUMBER variable 13 106 13 130 SQLPATH environment variables 3 2 registry entry 3 2 3 29 SQLPLUS environment variables 3 3 SQLPLUS command 4 8 clause 4 19 clause 419 and at sign 4 18 and EXIT FAILURE 4 16 BODY option 4 20 commands SQLPLUS 4 18 connect identifier 4 25 display syntax 4 19 ENTMAP option 4 21 HEAD op
211. T operation in WHENEVER OSERROR and WHENEVER SQLERROR is also disabled Example 10 1 Setting Restrictions in the PUP Table This is an example of how to insert a row into the PUP table to restrict the user HR from using the SELECT statement 1 Log in as SYSTEM with the command SQLPLUS SYSTEM your_password 2 Insert a row into the PUP table with the command INSERT INTO PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE VALUES SQL Plus HR SELECT NULL NULL DISABLED NULL NULL 3 Connect as HR and try to SELECT something 10 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Creating and Controlling Roles CONNECT HR your_password SELECT FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW This command causes the following error message SP2 0544 Command SELECT disabled in Product User Profile 4 Todelete this row and remove the restriction from the user HR CONNECT again as SYSTEM and enter DELETE FROM PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE WHERE USERID HR Creating and Controlling Roles You can use SQL commands to create and control access to roles to provide security for your database tables By creating a role and then controlling who has access to it you can ensure that only certain users have access to particular database privileges Roles are created and used with the SQL CREATE GRANT and SET commands To create a role you use the CREATE command You can create roles with or without passwords To grant access to roles you use the GRANT command In
212. THER_TAG PLUS_ Describes the function of the SOL statement in the OTHER_PLUS_ EXP EXP column OTHER_PLUS_EXP Shows the text of the query for the parallel server or remote database The format of the columns may be altered with the COLUMN command The default formats can be found in the site profile for example glogin sq 9 8 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Tracing Parallel and Distributed Queries Example 9 7 Tracing Statements With Parallel Query Option To trace a parallel query running the parallel query option create table D2_t1 uniquel number parallel degree 6 Table created create table D2_t2 uniquel number parallel degree 6 Table created create unique index d2_i_uniquel on d2_t1 uniquel Index created set long 500 longchunksize 500 SET AUTOTRACE ON EXPLAIN SELECT INDEX B D2_I_UNIQUE1 USE_NL B ORDERED COUNT A UNIQUE1 FROM D2_T2 A D2_T1 B WHERE A UNIQUE1 B UNIQUE1 Tuning SQL Plus 9 9 Tracing Parallel and Distributed Queries Execution Plan 0 SELECT STATEMENT Optimizer CHOOSE Cost 1 Card 1 Bytes 26 1 0 SORT AGGREGATE 2 1 SORT AGGREGATE Q2000 3 2 NESTED LOOPS Cost 1 Card 41 Bytes 1066 Q2000 4 3 TABLE ACCESS FULL OF D2_T2 Cost 1 Card 41 Byte Q2000 s 533 5 3 INDEX UNIQUE SCAN OF D2_I_UNIQUE1 UNIQUE 02000 2 PARALLEL TO SERIAL SELECT PIV_SSF SYS_OP_MSR COUNT A1 C0 FROM SELECT ORDERED NO_
213. TML file in your web browser Enter an employee identification number in the text field for example 105 Click the Run Report button iSQL Plus executes the script and displays the results in your web browser Generating HTML Reports from SQL Plus_ 8 11 Creating Reports using iSQL Plus 8 12 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference 9 Tuning SQL Plus This chapter provides information about how to tune SQL Plus for better performance It discusses the following topics Tracing Statements Collecting Timing Statistics Tracing Parallel and Distributed Queries SQL Plus Script Tuning For information about tuning Oracle Database see the Oracle Database Performance Tuning Guide Tracing Statements You can automatically get a report on the execution path used by the SQL optimizer and the statement execution statistics The report is generated after successful SQL DML that is SELECT DELETE UPDATE and INSERT statements It is useful for monitoring and tuning the performance of these statements Tuning SQL Plus 9 1 Tracing Statements Controlling the Autotrace Report You can control the report by setting the AUTOTRACE system variable Autotrace Setting Result SET AUTOTRACE OFF No AUTOTRACE report is generated This is the default SET AUTOTRACE ON EXPLAIN The AUTOTRACE report shows only the optimizer execution path SET AUTOTRACE ON The AUTOTRACE report shows only the SQL STATISTICS statement execution
214. The iSQL Plus Server has been configured to prevent the use of SET MARKUP HTML ENTMAP and COLUMN ENTMAP Action The System Administrator can change the value of iSQLPlusAllow UserMarkup in the iSQL Plus Server configuration to allow use of the ENTMAP option SP2 0930 Enter a URL or a path and file name not both Cause In the iSQL Plus Load Script screen the location of a script to load into the Workspace was specified in both the URL and File fields A script can be loaded from a URL or from the local file system but not from both at the same time Action Enter either a URL or a path and file name SQL Plus Error Messages 14 53 COPY Command Messages COPY Command Messages CPY 0002 Illegal or missing APPEND CREATE INSERT or REPLACE option Cause An internal COPY function has invoked COPY with a create option flag value that is out of range Action Please contact Oracle Worldwide Customer Support Services CPY 0003 Internal Error logical host number out of range Cause An internal COPY function has been invoked with a logical host number value that is out of range Action Please contact Oracle Worldwide Customer Support Services CPY 0004 Source and destination table and column names don t match Cause On an APPEND operation or an INSERT when the table exists at least one column name in the destination table does not match the corresponding column name in the optional column name list or in the SELECT command Ac
215. UMN NOPRIN T siriene cect ive fee a a a a Da EN 9 12 SET APPINFO OFF ronroni iis etnii eoir e arean Ap Aa aa a RSE a ai 9 12 SEFARRAYSIZE s s a E e EE sian cstuer danebdedasctt Moston 9 12 SET DEFINE QFE nta aea a A E E E a a a 9 12 SEPFELUSORE araea nsee ee e e ea Ae en E EAA EEE A a eae A e AA 9 12 SET LINESIZ E sanetsa a n E E E AR 9 13 SET LONGCHUNKSIZAE srackaceeosthntaniatii tin bad R R anA iaa Eii 9 13 SET PAGESIZE Jered ae n toni a a A dette a ten aa 9 13 SET SERVEROUTPUT iaaea Giihel abate hata as a a e a ea a aet 9 13 SFT SQUPROMP ra aeea Ea rae De Ro Loera ta ETa AE EA AE A ATEA E aara tera eee EEEa 9 13 SETTA B rT EE EE O A E ae E eee ae E E isch ee a a 9 14 SET TERMOU Proein io a e a a a e a l Bete eels 9 14 SET TRIMOUT ON SET TRIMSFOOL ON oaeaeei kasede eroari te Area eE EKE Rana aa a ee eaii 9 14 YVNDEHNE Frrr a e e E E a a E A E 9 14 10 SQL Plus Security 11 PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE Table ccccccccccsssssssssssscescessecseeceecssessecseceaecsecsseseesesseeeseeseeseees 10 1 Creating the PUP Tableits 2 ccticecanie denn auiiindbb aie bevel naatatih coisas 10 2 PUP Tabl Structure recieve fa a a a a eee hance E ee 10 2 Description and Use of PUP ColUmmnss cc cee ceseee cece ceeseseeeesenssssseenesesseeneneneneeeees 10 3 PUP Table Administration imsis eiieeii oint iare i AaS aAa EEEa Ea aati Taaa iak 10 4 Disabling SOL Plus SQL and PL SQL Commands ssesssseseseeieseeissieresertesisrerisresisessrsrer
216. UTE command for that type_name attribute_name applies to all such objects you reference in that session ALI AS alias Assigns a specified alias to a type_name attribute_name which can be used to refer to the type_name attribute_name in other ATTRIBUTE commands CLE AR Resets the display characteristics for the attribute_name The format specification must be a text constant such as A10 or 9 999 not a variable SQL Plus Command Reference 13 17 ATTRIBUTE Usage Examples FOR MAT format Specifies the display format of the column The format specification must be a text constant such as A10 or 9 999 not a variable LIKE type_name attribute_name alias Copies the display characteristics of another attribute LIKE copies only characteristics not defined by another clause in the current ATTRIBUTE command ON OFF Controls the status of display characteristics for a column OFF disables the characteristics for an attribute without affecting the characteristics definition ON reinstates the characteristics You can enter any number of ATTRIBUTE commands for one or more attributes All attribute characteristics set for each attribute remain in effect for the remainder of the session until you turn the attribute OFF or until you use the CLEAR COLUMN command Thus the ATTRIBUTE commands you enter can control an attribute s display characteristics for multiple SQL SELECT commands When you enter multiple ATTR
217. Y SQL created with Oracle7 SQL syntax enter SET COMPATIBILITY V7 START SALARY After running the file reset compatibility to NATIVE to run scripts created for Oracle Database 10g SET COMPATIBILITY NATIVE Alternatively you can add the command SET COMPATIBILITY V7 to the beginning of the script and reset COMPATIBILITY to NATIVE at the end of the file SQL Plus Command Reference 13 113 SET CON CAT I c ON OFF SET CON CAT c ON OFF Sets the character used to terminate a substitution variable reference when SQL Plus would otherwise interpret the next character as a part of the variable name SQL Plus resets the value of CONCAT to a period when you switch CONCAT on SET COPYC OMMIT 0 n Controls the number of rows after which the COPY command commits changes to the database COPY commits rows to the destination database each time it copies n row batches Valid values are zero to 5000 You can set the size of a batch with the ARRAYSIZE variable If you set COPYCOMMIT to zero COPY performs a commit only at the end of a copy operation SET COPYTYPECHECK ON OFF Sets the suppression of the comparison of datatypes while inserting or appending to tables with the COPY command This is to facilitate copying to DB2 which requires that a CHAR be copied to a DB2 DATE SET DEF INE amp c ON OFF Sets the character used to prefix substitution variables to c ON or OFF controls whether SQL P
218. You will be prompted to enter your password SQL Plus starts and connects to the default database Now you can start entering and executing SQL PL SQL and SQL Plus statements and commands at the SQL gt prompt To start SQL Plus and connect to a database other than the default Open a UNIX or a Windows terminal and enter the SQL Plus command sqlplus username password connect_identifier To hide your password enter the SQL Plus command in the form sqlplus username connect_identifier You will be prompted to enter your password Starting SQL Plus Windows GUI xxxviii To start the SQL Plus Windows GUI and connect to a database 1 Click Start gt Programs gt Oracle OraHomeName gt Application Development gt SQL Plus Alternatively open a Windows terminal and enter the SQL Plus command sqlplusw The SQL Plus Windows GUI opens and the Log On dialog is displayed Enter your Oracle Database username and password in the Log On dialog If you do not know your Oracle Database username and password ask your Database Administrator Leave the Host String field blank to connect to the default database Enter a connection identifier for the database you want to connect to in the Host String field You can connect to Oracle8i Oracle9i and Oracle Database 10g databases 4 Click OK SQL Plus starts and connects to the database Now you can start entering and executing SQL PL SQL and SQL Plus statements and commands at the
219. ZE sets the total number of characters that SQL Plus displays on one line before beginning a new line Keep LINESIZE as small as possible to avoid extra memory allocations and memory copying However if LINESIZE is too small columns that cannot fit next to each other are put on separate lines This may reduce performance significantly SET LONGCHUNKSIZE SET LONGCHUNKSIZE sets the size of the increments SQL Plus uses to retrieve a CLOB LONG NCLOB or XMLType value Experiment with different sizes if LONGS or LOBs are being fetched SET PAGESIZE Sets the number of rows on each page of output in iSQL Plus and the number of lines on each page of output in command line and Windows GUI Increase PAGESIZE to avoid printing headings frequently or set it to 0 to prevent headings being displayed SET SERVEROUTPUT SET SERVEROUTPUT OFF suppresses the display output DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_ LINE of stored procedures or PL SQL blocks in SQL Plus Setting SERVEROUTPUT OFF stops internal SQL Plus calls to the DBMS_OUTPUT package done after user SQL statements SET SQLPROMPT Sets the SQL Plus command prompt Use the default prompt SQL gt to stop variable substitution occurring each time the prompt is displayed SET SQLPROMPT is not supported in iSQL Plus Tuning SQL Plus 9 13 SQL Plus Script Tuning SET TAB Determines how SQL Plus formats white space in terminal output Setting TAB ON causes multiple spaces to be compress
220. _ HOME sqlplus mesg Also check that the file sp1XX msb is in the ORACLE_HOME sqlplus mesg or ORACLE_HOME sqlplus mesg directory The XX stands for the country prefix associated with your NLS_LANG environment variable SQL Plus reads only one of the sp1XX msb files For example sp1ja msb is read if NLS_LANG is JAPANESE_JAPAN JA16EUC If NLS_LANG is not set then the default English language splus msb is used Check that the appropriate file is of non zero size and that the file permissions allow it to be read Note that msb files are binary The contents may be meaningless when viewed or printed If you are unsure which language file is being used unset NLS_LLANG and run SQL Plus to verify it can read the splus msb file SP2 0751 Unable to connect to Oracle Exiting SOL Plus Cause No connection to an Oracle server could be made Action Normally occurs after other errors showing that the database is not running or that the username and password were invalid 14 32 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0752 Usage C OMPATIBILITY version release update Cause An invalid option was used in the C OMPATIBILITY command option Action Check the syntax of the SQL Plus executable for the correct options SP2 0753 STARTUP with MIGRATE only valid with Oracle 9 2 or greater Cause STARTUP MIGRATE was used to try to startup an Oracle server for a release prior to 9 2 Action Check the platf
221. _BASE ORACLE_HOME rdbms admin BASE components all subdirectories were directory located under a top level ORACLE_HOME directory For Windows NT the default location was C orant This release complies with Optimal Flexible Architecture OFA guidelines All subdirectories are not under a top level ORACLE_HOME directory There is a top level directory called ORACLE_BASE that by default is C oracle If you install the latest Oracle Database release on a computer with no other Oracle software installed then the default setting for the first Oracle Database home directory is C oracle orann where nn is the latest release number The Oracle Database home directory is located directly under ORACLE_BASE All directory path examples in this guide follow OFA conventions Refer to Oracle Database Platform Guide for Windows for additional information about OFA compliances and for information about installing Oracle products in non OFA compliant directories Xxix XXX What s New in SQL Plus This section describes new features of SOL Plus Release 10 1 and provides pointers to additional information New Features in SQL Plus and SQL Plus 10 1 SQL Plus Release 10 1 is a superset of SQL Plus 9 2 This section describes new features introduced in SQL Plus Release 10 1 Change in DESCRIBE Behavior Previously DESCRIBE on an invalidated object failed with error ORA 24372 invalid object for describe and conti
222. _DEST The command ARCHIVE LOG START destination causes the specified device or directory to become the new default archive destination for all future automatic or manual archives A destination specified with any other option is a temporary destination that is in effect only for the current manual archive It does not change the default archive SQL Plus Command Reference 13 15 ARCHIVE LOG Usage Examples destination for subsequent automatic archives For information about specifying archive destinations see your platform specific Oracle Database documentation You must be connected to an open Oracle database as SYSOPER or SYSDBA For information about connecting to the database see the CONNECT command on page 13 48 If an online redo log file group fills and none are available for reuse database operation is suspended The condition can be resolved by archiving a log file group For information about specifying archive destinations see your platform specific Oracle Database documentation Note This command applies only to the current instance To specify archiving for a different instance or for all instances in a Parallel Server use the SQL command ALTER SYSTEM For more information about using SQL commands see the Oracle Database SQL Reference To start up the archiver process and begin automatic archiving using the archive destination specified in LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST enter ARCHIVE LOG START To stop a
223. _DEST and LOG_ARCHIVE_FORMAT You should restore copies of the archived redo log files needed for recovery to the destination specified in LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST if necessary You can override the initialization parameters by setting the LOGSOURCE variable with the SET LOGSOURCE command 13 92 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference RECOVER Examples During recovery you can accept the suggested log name by pressing return cancel recovery by entering CANCEL instead of a log name or enter AUTO at the prompt for automatic file selection without further prompting If you have enabled autorecovery that is SET AUTORECOVERY ON recovery proceeds without prompting you with filenames Status messages are displayed when each log file is applied When normal media recovery is done a completion status is returned To recover the entire database enter RECOVER DATABASE To recover the database until a specified time enter RECOVER DATABASE UNTIL TIME 01 JAN 2001 04 32 00 To recover the two tablespaces ts_one and ts_two from the database enter RECOVER TABLESPACE ts_one ts_two To recover the datafile datal db from the database enter RECOVER DATAFILE datal db SQL Plus Command Reference 13 93 REMARK REMARK Syntax Usage Examples REMARK Begins a comment in a script SQL Plus does not interpret the comment as a command The REMARK command must appear at the beginning of a line and the comment ends at the end o
224. _name domain port isqlplus dba SQL Plus User Interface 2 13 iSQL Plus User Interface The following dialog is displayed prompting you to enter your Application Server authentication username and password Enter Network Password ME Please type your user name and password Site cascade au oracle com Realm iSQL Plus DBA User Name system Password porrem 4 7 Save this password in your password list Cancel User Name Enter a valid Application Server authentication username This may not be the same as your Oracle Database username Password Enter a valid Application Server authentication password for the username This may not be the same as your Oracle Database password After you have successfully authenticated the iSQL Plus DBA Login screen is displayed ORACLE nu Login Indicates required field Username lysten sSs S Password peer Connect Identifier C Privilege SYSDBA gt Copytigh 2003 Oracle All rights reserved 2 14 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference iSQL Plus User Interface Username Enter a valid username or to connect to Oracle Database mandatory Password Enter a valid password for the username Connection Identifier Leave this field blank to use the default Oracle database otherwise enter a connection identifier for the database you want to connect to Jhost port service_name You can
225. a subset of parameters whose names include that string For example if you enter SHOW PARAMETERS COUNT db_file_multiblock_read_count integer 12 spin_count integer 0 The SHOW PARAMETERS command without any string following the command displays all initialization parameters The column names and formats used in the SHOW PARAMETERS output is set in the site profile file glogin sql The value column display may be truncated Your output may vary depending on the version and configuration of the Oracle Database server to which you are connected You need SELECT ON SQL Plus Command Reference 13 137 SHOW V_ PARAMETER object privileges to use the PARAMETERS clause otherwise you will receive a message ORA 00942 table or view does not exist PNO Shows the current page number RECYC LEBIN original_name Shows objects in the recycle bin that can be reverted with the FLASHBACK BEFORE DROP command You do not need to remember column names or interpret the less readable output from the query SELECT FROM USER_RECYCLEBIN The query returns four columns displayed in the following order Column Name Description ORIGINAL NAME Shows the original name used when creating the object RECYCLEBIN NAME Shows the name used to identify the object in the recyclebin OBJECT TYPE Shows the type of the object DROP TIME Shows the time when the object was dropped The output columns c
226. abase Action Connect to a database and re try the operation SP2 0642 SQL Plus internal error state error_state context error_number Unsafe to proceedor Unable to proceed Cause An internal error occurred Action Make a note of the message then contact Oracle Support Services SP2 0645 Operating System error occurred Unable to complete EDIT command Cause An operating system error occurred with the EDIT command Action Check that the file was created successfully and verify that the device you are writing to is still available SP2 0650 New passwords do not match Cause The new passwords entered did not match Action Re issue the PASSWORD command and make sure that the new passwords are entered correctly SQL Plus Error Messages 14 27 SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0659 Password unchanged Cause The PASSWORD command failed to change passwords because No passwords were given The new passwords did not match Action Re issue the PASSWORD command and make sure that the new passwords are entered correctly SP2 0666 WARNING SHIFTINOUT only affects shift sensitive character sets Cause The NLS character set used in this session does not contain shift sensitive characters The SET SHIFTINOUT command is unnecessary Action No action required SP2 0667 Message file facility lt lang gt msb not found Cause The SP1 SP2 or CPY message file could not be found SQL Plus cannot run Action Check the Oracle
227. abetical order Chapter 14 SQL Plus Error Messages Lists error messages generated by SQL Plus It provides likely causes and appropriate actions for recovery PART IV SQL Plus Appendixes Contains SQL Plus Appendixes Appendix A SQL Plus Limits Lists the maximum values for elements of SOL Plus Appendix B SQL Plus COPY Command Provides syntax and usage information for the COPY command Appendix C Obsolete SQL Plus Commands Provides information on obsolete SOL Plus commands Appendix D Commands Not Supported in iSQL Plus Lists SQL Plus commands that are not supported in iSQL Plus Related Documents For more information see these Oracle resources a SQL Plus Quick Reference a PL SQL User s Guide and Reference a Oracle Database SQL Reference a Oracle Database Concepts a Oracle Database Administrator s Guide a Oracle Database Backup and Recovery Basics a Oracle Database Application Developer s Guide Fundamentals a Oracle XML DB Developer s Guide a Oracle Database Globalization Support Guide a Oracle Database Heterogeneous Connectivity Administrator s Guide a Oracle Database Error Messages a Oracle Database Upgrade Guide a Oracle Database Reference a Oracle Database Performance Tuning Guide xxiii a Oracle Net Services Administrator s Guide a Pro COBOL Programmer s Guide a Pro C C Programmer s Guide a Oracle Database installation and user s manuals for your operating system Many of the examples in
228. able representations of those characters Entity mapping is enabled by default preventing the use of user defined HTML in iSQL Plus output The iSQLPlusAllowUserMarkup option controls whether an iSQL Plus Application Server enables users to change the entity mapping setting or use the custom HTML header body and table tags For more information about user defined HTML see Enabling User Defined HTML Markup on page 3 24 iSQL Plus configuration file option to specify the databases that users can access in iSQL Plus When enabled a dropdown list of available databases is displayed in place of the Connection Identifier text field on the Login screen This enables greater security for SQL Plus Servers in hosted environments For more information about restricted database access see Enabling or Disabling Restricted Database Access on page 3 16 iSQL Plus configuration file option to specify the level to which messages are logged in the iSQL Plus Application Server error logs For more information about iSQL Plus logging see Setting the Level of iSQL Plus Logging on page 3 15 SQL Plus and iSQL Plus Configuration You can set up your SQL Plus or iSQL Plus Application Server environment to use the same settings with each session There are two operating system files to do this The Site Profile file glogin sql for site wide settings and settings for the iSQL Plus sessions from an iSQL Plus Application Server a Addi
229. aborting and exiting with a return code 6 15 13 169 13 171 creating with a system editor 6 2 creating with SAVE 13 101 13 116 editing with system editor 13 67 in at sign command 6 14 13 6 in EDIT command 13 67 in GET command 13 72 in SAVE command 6 3 13 101 Index 5 command files continued in SQLPLUS command 4 25 6 14 inSTART command 6 13 13 146 including comments in 6 9 13 94 including more than one PL SQL block 6 2 including more than one SQL command 6 2 nesting 6 15 opening 2 4 passing parameters to 6 26 13 6 13 146 registering 13 104 13 107 retrieving 13 72 running 6 13 13 6 13 146 running a series in sequence 6 15 running as you start SQL Plus 4 25 6 14 running in batch mode 6 15 13 71 saving 2 4 uniform resource locator 13 6 13 8 13 146 command keys SQL Plus Windows GUI 2 4 command prompt SET SQLPROMPT 9 13 13 106 13 132 SQL Plus 4 8 command line configuring globalization support 12 2 installing help 3 10 command line interface changing face and size 2 2 Euro sign 2 2 special character 2 2 Windows Character Map utility 2 2 commands collecting timing statistics on 9 8 13 153 copying text 2 3 disabled inschema 14 20 disabling 10 4 echo on screen 13 116 finding text 2 6 host running from SQL Plus 5 13 13 75 listing current in buffer 13 79 pasting text 2 6 re enabling 10 4 spaces 5 2 SQL continuing on additional lines 5 6 editing in buff
230. ace_report report Cause Unable to find the session identifier Action Check that the PLUSTRACE role has been granted SQL Plus Error Messages 14 25 SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0619 Error while connecting Cause An error occurred while AUTOTRACE attempted to make a second connection to the database instance Action Check that the database limit on number of active sessions has not been exceeded SP2 0620 Error while disconnecting SP2 SP2 SP2 SP2 SP2 Cause An error occurred while AUTOTRACE attempted to disconnect from the database instance Action Check that the database is still available 0621 Error ORA error_number while gathering statistics Cause No data was found in the PLAN_TABLE while gathering statistics using AUTOTRACE Action Refer to the Oracle Database Error Messages for the specified ORA error message 0622 Starting line number must be less than ending line number Cause The starting line number specified is larger than the ending number Action Re enter the starting line number with a smaller line number 0623 Error accessing PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE Warning Product user profile information not loaded You may need to run PUPBLD SQL as SYSTEM Cause The PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE table has not been built in the SYSTEM account Action The exact format of the file extension and location of the file are system dependent See the SQL Plus installation guide provided for your operating
231. aces Example 7 21 indenting a Title Element To print the company name left aligned with the report name indented five spaces on the next line enter TTITLE LEFT ACME WIDGET SKIP 1 COL 6 SALES DEPARTMENT PERSONNEL REPORT SKIP 2 Now rerun the current query to see the results ACME WIDGET SALES DEPARTMENT PERSONNEL REPORT DEPARTMENT_ID LAST _NAME SALARY 30 Colmenares 2500 30 Himuro 2600 30 Tobias 2800 30 Baida 2900 30 Khoo 3100 30 Raphaely 11000 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL 6 rows selected Entering Long Titles If you need to enter a title greater than 500 characters in length you can use the SQL Plus command DEFINE to place the text of each line of the title in a separate substitution variable DEFINE LINE1 This is the first line DEFINE LINE2 This is the second line DEFINE LINE3 This is the third line 7 28 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions Then reference the variables in your TTITLE or BIITLE command as follows TTITLE CENTER LINE1 SKIP 1 CENTER LINE2 SKIP 1 CENTER LINE3 Displaying System Maintained Values in Titles You can display the current page number and other system maintained values in your title by entering a system value name as a title element for example TTITLE LEFT system maintained_value_name There are five system maintained values you can display in titles the most commonly used of which is SQ
232. ach employee in the EMP_DETAILS_ VIEW view 1 At the command prompt enter the first line of the command SELECT EMPLOYEE_ID LAST_NAME JOB_ID SALARY If you make a mistake use Backspace to erase it and re enter When you are done press Return to move to the next line 2 SQL Plus displays a 2 the prompt for the second line not in iSQL Plus Enter the second line of the command FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 The semicolon means that this is the end of the command Press Return or click Execute SQL Plus processes the command and displays the results SQL Plus Basics 5 5 Running SQL Commands EMPLOYEE _ID LAST_NAME JOB_ID SALARY 100 King AD_PRES 24 000 101 Kochhar AD_VP 17 000 102 De Haan AD_VP 17 000 145 Russell SA_MAN 14 000 146 Partners SA_MAN 13 500 201 Hartstein MK_MAN 13 000 6 rows selected After displaying the results and the number of rows retrieved SQL Plus command line and Windows GUI display the command prompt again If you made a mistake and therefore did not get the results shown re enter the command or edit the command in the Input area in iSQL Plus The headings may be repeated in your output depending on the setting of a system variable called PAGESIZE Sometimes the result from a query will not fit the available page width You can use the system variable LINESIZE to set the width of the output in characters See Setting Page Dimensions on page 7 33 Typic
233. advanced users should edit the registry Oracle takes no responsibility for problems arising from editing the Windows registry 3 28 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Windows Graphical User Interface Configuration Using the Registry When you install Oracle products for Windows Oracle Universal Installer adds relevant parameters to the Windows registry The following table indicates which registry version s REGEDT32 EXE or REGEDIT EXE you can use for your particular Windows platform Windows Platform REGEDT32 EXE REGEDIT EXE Windows XP Pro YES YES Windows 2000 YES YES The HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE ORACLE subkey contains the Oracle Database parameters See the Registry Editor s help system for instructions on how to edit the registry entries defining Oracle Database parameters If you change the value of an Oracle Database related registry entry or add a registry entry you should restart SQL Plus to ensure the changes take effect SQLPATH Registry Entry The SQLPATH registry entry specifies the location of SQL scripts SOL Plus searches for SQL scripts in the current directory and then in the directories specified by the SQLPATH registry entry The HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE ORACLE HOMEO registry subkey or the HOMEn directory for the associated ORACLE_HOME contains the SQLPATH registry entry SQLPATH is created with a default value of ORACLE_ HOME DBS You can specify any directories on any drive as v
234. al to the at sign command When running nested scripts it looks for nested scripts in the same path or url as the calling script Only the url form is supported in iSQL Plus The command functions similarly to START url Specifies the Uniform Resource Locator of a script to run on the specified web server SOL Plus supports HTTP and FTP protocols but not HTTPS HTTP authentication in the form http username password machine_name domain is not supported in this release file_name ex Represents the nested script you wish to run If you omit ext SQL Plus assumes the default command file extension normally SQL For information on changing the default extension see SET SUF FIX SQL text on page 13 133 When you enter file_name ext from within a script SOL Plus runs file_name ext from the same directory as the script When you enter file_name ext interactively SOL Plus runs file_name ext from the current working directory or from the same url as the script from which it was called If SQL Plus does not find the file it searches a system dependent path to find the file Some operating systems may not support the path search See the platform specific Oracle documentation provided for your operating system for specific information related to your operating system environment All previous settings like COLUMN command settings stay in effect when the script starts If the script changes any setting the new value s
235. alid values for SOLPATH When setting the SOLPATH registry entry you can concatenate directories with a semicolon For example C ORACLE ORA10 DATABASE C ORACLE ORA10 DBS See the Registry Editor s help system for instructions on how to edit the SQLPATH registry entry Configuring SQL Plus 3 29 Windows Graphical User Interface Configuration SQLPLUS_FONT Registry Entry The SQLPLUS_FONT registry entry defines the font face used in the SQL Plus Windows GUL It is located in the registry subkey HKEY_LOCAL_ MACHINE SOFTWARE ORACLE HOMEDO If the SOQLPLUS_FONT entry is not created or if it has an invalid name or value the default face Fixedsys is used See To Change the Windows GUI Font and Font Size on page 2 9 for details on how to create the SQLPLUS_FONT registry entry and set the font face See the Registry Editor s help system for instructions on how to edit the SQLPLUS_FONT registry entry SQLPLUS_FONT_SIZE Registry Entry The SQLPLUS_FONT_SIZE registry entry defines the font size used in the SQL Plus Windows GUL It is located in the registry subkey HKEY_LOCAL_ MACHINE SOFTWARE ORACLE HOMEO If the SQLPLUS_FONT_SIZE entry is not created or if it has an invalid name or value the default size 16 is used See Changing the Windows GUI Font and Font Size on page 2 8 for details on how to create the SQLPLUS_FONT_SIZE registry entry and set the font size See the Registry Editor s help system for instructions on ho
236. alled a The ORACLE HOME environment variable is set a The SQL Plus help script files exist HLPBLD SQL to drop and create new help tables HELPDROP SQL to drop existing help tables HELPUS SQL to populate the help tables with the help data Running the helpins Shell Script or Batch File to Install Command line Help Run the provided shell script or batch file to install command line help In UNIX use the shell script HELPINS available in SORACLE_HOME BIN In Windows use the batch file HELPINS BAT available in SORACLE_HOME BIN 1 In UNIX set an environment variable SYSTEM_PASS to hold the SYSTEM user login with SYSTEM_PASS SYSTEM password EXPORT SYSTEM_PASS In Windows set SYSTEM_ PASS with SET SYSTEM_PASS SYSTEM password where password is the password you have defined for the SYSTEM user 3 10 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus and iSQL Plus Configuration In UNIX run the shell script HELPINS from a terminal with ORACLE_HOME BIN HELPINS In Windows run the batch file HELPINS BAT from the command line with SORACLE_HOME BIN HELPINS In either case the HELPINS utility reads the login from SYSTEM_PASS to connect to Oracle Database using SQL Plus creates and loads the help tables and then disconnects You can use command line help the next time you start SOL Plus Running the hipbld sql Script to Install Command line Help Run the provided SQL script HLPBLD SQL
237. ally LINESIZE is set to 80 in command line and Windows GUI and 150 in iSQL Plus Whether you see the message stating the number of records retrieved depends on the setting of the system variable FEEDBACK See System Variables that Affect How Commands Run on page 5 12 for more information Understanding SQL Command Syntax Just as spoken language has syntax rules that govern the way we assemble words into sentences SQL Plus has syntax rules that govern how you assemble words into commands You must follow these rules if you want SQL Plus to accept and execute your commands Dividing a SQL Command into Separate Lines You can divide your SQL command into separate lines at any points you wish as long as individual words are not split Thus you can enter the query you entered in Example 5 3 Entering a SQL Command on three lines SELECT EMPLOYEE_ID LAST_NAME JOB_ID FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 5 6 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Running SQL Commands In this guide you will find most SQL commands divided into clauses one clause on each line In Example 5 3 Entering a SQL Command for instance the SELECT and FROM clauses were placed on separate lines Many people find this clearly visible structure helpful but you may choose whatever line division makes commands most readable to you Ending a SQL Command You can end a SQL command in one of three ways a witha semicolon a witha slash on a l
238. ame and password authentication may still prevent access Starting iSQL Plus from a URL You can start iSQL Plus and pass URL variables SQL scripts and substitution variables by sending a request from a URL SQL scripts must be available through HTTP or FTP or passed to iSQL Plus as a URL variable iSQL Plus executes the script and returns the results in a web browser window or loads the script into the Workspace You can start iSQL Plus as a normal user or with SYSDBA or SYSOPER privileges The syntax to enter in your web browser s Location Address field to start iSQL Plus as a normal user is http machine_name domain port isqlplus dynamic UserOpts or to start iSQL Plus with SYSDBA or SYSOPER privileges use http machine_name domain port isqlplus dba dynamic DBAOpts where machine_name domain is the URL of the Application Server port is the number of the port used by the Application Server 4 14 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Starting SQL Plus UserOpts is UserLogin Script UserLogin amp Script DBAOpts is DBALogin Script DBALogin amp Script and UserLogin is userid username password connect_identifier DBALogin is userid username password connect_identifier AS SYSDBA SYSOPER Script is script text amp type url text amp action execute load amp variable value If there is no userid URL parameter or if it has incomplete information iSQL Plus displays the
239. ame domain port WKRPT SQL and runs it SQL Plus Command Reference 13 9 slash slash Syntax Usage Examples slash Executes the most recently executed SQL command or PL SQL block which is stored in the SQL buffer The buffer has no command history list and does not record SQL Plus commands You can enter a slash at the command prompt or at a line number prompt of a multi line command or in the input area of the iSQL Plus Workspace The slash command functions similarly to RUN but does not list the command Executing a SQL command or PL SQL block using the slash command will not cause the current line number in the SQL buffer to change unless the command in the buffer contains an error In that case SQL Plus changes the current line number to the number of the line containing the error Type the following SQL script SELECT CITY COUNTRY_NAME FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY 12000 Enter a slash to re execute the command in the buffer CLEF COUNTRY_NAME Seattle United States of America Oxford United Kingdom Seattle United States of America 13 10 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference ACCEPT ACCEPT Syntax Terms ACCEPT variable NUM BER CHAR DATE BINARY_FLOAT BINARY_DOUBLE FOR MAT format DEF AULT default PROMPT textNOPR OMPT HIDE Reads a line of input and stores it in a given substitution variable In iSQL Plus displays the Input Requir
240. an be formatted with the COLUMN command The default COLUMN formatting is in the site profile glogin sql For DBAs the command lists their own objects as they have their own user_recyclebin view REL EASE Shows the release number of Oracle Database that SQL Plus is accessing REPF OOTER Shows the current REPFOOTER definition REPH EADER Shows the current REPHEADER definition 13 138 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SHOW Examples SPOO L Shows whether output is being spooled SGA Displays information about the current instance s System Global Area You need SELECT ON V_ SGA object privileges otherwise you will receive a message ORA 00942 table or view does not exist SQLCODE Shows the value of SQL SQLCODE the SQL return code of the most recent operation TTI TLE Shows the current TTITLE definition USER Shows the username you are currently using to access SQL Plus If you connect as AS SYSDBA then the SHOW USER command displays USER is SYS To display information about the SGA enter SHOW SGA Total System Global Area 7629732 bytes Fixed Size 60324 bytes Variable Size 6627328 bytes Database Buffers 409600 bytes Redo Buffers 532480 bytes The following example illustrates how to create a stored procedure and then show its compilation errors CONNECT SYSTEM MANAGER CREATE PROCEDURE HR PROC1 AS BEGIN IPI a dy END SQL Plus Command Reference 13 139 SHOW Warning
241. an easier way By using a substitution variable in place of the text SA_MAN in the WHERE clause you can get the same results you would get if you had written the values into the command itself A substitution variable is preceded by one or two ampersands amp When SQL Plus encounters a substitution variable in a command SQL Plus executes the command as though it contained the value of the substitution variable rather than the variable itself For example if the variable SORTCOL has the value JOB_ID and the variable MYTABLE has the value EMP_DETAILS_VIEW SOL Plus executes the commands SELECT amp SORTCOL SALARY FROM amp MYTABLE WHERE SALARY gt 12000 as if they were SELECT JOB_ID SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 Where and How to Use Substitution Variables You can use substitution variables anywhere in SQL and SQL Plus commands except as the first word entered When SQL Plus encounters an undefined substitution variable in a command SQL Plus prompts you for the value You can enter any string at the prompt even one containing blanks and punctuation If the SQL command containing the reference should have quote marks around the variable and you do not include them there the user must include the quotes when prompted SQL Plus reads your response from the keyboard even if you have redirected terminal input or output to a file If a terminal is not available if for example you run the script i
242. and Escape Character preferences affect variable substitution behavior iSQL Plus will only prompt for input when scripts are invoked from the Workspace and output is being displayed in the browser Below Input Area option iSQL Plus will not prompt for values when output is set to any of the other three options or when invoked using the iSQL Plus dynamic URL syntax iSQL Plus prompts for each substitution variable as it encounters it by displaying a separate Input Required screen To synchronize variable substitution set the Substitution Variable Prefix preference ON to set iSQL Plus to always prompt for substitution variables before running any further scripts Click the Execute button to execute the command Enter your script using amp and amp amp as the prefix for variables Click the Execute button to execute the script iSQL Plus prompts you for values for the substitution variables in your script At the end of script execution any double ampersand substitution variables in the script remain defined This means that you are not prompted to enter values for these variables again until they have been undefined or you log out of iSQL Plus If this is not the behavior you want then use single ampersand substitution variables in your script You are prompted to substitute a value for each occurrence of a substitution variable created with a single ampersand If you use DEFINE to define variable values in your script in this mode
243. and SET TRANSACTION are SQL commands see the Oracle Database SQL Reference for more information When not followed by the keywords TRANSACTION or ROLE SET is assumed to be a SQL Plus command SQL Plus Command Reference 13 103 SET System Variable Summary SET System Variable Summary System Variable Page Description SET APPINFO ON OFF tex on Sets automatic registering of scripts through the page 13 107 DBMS_APPLICATION_INFO package SET ARRAYSIZE 15 n on Sets the number of rows called a batch that SQL Plus will page 13 109 fetch from the database at one time SET AUTOCOMMIT ON OFF IMMEDIATE n on Controls when Oracle Database commits pending changes page 13 109 to the database SET AUTOPRINT ON OFF on Sets the automatic printing of bind variables page 13 109 SET AUTORECOVERY ON OFF on ON sets the RECOVER command to automatically apply page 13 110 the default filenames of archived redo log files needed SET AUTOTRACE ON OFF TRACE ONLY on EXPLAIN STATISTICS page 13 110 SET BLOCKTERMINATOR c ON OFF on page 13 111 SET CMDSEP c ON OFF on page 13 111 SET COLSEP tex on page 13 112 SET COMPATIBILITY V7 V8 NATIVE on page 13 113 SET CONCAT c ON OFF on page 13 114 SET COPYCOMMIT 0 n on page 13 114 SET COPYTYPECHECK ON OFF on page 13 114 SET DEFINE amp c ON OFF on page 13 114 SET DESCRIBE DEPTH 1 n ALL LINENUM on ON O
244. and line SQL PIUS cece ceteeeteeee teens 12 2 SOL Plus Clienit avs 0 20 sr Sed specbeelor chee aa ths an a A Eaa Eara a ERRE atlas 12 2 Oracle Database eriin a aad haat ein ieee elastin een a als 12 2 Configuring Multiple Language Support in iSQL PIUS ccccecesesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeenens 12 2 Web Brow S r is cnr etree iiesien Meee cote ees tee eee oe a eet 12 2 Application S rv errs ciesteisescstesesie tides ea tieee So aie a a arte oe R 12 3 NLS_LANG Environment Variable 0 cccccccccccccessccccsssesssssecesssssssecccesseeseeccesseseeseseseseasenees 12 3 Viewing NLS LANG Settings isis hisnsetitirastsaeeteuila abiaastes eatsiends oiei ia enben ire anaran 12 4 Setting NLS LAIN G rrien Ee a dh ences E EAER AEN EENE EA 12 5 Part Ill SQL Plus Reference 13 SQL Plus Command Reference SOL Plus Command Summary cccccecccesseseseecssseeecsesesesesesesenseececsesesessesesessseessensesesessesesaeess 13 2 ABS OTN ss covsaiisvocivesis ose r a a at aed a E siete staves a 13 6 dOub le at signait inn a Pa aides oat a ES aa TE Sia eda a beeheay Albee Thess 13 8 AIET IEEE E E E 13 10 ACCEPT rroia a E E EIE N N A E A E ET 13 11 APPEND erma a a th ra Mea e a E apsateeet at stheaetess 13 13 ARCHIVE LOG rani o pa a A a E e a Ra 13 14 ATTRIBUTE gnnt i un epenn a E S Ea as Saara a nacre 13 17 BREAK erea aia a a a A rete teas cop ah OM oN eats 13 19 BEETLE riae laine AE E ae a A R a nes ae ee 13 24
245. and the clause DESC to line 4 of the current query first list line 4 LIST 4 4 ORDER BY SALARY Next enter the following command be sure to type two spaces between APPEND and DESC APPEND DESC 4 ORDER BY SALARY DESC Type RUN to verify the query Using Scripts in SQL Plus 6 7 Editing Scripts in SQL Plus Command Line 1 SELECT EMPLOYEE_ID LAST_NAME JOB_ID SALARY 2 FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW 3 WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN 4 ORDER BY SALARY DESC EMPLOYEE_ID LAST_NAME JOB_ID MONTHLY SALARY 145 Russell SA_MAN 14 000 146 Partners SA_MAN 13 500 147 Errazuriz SA_MAN 12 000 148 Cambrault SA_MAN 11 000 149 Zlotkey SA_MAN 10 500 Adding a New Line To insert a new line after the current line use the INPUT command To insert a line before line 1 enter a zero 0 and follow the zero with text SQL Plus inserts the line at the beginning of the buffer and all lines are renumbered starting at 1 0 SELECT EMPLOYEE_ID Example 6 6 Adding a Line Suppose you want to add a fourth line to the SQL command you modified in Example 6 4 Correcting the Error Since line 3 is already the current line enter INPUT and press Return INPUT SQL Plus prompts you for the new line Enter the new line Then press Return 4 ORDER BY SALARY SQL Plus prompts you again for a new line 6 8 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Placing Comments in Scripts Deleting Lines Press Return again to ind
246. and to redefine _EDITOR to hold the name of your preferred text editor For example to define the editor used by EDIT to be vi enter the following command DEFINE _EDITOR vi Contains the current version of the installed Oracle Database in the form Oracle Database 10g Release 10 1 0 2 0 Production Contains the full release number of the installed Oracle Database in the form 101020000 Contains a value indicating the privilege level of the current connection It contains one of the following values a ASSYSDBA a ASSYSOPER 13 54 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference DEFINE An empty string for normal user connections or when there is no connection AS SYSDBA and AS SYSOPER are database administrator level privileges See Also Oracle Database SQL Reference for information on AS SYSDBA and AS SYSOPER privileges _SQLPLUS_ RELEASE _USER Contains the full release number of the installed SQL Plus component in the form 101020000 Contains the user name connected to the current connection You can view the value of each of these variables with the DEFINE command These variables can be accessed and redefined like any other substitution variable They can be used in TTITLE in amp substitution variables or in your SQL Plus command line prompt You can use the DEFINE command to view the definitions of these eight predefined variables in the same way as you view other DEFINE definitions You can also use
247. and try again SP2 0599 Usage SET EDITF ILE filename ext Cause Required filename was missing after the SET EDITFILE command Action Check the syntax of the SET EDITFILE command for the correct options SP2 0603 Usage Illegal STORE command Usage STORE SET filenamel ext CRE ATE REP LACE APP END Cause An invalid option was used in the STORE command Action Check the syntax of the STORE command for the correct options SP2 0605 File file_name already exists Use another name or STORE SET filename ext REPLACE Cause The file specified in the STORE command already exists Action Use the REPLACE option to overwrite the existing file or specify another file name SP2 0606 Cannot create file_name file Cause The STORE command was unable to create the specified file There may be insufficient disk space too many open files or read only protection on the output directory Action Check that there is sufficient disk space and that the protection on the directory enables file creation SP2 0607 Cannot close file_name file Cause The STORE command was unable to close the specified file Another resource may have locked the file Action Check that the file is not locked before closing it SP2 0608 Object object_name is a remote object cannot further describe Cause Unable to DESCRIBE the remote object Action No action required 14 24 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages
248. ariable users may put it in TTITLE If DATE is dynamic and is used in TTITLE it will have all the normal variable semantics If it is used with an ampersand than the value will be set to the time when the TTITLE command is executed If it is used without an ampersand prefix it will be re evaluated for each page For long reports with DATE in the TTITLE or with multiple references to amp DATE different times may be displayed for each occurrence of the variable User s using _DATE in TTITLEs will almost certainly want to use an ampersand amp _DATE so that each page of the report has exactly the same timestamp This is especially true when the current date format contains a seconds component SQL Plus Command Reference 13 53 Predefined Variables _EDITOR _O_ VERSION _O RELEASE _PRIVILEGE A DEFINE with no arguments or dereference using amp DATE will give the current date The _DATE value can be UNDEFINED or set to a fixed string with an explicit DEFINE _DATE You can re enable the default dynamic date behavior with DEFINE _DATE an empty string _DATE enables time values to be included in your SQL Plus prompt Specifies the default editor used by the EDIT command During SQL Plus installation on Windows operating systems it is set to Notepad On UNIX operating systems it is set to the value of the UNIX environment variable EDITOR if it exists otherwise it is set to Ed You can use the DEFINE comm
249. as HEAD and TABLE settings Subsequent SET MARKUP commands have no effect on the information already sent to the report SET MARKUP only specifies that SQL Plus output will be HTML encoded You must use SET MARKUP HTML ON SPOOL ON and the SQL Plus SPOOL command to create and name a spool file and to begin writing HMTL output to it SET MARKUP has the same options and behavior as SQLPLUS MARKUP See MARKUP Options on page 4 19 for detailed information For examples of usage see SET MARK UP HTML ON OFF HEAD text BODY text TABLE text ENTMAP ON OFF SPOOL ON OFF PRE FORMAT ON OFF on page 13 122 and Chapter 8 Generating HTML Reports from SQL Plus on page 8 1 Use the SHOW MARKUP command to view the status of MARKUP options The following is a script which uses the SET MARKUP HTML command to enable HTML marked up text to be spooled to a specified file 13 122 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary Note The SET MARKUP example command is laid out for readability using line continuation characters and spacing Command options are concatenated in normal entry Use your favorite text editor to enter the commands necessary to set up the HTML options and the query you want for your report SET MARKUP HTML ON SPOOL ON HEAD lt TITLE gt SQL Plus Report lt title gt STYLE TYPE TEXT CSS gt lt BODY background ffffc6 gt lt STYLE gt SET ECHO OFF SP
250. at this location it is overwritten when you install SQL Plus If SQL Plus is removed the Site Profile script is deleted The default Site Profile script contains the following Copyright c 1988 2003 Oracle Corporation All Rights Reserved NAME glogin sql DESCRIPTION SQL Plus global login site profile file Add any SQL Plus commands here that are to be executed when a user starts SQL Plus or uses the SQL Plus CONNECT command USAGE This script is automatically run Used by Trusted Oracle COLUMN ROWLABEL FORMAT A15 Used for the SHOW ERRORS command COLUMN LINE COL FORMAT A8 COLUMN ERROR FORMAT A65 WORD_WRAPPED 3 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus and iSQL Plus Configuration User Profile Used for the SHOW SGA command COLUMN name_col_plus_show_sga FORMAT a24 Defaults for SHOW PARAMETERS COLUMN name_col_plus_show_param FORMAT a36 HEADING NAME COLUMN value_col_plus_show_param FORMAT a30 HEADING VALUE Defaults for SHOW RECYCLEBIN COLUMN origname_plus_show_recyc FORMAT al6 HEADING ORIGINAL NAME COLUMN objectname_plus_show_recyc FORMAT a30 HEADING RECYCLEBIN NAME COLUMN objtype_plus_show_recyc FORMAT a12 HEADING OBJECT TYPE COLUMN droptime_plus_show_recyc FORMAT al9 HEADING DROP TIME l l O efaults for SET AUTOTRACE EXPLAIN report COLUMN id_plus_exp FORMAT 990 HEADING i COLUMN parent_id_plus_exp FORMAT 990 HEADING
251. atabase tables SOL Plus and iSQL Plus commands and iSQL Plus access It covers the following topics a PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE Table a Disabling SQL Plus SQL and PL SQL Commands Creating and Controlling Roles a Disabling Commands with SQLPLUS RESTRICT a Program Argument Security a iSQL Plus Security PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE Table SQL Plus uses the PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE PUP table a table in the SYSTEM account to provide product level security that supplements the user level security provided by the SQL GRANT and REVOKE commands and user roles DBAs can use the PUP table to disable certain SOL and SQL Plus commands in the SQL Plus environment on a per user basis SQL Plus not Oracle Database enforces this security DBAs can even restrict access to the GRANT REVOKE and SET ROLE commands to control users ability to change their database privileges SQL Plus reads restrictions from the PUP table when a user logs in to SQL Plus and maintains those restrictions for the duration of the session Changes to the PUP table will only take effect the next time the affected users log in to SOL Plus SQL Plus Security 10 1 PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE Table When SYSTEM SYS or a user authenticating with SYSDBA or SYSOPER privileges connects or logs in SQL Plus does not read the PUP table Therefore no restrictions apply to these users The PUP table applies only to the local database If accessing objects on a remote database throu
252. atement The results include the following statistics Database Statistic Name Description recursive calls Number of recursive calls generated at both the user and system level Oracle Database maintains tables used for internal processing When Oracle Database needs to make a change to these tables it internally generates an internal SQL statement which in turn generates a recursive call db block gets Number of times a CURRENT block was requested consistent gets Number of times a consistent read was requested for a block 9 4 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Tracing Statements Database Statistic Name Description physical reads Total number of data blocks read from disk This number equals the value of physical reads direct plus all reads into buffer cache redo size Total amount of redo generated in bytes bytes sent through Total number of bytes sent to the client from the foreground SQL Net to client processes bytes received through Total number of bytes received from the client over Oracle Net SQL Net from client SQL Net round trips Total number of Oracle Net messages sent to and received to from client from the client sorts memory Number of sort operations that were performed completely in memory and did not require any disk writes sorts disk Number of sort operations that required at least one disk write rows processed Number of rows processed during the operation The client referred t
253. atype VARIABLE employee_info REFCURSOR Next enter a PL SQL block that uses the bind variable in an OPEN FOR SELECT statement This statement opens a cursor variable and executes a query See the PL SQL User s Guide and Reference for information on the OPEN command and cursor variables In this example we are binding the SOL Plus employee_info bind variable to the cursor variable BEGIN OPEN employee_info FOR SELECT EMPLOYEE_ID SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN END Using Scripts in SQL Plus 6 33 Using REFCURSOR Bind Variables PL SQL procedure successfully completed The results from the SELECT statement can now be displayed in SQL Plus with the PRINT command PRINT employee_info EMPLOYEE_ID SALARY 145 14000 146 13500 147 12000 148 11000 149 10500 The PRINT statement also closes the cursor To reprint the results the PL SQL block must be executed again before using PRINT Example 6 15 Using REFCURSOR Variables in Stored Procedures A REFCURSOR bind variable is passed as a parameter to a procedure The parameter has a REF CURSOR type First define the type CREATE OR REPLACE PACKAGE cv_types AS TYPE EmpInfoTyp is REF CURSOR RETURN emp_details_view ROWTYPE procedure emp_cv a IN OUT EmpInfoTyp END cv_types Package created Next create the stored procedure containing an OPEN FOR SELECT statement CREATE OR REPLACE PROCEDURE EmpInfo_rpt emp_cv I
254. ause 4 20 Set Options area 2 7 SET ROLE command disabling 10 5 SET system variable summary 13 104 SET TRANSACTION command disabling 10 5 SET variables 5 12 See system variables SGA clause 13 139 SHIFTINOUT variable 13 106 13 128 SHOW schema parameter 13 136 SHOW clause 13 153 SHOW command 5 12 13 136 ALL clause 13 136 BTITLE clause 13 136 ERRORS clause 13 137 LABEL variable C 2 C 5 listing current page dimensions 7 35 LNO clause 13 137 PNO clause 13 138 RELEASE clause 13 138 REPFOOTER clause 13 138 REPHEADER clause 13 138 SPOOL clause 13 139 SQLCODE clause 13 139 TTITLE clause 13 139 USER clause 13 139 SHOWMODE variable 13 106 13 128 SHUTDOWN command 13 142 ABORT 13 142 IMMEDIATE 13 142 NORMAL 13 142 TRANSACTIONAL LOCAL 13 142 SILENT option 4 24 8 6 site profile glogin xxxi xxxiv 3 5 3 6 3 8 4 23 9 4 9 8 10 12 13 131 13 137 Index 19 SKIP clause in BREAK command 7 14 7 15 13 21 in REPHEADER and REPFOOTER commands 13 98 in TTITLE and BTITLE commands 7 27 13 156 used to place blank lines before bottom title 7 27 SKIP PAGE clause 7 14 7 15 13 21 slash command 13 10 files loaded with GET command 13 73 SPACE variable C 2 C 4 special characters choosing a font 2 2 Euro sign 2 2 2 9 2 10 using 2 2 2 10 SPOOL clause 4 21 13 139 SPOOL command 7 35 13 144 APPEND clause 13 144 CREATE clause 13 144 filename 7 36 13 144 OFF clause 7 35 13 144 OU
255. ause in COPY command B 2 B 7 in SAVE command 13 101 13 144 APPEND command 6 3 6 7 13 13 APPINFO clause 9 12 13 107 Application Server 10 11 authentication 2 14 HTTP port 4 12 isqlplusctl utility 4 11 portinuse 3 12 Index 2 Product User Profile table 10 12 starting 4 11 starting the Windows service 4 11 stopping 4 13 test if running 3 14 ARCH background process 13 15 ARCHIVE LOG command 11 4 13 14 mode 11 4 argument inSTART command 6 26 ARRAYSIZE variable 9 12 13 104 13 109 relationship to COPY command B 4 B 8 ATTRIBUTE command 13 17 ALIAS clause 13 17 and CLEAR COLUMN command 13 18 CLEAR clause 13 17 clearing columns 13 29 13 32 controlling display characteristics 13 18 display characteristics 13 17 entering multiple 13 18 FORMAT clause 13 18 LIKE clause 13 18 listing attribute display characteristics 13 17 OFF clause 13 18 ON clause 13 18 restoring column display attributes 13 18 suppressing column display attributes 13 18 AUDIT command disabling 10 5 authentication adding username password entries 10 11 DBA access in iSQL Plus 10 11 AUTOCOMMIT variable 5 14 13 104 13 109 AUTOMATIC clause 13 86 AUTOPRINT variable 13 104 13 109 AUTORECOVERY variable 13 104 13 110 autotrace report 9 2 AUTOTRACE variable 9 2 13 104 13 110 background process startup after abnormal termination 13 142 batch mode 13 71 BEGIN command 5 8 disabling 10 5 BINARY_DOUBLE claus
256. ave the Host String field blank See Easy Connection Identifier earlier for more information about configuring and using Oracle Net connect identifiers Click OK Starting the GUI from the Windows Command Prompt 1 Select Command Prompt from Programs gt Accessories in the Start menu A Command Prompt window appears Enter C gt SQLPLUSW The SQL Plus graphical user interface starts You can optionally include your login username and password separated by a slash and a database to connect to for example C gt SQLPLUSW username password connect_identifier Otherwise enter the required information in the login dialog as described in Starting SQL Plus earlier The Oracle SQL Plus application window appears 4 10 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Starting SQL Plus Oracle SQL Plus File Edit Search Options Help SQL Plus Release 16 1 6 2 6 Production on Mon Oct 3 17 37 16 2003 Copyright c 1982 2063 Oracle Corporation All rights reserved Connected to Oracle Database 16g Enterprise Edition Release 16 1 6 2 6 Production With the Partitioning and Data Mining options SQL gt Starting the SQL Plus Application Server The iSQL Plus Application Server must be running on the middle tier before you can start an iSQL Plus session A command line utility and a Windows Service are supplied to start and stop iSQL Plus on Windows The iSQL Plus Application Server is started by default during Oracle Databas
257. azn jar user iSQL Plus DBA admin password admin_password setpasswd iSQL Plus DBA username old_password new_password 3 20 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference iSQL Plus Application Server Configuration Test SQL Plus DBA Access Test iSQL Plus DBA access by entering the iSQL Plus DBA URL in your web browser http machine_name domain 5560 isqlplus dba A dialog is displayed requesting authentication for the iSQL Plus DBA URL Log in as the user you created above You may need to restart iSQL Plus for the changes to take effect Enabling SSL with SQL Plus This is an example of setting up iSQL Plus to use SSL This procedure assumes that you have an existing certificate If not you can request a certificate from a certification authority CA Many CAs provide test certificates for use during testing For this procedure set AVA_HOME to 0RACLE_HOME jdk and perform the following steps from the ORACLE_HOME oc4j j2ee directory 1 Generate Keys and Storage File Use the keytool utility to generate the keypair public and private keys and a keystore database to store the keypair SJAVA_HOME bin keytool genkey keyalg RSA keystore keystore storepass 123456 validity 100 This example uses RSA as the key algorithm keystore as the storage file name to store the keys sets the password to access the storage file as 123456 and is valid for 100 days The keytool utility then prompts you for further information
258. back to SQL Plus SET APPINFO OFF Sets automatic registering of scripts through the DBMS_APPLICATION_INFO package Setting APPINFO OFF prevents administrators monitoring the performance and resource usage of scripts If many SQL scripts are being called then turning APPINFO OFF stops internal SQL Plus calls to the database DBMS_APPLICATION_INFO package SET ARRAYSIZE Sets the number of rows that SQL Plus will fetch from the database at one time Valid values are 1 to 5000 The effectiveness of setting ARRAYSIZE depends on how well Oracle Database fills network packets and your network latency and throughput In recent versions of SQL Plus and Oracle Database ARRAYSIZE may have little effect Overlarge sizes can easily take more SQL Plus memory which may decrease overall performance SET DEFINE OFF SET DEFINE OFF disables the parsing of commands to replace substitution variables with their values SET FLUSH OFF SET FLUSH OFF enables the operating system to buffer output ON disables buffering and flushes output to the screen Any benefit from setting FLUSH either ON or OFF depends on your operating system and data The gain may be marginal Use OFF only when you run a script that does not require user interaction and whose output you do not need to see until the script finishes running SET FLUSH is not supported in iSQL Plus 9 12 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Script Tuning SET LINESIZE SET LINESI
259. base Dismounting the database disassociates the database from an instance and closes the control files of the database 3 Shutting down the instance Shutting down an instance reclaims the SGA from memory and terminates the background Oracle Database processes that constitute an Oracle Database instance For more information about database shutdown see the Oracle Database Concepts guide For information about stopping a database see the SHUTDOWN command on page 13 142 Database Administration with SQL Plus 11 3 Redo Log Files Example 11 5 Shutting Down the Database To shut down the database normally after it has been opened and mounted enter SHUTDOWN Database closed Database dismounted ORACLE instance shut down Redo Log Files Every Oracle database has a set of two or more redo log files The set of redo log files for a database is collectively referred to as the database s redo log The redo log is used to record changes made to data If for example there is a database failure the redo log is used to recover the database To protect against a failure involving the redo log itself Oracle Database has a mirrored redo log so that two or more copies of the redo log can be maintained on different disks ARCHIVELOG Mode Operating a database in ARCHIVELOG mode enables the archiving of the online redo log The ARCHIVE LOG command enables a complete recovery from disk failure as well as instance failure b
260. base using the password FOX you could enter CONNECT TODD FOX In the command line interface if you omit the username and password SQL Plus prompts you for them You also have the option of typing only the username following CONNECT and omitting the password SQL Plus then prompts for the password Because CONNECT first disconnects you from your current database you will be left unconnected to any database if you use an invalid username and password in your CONNECT command If you log on or connect as a user whose account has expired you are prompted to change your password before you can connect If an account is locked a message is displayed and connection as this user is not permitted until the account is unlocked by your DBA You can use the DISCONNECT command to disconnect from a database without leaving SQL Plus Changing your Password In the command line interface you can change your password with the PASSWORD command See PASSWORD on page 13 81 Changing Your Password in SQL Plus You can change your Oracle Database account password in the Change Password screen If you have logged in with DBA privileges you can change the password of other users You access the Change Password screen from the Preferences screen 4 2 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Login Username and Password 4 Logout Preferences Help Change Password Indicates required field Apply
261. base has been created with the UTF8 character set See your Oracle Database Installation Guide for information about creating your database in a character set other than US7ASCII SQL Plus Globalization Support 12 5 Setting NLS_LANG 12 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Part Ill SQL Plus Reference This section contains the SOL Plus command reference and the list of SOL Plus error messages The following chapters are covered in this section a SQL Plus Command Reference a SQL Plus Error Messages 13 SQL Plus Command Reference This chapter contains descriptions of the SQL Plus commands available in command line and iSQL Plus interfaces listed alphabetically Each description contains the following parts Section Description Syntax Shows how to enter the command and provides a brief description of the basic uses of the command See Conventions on page xxiv for an explanation of the syntax notation Terms Describes the function of each term or clause appearing in the syntax Usage Provides additional information on uses of the command and on how the command works Examples Gives one or more examples of the command A summary table that lists and briefly describes SQL Plus commands precedes the individual command descriptions You can continue a long SQL Plus command by typing a hyphen at the end of the line and pressing Return If you wish you can type a space before typing the
262. blanks at end 13 135 Index 12 LINESIZE variable 7 26 7 34 13 105 13 120 LIST clause 13 14 13 72 LIST command 6 4 13 79 determining current line 6 5 13 79 making last line current 6 5 13 79 using an asterisk 6 4 13 79 LNO clause 13 137 load script button 2 17 LOBOFFSET variable 13 105 13 120 LOCAL environment variables 3 2 LOCK TABLE command disabling 10 5 login button 2 13 2 15 Log On dialog 4 9 LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST parameter 13 14 log4j rootLogger 3 15 configuration parameter 3 4 LOGFILE clause 13 87 logging 3 15 logging off conditionally 13 168 13 170 Oracle Database 4 2 13 66 SQL Plus 4 17 13 70 logging on Oracle Database 13 48 SQL Plus 4 8 login user profile 3 7 Login screen 2 12 2 14 3 16 4 13 login sql 3 7 See glogin sql Logout xlii 4 17 LONG column definition from DESCRIBE 13 59 LONG columns changing format 13 33 default format 13 33 setting maximum width 13 105 13 121 setting retrieval size 9 13 13 105 13 121 LONG variable 13 105 13 121 effect on COPY command _ B 3 B 8 LONGCHUNKSIZE variable 7 6 13 33 13 105 13 121 13 122 LONGRAW column definition from DESCRIBE 13 59 MARKUP 4 19 8 1 SQLPLUS command clause 4 20 MARKUP 4 19 8 1 13 122 BODY clause 4 20 ENTMAP clause 4 21 HEAD clause 4 20 PREFORMAT clause 4 22 TABLE clause 4 20 MAXDATA variable C 2 C 4 media recovery 13 149 menus Windows GUI 2 4 message logging 3 15
263. ble output in same browser window Output Page Setup Set whether output is displayed on a single page or over multiple pages Single page Multiple pages Number of rows on each page pea Text at each page break System Configuration You can click one of the three entries under System Configuration in the side menu to open these further three screens a Script Formatting a Script Execution a Database Administration SQL Plus User Interface 2 21 iSQL Plus User Interface Script Formatting Click Script Formatting in the side menu to open the Script Formatting screen You use the Script Formatting screen to set options that affect the way script output is displayed Each of these options contains either a field set of radio buttons or text area to change the setting with explanatory text Z Logout Preferences Hel Script Formatting Configure settings that affect how script output is formatted and what Cancel optional information it contains o Script Describe Objects Formatting Set the depth of the level to which you can recursively describe an object I Describe all Describe depth fi Show Line Numbers On Off Indent Attribute or Column Names On Off Display Bind Variables Set whether to automatically display bind variables referenced in PL SQL blocks or EXECUTE commands On Off Display Commands Set w
264. box if you want to use a bold version of the font For more information about changing Command Prompt properties see Windows Help or click Help in the Command Prompt Properties dialog Using a Special Character in Windows To check if a font contains a particular character for example the Euro sign enter the character s decimal number equivalent in the SQL Plus command line interface For example the decimal number equivalent for the Euro sign is 128 so you would enter Alt 0128 hold Alt while pressing 0 1 2 and 8 in the numeric keypad to display it If it appears correctly the font contains the Euro sign otherwise you need to try another font You can use the Windows Character Map utility to view the characters available in a font Character Map also shows the decimal number equivalent for extended ASCII characters You access the Character Map utility by selecting Start Programs Accessories and then clicking Character Map 2 2 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Windows Graphical User Interface Windows Graphical User Interface The graphical user interface is a feature of SQL Plus only available in Windows The Windows Graphical User Interface will be obsoleted in favor of the iSQL Plus browser based user interface in a future release of SOL Plus The following image shows the SQL Plus Windows Graphical User Interface GUI running in Windows Oracle SOL Plus File Edit Search Options Help SQL Plus Release 16 1 6 2
265. browser window These elements may not align with the main output as expected due to the way they are handled for web output Entity mapping in TTITLE and BTITLE is the same as the general ENTMAP setting specified in the MARKUP command Ifyou use a title in your output then SQL Plus starts a new HTML table for output rows that appear after the title Your browser may format column widths of each table differently depending on the width of data in each column a SET COLSEP RECSEP and UNDERLINE only produce output in HTML reports when PREFORMAT is ON RESTRICT Option R ESTRICT 11213 Enables you to disable certain commands that interact with the operating system This is similar to disabling the same commands in the Product User Profile PUP table However commands disabled with the RESTRICT option are disabled even if there is no connection to a server and remain disabled until SOL Plus terminates If no RESTRICT option is active than all commands can be used unless disabled in the PUP table If RESTRICT 3 is used then LOGIN SQL is not read GLOGIN SQL is read but restricted commands used will fail Starting SQL Plus 4 23 SQLPLUS Program Syntax Logon Table 4 1 Commands Disabled by Restriction Level Command Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 EDIT disabled disabled disabled GET disabled HOST disabled disabled disabled SAVE disabled disabled SPOOL disabled disabled START disabled STORE disabled disabled
266. ce a REMARK command between different lines of a single SQL command REMARK Commission Report REMARK to be run monthly COLUMN LAST NAME HEADING LAST_NAME COLUMN SALARY HEADING MONTHLY SALARY FORMAT 99 999 COLUMN COMMISSION_PCT HEADING COMMISSION FORMAT 90 90 REMARK Includes only salesmen SELECT LAST_NAME SALARY COMMISSION_PCT FROM EMP_DETAILS VIEW WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN A ik ok Using Enter the SQL comment delimiters on separate lines in your script on the same line as a SQL command or on a line in a PL SQL block You must enter a space after the slash asterisk beginning a comment The comments can span multiple lines but cannot be nested within one another Commission Report to be run monthly COLUMN LAST_NAME HEADING LAST_NAME COLUMN SALARY HEADING MONTHLY SALARY FORMAT 99 999 COLUMN COMMISSION_PCT HEADING COMMISSION FORMAT 90 90 REMARK Includes only salesmen SELECT LAST_NAME SALARY COMMISSION_PCT FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW Include only salesmen WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN Using You can use ANSI ISO style comments within SQL statements PL SQL blocks or SQL Plus commands Since there is no ending delimiter the comment cannot span multiple lines For PL SQL and SQL enter the comment after a command on a line or on a line by itself 6 10 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Placing Comments in Scripts Commissions report to be run monthly
267. ceeseeene cesses neseneesasaeans 6 15 Defining Substitution Variables 00 00 00 cece ccs ccse teens cece cece teeseneasenesseneaeneeneseneenie 6 16 Using Predefined Variables ii ciscic scsi ede vnees ie ES E A ins sevne shins casts 6 16 Using Substitution Variables isenle toena a ane aab iiss wasn S Ea AEEA Ee Eea E an 6 17 Where and How to Use Substitution Variables ccccccccccssesssesceescesceseecseeseecseessecssesseensens 6 17 Avoiding Unnecessary Prompts for Values sssssssssssessssssssiesisstsstesiesteseessenieniesrnsnenreneese 6 20 vii viii RESELICH ONS sines nr ne hate aa si cabinet heen Raul le eal ae at 6 23 System Variables and iSQL Plus Preferences cccceeeee ee cseseseeeesessseeseesesessseeseneseneeeeees 6 23 Substitution Variables in iSQL PIUS 0 cece ceseeeeceseesececeesceeeeesceeeeescecsecsaecsecsacesecereeeeereeereees 6 24 ISOL Plus Input Required Screen sss sira edie hiii ina hdd Watashi 6 25 Passing Parameters through the START Command c cccecceccsseeeeeteeeceeseseseneeeceenseeeeeeeaes 6 26 Communicating with the User ii cscu tsestieonstsitiseinia hin uaa ities ETEEN 6 28 Receiving a Substitution Variable Value 0 0 ccc cece cece cseeeeeecececenenenenecesesenenetecenans 6 28 Customizing Prompts for Substitution Variable ccccccseseseccscseseseescseeeseecseseseseseeees 6 29 Sending a Message and Accepting Return as Input ccccc eee ceeseseseeeeseeeseneneeeneeseees
268. column named clob_col of type CLOB The clob_col contains the following data Remember to run the Departmental Salary Bill report each month This report contains confidential information To produce a report listing the data in the col_clob column enter VARIABLE T CLOB BEGIN SELECT CLOB_COL INTO T FROM CLOB_TAB END PL SQL PROCEDURE SUCCESSFULLY COMPLETED 13 166 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference VARIABLE To print 200 characters from the column clob_col enter SET LINESIZE 70 SET LONG 200 PRINT T Remember to run the Departmental Salary Bill report each month This r eport contains confidential information To set the printing position to the 21st character enter SET LOBOFFSET 21 PRINT T Departmental Salary Bill report each month This report contains confi dential information For more information on creating CLOB columns see your Oracle Database SQL Reference SQL Plus Command Reference 13 167 WHENEVER OSERROR WHENEVER OSERROR Syntax Terms WHENEVER OSERROR EXIT SUCCESS FAILURE n variable BindVariable COMMIT ROLLBACK CONTINUE COMMIT ROLLBACK NONE Performs the specified action exits SQL Plus by default if an operating system error occurs such as a file writing error In iSQL Plus performs the specified action stops the current script by default and returns focus to the Workspace if an operating system error occurs SUCCESS FAILURE
269. command line enter SJAVA_HOME bin java Djava security properties SORACLE_ HOME sqlplus admin iplus provider jar SORACLE_HOME oc4j j2ee home jazn jar user iSQL Plus DBA admin password admin password grantrole webDba i1SQL Plus DBA username Configuring SQL Plus 3 19 iSQL Plus Application Server Configuration Remove Users To remove a user using the JAZN shell enter JAZN gt remuser iSQL Plus DBA username To remove a user using the command line enter SJAVA_HOME bin java Djava security properties SORACLE_ HOME sqlplus admin iplus provider jar SORACLE_HOME oc4j j2ee home jazn jar user iSQL Plus DBA admin password admin_password remuser iSQL Plus DBA username Revoke the webDba Role To revoke a user s webDba role from the JAZN shell enter JAZN gt revokerole webDba iSQL Plus DBA username To revoke a user s webDba role from the command line enter SJAVA_HOME bin java Djava security properties SORACLE_ HOME sqlplus admin iplus provider jar SORACLE_HOME oc4j j2ee home jazn jar user iSQL Plus DBA admin password admin_password revokerole iSQL Plus DBA username Change User Passwords To change a user s password from the JAZN shell enter JAZN gt setpasswd iSQL Plus DBA username old_password new_password To change a user s password from the command line enter SJAVA_HOME bin java Djava security properties SORACLE_ HOME sqlplus admin iplus provider jar SORACLE_HOME oc4j j2ee home j
270. command to disable the restricted session feature PFILE filename Causes the specified parameter file to be used while starting up the instance If PFILE is not specified then the default STARTUP parameter file is used The default file used is platform specific For example the default file is ORACLE_HOME dbs init ORACLE_SID ora on UNIX and Y ORACLE _HOME database initORCL ora on Windows QUIET Suppresses the display of System Global Area information for the starting instance 13 148 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference STARTUP MOUNT dbname Mounts a database but does not open it dbname is the name of the database to mount or open If no database name is specified the database name is taken from the initialization parameter DB_LNAME OPEN Mounts and opens the specified database NOMOUNT Causes the database not to be mounted upon instance startup Cannot be used with MOUNT or OPEN RECOVER Specifies that media recovery should be performed if necessary before starting the instance STARTUP RECOVER has the same effect as issuing the RECOVER DATABASE command and starting an instance Only complete recovery is possible with the RECOVER option Recovery proceeds if necessary as if AUTORECOVERY is set to ON regardless of whether or not AUTORECOVERY is enabled If a redo log file is not found in the expected location recovery continues as if AUTORECOVERY is disabled by prompting you with the suggested locat
271. commands See Also SHOW on page 13 136 SET PROMPT Support for Substitution Variables You can now use substitution variables in the SQL Plus command line prompt to display for example the database and server you are connected to or other information available through a substitution variable you choose This is similar to the substitution variable usage in TTITLE See Also SET SQLP ROMPT SQL gt text on page 13 132 Predefined Variables DATE PRIVILEGE USER There are three new predefined variables a _DATE contains the current date or a user defined fixed string a _PRIVILEGE contains the privilege level of the current connect This will be either AS SYSDBA AS SYSOPER or blank to indicate a normal connection a _USER contains the username as supplied by the user to make the current connection This is the same as the output from the SHOW USER command These variables can be accessed like any other substitution variable For example they could be used in TTITLE in amp substitution variables or as your SQL Plus command line prompt by using the SET SQLPROMPT command For example to make your prompt always show your username _USER the symbol and then your connection identifier CONNECT_IDENTIFIER during your session enter SET SQLPROMPT _USER _CONNECT_IDENTIFIER gt You can view the predefined variable definitions in the same way as you view other DEFINE definitions using the DEFINE command wit
272. created but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages 0838 Trigger altered with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL trigger has been altered but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages 0839 Type created with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL type has been created but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages 0840 Type altered with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL type has been altered but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages 14 42 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0841 Type Body created with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL type body has been created but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0842 Type Body altered with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL type body has been altered but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0843 Library created with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL library has been created but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to d
273. ctionality of the commands mentioned in this chapter database administrator privileges are necessary For more information on database administration see the Oracle Database Concepts manual Special operations such as starting up or shutting down a database are performed by a database administrator DBA The DBA has certain privileges that are not assigned to normal users The commands outlined in this chapter would normally be used by a DBA For more information about security and roles in SQL Plus see Chapter 10 SQL Plus Security Database Administration with SQL Plus 11 1 Introduction to Database Startup and Shutdown Introduction to Database Startup and Shutdown An Oracle database may not always be available to all users To open or close a database or to start up or shut down an instance you must have DBA privileges or be connected as SYSOPER or SYSDBA Other users cannot change the current status of an Oracle database Database Startup Starting a database involves three steps 1 Starting an instance An instance controls the background processes and the allocation of memory area to access an Oracle database 2 Mounting the database Mounting the database associates it with a previously started instance 3 Opening the database Opening the database makes it available for normal database operations For more information about database startup see the Oracle Database Concepts guide For more information about s
274. ctions SP2 0084 COMPUTE ON keyword specified already Cause The ON keyword was specified more than once Action Specify the ON keyword once in the command SP2 0085 COMPUTE OF keyword specified already Cause The OF keyword was specified more than once Action Specify the OF keyword once in the command SP2 0087 no room to allocate COMPUTE control block for column_name Cause Unable to allocate memory to process the COMPUTE command Action Free up additional memory by closing applications not required reducing the size of the command or statement or by recoding the query to select fewer records SQL Plus Error Messages 14 5 SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0088 missing keyword_name keyword Usage STORE SET filenamel ext CRE ATE REP LACE APP END Cause Missing a keyword in the statement Action Check the syntax of the command you used for the correct options and use the keyword in the appropriate place SP2 0092 missing columns for keyword_name keyword Cause The column name was not specified for the keyword Action Specify the column name and try again SP2 0096 no more room to allocate INTO variable variable_name Cause Unable to allocate memory to process the COMPUTE command Action Free up additional memory by closing applications not required reducing the size of the command or statement or by recoding the query to select fewer records SP2 0097 no storage to allocate ON column column_na
275. d DESCRIBE PROPERTY PRICE NUMBER DESCRIPTION SYS XMLTYPE To format the DESCRIBE output use the SET command as follows SET LINESIZE 80 SET DESCRIBE DEPTH 2 SET DESCRIBE INDENT ON SET DESCRIBE LINE OFF To display the settings for the object use the SHOW command as follows SHOW DESCRIBE DESCRIBE DEPTH 2 LINENUM OFF INDENT ON DESCRIBE employee Name Null Type FIRST_NAME VARCHAR2 30 EMPADDR ADDRESS STREET VARCHAR2 20 CITY VARCHAR2 20 JOB_ID VARCHAR2 20 SALARY NUMBER 7 2 For more information on using the CREATE TYPE command see your Oracle Database SQL Reference For information about using the SET DESCRIBE and SHOW DESCRIBE commands see the SET command on page 13 103 and SHOW command on page 13 136 SQL Plus Command Reference 13 65 DISCONNECT DISCONNECT Syntax DISC ONNECT Commits pending changes to the database and logs the current username out of Oracle Database but does not exit SOL Plus Usage Use DISCONNECT within a script to prevent user access to the database when you want to log the user out of Oracle Database but have the user remain in SQL Plus In SQL Plus command line use EXIT or QUIT to log out of Oracle Database and return control to your computer s operating system In iSQL Plus click the Logout button to log out of Oracle Database Examples Your script might begin with aCONNECT command and end with a DISCONNECT as shown later CONNECT H
276. d in the Password field 14 50 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference iSQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0912 Only a connect identifier is allowed in the connection identifier field Cause An attempt was made to enter a value other than a valid connection identifier in the iSQL Plus Login screen Connection Identifier field Action Only a valid connection identifier or a valid alias is allowed in the Connection Identifier field SP2 0913 No keywords recognised by iSQL Plus Cause An attempt was made to request a service from iSQL Plus by manually typing in the URL but no keywords could be recognized Action Refer to the iSQL Plus documentation for the syntax and types of service that can be manually entered in a URL SP2 0914 Value value for keyword keyword not recognised by iSQL Plus Cause An attempt was made to request a service from iSQL Plus by manually typing in the URL but the value specified for a keyword was not recognized Action Refer to the iSQL Plus documentation for the syntax and types of service that can be manually entered in a URL SP2 0915 Cookies may have been disabled Cause After logging in iSQL Plus can only process further requests if cookies are enabled on your browser Action Enable cookies on your browser and log in again SP2 0916 Scheme scheme not supported Cause iSQL Plus only supports HTTP HTTPS and FTP Action Change the scheme to one that is supported SP2 0917 User requested canc
277. d the Oracle Advanced Security Administrator s Guide Enabling or Disabling SQL Plus or SQL Plus Help You can edit the Application Server configuration file to disable iSQL Plus To disable iSQL Plus 1 Stop the Application Server 2 Open server xml located in 0RACLE_HOME oc4j j2ee isqplus config 3 Find the application tag for iSQL Plus It has the form lt application name isqlplus gt and wrap with the comment tags lt and gt The syntax of the line to change in the configuration file to disable or enable iSQL Plus is lt application name isqlplus path applications isqlplus ear auto start true gt or to enable or disable iSQL Plus Help the application tag has the form lt application name isqlplushelp gt The syntax of the line to change in the configuration file to disable or enable SQL Plus Help is lt application name isqlplushelp path applications isqlplushelp ear auto start true gt 4 Start the Application Server Enabling User Defined HTML Markup The iSQLPlusAllowUserMarkup configuration option controls whether an iSQL Plus Application Server enables users to use custom HTML in scripts You can edit the configuration file web xml to set iSQLPlusAllowUserMarkup ON or OFF The web xml file is located in the directory SORACLE_HOME o0c4j j2ee o0c4j_applications applications isqlplus isqlplus WEB INF 3 24 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference iSQL Plus Web Browser Con
278. d with an asterisk when you list the current command or block Example 6 2 Listing the Buffer Contents Suppose you want to list the current command Use the LIST command as shown If you have exited SQL Plus or entered another SQL command or PL SQL block since following the steps in Example 5 3 Entering a SQL Command perform the steps in that example again before continuing LIST 6 4 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Editing Scripts in SQL Plus Command Line SELECT EMPLOYEE_ID LAST_NAME JOB_ID SALARY 2 FROM EMP_DETAILS VIEW 3 WHERE SALARY gt 12000 Notice that the semicolon you entered at the end of the SELECT command is not listed This semicolon is necessary to indicate the end of the command when you enter it but it is not part of the SQL command and SQL Plus does not store it in the SQL buffer Editing the Current Line The SQL Plus CHANGE command enables you to edit the current line Various actions determine which line is the current line a LIST a given line to make it the current line a When you LIST or RUN the command in the buffer the last line of the command becomes the current line Note that using the slash command to run the command in the buffer does not affect the current line a Ifyou get an error the error line automatically becomes the current line Example 6 3 Making an Error in Command Entry Suppose you try to select the JOB_ID column but mistakenly enter it as JO_ID Ent
279. dit menu Run the file using the START or RUN commands from the SQL Plus command prompt Save As The Save As option saves the contents of the SQL Plus buffer in a script SAVE filename By default SQL Plus assigns the SQL extension to scripts You can specify a ia different extension in the File name text box Spool The Spool option has two alternatives Spool File and Spool Off The Spool File option is the same as the SPOOL command with the REPLACE option SQL Plus for Windows does not support the SPOOL OUT option Spool File stores query results in a file By default SOL Plus assigns the SPOOL LST extension to spool files You can specify a different extension in the filename File name text box You can edit the results with the Editor option on the REP ACE Edit menu and print the file from a Windows text editor Spool Off turns off spooling SPOOL OFF Run The Run option lists and executes the SQL command or PL SQL block RUN currently stored in the SQL buffer Typically this will be the last statement that was executed Cancel The Cancel option cancels an in progress operation Ctrl C EIEC The Cancel keyboard shortcut is only available when a SQL operation is running in the SQL Plus session When no SQL Plus operation is running Ctrl C copies selected text Exit The Exit option commits all pending database changes and closes the EXIT SQL Plus application window SQL Plus User Interface 2 5 Windows Graphical User Interface
280. double quotation marks slash pipe 1 and dash The special character backslash is treated as an element separator even when it appears in quotes If the file name begins with then Windows assumes it uses the Universal Naming Convention C gt Represents the Windows command C oracle oradata gt Special characters HOME_NAME xxviii prompt of the current hard disk drive The escape character in a command prompt is the caret Your prompt reflects the subdirectory in which you are working Referred to as the command prompt in this manual The backslash special character is sometimes required as an escape character for the double quotation mark special character at the Windows command prompt Parentheses and the single quotation mark do not require an escape character Refer to your Windows operating system documentation for more information on escape and special characters Represents the Oracle Database home name The home name can be up to 16 alphanumeric characters The only special character allowed in the home name is the underscore C gt exp scott tiger TABLES emp QUERY WHERE job SALESMAN and sal lt 1600 C gt imp SYSTEM password FROM USER scott TABLES emp dept C gt net start OracleHOME_NAMETNSListener Convention Meaning Example ORACLE _HOME In releases prior to Oracle8i release 8 1 3 Go to the and ORACLE_ when you installed Oracle Database ORACLE
281. e BTITLE position_clause s char_value position_clause s char_value 7 24 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions REPHEADER position_clause s char_value position_clause s char_value REPFOOTER position_clause s char_value position_clause s char_value For descriptions of all TTITLE BTITLE REPHEADER and REPFOOTER clauses see the TTITLE and REPHEADER commands in Chapter 13 SQL Plus Command Reference Example 7 18 Placing a Top and Bottom Title on a Page To put titles at the top and bottom of each page of a report enter TTITLE CENTER ACME SALES DEPARTMENT PERSONNEL REPORT BTITLE CENTER COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL Now run the current query ACME SALES DEPARTMENT PERSONNEL REPORT DEPARTMENT_ID LAST _NAME SALARY 30 Colmenares 2500 30 Himuro 2600 30 Tobias 2800 30 Baida 2900 30 Khoo 3100 30 Raphaely 11000 COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL 6 rows selected Example 7 19 Placing a Header on a Report To put a report header on a separate page and to center it enter REPHEADER PAGE CENTER PERFECT WIDGETS Now run the current query which displays the following two pages of output with the new REPHEADER displayed on the first page Formatting SQL Plus Reports 7 25 Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions ACME SALES DEPARTMENT PERSONNEL REPORT PERFECT WIDGETS COMPANY CONFIDENTIAL ACME SALES DEPARTMENT PERSONNEL REPOR
282. e installation To Start the SQL Plus Application Server on Unix 1 Start a terminal session 2 Enter SORACLE_HOME bin isqlplusctl start The iSQL Plus Application Server is started To Start the SQL Plus Application Server on Windows 1 Select Services from the Start gt Programs gt Administrative Tools menu 2 Locate the iSOL Plus Windows Service OracleOracleHomeNameiSQL Plus 3 Start the Windows Service Alternatively you can start iSQL Plus from a command prompt Starting SQL Plus 4 11 Starting SQL Plus To Start SSQL Plus Application Server from a Command Prompt 1 2 Start a command prompt session Enter SORACLE_HOME bin isqlplusctl start The iSQL Plus Application Server is started To Test If the SSQL Plus Application Server Has Started Correctly 1 Enter the iSQL Plus URL in your web browser The iSQL Plus URL is in the form http machine_name 5560 isqlplus iSQL Plus uses HTTP port 5560 by default If iSQL Plus is not available on port 5560 read the ORACLE_HOME install portlist ini file to find the port on which iSQL Plus is running Enter one of the following URLs from a web browser on the machine running the iSQL Plus Application Server if you do not know the iSQL Plus URL http 127 0 0 1 5560 isqlplus http localhost 5560 isqlplus The iSQL Plus Login screen should be displayed Enter the same URL you used in step 2 without isqlplus if the iSQL Plus Login screen wa
283. e 7 27 13 156 suppressing current definition 7 30 13 156 TAB clause 13 156 tuning SET APPINFO OFF 9 12 SET ARRAYSIZE 9 12 SET DEFINE OFF 9 12 SET FLUSH OFF 9 12 SET TRIMOUT ON 9 14 SET TRIMSPOOL ON 9 14 SQL Plus 9 1 system variables 9 11 TWO_TASK environment variables 3 3 U om Cee Cease U NDEFINE command 6 16 13 159 and DEFINE command 13 51 NDERLINE variable 13 107 13 135 unicode NIX ed 13 54 unlocking sample tables xl 1 6 NTIL CANCEL clause 13 88 NTIL CHANGE clause 13 88 NTIL CONTROLFILE clause NTIL TIME clause 13 88 PDATE command disabling 10 5 RL running dynamic reports 8 8 starting iSQL Plus 4 14 SER clause 13 139 13 89 user profile 3 7 glogin sql 3 7 login sql 3 7 See also site profile user variable See substitution variable username 4 1 connecting under different 4 2 13 48 field 2 12 2 15 4 3 in CONNECT command 4 2 13 48 in COPY command B 5 B 7 B 9 in SQLPLUS command 4 8 4 24 USING BACKUP CONTROL FILE clause 13 88 USING clause B 3 B 6 UTF 8 V V SESSION virtual table 13 107 V SQLAREA virtual table 13 107 value area 2 7 value screen area 2 7 VARCHAR columns V default format 7 6 ARCHAR2 column definition from DESCRIBE 13 59 Index 23 VARCHAR clause VARIABLE command 13 161 VARCHAR columns changing format 13 33 default format 7 6 VARIABLE command 13 160 BINARY_DOUBLE clause 13 162
284. e ACCEPT command 13 11 VARIABLE command 13 162 BINARY_FLOAT clause ACCEPT command 13 11 VARIABLE command 13 161 bind variables 6 32 creating 13 160 displaying 13 83 displaying automatically 13 109 13 162 in PL SQL blocks 13 162 in SQL statements 13 162 in the COPY command 13 162 blank line in PL SQL blocks 5 8 inSQL commands 5 7 preserving inSQL commands 13 106 13 129 blocks PL SQL continuing 5 8 editing in buffer 6 3 editing with system editor 6 2 13 67 entering and executing 5 8 listing current in buffer 6 4 saving current 13 101 setting character used toend 13 104 13 111 stored in SQL buffer 5 8 timing statistics 13 134 within SQL commands 5 9 BLOCKTERMINATOR 13 104 13 111 13 129 13 133 BODY clause 4 20 BODY option 4 20 BOLD clause 13 98 13 157 break columns 7 12 13 19 inserting space when value changes 7 14 specifying multiple 7 15 suppressing duplicate values in 7 13 BREAK command 7 12 13 19 and SQL ORDER BY clause 7 12 7 13 7 15 13 20 clearing BREAKS 7 16 displaying column values in titles 7 31 DUPLICATES clause 13 22 inserting space after every row 7 15 inserting space when break column changes 7 14 listing current break definition 7 16 13 22 ON column clause 7 13 13 19 ON expr clause 13 20 ON REPORT clause 7 21 13 21 ON ROW clause 7 15 13 21 printing grand and sub summaries 7 21 printing summary lines at ends of reports 7 21 removing definition 1
285. e SQL buffer contains the following script SELECT DEPARTMENT_ID FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 To RUN the script enter RUN 1 SELECT DEPARTMENT_ID 2 FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW 3 WHERE SALARY gt 12000 DEPARTMENT_ID 6 rows selected 13 100 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SAVE SAVE Syntax Terms Usage SAVE is not available in iSQL Plus In iSQL Plus use Save Script SAVE FILE file_namef ext CRE ATE REP LACE APP END Saves the contents of the SQL buffer in an operating system script In iSQL Plus click the Save Script button to save the Input area contents to a script The buffer has no command history list and does not record SQL Plus commands FILE Keyword to specify that the following argument is the name you want to give to the saved script This optional keyword is usually omitted If you want to save the script with the name file because it is a command keyword you need to put the name file in single quotes file_name exf Specifies the script in which you wish to save the buffer s contents CREATE Creates a new file with the name specified This is the default behavior REP LACE Replaces the contents of an existing file If the file does not exist REPLACE creates the file APP END Adds the contents of the buffer to the end of the file you specify If you do not specify an extension SQL Plus assumes the default command file extension normally S
286. e a HTML report containing your query results This chapter covers the following topics Creating Reports using Command line SQL Plus Creating Reports using iSQL Plus Creating Reports using Command line SQL Plus In addition to plain text output the SQL Plus command line interface enables you to generate either a complete web page or HTML output which can be embedded in a web page You can use SQLPLUS MARKUP HTML ON or SET MARKUP HTML ON SPOOL ON to produce complete HTML pages automatically encapsulated with lt HTML gt and lt BODY gt tags By default data retrieved with MARKUP HTML ON is output in HTML though you can optionally direct output to the HTML lt PRE gt tag so that it displays ina web browser exactly as it appears in SQL Plus See the SQLPLUS MARKUP Options on page 4 19 and the SET MARKUP command on page 13 103 for more information about these commands SQLPLUS MARKUP HTML ON is useful when embedding SQL Plus in program scripts On starting it outputs the HTML and BODY tags before executing any commands All subsequent output is in HTML until SQL Plus terminates The SILENT and RESTRICT command line options may be effectively used with MARKUP to suppress the display of SOL Plus prompt and banner information and to restrict the use of some commands SET MARKUP HTML ON SPOOL ON generates an HTML page for each subsequently spooled file The HTML tags in a spool file are closed when SPOOL OFF is executed o
287. e a aa araa aa aa e a a a a a a Sa ai eiA 13 136 SHUTDOWN tooo ke corecsteerr eke ese e ae ee ee ee 13 142 S POO I EEEE A Sete ca na ecu ed oh knee Sek acevo S A eats Soe T 13 144 STAR Darrin a a ea a dita A rei E AT E alae 13 146 STARTU P a E a a r a a ra Blas tebe lah Ki raaa E aaea iaae eria ranis 13 148 STORE pe e desis a WALA en ea opel Mees a E Ae Es kee ede 13 152 TIMING 2 32 5 9 22h ite ees tee ie kis Site aches athe a sch acai lee Boe hee 13 153 a E E PLE 22 ca caves cagze sac burt E E E EE E EEE EE A ES 13 155 UNDEFIN 200 0523 0c r E E es ee R AA ae ae 13 159 VARTA BLE EEE A E T E E S EIEEE 13 160 WHENEVER OSERROR sss 3045 5 co cc ic2i egeesscndiedecsens Osh Ais Suen loceiedens lactis lee bhesocedeesteevessceiens 13 168 WHENEVER SOLERRO Re ees ee beeen de ee i as 13 170 SQL Plus Error Messages SOE Plus Error Message ives ccststessshescsvesacnereteesseherteves Steautavenecbeu dhesvaseucenss eth A E i 14 1 ISOL Plus Error Messages 3 monne eaa E E a R A 14 45 COPY Command Messages e esesesesisisieisissserisisiirirtsssnesisesirenintenenesinisinenenteneneninenietnrenenenes 14 54 Part IV SQL Plus Appendixes A SQL Plus Limits SQL Plus COPY Command COPY Command Syntax cccceceseseeeeeeeeeseneeeees Copying Data from One Database to Another Copying Data between Tables on One Database C Obsolete SQL Plus Commands D SQL Plus Obsolete Command Alternatives BTI TLE text obsolete old fo
288. e and password SQL Plus prompts you for them If you enter a slash or enter Return or click Execute when prompted for username SQL Plus logs you in using a default logon See slash on page 13 10 for more information If you omit only password SQL Plus prompts you for password When prompting SQL Plus does not display password on your terminal screen See the PASSWORD command on page 13 81 for information about changing your password in SQL Plus and see Changing Your Password in iSQL Plus on page 4 2 for information about changing passwords in iSQL Plus connect_identifier An Oracle Net connect identifier The exact syntax depends on the Oracle Net communications protocol your Oracle Database installation uses For more information refer to the Oracle Net manual for your protocol or contact your DBA SQL Plus does not prompt for a service name but uses your default database if you do not include a connect identifier slash Represents a default logon using operating system authentication You cannot enter a connect_identifier if you use a default logon In a default logon SQL Plus typically attempts to log you in using the username OPS name where name is your operating system username See the Oracle Database Administrator s Guide for information about operating system authentication 13 48 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference CONNECT Usage Examples AS SYSOPER SYSDBA The AS clause enables privileg
289. e function COMPUTE must appear before each LABEL keyword Action Check the syntax of the COMPUTE command for the correct usage SP2 0591 Unable to allocate dynamic space needed number_of_bytes bytes Try reducing ARRAYSIZE or the number of columns selected Cause Unable to allocate memory to process the command Action Free up additional memory by closing applications not required reducing the size of the command or statement or by recoding the query to select fewer records SP2 0593 Label text must follow the LABEL keyword Cause Missing label text about the LABEL keyword in the COMPUTE command Action Check the syntax of the COMPUTE command for the correct options SP2 0594 Usage SET COLSEP text Cause An invalid option was used in the SET COLSEP command Action Specify a valid option SP2 0596 Usage SET AUTO COMMIT OFF ON IMM EDIATE n Cause An invalid option was used in the SET AUTO COMMIT command Action Check the syntax of the SET AUTOCOMMIT command for the correct options SP2 0597 datatype _name is not a valid datatype _name format Cause The value entered in the ACCEPT command was not in the specified datatype Action Correct the datatype and re enter SQL Plus Error Messages 14 23 SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0598 value_name does not match input format format_name Cause The value entered in the ACCEPT command was not in the specified format Action Correct the format
290. e has no effect on that item If no appropriate FORMAT model precedes a given data item SQL Plus prints NUMBER values using the format specified by SET NUMFORMAT or if you have not used SET NUMFORMAT the default format SQL Plus prints DATE values according to the default format Enter TTITLE with no clauses to list the current TTITLE definition If you do not enter a printspec clause before the first occurrence of text TTITLE left justifies the text SOL Plus interprets TTITLE in the new form if a valid printspec clause LEFT SKIP COL and so on immediately follows the command name See COLUMN on page 13 31 for information on printing column and DATE values in the top title You can use any number of constants and variables in a printspec SQL Plus displays them in the order you specify them positioning and formatting each constant or variable as specified by the printspec clauses that precede it The length of the title you specify with TTITLE cannot exceed 2400 characters The continuation character a hyphen will not be recognized inside a single quoted title text string To be recognized the continuation character must appear outside the quotes as follows TTITLE CENTER Summary Report for gt the Month of May SQL Plus Command Reference 13 157 TTITLE Examples To define Monthly Analysis as the top title and to left align it to center the date to right align the page number with a three digit format a
291. e information on AUTOTRACE See Tracing Statements on page 9 1 for more information on AUTOTRACE SET BLO CKTERMINATOR c ON OFF Sets the character used to end PL SQL blocks to c It cannot be an alphanumeric character or a whitespace To execute the block you must issue a RUN or slash command OFF means that SQL Plus recognizes no PL SQL block terminator ON changes the value of c back to the default period not the most recently used character SET CMDS EP c ON OFF Example Sets the non alphanumeric character used to separate multiple SQL Plus commands entered on one line to c ON or OFF controls whether you can enter multiple commands on a line ON automatically sets the command separator character to a semicolon To specify a title with TTITLE and format a column with COLUMN both on the same line enter SET CMDSEP TTITLE LEFT SALARIES COLUMN SALARY FORMAT 99 999 SELECT LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE JOB_ID SH_CLERK SQL Plus Command Reference 13 111 SET COLSEP text SALARIES LAST_NAME SALARY Taylor 3 200 Fleaur 3 100 Sullivan 2 500 Geoni 2 800 Sarchand 4 200 Bull 4 100 Dellinger 3 400 Cabrio 3 000 Chung 3 800 Dilly 3 600 Gates 2 900 Perkins 2 500 Bell 4 000 Everett 3 900 McCain 3 200 Jones 2 800 SALARIES LAST_NAME SALARY Walsh 3 100 Feeney 3 000 OConnel1 2 600 Grant 2 600 20 rows selected SET COLS
292. e is sufficient space on the destination device a Check the statement for a typing mistake in the directory name Then issue the statement again after correcting the directory name SP2 0111 Cannot close save file file_name Cause The file was in use Action Release the file from the other process SP2 0116 Illegal SAVE command Cause An invalid option was used in the SAVE command Action Check the syntax of the SAVE command for the correct options SP2 0134 no symbols currently defined Cause No DEFINE symbols were defined Action No action required SP2 0135 Symbol symbol_name is UNDEFINED Cause The specified symbol was undefined Action Re enter the DEFINE command with an assignment clause or a valid symbol or variable name SP2 0136 DEFINE requires an equal sign Cause Expecting an equal sign after a symbol or variable name in the DEFINE command Action Specify an equal sign after the symbol or variable name SP2 0137 DEFINE requires a value following equal sign Cause There was no value for the variable or symbol SOL Plus expected a value to be assigned to a symbol or variable name after the equal sign Action Specify a value for the symbol or variable 14 8 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0138 no room to add substitution variable variable Cause Maximum number of variables that can be defined in a SQL Plus session was exceeded Action UNDEFINE any unu
293. e on each of the four Preferences screens and the equivalent system variables that can be set using the SET command Table 2 1 Interface Configuration iSQL Plus Preference Equivalent SET Command History Size Not applicable Input Area Size Not applicable Not applicable Output Location SET PAGESIZE SET PAUSE Output Page Setup SQL Plus User Interface 2 25 Preferences and Equivalent SET Commands Table 2 2 Script Formatting iSQL Plus Preference Equivalent SET Command Describe Objects Display Bind Variables Display Commands Display Headings Display Record Count Display Server Output Display Substitution Variables HTML HEAD Tag HTML BODY Tag HTML TABLE Tag Line Size Map Special Characters to HTML Entities Null Text Number Format Number Width Preformatted Output Column Separator Display Record Separator Headings on Multiple Lines Underline Headings Start Output Timing Statistics Wrap Lines SET DESCRIBE SET AUTOPRINT SET ECHO SET HEADING SET FEEDBACK SET SERVEROUTPUT SET VERIFY SET MARKUP HTML HEAD SET MARKUP HTML BODY SET MARKUP HTML TABLE SET LINESIZE SET MARKUP HTML ENTMAP SET NULL SET NUMFORMAT SET NUMWIDTH SET MARKUP HTML PREFORMAT SET COLSEP SET RECSEP SET RECSEPCHAR SET HEADSEP SET UNDERLINE SET EMBEDDED SET TIMIMG SET WRAP 2 26 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Preferences and Equivalent SET Commands Table 2 3 Script Executi
294. e substitution occurs each time SQLPROMPT is SET If SQLPROMPT is included in glogin sql then substitution variables in SQLPROMPT are refreshed with each login or connect You need the Select Any Table privilege to successfully run the following example scripts To change your SQL Plus prompt to display your connection identifier enter SET SQLPROMPT _CONNECT_IDENTIFIER gt 13 132 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary To set the SQL Plus command prompt to show the current user enter SET SQLPROMPT _USER gt To change your SQL Plus prompt to display your the current date the current user and the users privilege level enter SET SQLPROMPT _DATE _USER _PRIVILEGE gt To change your SQL Plus prompt to display a variable you have defined enter DEFINE mycon Prod1 SET SQLPROMPT mycon gt Prod1 gt Text in nested quotes is not parsed for substitution To have a SQL Plus prompt of your username followed by and then your connection identifier enter SET SQLPROMPT _USER _CONNECT_IDENTIFIER gt SET SQLT ERMINATOR c ON OFF Sets the character used to end script or data entry for PL SQL blocks or SQL statements to execute the script and to load it into the buffer It cannot be an alphanumeric character or a whitespace OFF means that SQL Plus recognizes no command terminator you terminate a SQL command by entering an empty line or a slash If SQLB
295. e the object resides If you omit schema SQL Plus assumes you own object object Represents the table view type procedure function package or synonym you wish to describe connect_identifier Consists of the database link name corresponding to the database where object exists For more information on which privileges allow access to another table in a different schema refer to the Oracle Database SQL Reference The description for tables views types and synonyms contains the following information a each column s name a whether or not null values are allowed NULL or NOT NULL for each column datatype of columns for example CHAR DATE LONG LONGRAW NUMBER RAW ROWID VARCHAR2 VARCHAR or XMLType precision of columns and scale if any for a numeric column When you do a DESCRIBE VARCHAR columns are returned with a type of VARCHAR2 The DESCRIBE command enables you to describe objects recursively to the depth level set in the SET DESCRIBE command You can also display the line number and SQL Plus Command Reference 13 59 DESCRIBE indentation of the attribute or column name when an object contains multiple object types For more information see the SET command later in this chapter To control the width of the data displayed use the SET LINESIZE command Columns output for the DESCRIBE command are typically allocated a proportion of the linesize currently specified Decreasing or increasing the l
296. e username for example scott tiger and simultaneously put the password in the Password field of the Login screen The password should appear once only This error occurs when iSQL Plus can t determine what password you intended to use SQL Plus Error Messages 14 45 iSQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0855 Connect identifier cannot be entered twice Cause An error occurred while trying to read the connection identifier in the Connection Identifier field of the iSQL Plus Login screen Action If the full connection syntax is used in the Username field for example username password connect_identifier then the Connection Identifier field must be empty SP2 0856 Usage CONN ECT username password connect_identifier AS SYSOPER SYSDBA or CONNIECT connect_identifier AS SYSOPER SYSDBA Cause iSQL Plus was unable to connect to an Oracle instance or the username and password were incorrect An incomplete or incorrect CONNECT command was specified in an iSQL Plus script Action All authentication information must be included in the CONNECT command in iSQL Plus Make sure that both a username and password are used SP2 0858 Usage SET MARKUP HTML ON HEAD text BODY text TABLE text PRE FORMAT ON OFF Cause An invalid option to SET MARKUP was entered in iSQL Plus Action Remove the invalid option SP2 0860 For a list of known commands enter HELP Cause An invalid command sequence was entered Action Use
297. ecause all changes made to the database are permanently saved in an archived redo log For more information about redo log files and database archiving modes see the Oracle Database Concepts manual and the ARCHIVE LOG command on page 13 14 To automatically begin archiving enter ARCHIVE LOG START 11 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Database Recovery To list the details of the current log file being archived enter ARCHIVE LOG LIST Database log mode Archive Mode Automatic archival Enabled Archive destination vobs oracle dbs arch Oldest online log sequence 221 Next log sequence to archive 222 Current log sequence 222 Database Recovery If a damaged database is in ARCHIVELOG mode it is a candidate for either complete media recovery or incomplete media recovery operations To begin media recovery operations use the RECOVER command For more information about recovering data see the RECOVER command on page 13 85 Because of possible network timeouts it is recommended that you use SQL Plus command line not iSQL Plus for long running DBA operations such as RECOVER In order to begin recovery operations you must have DBA privileges To recover the database up to a specified time using a control backup file enter RECOVER DATABASE UNTIL TIME 1998 11 23 12 47 30 USING BACKUP CONTROLFILE To recover two offline tablespaces enter RECOVER TABLESPACE ts1 ts2 Make sure that the tablespaces you are i
298. ecified for the command Action Check the syntax of the command you used for the correct options SP2 0308 cannot close spool file Cause The file is currently being used Action Release the file from the other process SP2 0309 SOL Plus command procedures may only be nested to a depth of number_of_nested_procedures Cause Maximum number of nested procedures or scripts was reached Action Reduce the number of nested procedures or scripts SP2 0310 unable to open file file_name Cause Unable to open the specified file Action Check and make sure the file name is valid SP2 0311 string expected but not found Cause SQL Plus was expecting a string at the end of the command but could not find it Action Retry the command with a valid string Check the syntax of the command you used for the correct options 14 14 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0312 missing terminating quote quote_type Cause The DESCRIBE command schema or object did not have a terminating quote Action Close the opening quotation mark with the corresponding closing quotation mark SP2 0317 expected symbol name is missing Cause SQL Plus was expecting a symbol but it was not specified Action Check the syntax of the command you used for the correct options SP2 0318 symbol name beginning variable_name is too long max max_name_ length Illegal variable name variable_name Cause Specified variable name
299. ect the current SQL Plus session For example setting an operating system environment variable only affects SQL Plus sessions started subsequently You can disable HOST For more information about disabling HOST see Chapter 10 SOQL Plus Security In some operating systems you can use a character in place of HOST such as in Windows or in UNIX or you may not have access to the HOST command See the platform specific Oracle documentation provided for your operating system or ask your DBA for more information On some platforms an _RC substitution variable may be created with a HOST return value that is operation system dependent It is recommended that you do not use the _RC substitution variable in scripts as it is not portable SQL Plus removes the SQLTERMINATOR a semicolon by default before the HOST command is issued A workaround for this is to add another SQLTERMINATOR See SET SOLT ERMINATOR c ON OFF on page 13 133 for more information SQL Plus Command Reference 13 75 HOST Examples To execute a UNIX operating system command Is sql enter HOST 1s sql To execute a Windows operating system command dir sql enter HOST dir sql 13 76 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference INPUT INPUT Syntax Usage Examples INPUT is not available in iSQL Plus I NPUT tex where text represents the text you wish to add Adds one or more new lines of text after the current line
300. ed connections by users who have been granted SYSOPER or SYSDBA system privileges You can use either of these privileged connections with the default logon For information about system privileges see the Oracle Database Administrator s Guide CONNECT commits the current transaction to the database disconnects the current username from Oracle Database and reconnects with the specified username If you log on or connect as a user whose account has expired SQL Plus prompts you to change your password before you can connect If an account is locked a message is displayed and connection into that account as that user is not permitted until the account is unlocked by your DBA For more information about user account management refer to the CREATE USER ALTER USER and the CREATE PROFILE commands in the Oracle Database SQL Reference To connect across Oracle Net with username HR and password HR to the database known by the Oracle Net alias as FLEETDB enter CONNECT HR your_password FLEETDB To connect as user HR letting SQL Plus prompt you for the password enter CONNECT HR For more information about setting up your password file refer to the Oracle Database Administrator s Guide To use a password file to connect to an instance on the current node as a privileged user named HR with the password HR enter CONNECT HR your_password AS SYSDBA To connect to an instance on the current node as a privileged default user enter
301. ed in terminal output Unless this significantly reduces the written data the processing required may marginally outweigh any benefit SET TAB is not supported in iSQL Plus SET TERMOUT SET TERMOUT OFF suppresses the display so that you can spool output from a script without seeing it on the screen If both spooling to file and writing to terminal are not required use SET TERMOUT OFF in SQL scripts to disable terminal output SET TERMOUT is not supported in iSQL Plus SET TRIMOUT ON SET TRIMSPOOL ON UNDEFINE SET TRIMOUT ON or SET TRIMSPOOL ON removes trailing blanks at the end of each displayed or spooled line Setting these variables ON can reduce the amount of data written However if LINESIZE is optimal it may be faster to set the variables OFF The SQL Plus output line is blank filled throughout the query processing routines so removing the spaces could take extra effort SET TRIMOUT and SET TRIMSPOOL are not supported in iSQL Plus Deletes substitution variables that you defined either explicitly with the DEFINE command or implicitly with an argument to the START command or COLUMN NEWVAL OLDVAL Use the UNDEFINE command to remove unnecessary substitution variables This can reduce the time taken for any operation that uses amp new_value or old_value variables 9 14 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference 10 SQL Plus Security This chapter describes the available methods for controlling access to d
302. ed screen for you to enter a value for the substitution variable variable Represents the name of the variable in which you wish to store a value If variable does not exist SOL Plus creates it NUM BER Makes the variable a NUMBER datatype If the reply does not match the datatype ACCEPT gives an error message and prompts again CHAR Makes the variable a CHAR datatype The maximum CHAR length is 240 bytes If a multi byte character set is used one CHAR may be more than one byte in size DATE Makes reply a valid DATE format If the reply is not a valid DATE format ACCEPT gives an error message and prompts again The datatype is CHAR BINARY_FLOAT Makes the variable a BINARY_FLOAT datatype BINARY_DOUBLE Makes the variable a BINARY_DOUBLE datatype FOR MAT Specifies the input format for the reply If the reply does not match the specified format ACCEPT gives an error message and prompts again If an attempt is made to enter more characters than are specified by the char format an error message is given and the value must be reentered If an attempt is made to enter a greater number precision than is specified by the number format an error message is given and the value must be reentered The format element must be a text constant such as A10 or 9 999 See COLUMN FORMAT on page 13 31 for a complete list of format elements SQL Plus Command Reference 13 11 ACCEPT Examples Oracle Database date formats such as dd
303. ed to restrict connections to specific databases If restricted database access has been enabled a dropdown list of available databases is displayed in place of the Connection Identifier text field This enables greater security for iSQL Plus Servers in hosted environments This is configured using the iSQLPlusConnectIdList parameter in the configuration file See the Oracle Net Services Administrator s Guide for more information about defining connection identifiers Login Click the Login button to log in to iSQL Plus If you enter an invalid username or password the Login screen is re displayed with an error message iSQL Plus DBA Login Screen You can log in to iSQL Plus with SYSDBA or SYSOPER privileges to perform database administration and run DBA commands through iSQL Plus You must authenticate with the Application Server and have Oracle SYSDBA or SYSOPER privileges To connect with either SYSDBA or SYSOPER privileges your username and password must be added to the Application Server authentication file To add usernames and passwords for DBA Login see Chapter 6 Security in the SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Because of possible HTTP network timeouts it is recommended that you use command line SQL Plus for long running DBA operations To log in with SYSDBA or SYSOPER privileges you must enter the iSQL Plus DBA URL in the Location Address field of your web browser The iSQL Plus DBA URL is in the form http machine
304. ee up additional memory by closing applications not required reducing the size of the command or statement or by recoding the query to select fewer records SP2 0246 Illegal FORMAT string column_ format_name Cause An invalid format was specified for the column Action Specify a valid format for the column SQL Plus Error Messages 14 11 SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0249 variable_name not a valid variable type for printing Cause The specified variable is not valid for printing Action Check the variable type before re typing the command SP2 0253 data item line_number data_item_name will not fit on line Cause The current line size setting is too small to fit the specified data item on a line Action Increase the line size so that the item can be displayed SP2 0258 could not create variable variable_name for column column_name Cause The specified variable could not be created for column internal error or out of memory Action Check memory usage SP2 0259 could not create variable variable_name for COMPUTE INTO Cause The specified variable could not be created Action Check the syntax of the command you used for the correct options SP2 0260 computation for column column_name not uniquely qualified could be for table table_name or table_name computation ignored Cause The specified column was not uniquely qualified in the statement Action Check the syntax of the command you used for the correct
305. eee csescseecesecsescseecesssssssseesesesseesesesessseeeeseneneee 3 10 Configuring Oracle Net Services cccccecescsssssesesecsesecesscssssseesesesssssseesesessssesesesesssseesesesenees 3 12 iSQL Plus Application Server Configuration cccceceseesseesecseteeeceeseseneeseeesesseecessssesenanens 3 12 Changing the iSQL Plus Application Server Port in Use ccc eee ee ee seessseeeeeeeneee 3 12 Testing if the iSQL Plus Application Server is RUNNING cece esses cee sessssseseeeneeeee 3 14 Setting the Level of iSQL Plus Logging cccc cece ee cseseseeeecesssseseesesesssseeesesessseeesenenees 3 15 Setting the Session Time Out serinus betaine E E ealaniastin anaiaaguiaeates 3 15 Enabling or Disabling Restricted Database ACCESS cceceeecseseseseesetesssseeeetesesseseseseneneee 3 16 Enabling SOL Plus DBAvA CCOSS oirn E E A E A 3 17 Enabling SSL with SOL PluS niisiis ona oetsdeteniatiedectosveis eesessesetvasdeens 3 21 Enabling or Disabling iSQL Plus or iSQL Plus Help eee cesses eesessssseseseeneee 3 24 Enabling User Defined HTML Markup o ccccccccesesesesecsenesesesssssseesesesssssesesesesssssesesenenees 3 24 iSQL Plus Web Browser Configuration ccccccccccesesessesesesenseececeeseeeseesesesseseessessesesessesenaness 3 25 Session Integrity yiyin ee e a a E E A ae e aa E Eai 3 25 Retained Session Settings nsissnnsn nsan hiia aar i eisat iett 3 26 Windows Graphical User Interface Configuration ss sse
306. eeseeeeeeeteneeseneneneneeneees 7 13 Inserting Space when a Break Column s Value Changes ccccccceceeeesessssseneneeeneeeeees 7 14 Inserting Space after Every ROW cccccsescessssssesesesescsesesesescsesesesesescsesesesesescsesesesescseseseseseees 7 15 Using Multiple Spacing Techniques ccccccsesecessscsssesesescsesesesesescsesesesesescssseseseecseseseseseees 7 15 Listing and Removing Break Definitions c ccc cece cece ceeseseeeesenesenseeseseseseeneneseeneees 7 16 Computing Summary Lines when a Break Column s Value Changes ccceeeseeees 7 17 Computing Summary Lines at the End of the Report ccccccccecensesesteteteeceeeseseseeneeneees 7 21 Computing Multiple Summary Values and Lines c ccccc ccc cece nenensseneneeeneneneees 7 22 Listing and Removing COMPUTE Definitions 0 0 0 ccc cece cence cece sensseeneseneeeneees 7 23 Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions 0 ccccccccseseeeseseseseeseeesesseeeeseeseenseess 7 24 Setting the Top and Bottom Titles and Headers and Footers ccccccccesseeeesssssssseeeeeneeeee 7 24 Displaying System Maintained Values in Titles ccc eee ee cesseseeeeteseseeeseseneneee 7 29 Listing Suppressing and Restoring Page Title Definitions cccceeee ce eesseseeeeeeneneee 7 30 Displaying Column Values in Titles c ccc eee cece cseseseeeecessseseesesesssssesesesesseeseseneneee 7 31 Displaying the Current Date in Titles nunnia 7 32 Set
307. eference the same column in the ON clause only the last COMPUTE command applies To reference a SQL SELECT expression or function reference in an ON clause place the expression or function reference in quotes Column names and aliases do not need quotes Enter COMPUTE without clauses to list all COMPUTE definitions SQL Plus Command Reference 13 43 COMPUTE Usage In order for the computations to occur the following conditions must all be true a One or more of the expressions columns or column aliases you reference in the OF clause must also be in the SELECT command a The expression column or column alias you reference in the ON clause must occur in the SELECT command and in the most recent BREAK command a Ifyou reference either ROW or REPORT in the ON clause also reference ROW or REPORT in the most recent BREAK command To remove all COMPUTE definitions use the CLEAR COMPUTES command Note that if you use the NOPRINT option for the column on which the COMPUTE is being performed the COMPUTE result is also suppressed Examples To subtotal the salary for the account manager AC_MGR and salesman SA_MAN job classifications with a compute label of TOTAL enter BREAK ON JOB_ID SKIP 1 COMPUTE SUM LABEL TOTAL OF SALARY ON JOB_ID SELECT JOB_ID LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE JOB_ID IN AC_MGR SA_MAN ORDER BY JOB_ID SALARY JOB_ID LAST_NAME SALARY AC_MGR Higgins 12000 MURR REREEE i atc
308. effect when the script starts If the script changes any setting this new value stays in effect after the script has finished You can include in a script any command you would normally enter interactively typically SQL SOL Plus commands or PL SQL blocks If the START command is disabled see Disabling SOL Plus SQL and PL SQL Commands on page 10 4 this will also disable the command See START on page 13 146 for information on the START command SQL Plus removes the SQLTERMINATOR a semicolon by default before the command is issued If you require a semicolon in your command add a second SOQLTERMINATOR See SET SOLT ERMINATOR c ON OFF on page 13 133 for more information To run a script named PRINTRPT with the extension SQL enter PRINTRPT To run a script named WKRPT with the extension ORY enter WKRPT QRY You can run a script named YEAREND specified by a URL and pass values to variables referenced in YEAREND in the usual way HTTP machine_name domain port YEAREND SQL VAL1 VAL2 FTP machine_name domain port YEAREND SQL VAL1 VAL2 On a web server configured to serve SQL reports you could request SQL Plus to execute a dynamic script with HTTP machine_name domain port SCRIPTSERVER ENDOFYEAR VAL1 VAL2 SQL Plus Command Reference 13 7 double at sign double Syntax Terms Usage at sign url file_name ext Runs a script This command is almost identic
309. eger part is zero regardless of zeros in the format model 13 34 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COLUMN Table 13 1 Number Formats Element Examples Description C C999 Displays the ISO currency symbol in the specified position D 99D99 Displays the decimal character to separate the integral and fractional parts of a number EEEE 9 999EEEE Displays value in scientific notation format must contain exactly four E s G 9G999 Displays the group separator in the specified positions in the integral part of a number L L999 Displays the local currency symbol in the specified position MI 9999MI Displays a trailing minus sign after a negative value Display a trailing space after a positive value PR 9999PR Displays a negative value in lt angle brackets gt Displays a positive value with a leading and trailing space RN RN Displays uppercase Roman numerals rn rn Displays lowercase Roman numerals Value can be an integer between 1 and 3999 S 9999 Displays a leading minus or plus sign 9999S Displays a trailing minus or plus sign TM Displays the smallest number of decimal characters possible The default is TM9 Fixed notation is used for output up to 64 characters scientific notation for more than 64 characters Cannot precede TM with any other element TM can only be followed by a single 9 or E U 9999 Displays the dual currency symbol in the specified position V 999V99 Displays value multiplied by 10n whe
310. el Cause The iSQL Plus script that was running has been cancelled by the user It may have been cancelled by clicking the Cancel button by re executing the script or by clicking any other button or link on the Workspace Action No action required SP2 0918 HTTP error number on attempt to open URL Cause An HTTP error occurred while attempting to fetch the contents of a URL The URL may have been renamed removed or be temporarily unavailable Action Check that the URL is spelled correctly and that it is available from the requested server SQL Plus Error Messages 14 51 iSQL Plus Error Messages SP2 00920 HTTP error message on attempt to open URL Cause An HTTP error occurred while attempting to fetch the contents of a URL The URL may have been renamed removed or be temporarily unavailable Action Check that the URL is spelled correctly and that it is available from the requested server SP2 0921 The value specified for the keyword action must be either EXECUTE or LOAD Cause The value entered for the specified keyword was invalid Action Re enter the command using a valid value for the specified keyword Valid values for the keyword action are EXECUTE or LOAD SP2 0923 AS SYSDBA or AS SYSOPER login not allowed through the iSQL Plus URL Cause An attempt was made to log in through the iSQL Plus URL with AS SYSDBA or AS SYSOPER privilege Action AS SYSDBA or AS SYSOPER privileged login is only permitted
311. ementation of the Java Authentication and Authorization Service JAAS Oracle s JAAS Provider is referred to as JAZN in the remainder of this document See the Oracle9iAS Containers for J2EE documentation for more information about JAZN the Oracle JAAS Provider Configuring SQL Plus 3 17 iSQL Plus Application Server Configuration Create and Manage Users for the SQL Plus DBA URL The actions available to manage users for the iSQL Plus DBA URL are 1 Create users List users Grant the webDba role 2 3 4 Remove users 5 Revoke the webDba role 6 Change user passwords You perform these actions from the ORACLE_ HOME o0c43j j2ee isqlplus application deployments isqlplus directory JAVA_HOME is the location of your JDK 1 4 or above It should be set to ORACLE_HOME jdk but you may use another JDK admin_password is the password for the iSQL Plus DBA realm administrator user admin The password for the admin user is set to welcome by default You should change this password as soon as possible See Change User Passwords A JAZN shell option and a command line option are given for all steps To start the JAZN shell enter SJAVA_HOME bin java Djava security properties SORACLE_ HOME sqlplus admin iplus provider jar SORACLE_HOME oc4j j2ee home jazn jar user iSQL Plus DBA admin password admin password shell To exit the JAZN shell enter EXIT 3 18 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference i
312. ence Formatting Columns Example 7 2 Splitting a Column Heading To give the columns SALARY and LAST_NAME the headings MONTHLY SALARY and LAST NAME respectively and to split the new headings onto two lines enter COLUMN SALARY HEADING MONTHLY SALARY COLUMN LAST_NAME HEADING LAST NAME Now rerun the query with the slash command LAST MONTHLY NAME SALARY COMMISSION Russell 14000 4 Partners 13500 me Errazuriz 12000 3 Cambrault 11000 3 Zlotkey 10500 2 Example 7 3 Setting the Underline Character To change the character used to underline headings to an equal sign and rerun the query enter the following commands SET UNDERLINE LAST MONTHLY NAME SALARY COMMISSION Russell 14000 4 Partners 13500 3 Errazuriz 12000 ia Cambrault 11000 3 Zlotkey 10500 2 Now change the underline character back to a dash SET UNDERLINE Formatting SQL Plus Reports 7 3 Formatting Columns Note You must enclose the dash in quotation marks otherwise SQL Plus interprets the dash as a hyphen indicating that you wish to continue the command on another line Formatting NUMBER Columns When displaying NUMBER columns you can either accept the SQL Plus default display width or you can change it using the COLUMN command Later sections describe the default display and how you can alter it with the COLUMN command The format model will stay in effect until you enter a new one
313. ends on the item selected in the Set Option Screen Buffer not applicable This area has two text boxes Buffer Width and Buffer Length a Use the Buffer Width text box to set the number of characters available to display on one line The Buffer Width value must be at least as big as the LINESIZE value Buffer Width has a default value of 100 a minimum value of 80 and a maximum value of 32 767 characters a Inthe Buffer Length text box you set the number of lines that SQL Plus displays on the screen The default value of the Buffer Length parameter is 1000 lines You can specify from 100 to 2000 lines on one screen Notes When you change the Screen Buffer option SQL Plus displays a dialog to alert you that if you shorten the size of your screen buffer some data may not be displayed on your screen Click OK to proceed SQL Plus User Interface 2 7 Windows Graphical User Interface Option Description of Options Menu Option Command line If you use SET MARKUP to send output to an HTML table the number of lines specified in the Buffer Length variable specifies the number of HTML table rows Each HTML table row may contain more than one text line Help Menu The Help menu has the following option Option Description of Help Menu Option Command line About Displays the SQL Plus version number and copyright information not applicable SQL Plus You access SQL Plus help from the SQL Plus prompt See Getting Command line Help on page
314. er 6 3 editing with system editor 13 67 Index 6 ending 5 7 entering and executing 5 5 entering without executing 5 7 executing current 13 10 13 100 following syntax 5 6 listing current in buffer 6 4 saving current 13 101 setting character used to end and run 13 106 SQL Plus command summary 13 2 continuing on additional lines 5 11 13 1 ending 5 11 13 1 entering and executing 5 10 entering during SQL command entry 13 132 obsolete command alternatives C 1 stopping while running 5 12 tabs 5 2 types of 5 2 variables that affect running 5 12 comments including in command files C 1 including in scripts 6 9 13 94 C 1 using to create 6 10 using to create 6 10 using REMARK C 1 using REMARK to create 6 10 13 94 C 1 COMMIT clause 13 70 WHENEVER OSERROR 13 168 WHENEVER SQLERROR 13 170 COMMIT command 5 13 communication between tiers 1 2 1 3 COMPATIBILITY variable 13 104 13 113 compilation errors 5 9 13 137 14 40 COMPUTE command 7 12 13 42 computing a summary on different columns 7 22 LABEL clause 7 18 7 21 13 43 listing all definitions 7 23 13 43 maximum LABEL length 13 43 OF clause 7 17 ON 13 43 ON column clause 7 17 13 43 ON expr clause 13 43 ON REPORT clause 7 21 13 43 printing grand and sub summaries 7 21 COMPUTE command continued printing multiple summaries on same column 7 22 printing summary lines at ends of reports 7 21 printing summary lines
315. er the following command purposely misspelling JOB_ID in the first line SELECT EMPLOYEE_ID LAST_NAME JO_ID SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN You see this message on your screen SELECT EMPLOYEE_ID LAST_NAME JO_ID SALARY x ERROR at line 1 ORA 00904 invalid column name Examine the error message it indicates an invalid column name in line 1 of the query The asterisk shows the point of error the mis typed column JOB_ID Instead of re entering the entire command you can correct the mistake by editing the command in the buffer The line containing the error is now the current line Using Scripts in SQL Plus 6 5 Editing Scripts in SQL Plus Command Line Use the CHANGE command to correct the mistake This command has three parts separated by slashes or any other non alphanumeric character a the word CHANGE or the letter C the sequence of characters you want to change the replacement sequence of characters The CHANGE command finds the first occurrence in the current line of the character sequence to be changed and changes it to the new sequence You do not need to use the CHANGE command to re enter an entire line Example 6 4 Correcting the Error To change JO_ID to JOB_ID change the line with the CHANGE command CHANGE JO_ID JOB_ID The corrected line appears on your screen 1 SELECT EMPLOYEE_ID FIRST_NAME JOB_ID SALARY Now that you have corrected the error you can use
316. erritory values set for an application server are used for all iSQL Plus sessions run from that application server However you can use an ALTER SESSION command to change the language and territory used for the duration of the current session For example to use Chinese language and conventions in your current session enter ALTER SESSION SET NLS_LANGUAGE SIMPLIFIED CHINESE ALTER SESSION SET NLS_TERRITORY CHINA New pages served to your iSQL Plus browser are now displayed with error messages and text fields in Chinese Information is now displayed according to Chinese convention This is a temporary change for the current login in the current iSQL Plus session To check what settings are currently in effect enter SELECT FROM NLS_SESSION_PARAMETERS The NLS_TERRITORY and NLS_LANGUAGE values correspond to the language and territory components of the NLS_LANG variable NLS_LANG Environment Variable The NLS_LANG environment variable has three components each controlling a subset of the globalization features Your operating system and keyboard must be able to support the character set you have chosen You may need to install additional support software For more information about NLS_LANG and software support see the Oracle Database Globalization Support Guide Setting up locale specific behavior on the SQL Plus client is achieved with the use of NLS parameters These parameters may be specified in a number of ways includin
317. es ora file has the syntax net_service_name DESCRIPTION ADDRESS PROTOCOL tcp HOST host PORT port CONNECT_DATA SERVICE_NAME service_name To use a net service name alias it must have an entry in the tnsnames ora file on the machine running SQL Plus or for iSQL Plus the machine running the iSQL Plus Application Server An entry in tnsnames ora is not required if you use a connection identifier Example 4 1 tnsnames ora entry for the sales database SALES1 DESCRIPTION ADDRESS PROTOCOL tcp HOST sales server PORT 1521 CONNECT_DATA SERVICE_NAME sales us acme com Example 4 2 Start a command line session to the sales database using the net service name SQLPLUS hr password SALES1 See the Oracle Net Services Reference Guide and the Oracle Net Services Administrator s Guide for more information about database connections and net service name definitions Starting SQL Plus 4 5 Connecting to a Database Full Connection Identifier Depending on your configuration use the full connection identifier syntax like DESCRIPTION ADDRESS PROTOCOL tcp HOST host PORT port CONNECT_DATA SERVICE_NAME service_name You can optionally use the INSTANCE_NAME instance phrase in place of the SERVICE_NAME service_name phrase When connecting to an Oracle8i database use the SID name phrase in place of the SERVICE_NAME service_name phrase Example 4 3 Full connection ide
318. esne 10 4 Creating and Controlling R lesi e ae e iaraa idoira 10 7 Disabling SET ROLE E E E E E E E ete dei see 10 7 Disabling User Rolessassnd aiaa mes ae a a a r AE E e E r alaa aE 10 8 Disabling Commands with SQLPLUS RESTRICT seeseseesessesessesessesessesrssesseseseenesteneseesene 10 9 Program Argument Security oerni err e aE aaa Raai i 10 10 ISOL Plus Secufity seiiet sxsdoVeciscsedessede hatesaets opDois Distgu ccs AENEA EEEa E beth a a 10 10 Enabling SSL with SQL PIHS srry ai a ir a i a eee ase eld 10 11 Administration Privileges santon a aE E E E E E E A 10 11 Enabling DBAAGCESSi npe a a a r E a A 10 11 Enabling or Disabling Restricted Database ACCeSS ss e esessssssressississertierisreneeseeressesneene 10 12 Security Usage Notessa ein ara a Eran AEA i ara aAa AE EASA EAST a AATAS inansa 10 12 Database Administration with SQL Plus OARA DATAA E EE E EEEE TA E E EAEE AE 11 1 Introduction to Database Startup and Shutdown sssssssssssssessistesirtesietesestesissesesresesesseseesesee 11 2 Database Startup scieccsccrisa cecielitiscscsh decsten tines a i ath E a T iiei 11 2 Database ShutdOw ins scs2ecc cccse siete ceesset a fees a A a aT ta e i baad pE ATAA a 11 3 Redo Log Files ees oss shes a E E en E E a E aa e Sa E a SaS 11 4 ARCHIV F OG MOG e e E a E a E Ee E aoa ie aeei 11 4 Database Recovery ing e naaa e aa e a a a a aaia eiS 11 5 12 SQL Plus Globalization Support Configuring Globalization Support in Comm
319. et os a a a E T Ea p a r TE EASA 13 114 SEFCOPYTYPECHEGK a n a aiaa a r a a Menai aid Rie eee 13 114 SET DERNE renei a a Ses oh wt a ee 13 114 SET DESCRIBE inpe a hasten Ai e Gita ialba A A Mian tains Masten 13 115 Pe Nahe as et ee Oe Nn E eh aan 13 116 SET NNT es ace eal ate Pe ican eld Aa a 13 116 SET A BUD sociation a zich ecto meres neath hn fy Rates te ht 13 116 SAE EN a sisi E aoa etna ae Ataa dt araehin ty E 13 117 SET oh 1 59 12 eee OTe ee Nr a em ett a aai S enla e SPE Trent 13 117 SR IE GC ERE ae aee a aie TR A E E A EES 13 118 SET BISCO sn cect a ncaa A A N N athe 13 118 SP PTE IDIIN C est acre sient ae ee Oa alee UT as 13 118 GB THIEN DISI E S D 13 119 SETIN TAN C Ee ce ios a Pesaran eas A en een iana aa 13 119 SET LINTES ZE ieaiao n ia r AE a a aaa 13 120 SET TOBOPIESE Thinner na a aa ae a e 13 120 SI CSO RG E EA AT 13 121 SPONG a A a a e a A AEA 13 121 SET LONGC HUNKSIZE caused ivcteisedtsttndes eat chee don al let pedi ivctebaate tattle vl buat eh se ate 13 121 SET MARKJ PI dania nn eni aa assed o epee atanan 13 122 SET NEWP A GE arsa eii ina aa E ei ate tak iea 13 123 AA NAO A E EEE EAEE ASES 13 124 SET NUMFIORMA Tiaan A EEA E EE AA A bat E 13 124 SET NUM WIDTH ene ee et a eee ee ee Cetera tn Deer ene 13 124 SET PAG ESIIZ P A hayi an osm oaa a ana A A R ana aed 13 124 BM EE oe AIA A EE ENE O ER E 13 125 SAAS AE E E E EE T EAA 13 125 SET RECSEPC HAR mra harsen aT A A ARE NE he 13 125 SET SERV EROU T PUT pecsx
320. eteneneneneceeeeseseceeeesenenenene 5 13 Interpreting Error MeSSag OS cz isccstecescecsssseesdensssscacdeseesssuvivaentesvesisesucvevacestsavesatvedecvdeteederseveteededeeds 5 15 Using Scripts in SQL Plus Editing Scripts sstessesiskvcrtesticts ised She eee Mat eink a eich teh ieee ane Talia 6 2 Writing Scripts with a System Editon niesna i aa gaai iiai iea 6 2 Editing Scripts in SQL Plus Command Line seseseseseeesisiesesesesesiriseressssssesesiininreneneseneserenrenes 6 3 Listing the Buffer Contents otesi on i e EE E E 6 4 Editing the Current Line arerioek r E EE R P e a EEE EEES 6 5 Appending Text toa Lite sjsssnesssau ynno unna hapnin hoken o i 6 7 Adding a New Line in ti r a a E a E tie cdcters 6 8 Deleting Lines hernron ieaiai ri Asia a EREN a Aan i ai 6 9 Placing Comments in Scripts e eseseseseseseeesiesesssesisererirtesessseseresireriestnenenenininintnnenenenenenenentenenenee 6 9 Using the REMARK Comma dscsesbeiprdsceeeiierei e i 6 10 MUSLIN fe cc score a e t Natal E a a A 6 10 MU SHINS Se E T N TTE E O E EA E S 6 10 Notes on Placing COMME Sisiane hiis aia iea interiit 6 11 RUN MING Scip Enei a e E AOE OE EI IE EOE 6 13 Running a Script as You Start SQL PIUS eee ceeeeeee ce cesssesseeeeteessseseseseseeeeesenenees 6 14 Nesting Seri pts ccc ereere aanak cantesserssbepsaauts ange clots ssatectabepeeseasebeasonienasaraepueceseetssaaslasepasionse 6 15 Exiting from a Script with a Return Code ees ce ceeeeece
321. ex on Sets the default filename for the EDIT command page 13 116 SET EMBEDDED ON OFF on Controls where on a page each report begins page 13 116 SET ESCAPE cl ON OFF on Defines the character you enter as the escape character page 13 117 SET FEEDBACK 6 nlON OFF on Displays the number of records returned by a query when page 13 117 a query selects at least n records SET FLAGGER OFF ENTRY on Checks to make sure that SQL statements conform to the INTERMEDIATE FULL page 13 118 ANSI ISO SQL92 standard SET FLUSH ON OFF on Controls when output is sent to the user s display device page 13 118 SET HEADING ON OFF on Controls printing of column headings in reports page 13 118 SET HEADSEP _ cl ON OFF on Defines the character you enter as the heading separator page 13 119 character SET INSTANCE instance_path LOCAL on Changes the default instance for your session to the page 13 119 specified instance path SET LINESIZE 80 n on Sets the total number of characters that SQL Plus displays page 13 120 on one line before beginning a new line SET LINESIZE 150 n in SQL Plus SET LOBOFFSET n 1 on Sets the starting position from which CLOB and NCLOB page 13 120 data is retrieved and displayed SET LOGSOURCE pathname on Specifies the location from which archive logs are retrieved page 13 121 during recovery SET LONG 80 n on Sets maximum width in bytes for displaying LONG page 13 121 CLOB
322. f the file after it is loaded This is the default NOL IST Suppresses the listing If you do not specify a file extension SQL Plus assumes the default command file extension normally SQL For information on changing the default extension see SET SUF FIX SQL text on page 13 133 If the filename you specify contains the word list or the word file the name must be in double quotes SOL Plus searches for the file in the current working directory 13 72 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference GET Examples The operating system file should contain a single SQL statement or PL SQL block The statement should not be terminated with a semicolon If a SQL Plus command or more than one SQL statement or PL SQL block is loaded into the SOL buffer from an operating system file an error occurs when the RUN or slash command is used to execute the buffer The GET command can be used to load files created with the SAVE command See SAVE on page 13 101 for more information To load a file called YEARENDRPT with the extension SQL into the buffer enter GET YEARENDRPT SQL Plus Command Reference 13 73 HELP HELP Syntax HELP topic where topic represents a SQL Plus help topic for example COLUMN Accesses the SQL Plus command line help system Enter HELP INDEX or INDEX for a list of topics You can view SQL Plus resources at http otn oracle com tech sql_plus and the Oracle Database Library at http otn oracle c
323. f the line A line cannot contain both a comment and a command A at the end of a REMARK line is treated as a line continuation character For details on entering comments in scripts using the SQL comment delimiters or the ANSI ISO comment delimiter see Placing Comments in Scripts on page 6 9 The following script contains some typical comments REM COMPUTE uses BREAK ON REPORT to break on end of table BREAK ON REPORT COMPUTE SUM OF DEPARTMENT 10 DEPARTMENT 20 DEPARTMENT 30 TOTAL BY JOB_ID ON REPORT REM Each column displays the sums of salaries by job for REM one of the departments 10 20 30 SELECT JOB_ID SUM DECODE DEPARTMENT_ID 10 SALARY 0 DEPARTMENT 10 SUM DECODE DEPARTMENT_ID 20 SALARY 0 DEPARTMENT 20 SUM DECODE DEPARTMENT_ID 30 SALARY 0 DEPARTMENT 30 SUM SALARY TOTAL BY JOB_ID FROM EMP_DETAILS VIEW GROUP BY JOB_ID 13 94 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference REPFOOTER REPFOOTER Syntax Terms Usage REPF OOTER PAGE printspec text variable ON OFF where printspec represents one or more of the following clauses used to place and format the text COL n S KIP n TAB n LE FT CE NTER RIGHT BOLD FORMAT text Places and formats a specified report footer at the bottom of each report or lists the current REPFOOTER definition Enter REPFOOTER with no clauses to list the current REPFOOTER definition See
324. fied report footer at the bottom of page 13 95 each report or lists the current REPFOOTER definition REPHEADER on Places and formats a specified report header at the top of page 13 97 each report or lists the current REPHEADER definition RUN on Lists and runs the SQL command or PL SQL block page 13 100 currently stored in the buffer SAVE on Saves the contents of the buffer in an operating system file a page 13 101 script SET on Sets a system variable to alter the SQL Plus environment for page 13 103 your current session SHOW on Shows the value of a SQL Plus system variable or the page 13 136 current SQL Plus environment SHUTDOWN on Shuts down a currently running Oracle Database instance page 13 142 SPOOL on Stores query results in an operating system file and page 13 144 optionally sends the file to a printer START on Runs the SQL Plus statements in the specified script The page 13 146 script can be called from a web server in iSQL Plus or from the local file system or a web server in SQL Plus command line STARTUP on Starts an Oracle Database instance and optionally mounts page 13 148 and opens a database STORE on Saves attributes of the current SQL Plus environment in an page 13 152 operating system script TIMING on Records timing data for an elapsed period of time lists the page 13 153 current timer s title and timing data or lists the number of active timers TTITLE on Places and formats a specified title at the top of eac
325. figuration In the web xml file search for the lt param name gt iSQLPlusAllowUserMarkup The syntax of the line to change in the configuration file is lt init param gt lt param name gt iSQLPlusAllowUserMarkup lt param name gt lt param value gt none lt param value gt lt description gt Valid values are none all lt description gt lt init param gt Where the parameter is set OFF or if it does not exist or has an invalid value users cannot use SET MARKUP HTML HEAD text BODY text TABLE text ENTMAP or COLUMN ENTMAP to create user defined HTML If Map Special Characters to HTML Entities is set OFF in the Script Formatting Preferences screen the value is ignored and reverts to ON The default value for iSQLPlusAllowUserMarkup is OFF Leaving it set OFF provides greater security Where the parameter is set ON users can execute SET MARKUP HTML HEAD text BODY text TABLE text ENTMAP and COLUMN ENTMAP commands to change the status of entity mapping for the iSQL Plus session or report column This enables custom HTML to be included in iSQL Plus report output iSQL Plus Web Browser Configuration Your web browser needs to be configured to enable cookies and JavaScript Your iSQL Plus interface and online help default to the language of the operating system However data you retrieve and enter is determined by the language and territory parameters set by the NLS_LANG environment variable See Chapter 12 SQL Plus Globalization Sup
326. fining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions on page 7 24 for more information about the TTITILE command Finally run the script responding to the prompt for the title as shown START PROMPT1 Enter a title of up to 30 characters Title Department Report Department Report EMPLOYEE_ID FIRST_NAME LAST_NAME SALARY 145 John Russell 14000 146 Karen Partners 13500 147 Alberto Errazuriz 12000 148 Gerald Cambrault 11000 149 Eleni Zlotkey 10500 Before continuing turn the TTITLE command off TTITLE OFF Customizing Prompts for Substitution Variable If you want to customize the prompt for a substitution variable value use PROMPT and ACCEPT in conjunction with the substitution variable as shown in the following example Example 6 13 Using PROMPT and ACCEPT in Conjunction with Substitution Variables As you have seen in Example 6 12 Prompting for and Accepting Input SQL Plus automatically generates a prompt for a value when you use a substitution variable You can replace this prompt by including PROMPT and ACCEPT in the script with the query that references the substitution variable First clear the buffer with CLEAR BUFFER To create such a file enter the following INPUT PROMPT Enter a valid employee ID PROMPT For Example 145 206 Using Scripts in SQL Plus 6 29 Communicating with the User ACCEPT ENUMBER NUMBER PROMPT Employee ID SELECT FIRST_NAME LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW
327. g Command line SQL Plus Start your web browser and enter the appropriate URL to open depart html DEPARTMENT _NAME CITY Executive Seattle Executive Seattle Executive Seattle Sales Oxford Sales Oxford Marketing Toronto 6 rows selected The SQLPLUS command in this example contains three layers of nested quotes From the inside out these are 2 isa quoted HTML attribute value for BORDER a BORDER 2 is the quoted text argument for the TABLE option a HTML ON TABLE BORDER 2 is the quoted argument for the MARKUP option The nesting of quotes may be different in some operating systems or program scripting languages Suppressing the Display of SQL Plus Commands in Reports The SQLPLUS SILENT option is particularly useful when used in combination with MARKUP to generate embedded SQL Plus reports using CGI scripts or operating system scripts It suppresses the display of SQL Plus commands and the SQL Plus banner The HTML output shows only the data resulting from your SQL query You can also use SET ECHO OFF to suppress the display of each command in a script that is executed with the START command 8 6 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Creating Reports using Command line SQL Plus HTML Entities Certain characters lt gt and amp have a predefined meaning in HTML In the previous example you may have noticed that the gt character was replaced by amp gt as soon as you e
328. g Commands c cccecccccessssseesessssescscssseescsessesssseecsesseececseseeeseesssesaeeeeseens 5 2 The SQL B ff ra cmeona erona a a of ete otha Nek SER te seats been O aeS 5 3 Executing Commands sssrini iaia ie a has ea ia a a a a keaton de 5 3 Listing a Table Defiiti omire ir AET E a E E A a 5 4 Listing PL SQL Destinations ien e ee eerie seven atk eE ra eE aa EE AEAEE EEA 5 5 Running SOL Command esierre tiation nanain nE EEEE IET OVERA REAR 5 5 Understanding SQL Command Syntax ccccccsseceseccscsesesesescseeeeseseeneesescsessesesescseseenseess 5 6 Running PL SQOL BlOCKS sccicccseisseeacessnsecdalicsebhac chsstnsuctes Saro APEE AAA AEE AAS aterea ara a Eaa a AaS 5 8 Creating Stored Procedures norig ri Aan dies R E E E E E 5 9 Running SQL Plus Commands snsseseseseseeeetesererereseseetetorerereseseseeterereneseseseseereteneserereseseereresenese 5 10 Understanding SQL Plus Command Syntax ss sssssssssssessesestesiestesesstentesiestestnstentesresensnes ens 5 11 System Variables that Affect How Commands Run s esesssesesesesisisisiesesesiseseriririesssesiseseneeees 5 12 Stopping a Command while it is Running cece erence neers neeseneceneeseneesans 5 12 Running Operating System Commands c cece cc ccs cence rene cnenece tees neceneeeneeseneeneas 5 13 Patising the Display iais inikas Ae eea A E AE AAA setpssdtedtev AARE KEN RA E ANER 5 13 Saving Changes to the Database Automatically ccccccccscseesee
329. g as an initialization parameter on the server For settings that control the behavior of the server see the Oracle Database Globalization Support Guide NLS_LANG has the syntax NLS_LANG language_territory charset SQL Plus Globalization Support 12 3 NLS_LANG Environment Variable where language specifies the conventions to use for Oracle Database messages sorting order day and month names For example to receive messages in Japanese set language to JAPANESE If language is not set it defaults to AMERICAN where territory specifies the convention for default dates and for monetary and numeric formats For example to use the Japanese territory format set territory to JAPAN If territory is not set the default value is derived from the language value and so is set to AMERICA where in SQL Plus command line charset specifies the character set encoding used by SQL Plus for data processing and is generally suited to that of the users terminal Illogical combinations can be set but will not work For example Japanese cannot be supported using a Western European character set such as NLS_LANG JAPANESE_JAPAN WE8DEC However Japanese could be supported with the Unicode character set For example NLS_LANG JAPANESE_JAPAN UTF8 charset is not used by the iSQL Plus Application Server The iSQL Plus Application Server always uses AL32UTF8 character encoding Oracle s implementation of Unicode It cannot be changed Vie
330. gain Enabling or Disabling Restricted Database Access You may want to limit the databases that users can access in iSQL Plus to a restricted list When restricted database access has been enabled a dropdown list of available databases is displayed in place of the Connection Identifier text field on the Login screen This enables greater security for iSQL Plus Servers in hosted environments Connection identifiers are listed in the order defined in iSQLPlusConnectId List Edit the ORACLE_ HOME oc4j j2ee oc4j applications applications isqlplus isqlplus WEB INF we b xml file to restrict database access to iSQL Plus users Change the following entry to include a new param value element which contains the list of databases to which you want to restrict access for example lt init param gt lt param name gt iSQLPlusConnectIdList lt param name gt lt description gt The database s to which iSQL Plus users are restricted The list should contain the Oracle SIDs or SERVICE_NAMEs separated by a semicolon If there are no entries database access is not restricted through iSQL Plus lt description gt lt param value gt oral0g ora9i lt param value gt lt init param gt Entries in the param value element should be identical to the alias for SERVICE_ NAMEs or SIDs set in your ORACLE_HOME network admin tnsnames ora file 3 16 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference iSQL Plus Application Server Configuration Restart iSQL Plus
331. ganizations that Oracle does not own or control Oracle neither evaluates nor makes any representations regarding the accessibility of these Web sites Structure This document contains SQL Plus Quick Start A brief guide to get you up and running after installation PART I SQL Plus Getting Started Provides an overview of SOL Plus describes the command line interface Windows Graphical User Interface GUI and the iSQL Plus user interface and provides configuration information and information you need to log in and run SQL Plus Chapter 1 SQL Plus Overview An overview of SQL Plus SQL Plus architecture and user interfaces with instructions on using this guide and information on what you need to run SOL Plus Chapter 2 SQL Plus User Interface Describes the SOL Plus command line Windows GUI and iSQL Plus user interfaces Chapter 3 Configuring SQL Plus Explains how to configure your SQL Plus command line Windows GUI and iSQL Plus environments Chapter 4 Starting SQL Plus Provides command syntax and explanations for the SQLPLUS command explains how to start connect to an Oracle database access the command line and online help and exit SQL Plus It provides information about the login username and password and the connection identifier you use to connect to an Oracle database PART Il Using SQL Plus Contains SQL Plus user guide and tutorial content information about writing SQL Plus scripts and SQL P
332. ge C 2 Refer to the TTITLE command on page 13 155 for information on terms and clauses in the BTITLE command syntax If you do not enter a printspec clause before the first occurrence of text BTITLE left justifies the text SOL Plus interprets BTITLE in the new form if a valid printspec clause LEFT SKIP COL and so on immediately follows the command name SQL Plus substitution variables amp variables are expanded before BTITLE is executed The resulting string is stored as the BTITLE text During subsequent execution for each page of results the expanded value of a variable may itself be interpreted as a variable with unexpected results 13 24 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference BTITLE Examples You can avoid this double substitution in a BTITLE command by not using the amp prefix for variables that are to be substituted on each page of results If you want to use a substitution variable to insert unchanging text ina BTITLE enclose it in quotes so that it is only substituted once To set a bottom title with CORPORATE PLANNING DEPARTMENT on the left and a date on the right enter BTITLE LEFT CORPORATE PLANNING DEPARTMENT RIGHT 1 JAN 2001 To set a bottom title with CONFIDENTIAL in column 50 followed by six spaces and a date enter BTITLE COL 50 CONFIDENTIAL TAB 6 1 JAN 2001 SQL Plus Command Reference 13 25 CHANGE CHANGE Syntax Terms Usage CHANGE is not available in iSQL Plus
333. gh a database link the PUP table for the remote database does not apply The remote database cannot extract the username and password from the database link in order to determine that user s profile and privileges Creating the PUP Table You can create the PUP table by running the script named PUPBLD with the extension SQL as SYSTEM The exact format of the file extension and the location of the file are system dependent See your DBA for more information Note If the table is created incorrectly all users other than privileged users will see a warning when connecting to Oracle Database that the PUP table information is not loaded PUP Table Structure The PUP table has the following columns PRODUCT NOT NULL VARCHAR2 30 USERID VARCHAR2 30 ATTRIBUTE VARCHAR2 240 SCOPE VARCHAR2 240 NUMERIC_VALUE NUMBER 15 2 CHAR_VALUE VARCHAR2 240 DATE_VALUE DATE LONG_VALUE LONG 10 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE Table Description and Use of PUP Columns The following list describes each column in the PUP table PUP Column Description PRODUCT USERID ATTRIBUTE SCOPE NUMERIC _ VALUE CHAR_VALUE DATE_VALUE LONG_VALUE Must contain the product name in this case SQL Plus You cannot enter wildcards or NULL in this column Must contain the username uppercase of the user for whom you wish to disable the command To disable the command for more than one user u
334. gle PL SQL statement The EXECUTE command is often useful when you want to execute a PL SQL statement that references a stored procedure For more information on PL SQL see your PL SQL User s Guide and Reference If your EXECUTE command cannot fit on one line because of the PL SQL statement use the SQL Plus continuation character a hyphen The length of the command and the PL SQL statement cannot exceed the length defined by SET LINESIZE You can suppress printing of the message PL SQL procedure successfully completed with SET FEEDBACK OFF If the variable n has been defined with VARIABLE n NUMBER The following EXECUTE command assigns a value to the bind variable n EXECUTE n 1 PL SQL procedure successfully completed For information on how to create a bind variable see the VARIABLE command on page 13 160 SQL Plus Command Reference 13 69 EXIT EXIT Syntax Terms EXIT QUIT SUCCESS FAILURE WARNING n variable BindVariable COMMIT ROLLBACK Commits or rolls back all pending changes logs out of Oracle Database terminates SQL Plus and returns control to the operating system In iSQL Plus commits or rolls back all pending changes stops processing the current iSQL Plus script and returns focus to the Input area There is no way to access the return code in iSQL Plus In iSQL Plus click the Logout button to exit the Oracle Database Commit on exit or commit on termination of pr
335. gt You can enter a department number at the prompt Department ID gt By default SQL Plus lists the line containing amp NEWDEPT before and after substitution and then displays the department name corresponding to the number entered at the Department ID gt prompt You can use SET VERIFY OFF to prevent this behavior 13 84 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference RECOVER RECOVER Syntax RECOVER general managed BEGIN BACKUP END BACKUP where the general clause has the following syntax AUTOMATIC FROM location full_database_recovery partial_database_recovery LOGFILE filename TEST ALLOW integer CORRUPTION parallel_clause TEST ALLOW integer CORRUPTION parallel_ciause CONTINUE DEFAULT CANCEL where the full_database_recovery clause has the following syntax STANDBY DATABASE UNTIL CANCEL TIME date CHANGE integer USING BACKUP CONTROLFILE UNTIL CANCEL TIME date CHANGE integer USING BACKUP CONTROLFILE where the partial_database_recovery clause has the following syntax TABLESPACE tablespace tablespace DATAFILE filename filenumber filename filenumbe STANDBY TABLESPACE tablespace tablespace DATAFILE filename filenumber filename filenumbe UNTIL CONSISTENT WITH CONTROLFILE where the parallel clause has the following syntax NOPARALLEL PARALLEL integer where the managed clause has the following syn
336. gt and amp are correctly interpreted in the report Otherwise they would be replaced with their respective entities amp lt amp gt amp quot and amp amp preventing web browsers from correctly interpreting the HTML Entities in the column heading and any COMPUTE labels or output appearing in the column are mapped or not mapped according to the value of ENTMAP for the column 13 32 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COLUMN The default setting for COLUMN ENTMAP is the current setting of the MARKUP HTML ENTMAP option For more information about the MARKUP HTML ENTMAP option see SET MARKUP Options on page 4 19 FOLD_AIFTER Inserts a carriage return after the column heading and after each row in the column SQL Plus does not insert an extra carriage return after the last column in the SELECT list FOLD_A FTER does not work in SET MARKUP HTML ON mode or in iSQL Plus unless PREFORMAT is set ON FOLD_B EFORE Inserts a carriage return before the column heading and before each row of the column SQL Plus does not insert an extra carriage return before the first column in the SELECT list FOLD_A FTER does not work in SET MARKUP HTML ON mode or in iSQL Plus unless PREFORMAT is set ON FOR MAT format Specifies the display format of the column The format specification must be a text constant such as A10 or 9 999 Character Columns The default width of CHAR NCHAR VARCHAR2 VARCHAR and NVARCHAR2 NCHAR VARYI
337. h column s value changes Each BREAK command you enter replaces the previous one Thus if you want to use different spacing techniques in one report or insert space after the value changes in more than one ordered column you must specify multiple columns and actions in a single BREAK command Example 7 12 Combining Spacing Techniques Type the following SELECT DEPARTMENT_ID JOB_ID LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 ORDER BY DEPARTMENT_ID JOB_ID Now to skip a page when the value of DEPARTMENT_ID changes and one line when the value of JOB_ID changes enter the following command BREAK ON DEPARTMENT_ID SKIP PAGE ON JOB_ID SKIP 1 To show that SKIP PAGE has taken effect create a TTITLE with a page number TTITLE COL 35 FORMAT 9 Page SQL PNO Run the new query to see the results Formatting SQL Plus Reports 7 15 Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines Page 1 DEPARTMENT_ID JOB_ID LAST _NAME SALARY 20 MK_MAN Hartstein 13000 Page 2 DEPARTMENT_ID JOB_ID LAST _NAME SALARY 80 SA_MAN Russell 14000 Partners 13500 Page 3 DEPARTMENT_ID JOB_ID LAST _NAME SALARY 90 AD_PRES King 24000 AD_VP Kochhar 17000 De Haan 17000 6 rows selected Listing and Removing Break Definitions Before continuing turn off the top title display without changing its definition TTITLE OFF You can list your current break definition by entering the BREAK command with no clauses BREAK
338. h no arguments or with the specific argument you wish to display for example DEFINE or DEFINE _PRIVILEGE You can use UNDEFINE to remove variable definitions See Also Predefined Variables on page 13 53 APPEND CREATE and REPLACE extensions to SPOOL The SPOOL command has been enhanced You can now append to or replace an existing file where previously you could only use SPOOL to create and replace a file Replace is the default The new SPOOL command syntax is as follows SPOOL file_name ext CRE ATE REP LACE APP END OFF OUT See Also SPOOL on page 13 144 Windows Specific Information The SQL Plus Getting Started for Windows guide has been discontinued Windows specific information is now included in this guide COPY Command Messages and Prompts There are new error messages for the following COPY command errors a Missing usernames a Missing FROM and TO clauses a FROM and TO clauses that are too long a Password input errors See Also Appendix B SQL Plus COPY Command Chapter 14 SQL Plus Error Messages xxxiii XXXiV PAGESIZE Default The default value of PAGESIZE has been changed from 24 to 14 SQL Plus Site Profile and User Profile Changes SET PAGESIZE 14 and SET SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY 8 1 7 have been removed from the Site Profile glogin sql As the new default for pagesize has been changed from 24 to 14 the default value of 14 effectively remains unchanged The default for
339. h report page 13 155 page or lists the current TTITLE definition 13 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Command Summary Command Page Description UNDEFINE on Deletes one or more substitution variables that you defined page 13 159 either explicitly with the DEFINE command or implicitly with an argument to the START command VARIABLE on Declares a bind variable that can be referenced in PL SQL page 13 160 WHENEVER on Exits SOL Plus if an operating system command generates OSERROR page 13 168 an error In iSQL Plus performs the specified action if an operating system command generates an error WHENEVER on Exits SOL Plus if a SQL command or PL SQL block SQLERROR page 13 170 generates an error In iSQL Plus performs the specified action if a SQL command or PL SQL block generates an error Commands not available in iSQL Plus SQL Plus Command Reference 13 5 at sign at sign Syntax Terms url file_namel ex arg Runs the SQL Plus statements in the specified script The script can be called from the local file system or from a web server Only the url form is supported in iSQL Plus The command functions similarly to START url Specifies the Uniform Resource Locator of a script to run on the specified web server SOL Plus supports HTTP and FTP protocols but not HTTPS HTTP authentication in the form http username password machine_name domain is not supported i
340. hat line 4 is the current line To list the second line only enter LIST 2 The second line is displayed 2 FROM EMP_DETAILS VIEW To list the current line now line 2 to the last line enter LIST LAST You will then see this 2 FROM EMP_DETAILS VIEW 3 WHERE JOB_ID SH_CLERK 4 ORDER BY DEPARTMENT_ID 13 80 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference PASSWORD PASSWORD Syntax Usage Examples PASSW ORD username where username specifies the user If omitted username defaults to the current user Enables you to change a password without echoing it on an input device In iSQL Plus use the Password screen to change your password To change the password of another user you must have been granted the appropriate privilege See CONNECT on page 13 48 for more information about changing your password If you want to change your current password enter PASSWORD Changing password for your_password Old password your_password New password new_password Retype new password new_password Password changed If you are logged on as a DBA and want to change the password for user johnw currently identified by johnwpass to johnwnewpass PASSWORD johnw Changing password for johnw New password johnwnewpass Retype new password johnwnewpass Password changed Passwords are not echoed to the screen they are shown here for your convenience SQL Plus Command Reference 13 81 PAUSE
341. he COLUMN command followed by the column name only as shown COLUMN column_name To list the current display attributes for all columns enter the COLUMN command with no column names or clauses after it COLUMN To reset the display attributes for a column to their default values use the CLEAR clause of the COLUMN command as shown COLUMN column_name CLEAR Formatting SQL Plus Reports 7 9 Formatting Columns Example 7 8 Resetting Column Display Attributes to their Defaults To reset all column display attributes to their default values enter CLEAR COLUMNS columns cleared Suppressing and Restoring Column Display Attributes You can suppress and restore the display attributes you have given a specific column To suppress a column s display attributes enter a COLUMN command in the following form COLUMN column_name OFF OFF tells SOL Plus to use the default display attributes for the column but does not remove the attributes you have defined through the COLUMN command To restore the attributes you defined through COLUMN use the ON clause COLUMN column_name ON Printing a Line of Characters after Wrapped Column Values As you have seen by default SOL Plus wraps column values to additional lines when the value does not fit the column width If you want to insert a record separator a line of characters or a blank line after each wrapped line of output or after every row use the RECSEP and RECSEPCHAR variables
342. he DESCRIBE command DESCRIBE output columns are typically allocated a proportion of the linesize Decreasing or increasing the linesize may give unexpected text wrapping in your display You can define LINESIZE as a value from 1 to a maximum that is system dependent SET LOBOF FSET 1 n Example Sets the starting position from which CLOB and NCLOB data is retrieved and displayed To set the starting position from which a CLOB column s data is retrieved to the 22nd position enter SET LOBOFFSET 22 13 120 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary The CLOB data will wrap on your screen SQL Plus will not truncate until the 23rd character SET LOGSOURCE pathname Example Specifies the location from which archive logs are retrieved during recovery The default value is set by the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST initialization parameter in the Oracle Database initialization file init ora Using the SET LOGSOURCE command without a pathname restores the default location To set the default location of log files for recovery to the directory usr oraclel10 dbs arch enter SET LOGSOURCE usr oracle10 dbs arch RECOVER DATABASE SET LONG 80 n Example Sets maximum width in bytes for displaying CLOB LONG NCLOB and XMLType values and for copying LONG values The maximum value of n is 2 000 000 000 bytes To set the maximum number of bytes to fetch for displaying and copying LONG values to 500
343. he SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0812 View created with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL view has been created but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL view Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SQL Plus Error Messages 14 37 SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0813 View altered with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL view has been altered but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL view Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0814 Trigger created with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL trigger has been created but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL trigger Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0815 Trigger altered with compilation warnings SP2 SP2 Cause The PL SQL trigger has been altered but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL trigger Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages 0816 Type created with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL type has been created but has
344. he bottom of the page 14 a number of characters per line 80 You can change these settings to match the size of your computer screen or for printing the size of a sheet of paper You can change the page length with the system variable PAGESIZE For example you may wish to do so when you print a report To set the number of lines between the beginning of each page and the top title use the NEWPAGE variable of the SET command SET NEWPAGE number_of_lines If you set NEWPAGE to zero SQL Plus skips zero lines and displays and prints a formfeed character to begin a new page On most types of computer screens the formfeed character clears the screen and moves the cursor to the beginning of the first line When you print a report the formfeed character makes the printer move to the top of a new sheet of paper even if the overall page length is less than that of the paper If you set NEWPAGE to NONE SQL Plus does not print a blank line or formfeed between report pages To set the number of lines on a page use the PAGESIZE variable of the SET command SET PAGESIZE number_of_lines Formatting SQL Plus Reports 7 33 Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions You may wish to reduce the line size to center a title properly over your output or you may want to increase line size for printing on wide paper You can change the line width using the LINESIZE variable of the SET command SET LINESIZE number_of_characters Example 7
345. he end of a report so you cannot use BREAK ON REPORT SKIP PAGE SKI P n Skips n lines before printing the row where the break occurred BREAK SKIP n does not work in SET MARKUP HTML ON mode or in iSQL Plus unless PREFORMAT is SET ON SKI P PAGE Skips the number of lines that are defined to be a page before printing the row where the break occurred The number of lines per page can be set with the PAGESIZE clause of the SET command Note that PAGESIZE only changes the number of lines that SQL Plus considers to be a page Therefore SKIP PAGE may not always cause a physical page break unless you have also specified NEWPAGE SQL Plus Command Reference 13 21 BREAK Usage Examples 0 Note also that if there is a break after the last row of data to be printed in a report SQL Plus will not skip the page NODUP LICATES Prints blanks rather than the value of a break column when the value is a duplicate of the column s value in the preceding row DUP LICATES Prints the value of a break column in every selected row Enter BREAK with no clauses to list the current break definition Each new BREAK command you enter replaces the preceding one To remove the BREAK command use CLEAR BREAKS To produce a report that prints duplicate job values prints the average of SALARY and additionally prints the sum of SALARY you could enter the following commands The example selects departments 50 and 80 and the jobs of clerk and
346. he first break encountered in the initial search If for example in a given row the value of JOB_ID changes but the values of DEPARTMENT_ID and SALARY remain the same SQL Plus skips two lines before printing the row one as a result of SKIP 1 ON SALARY and one as a result of SKIP 1 ON JOB_ID Whenever you use ON column you should also use an ORDER BY clause in the SQL SELECT command Typically the columns used in the BREAK command should appear in the same order in the ORDER BY clause although all columns specified in the ORDER BY clause need not appear in the BREAK command This prevents breaks from occurring at meaningless points in the report If the BREAK command specified earlier in this section is used the following SELECT command produces meaningful results SELECT DEPARTMENT_ID JOB_ID SALARY LAST_NAME FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 ORDER BY DEPARTMENT_ID JOB_ID SALARY LAST_NAME All rows with the same DEPARTMENT_ID print together on one page and within that page all rows with the same JOB_ID print in groups Within each group of jobs those jobs with the same SALARY print in groups Breaks in LAST_NAME cause no action because LAST_NAME does not appear in the BREAK command In BREAK commands nulls are considered equal to each other but not equal to anything else This is different to the treatment of nulls in WHERE clauses ON expr action action When you include actions specifies actions f
347. hether commands in scripts are displayed in output as the script is executed On Off 2 22 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference iSQL Plus User Interface Script Execution Click Script Execution in the side menu to open the Script Execution screen You use the Script Execution screen to set options which affect the way scripts are executed Each of these options contains either a field set of radio buttons or text area to change the setting with explanatory text ee 2 Logout Preferences Help Script Execution Configure settings that affect how scripts are parsed and executed Array Size Set the number of rows batch to fetch from the database at one time Rows 15 Script Execution Check SQL Syntax Set whether to check SQL statements for conformance to ANSISO SQL92 standard C Entry Intermediate Full Off Commit Changes Set whether to automatically commit pending changes to the database On Off Immediate Number of statements or blocks before commit l Commit When Copying Set the number of batches after which a commit will be performed when copying data Number of batches O SQL Plus User Interface 2 23 iSQL Plus User Interface Database Administration Click Database Administration in the side menu to open the Database Administration screen You use the Database Administration screen to
348. i threaded server STARTUP with no arguments is equivalent to STARTUP OPEN STARTUP OPEN RECOVER mounts and opens the database even when recovery fails Examples To start an instance using the standard parameter file mount the default database and open the database enter STARTUP or enter STARTUP OPEN database To start an instance using the standard parameter file mount the default database and open the database enter STARTUP FORCE RESTRICT MOUNT To start an instance using the parameter file TESTPARM without mounting the database enter STARTUP PFILE testparm NOMOUNT 13 150 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference STARTUP To shutdown a particular database immediately restart and open it allow access only to users with the RESTRICTED SESSION privilege and use the parameter file MYINIT ORA enter STARTUP FORCE RESTRICT PFILE myinit ora OPEN database To startup an instance and mount but not open a database enter CONNECT as SYSDBA Connected to an idle instance STARTUP MOUNT ORACLE instance started Total System Global Area 7629732 bytes Fixed Size 60324 bytes Variable Size 6627328 bytes Database Buffers 409600 bytes Redo Buffers 532480 bytes SQL Plus Command Reference 13 151 STORE STORE Syntax Terms Usage Examples STORE is not available in iSQL Plus STORE SET file_namel exf CREJATE REP LACE APP END Saves attributes of the current SQL Plus enviro
349. iSQL Plus Application Server is restarted Running SQL Plus To start an iSOL Plus session 1 Enter the Uniform Resource Locator URL of iSQL Plus in the Location field of your web browser for example http machine_name domain port isqlplus where machine_name domain is the URL and port is the port number for the Application Server you want to use The iSQL Plus Login screen is displayed Each successful login is uniquely identified so you can have multiple iSQL Plus sessions running from the same machine or from multiple client machines Starting SQL Plus 4 13 Starting SQL Plus 2 Enter your Username Password and Connection Identifier See Login Username and Password and Connecting to a Database for more information 3 Click the Login button The iSQL Plus Workspace is displayed Running SQL Plus as a DBA To start an iSQL Plus session with SYSDBA or SYSOPER privileges you use the iSQL Plus DBA URL which has the form http machine_name port isqlplus dba To access the iSQL Plus DBA URL you must set up login credentials using the Oracle JAAS Provider known as JAZN Java AuthoriZatioN See Enabling iSQL Plus DBA Access on page 3 17 for information on accessing the iSQL Plus DBA URL When you are connected through the iSQL Plus DBA URL the Application Server authentication enables AS SYSDBA or AS SYSOPER connections through the DBA Login screen or through a CONNECT command but the Oracle Database usern
350. icate that you will not enter any more lines and then use RUN to verify and re run the query 1 SELECT EMPLOYEE_ID LAST_NAME JOB_ID SALARY 2 FROM EMP_DETAILS VIEW 3 WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN 4 ORDER BY SALARY EMPLOYEE_ID LAST_NAME JOB_ID MONTHLY SALARY 149 Zlotkey SA_MAN 10 500 148 Cambrault SA_MAN 11 000 147 Errazuriz SA_MAN 12 000 146 Partners SA_MAN 13 500 145 Russell SA_MAN 14 000 Use the DEL command to delete lines in the buffer Enter DEL specifying the line numbers you want to delete Suppose you want to delete the current line to the last line inclusive Use the DEL command as shown DEL LAST DEL makes the following line of the buffer if any the current line See DEL on page 13 57 for more information Placing Comments in Scripts You can enter comments in a script in three ways using the SQL Plus REMARK command for single line comments using the SQL comment delimiters for single or multi line comments a using ANSI ISO American National Standards Institute International Standards Organization comments for single line comments Comments entered at the command line are not stored in the SQL buffer Using Scripts in SQL Plus 6 9 Placing Comments in Scripts Using the REMARK Command Use the REMARK command on a line by itself in a script followed by comments on the same line To continue the comments on additional lines enter additional REMARK commands Do not pla
351. ice is applicable U S GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs software databases and related documentation and technical data delivered to U S Government customers are commercial computer software or commercial technical data pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency specific supplemental regulations As such use duplication disclosure modification and adaptation of the Programs including documentation and technical data shall be subject to the licensing restrictions set forth in the applicable Oracle license agreement and to the extent applicable the additional rights set forth in FAR 52 227 19 Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights June 1987 Oracle Corporation 500 Oracle Parkway Redwood City CA 94065 The Programs are not intended for use in any nuclear aviation mass transit medical or other inherently dangerous applications It shall be the licensee s responsibility to take all appropriate fail safe backup redundancy and other measures to ensure the safe use of such applications if the Programs are used for such purposes and we disclaim liability for any damages caused by such use of the Programs Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and or its affiliates Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners The Programs may provide links to Web sites and access to content products and services from third parties Oracle is not responsible for the availability of or an
352. ick the Continue button to execute the script in the Input area with the input values you entered Cancel Click the Cancel button to cancel execution of the script and return to the Workspace iSQL Plus Preferences Screen The Preferences screen enables you to change interface settings system settings and your password The Cancel and Apply buttons appear on each of the Preferences screens and have the same function on all Preferences screens Click the Workspace or History tab to return to the Workspace or History screen Cancel Click the Cancel button to cancel changes you have made on this Preferences screen Apply Click the Apply button to apply the changes you have made on this Preferences screen 2 20 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference iSQL Plus User Interface Interface Configuration Click Interface Configuration in the side menu to open the Interface Configuration screen ORACLE rein a 2 2 Logout Preferences Help EF Interface Configuration interface Configuration Configure settings that affect the iSQL Plus user interface Apply History Size Set the number of scripts displayed in the script history Scripts fio Input Area Size Set the size of the script input area Width 80 Height fio Output Location Set where script output is displayed Below Input Area Save to HTML File Printable output in new browser window Printa
353. ifferent buffer use CLEAR SQL Obsolete SQL Plus Commands C 3 SET CLOSECUR SOR ONIOFF obsolete SET CLOSECUR SOR ONIOFF obsolete Sets the cursor usage behavior On or OFF sets whether or not the cursor will close and reopen after each SQL statement This feature may be useful in some circumstances to release resources in the database server SET DOC UMENT ONIOFF obsolete Displays or suppresses blocks of documentation created by the DOCUMENT command SET DOCUMENT ON causes blocks of documentation to be echoed to the screen Set DOCUMENT OFF suppresses the display of blocks of documentation See DOC UMENT obsolete on page C 3 for information on the DOCUMENT command SET MAXD ATA n obsolete Sets the maximum total row width that SQL Plus can process In SQL Plus the maximum row width is now unlimited Any values you set using SET MAXDATA are ignored by SQL Plus SET SCAN ONIOFF obsolete Controls scanning for the presence of substitution variables and parameters OFF suppresses processing of substitution variables and parameters ON enables normal processing ON functions in the same manner as SET DEFINE ON SET SPACE 11n obsolete Sets the number of spaces between columns in output The maximum value of n is 10 The SET SPACE 0 and SET COLSEP commands have the same effect This command is obsoleted by SET COLSEP but you can still use it for backward compatibility You may prefer to
354. ill return an error status equivalent to an EXIT FAILURE command See the EXIT command on page 13 70 for further information 4 16 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Exiting SQL Plus Exiting the Command line User Interface When you are done working with SQL Plus and wish to return to the operating system enter EXIT or QUIT at the SQL Plus prompt or enter the end of file character Ctrl D on UNIX or Ctrl Z on Windows SQL Plus displays the version of Oracle Database from which you disconnected and the versions of tools available through SQL Plus After a moment you will see the operating system prompt Exiting the Windows Graphical User Interface You can exit the Windows GUI in exactly the same way as you exit the command line user interface by entering EXIT or QUIT at the SQL Plus prompt You can also click Exit from the File menu to exit the Windows GUI and return to Windows Exiting the SQL Plus User Interface To exit iSQL Plus click the Logout icon It is recommended that you always use the Logout icon to exit iSQL Plus to free up system and server resources In iSQL Plus the EXIT or QUIT command halts the script currently running it does not terminate your session Starting SQL Plus 4 17 SQLPLUS Program Syntax SQLPLUS Program Syntax Options You use the SQLPLUS command at the operating system prompt to start command line SQL Plus SQLPLUS Options Logon Start where Options has the follo
355. in SSL mode Configure iSQL Plus to run in SSL mode 1 Copy http web site xml to secure web site xml cd SORACLE_HOME oc4j j2ee isqlplus config cp http web site xml secure web site xml Edit secure web site xml and set the port number and add the attribute secure true lt web site port 4443 secure true display name Oracle9iAS Containers for J2EE HTTP Web Site gt The port you use for iSQL Plus in SSL mode can be any free port on your machine In this example it is set to port 4443 The default SSL port is 443 Add a new element to the web site element in the secure web site xml file lt ssl config keystore oracle oral0g o0c4j j2ee keystore keystore password 123456 gt Note You can hide the password through password indirection See Oracle Application Server Containers for J2EE Security Guide for a description of password indirection Configuring SQL Plus 3 23 iSQL Plus Application Server Configuration 4 Edit server xml to refer to the secure web site xml file lt web site default true path secure web site xml gt For detailed information about implementing SSL see the Oracle Application Server Containers for J2EE Security Guide The Oracle Net connection between the iSQL Plus Server and Oracle Database provides the same security as in previous client server architectures For more information about Oracle Net connection security see the Oracle Net Services Administrator s Guide an
356. in the buffer The buffer has no command history list and does not record SQL Plus commands To add a single line enter the text of the line after the command INPUT separating the text from the command with a space To begin the line with one or more spaces enter two or more spaces between INPUT and the first non blank character of text To add several lines enter INPUT with no text INPUT prompts you for each line To leave INPUT enter a null empty line or a period If you enter a line number at the command prompt larger than the number of lines in the buffer and follow the number with text SOL Plus adds the text in a new line at the end of the buffer If you specify zero 0 for the line number and follow the zero with text then SQL Plus inserts the line at the beginning of the buffer that line becomes line 1 Assume the SQL buffer contains the following command SELECT LAST_NAME DEPARTMENT_ID SALARY COMMISSION_PCT FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW To add an ORDER BY clause to the query enter LIST 2 2 FROM EMP_DETAILS VIEW INPUT ORDER BY LAST_NAME SQL Plus Command Reference 13 77 INPUT LIST 2 ensures that line 2 is the current line INPUT adds a new line containing the ORDER BY clause after the current line The SQL buffer now contains the following lines 1 SELECT LAST_NAME DEPARTMENT_ID SALARY COMMISSION_PCT 2 FROM EMP_DETAILS VIEW 3 ORDER BY LAST_NAME To add a two line WHERE clause enter LIST
357. ine by itself a with a blank line A semicolon tells SOL Plus that you want to run the command Type the semicolon at the end of the last line of the command as shown in Example 5 3 Entering a SQL Command and press Return or click Execute SQL Plus processes the command and also stores the command in the SQL buffer See The SQL Buffer on page 5 3 for details If you mistakenly press Return before typing the semicolon SQL Plus prompts you with a line number for the next line of your command not in iSQL Plus Type the semicolon and press Return again or click Execute to run the command A slash ona line by itself also tells SQL Plus that you wish to run the command Press Return at the end of the last line of the command SQL Plus prompts you with another line number not in iSQL Plus Type a slash and press Return again or click Execute SOL Plus executes the command and stores it in the buffer A blank line in a SQL statement or script tells SQL Plus that you have finished entering the command but do not want to run it yet Press Return at the end of the last line of the command SQL Plus prompts you with another line number not in iSQL Plus Note You can change the way empty lines in SQL statements behave using the SET SQLBLANKLINES command not in iSQL Plus For more information about changing blank line behavior see the SET command on page 13 103 To execute commands this way press Return again SQL Plus
358. inesize with the SET LINESIZE command usually makes each column proportionally smaller or larger This may give unexpected text wrapping in your display For more information see the SET command later in this chapter The description for functions and procedures contains the following information the type of PL SQL object function or procedure a the name of the function or procedure a the type of value returned for functions the argument names types whether input or output and default values if any Examples To describe the view EMP_DETAILS_VIEW enter DESCRIBE EMP_DETAILS_VIEW Name Null Type EMPLOYEE_ID NOT NULL NUMBER 6 JOB_ID NOT NULL VARCHAR2 10 MANAGER_ID NUMBER 6 DEPARTMENT _ID NUMBER 4 LOCATION_ID NUMBER 4 COUNTRY_ID CHAR 2 FIRST NAME VARCHAR2 20 LAST NAME NOT NULL VARCHAR2 25 SALARY NUMBER 8 2 COMMISSION_PCT NUMBER 2 2 DEPARTMENT _NAME NOT NULL VARCHAR2 30 JOB_TITLE NOT NULL VARCHAR2 35 City NOT NULL VARCHAR2 30 STATE_PROVINCE VARCHAR2 25 COUNTRY_NAME VARCHAR2 40 REGION_NAME VARCHAR2 25 13 60 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference DESCRIBE To describe a procedure called CUSTOMER_LOOKUP enter DESCRIBE customer_lookup PROCEDURE customer_lookup Argument Name Type In Out Default CUST_ID NUMBER IN CUST_NAME VARCHAR2 OUT To create and describe the package APACK that contains the procedures aproc and bproc enter CREAT
359. insert unchanging text in a BTITLE enclose it in quotes so that it is only substituted once For information on displaying a column value in the top title see NEW_V ALUE variable For more information on referencing variables in titles see the TTITLE on page 13 155 command later in this chapter ON OFF Controls the status of display attributes for a column OFF disables the attributes for a column without affecting the attributes definition ON reinstates the attributes WRAIPPED WOR D_WRAPPED TRU NCATED Specifies how SQL Plus will treat a datatype or DATE string that is too wide for a column WRAPPED wraps the string within the column bounds beginning new lines when required When WORD_WRAP is enabled SQL Plus left justifies each new line skipping all leading whitespace for example returns newline characters tabs and spaces including embedded newline characters Embedded whitespace not on a line boundary is not skipped TRUNCATED truncates the string at the end of the first line of display The COLUMN commands you enter can control a column s display attributes for multiple SQL SELECT commands You can enter any number of COLUMN commands for one or more columns All column attributes set for each column remain in effect for the remainder of the 13 38 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COLUMN Examples session until you turn the column OFF or until you use the CLEAR COLUMN command When you enter m
360. installing own copy of HR 1 6 sample xxiv SHOW parameter 13 136 unlocking HR xl 1 6 using HR in COLUMN example 13 40 using HR in examples 6 1 7 1 8 8 screen buffer area 2 7 SCREEN clause 6 31 13 30 screens Change Password 4 2 clearing 6 31 13 30 connection identifier field 2 12 2 15 DBA Login 2 13 DBA Workspace 2 17 Index 17 screens continued enter statements field 2 18 2 19 Expired Password 4 4 History 2 18 Login 2 12 2 14 new password field 4 3 password field 2 12 2 15 Preferences 2 20 privilege list 2 15 script location field 2 21 username field 2 12 2 15 4 3 Workspace 2 16 scripts extension 13 101 13 133 13 152 location field 2 21 registering 9 12 See also command file Search menu 2 6 Secure Sockets Layer security 10 11 security Application Server 10 11 changing password 13 81 HTTP 10 10 Oracle Net 10 10 password viewable 4 24 PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE table 10 1 RESTRICT 4 23 10 9 Secure Sockets Layer SSL 10 11 SELECT command and BREAK command 7 12 13 20 13 21 and COLUMN command 13 32 and COMPUTE command 7 12 and COPY command _ B 3 B 6 and DEFINE command 13 51 and ORDER BY clause 7 12 formatting results 6 33 semicolon in PL SQL blocks 5 8 in SQL commands 5 5 5 7 in SQL Plus commands 5 11 13 1 not stored in buffer 6 5 server authentication 10 11 iSQL Plus port conflict 3 12 SERVEROUTPUT variable 13 126 Index 18 service name in
361. ion and name of the subsequent log files that need to be applied UPGRADE Starts the database in OPEN UPGRADE mode and sets system initialization parameters to specific values required to enable database upgrade scripts to be run UPGRADE should only be used when a database is first started with a new version of the Oracle Database Server See the Oracle Database Upgrade Guide for details about preparing for testing and implementing a database version upgrade When run upgrade scripts transform an installed version or release of an Oracle database into a later version for example to upgrade an Oracle9i database to Oracle Database 10g Once the upgrade completes the database should be shut down and restarted normally SQL Plus Command Reference 13 149 STARTUP DOWNGRADE Starts the database in OPEN DOWNGRADE mode and sets system initialization parameters to specific values required to enable database downgrade scripts to be run See the Oracle Database Upgrade Guide for details about preparing for testing and implementing a database version downgrade When run downgrade scripts transform an installed version or release of Oracle Database into a previous version for example to downgrade an Oracle10g database to an Oracle9i database Once the downgrade completes the database should be shut down and restarted normally Usage You must be connected to a database as SYSOPER or SYSDBA You cannot be connected through a mult
362. isplay the warnings and messages SP2 0844 Library altered with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL library has been altered but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0845 Java created with compilation error Cause The PL SQL java has been created but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0846 Java altered with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL java has been altered but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0847 PL SQL compilation errors Cause The PL SQL block has been created but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SQL Plus Error Messages 14 43 SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0848 Dimension created with compilation errors SP2 SP2 SP2 Cause The PL SQL dimension has been created but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages 0849 Dimension altered with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL dimension has been altered but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages 1500 STARTUP with UPGRADE only valid with Oracle 9 2 or greater
363. k SET NUMF ORMAT format Sets the default format for displaying numbers Enter a number format for format Enter SET NUMFORMAT to use the default field width and formatting model specified by SET NUMWIDTH SET NUM WIDTH 10 n Sets the default width for displaying numbers See the FORMAT clause of the COLUMN command on page 13 33 and SET NUMF ORMAT format on page 13 124 and SET NUM WIDTH 10 n on page 13 124 for number format descriptions COLUMN FORMAT settings take precedence over SET NUMFORMAT settings which take precedence over SET NUMWIDTH settings SET PAGES IZE 14 n Sets the number of rows on each page of output in iSQL Plus and the number of lines on each page of output in command line and Windows GUI You can set PAGESIZE to zero to suppress all headings page breaks titles the initial blank line and other formatting information In iSQL Plus sets the number of rows displayed on each page Error and informational messages are not counted in the page size so pages may not always be exactly the same length The default pagesize for iSQL Plus is 24 13 124 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET PAU SE ON OFF tex Enables you to control scrolling of your terminal when running reports You need to first SET PAUSE text and then SET PAUSE ON if you want text to appear each time SQL Plus pauses In command line and Windows GUI SET PAUSE ON pauses
364. l database you can omit the FROM clause When you copy between remote databases you must include both clauses However including both clauses increases the readability of your scripts The COPY command behaves differently based on whether the destination table already exists and on the action clause you enter CREATE in the example See Controlling Treatment of the Destination Table on page B 6 for more information By default the copied columns have the same names in the destination table that they have in the source table If you want to give new names to the columns in the destination table enter the new names in parentheses after the destination table name If you enter any column names you must enter a name for every column you are copying SQL Plus COPY Command B 5 Copying Data from One Database to Another Note To enable the copying of data between Oracle and non Oracle databases NUMBER columns are changed to DECIMAL columns in the destination table Hence if you are copying between Oracle databases a NUMBER column with no precision will be changed to a DECIMAL 38 column When copying between Oracle databases you should use SQL commands CREATE TABLE AS and INSERT or you should ensure that your columns have a precision specified The USING clause specifies a query that names the source table and specifies the data that COPY copies to the destination table You can use any form of the SQL SELECT command t
365. l messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL dimension Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0826 Dimension altered with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL dimension has been altered but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL dimension Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0827 Procedure created with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL procedure has been created but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0828 Procedure altered with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL procedure has been altered but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages 14 40 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0829 Function created with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL function has been created but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0830 Function altered with compilation errors Cause The PL SQL function has been altered but has one or more error messages Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0831 Package
366. le 8 1 Creating a Report Interactively You can create HTML output in an interactive SQL Plus session using the SET MARKUP command You can include an embedded style sheet or any other valid text in the HTML lt HEAD gt tag Open a SQL Plus session and enter the following SET MARKUP HTML ON SPOOL ON PREFORMAT OFF ENTMAP ON HEAD lt TITLE gt Department Report lt TITLE gt lt STYLE type text css gt lt BODY background FFFFC6 gt lt STYLE gt BODY TEXT FFOOF TABLE WIDTH 90 BORDER 5 You use the COLUMN command to control column output The following COLUMN commands create new heading names for the SQL query output The first command also turns off entity mapping for the DEPARTMENT_NAME 8 2 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Creating Reports using Command line SQL Plus column to allow HTML hyperlinks to be correctly created in this column of the output data COLUMN DEPARTMENT_NAME HEADING DEPARTMENT ENTMAP OFF COLUMN CITY HEADING CITY SET MARKUP HTML ON SPOOL ON enables SQL Plus to write HTML to a spool file The following SPOOL command triggers the writing of the lt HTML gt and lt BODY gt tags to the named file SPOOL report html After the SPOOL command anything entered or displayed on standard output is written to the spool file report html Enter a SQL query SELECT lt A HREF http oracle com DEPARTMENT_NAME htm1 gt DEPARTMENT_ NAME lt A gt
367. le it is Running Suppose you have displayed the first page of a 50 page report and decide you do not need to see the rest of it Press Cancel the system s interrupt character which is usually CTRL C SQL Plus stops the display In iSQL Plus click the Cancel button Note Pressing Cancel does not stop the printing of a file that you have sent to a printer with the OUT clause of the SQL Plus SPOOL command You will learn about printing query results in Chapter 7 Formatting SQL Plus Reports You can stop the printing of a file through your operating system For more information see your operating system s installation and user s guide 5 12 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Saving Changes to the Database Automatically Running Operating System Commands You can execute an operating system command from the SQL Plus command prompt This is useful when you want to perform a task such as listing existing operating system files To run an operating system command enter the SQL Plus command HOST followed by the operating system command For example this SQL Plus command runs the command DIRECTORY SQL HOST DIRECTORY SQL When the command finishes running the SQL Plus command prompt appears again Note Operating system commands entered from a SQL Plus session using the HOST command do not affect the current SQL Plus session For example setting an operating system environment variable does not affec
368. lem Shortcuts to Starting Command line SQL Plus When you start SOL Plus you can enter your username and password separated by a slash following the command SQLPLUS For example you can enter SQLPLUS HR your_password and press Return Getting Command line Help To access command line help for SQL Plus commands type HELP or followed by the command name at the SQL command prompt or in the iSQL Plus Workspace Input area See the HELP command on page 13 74 for more information For example HELP ACCEPT To display a list of SQL Plus commands type HELP followed by either TOPICS or INDEX HELP TOPICS displays a single column list of SQL Plus commands HELP INDEX displays a four column list of SQL Plus commands which fits in a standard screen For example HELP INDEX Starting the Windows Graphical User Interface The graphical user interface can be started from the Windows menu or from a Windows command prompt Starting the GUI from the Windows Menu 1 Select Programs in the Start menu Then select Oracle ORACLE_HOME then Application Development and click SQL Plus The SQL Plus window appears displaying the Log On dialog Starting SQL Plus 4 9 Starting SQL Plus User Name l Password Host String Enter a valid user name and password If you are connecting to a remote Oracle database enter the Oracle Net connect identifier in the Host String field To connect to the default database le
369. les You can control the formatting of the PRINT output just as you would query output For more information see the formatting techniques described in Chapter 7 Formatting SQL Plus Reports To automatically display bind variables referenced in a successful PL SQL block or used in an EXECUTE command use the AUTOPRINT clause of the SET command See SET on page 13 103 for more information The following example illustrates a PRINT command VARIABLE n NUMBER BEGIN oi ae geal END PL SQL procedure successfully completed PRINT n SQL Plus Command Reference 13 83 PROMPT PROMPT Syntax Usage Examples PRO MPT text where text represents the text of the message you want to display Sends the specified message or a blank line to the user s screen If you omit text PROMPT displays a blank line on the user s screen You can use this command in scripts to give information to the user The following example shows the use of PROMPT in conjunction with ACCEPT in a script called ASKFORDEPT SQL ASKFORDEPT SQL contains the following SQL Plus and SQL commands PROMPT PROMPT Please enter a valid department PROMPT For example 10 SELECT DEPARTMENT NAME FROM EMP DETAILS VIEW WHERE DEPARTMENT_ID amp NEWDEPT Assume you run the file using START or ASKFORDEPT SQL VAL1 HTTP machine_name domain port ASKFORDEPT SQL VAL1 Please enter a valid department For example 10 Department ID
370. lick the link to go to the screen you want Footer Links Footer links are navigation links to available screens shown at the bottom of each page Click a link to go to that screen SQL Plus User Interface 2 11 iSQL Plus User Interface iSQL Plus Login Screen You connect to the Login screen from your web browser with a URL like http machine_name domain port isqlplus The Login screen is displayed ORACLE 2SQL Plus Login Indicates required field Username system Password p Connect Identifier finst Login Help Copyright 2003 Oracle All ighis reserved Username Enter a valid username to connect to the Oracle Database mandatory Password Enter a valid password for the username mandatory Connection Identifier Leave this field blank to use the default Oracle database otherwise enter a connection identifier for the database you want to connect to host port service_name You can optionally use INSTANCE_NAME instance phrase in place of the SERVICE_NAME name phrase When connecting to an Oracle8 or earlier database you use the SID name phrase Alternatively you can use an Oracle Net alias If you use an Oracle Net alias it must be specified on the machine running the iSQL Plus Server which may not be the same machine from which you run your web browser 2 12 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference iSQL Plus User Interface iSQL Plus can be configur
371. lid numeric values for the Input area size SP2 0884 Connection to database connect_identifier is not allowed Cause An attempt was made to connect to a database that SOL Plus has not been configured to allow connections to Action If this occurred with the CONNECT command in iSQL Plus the iSQLPlusConnectldList configuration parameter in the web xml file does not include the connection identifier used For example when the command CONNECT username password connect_identifier is entered the connect_ identifier must match a connection identifier in the parameter list The connection identifier is not case sensitive SP2 0885 Only a valid username or is allowed in the username field Cause An attempt was made to enter a value other than a username or in the iSQL Plus Login screen Username field Action Only a username is allowed in the iSQL Plus Login screen Username field A username or is allowed in the iSQL Plus DBA Login screen SP2 0886 No scripts in history Cause No scripts are available in the history list because no scripts have yet been executed in this session Action Scripts are only made available in the history list after they have been executed in the session SP2 0887 History size specified is non numeric or outside the range 0 100 Cause The history size specified was either not a numeric value or was not in the range 0 to 100 Action Re enter a numeric value in the range 0 to 100 for the
372. login screen If the URL parameter is complete and the login information is valid iSQL Plus connects and continues with the request SQL script parameters can be given in any order If any user variable script parameter begins with a reserved keyword such as script or userid iSQL Plus may interpret it as a command rather than as a literal parameter If the URL parameter type is url or if it is not specified the script parameter is assumed to be the URL of a SQL script If the URL parameter type is text the text in the script parameter is assumed to be the contents of the SQL script itself There may be HTML character set restrictions on scripts passed using this method If the URL parameter action is execute or if it is not specified the SQL script is executed in iSQL Plus If the URL parameter action is load the script is loaded into the Workspace but it is not executed A web browser may not be able to display large scripts in the Workspace and as a result scripts may be truncated Examples To log into iSQL Plus with the username HR and password your_password enter http machine_name domain 5560 isqlplus dynamic userid HR your_password To execute a script that is located at the URL http machine_ name2 domain myscript sql in iSQL Plus and prompt for username and password enter http machine_name domain 5560 isqlplus dynamic script http machine_ name2 domain myscript sql Starting SQL Plus 4 15 Exiting S
373. lus passes the arguments to the script as if executing the file using the SQL Plus START command If no file suffix file extension is specified the suffix defined by the SET SUFFIX command is used The default suffix is sql See the START command on page 13 146 for more information Starting SQL Plus 4 25 SQLPLUS Program Syntax 4 26 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Part Il Using SQL Plus This section helps you learn how to use SQL Plus how to tune SQL Plus for better performance how to restrict access to tables and commands and provides overviews of database administration tools and globalization support The following chapters are covered in this section SQL Plus Basics Using Scripts in SQL Plus Formatting SQL Plus Reports Generating HTML Reports from SQL Plus Tuning SQL Plus SQL Plus Security Database Administration with SQL Plus SQL Plus Globalization Support 9 SQL Plus Basics This chapter helps you learn the basics of using SQL Plus It has the following topics a Entering and Executing Commands a Listing a Table Definition a Listing PL SQL Definitions Running SQL Commands a Running PL SQL Blocks Running SQL Plus Commands a System Variables that Affect How Commands Run Stopping a Command while it is Running a Running Operating System Commands a Pausing the Display a Saving Changes to the Database Automatically a Interpreting Error Messages SQL Plus Basics 5
374. lus tuning security database administration and globalization information Chapter 5 SQL Plus Basics Explains how to enter and execute commands You learn by following step by step examples using sample tables Xxi xxii Chapter 6 Using Scripts in SQL Plus Contains further examples to help you learn to write and edit scripts containing SOL Plus SOL and PL SQL statements and commands Chapter 7 Formatting SQL Plus Reports Uses examples to explain how you can format your query results to produce a finished text report Chapter 8 Generating HTML Reports from SQL Plus Explains how to generate a HTML report containing your query results Chapter 9 Tuning SQL Plus Explains how to obtain and use statistics and other mechanisms to obtain optimal performance from SQL Plus Chapter 10 SQL Plus Security Explains how to restrict access to databases and to certain SQL Plus and SQL commands Chapter 11 Database Administration with SQL Plus Explains basic database administration features in SQL Plus for Database Administrators DBAs Chapter 12 SQL Plus Globalization Support Explains how to configure globalization support in command line SQL Plus and iSQL Plus user interfaces PART Ill SQL Plus Reference Contains SQL Plus Command Reference and Error Messages Chapter 13 SQL Plus Command Reference Provides a summary of SQL Plus commands and detailed descriptions of each SQL Plus command in alph
375. lus will scan commands for substitution variables and replace them with their values ON changes the value of c back to the default amp not the most recently used character The setting of DEFINE to OFF overrides the setting of the SCAN variable See SET SCAN ON OFF obsolete on page C 4 for more information on the SCAN variable 13 114 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET DESCRIBE DEPTH 1 n ALL LINENUM ON OFF INDENT ON OFF Example Sets the depth of the level to which you can recursively describe an object The valid range of the DEPTH clause is from 1 to 50 If you SET DESCRIBE DEPTH ALL then the depth will be set to 50 which is the maximum level allowed You can also display the line number and indentation of the attribute or column name when an object contains multiple object types Use the SET LINESIZE command to control the width of the data displayed See DESCRIBE on page 13 59 for more information about describing objects To create an object type ADDRESS enter CREATE TYPE ADDRESS AS OBJECT STREET VARCHAR2 20 CITY VARCHAR2 20 Type created To create the table EMPLOYEE that contains a nested object EMPADDR of type ADDRESS enter CREATE TABLE EMPLOYEE LAST_NAME VARCHAR2 30 EMPADDR ADDRESS JOB_ID VARCHAR2 20 SALARY NUMBER 7 2 3 Table created To describe the table EMPLOYEE to a depth of two levels and to inden
376. mand If the expression in the SELECT command is a b for example you cannot use b a or a b in a COLUMN command to refer to the expression in the SELECT command If you select columns with the same name from different tables a COLUMN command for that column name will apply to both columns That is a COLUMN command for the column LAST_NAME applies to all columns named LAST_NAME that you reference in this session COLUMN ignores table name prefixes in SELECT commands Also spaces are ignored unless the name is placed in double quotes To format the columns differently assign a unique alias to each column within the SELECT command itself do not use the ALIAS clause of the COLUMN command and enter a COLUMN command for each column s alias ALI AS alias Assigns a specified alias to a column which can be used to refer to the column in BREAK COMPUTE and other COLUMN commands CLE AR Resets the display attributes for the column to default values To reset the attributes for all columns use the CLEAR COLUMNS command CLEAR COLUMNS also clears the ATTRIBUTES for that column ENTMAP ON OFF Enables entity mapping to be turned on or off for selected columns in HTML output This feature enables you to include for example HTML hyperlinks in a column of data while still mapping entities in other columns of the same report By turning entity mapping off for a column containing HTML hyperlinks the HTML anchor tag delimiters lt
377. mand for the correct options SP2 0515 Maximum number of columns max_num_columns exceeded Cause The maximum number of columns was exceeded in the COPY command Action Reduce the number of columns and try again 14 18 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0516 Invalid command_name name NULL encountered Cause An invalid or null column name was specified in either the COLUMN or the ATTRIBUTE command Action Retry the operation with a valid column name SP2 0517 Missing comma or right parenthesis Cause A missing right parenthesis was identified in the COPY command Action Retry the operation with a comma or right parenthesis SP2 0518 Missing USING clause Cause USING keyword is missing in the USING clause of the COPY command Action Specify the USING keyword before the USING clause of the COPY command SP2 0519 FROM string missing Oracle Net database specification Cause Missing connect string for the database that contains the data to be copied from in the COPY command Action Include a FROM clause to specify a source database other than the default SP2 0520 TO string missing Oracle Net database specification Cause Missing connect string for the database containing the destination table in the COPY command Action Include a TO clause to specify a source database other than the default SP2 0526 Misplaced INSERT keyword Cause The INSERT keyword was misplaced in the
378. mand was entered Action Check the syntax of the VARIABLE command for the correct usage SP2 0549 Usage PRINT lt variable gt Cause Incorrect syntax for the PRINT command was entered Action Check the syntax of the PRINT command for the correct usage SP2 0550 Usage SHOW ERRORS FUNCTION PROCEDURE PACKAGE PACKAGE BODY TRIGGER VIEW TYPE TYPE BODY DIMENSION JAVA SOURCE JAVA CLASS schema name Cause Incorrect syntax for the SHOW ERRORS command was entered Action Check the syntax of the SHOW ERRORS command for the correct options 14 20 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0552 Bind variable variable_name not declared Cause The specified bind variable was not declared Action Run the VARIABLE command to check that the bind variables you used in your SQL statement exist Before running a SQL statement with bind variables you must use the VARIABLE command to declare each variable SP2 0556 Invalid file name Usage STORE SET filenamel ext CRE ATE REP LACE APP END or Unable to complete EDIT command Cause Missing file name or an invalid file name specified Action Make sure that a file name was specified SP2 0559 Usage EXEC UTE statement Cause Incorrect syntax for the EXECUTE command was entered Action Check the syntax of the EXECUTE command for the correct usage SP2 0560 Usage DESCRIBE schema object subobject db_link col
379. may wish to place the commands CLEAR BREAKS and CLEAR COMPUTES at the beginning of every script to ensure that previously entered BREAK and COMPUTE commands will not affect queries you run in a given file Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions The word page refers to a screen full of information on your display or a page of a spooled printed report You can place top and bottom titles on each page set the number of lines per page and determine the width of each line The word report refers to the complete results of a query You can also place headers and footers on each report and format them in the same way as top and bottom titles on pages Setting the Top and Bottom Titles and Headers and Footers As you have already seen you can set a title to display at the top of each page of a report You can also set a title to display at the bottom of each page The TTITLE command defines the top title the BTITLE command defines the bottom title You can also set a header and footer for each report The REPHEADER command defines the report header the REPFOOTER command defines the report footer A TTITLE BTITLE REPHEADER or REPFOOTER command consists of the command name followed by one or more clauses specifying a position or format and a CHAR value you wish to place in that position or give that format You can include multiple sets of clauses and CHAR values TTITLE position_clause s char_value position_clause s char_valu
380. mber specified was incorrect Action Check that the line number is correct and try again 14 10 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0226 Invalid line number current_line_number Cause Invalid line number was specified Action Re enter with a valid line number SP2 0232 Input too long Must be less than number_of_characters characters Cause The input value was too long Action Reduce the size of the value and re enter SP2 0233 Unable to obtain userid after number_of_attempts attempts Retry command Cause SQL Plus was unable to login after three attempts Action Make sure the userid and password is correct and try again SP2 0240 Enter value for variable_name Cause SQL Plus was unable to find a value for a substitution variable Action Enter a value for the substitution variable at the prompt SP2 0241 No room for symbol symbol_name not defined Cause Unable to allocate memory for the symbol Action Free up additional memory by closing applications not required reducing the size of the command or statement or by recoding the query to select fewer records SP2 0244 Cannot issue a PRINT command within a PAGE break Cause The PRINT command is not allowed within a PAGE break Action Check the syntax of the PRINT command for the correct options SP2 0245 Unable to allocate temporary storage for printing Cause Unable to allocate temporary storage for printing Action Fr
381. me Cause Unable to allocate memory to process the COMPUTE command Action Free up additional memory by closing applications not required reducing the size of the command or statement or by recoding the query to select fewer records SP2 0098 no storage to allocate COMPUTE block for column_name Cause Unable to allocate memory to process the COMPUTE command Action Free up additional memory by closing applications not required reducing the size of the command or statement or by recoding the query to select fewer records SP2 0103 Nothing in SQL buffer to run Cause Nothing was in the SQL buffer to run Action Enter a valid SQL command SQL Plus commands are not stored in the SQL buffer SP2 0105 Illegal or missing entity name Cause File name was not specified in the GET or SAVE commands Action Specify a file name and try again 14 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0107 Nothing to save Cause Nothing in the SQL buffer when attempting to save the content to a file Action Enter a SQL command to save SQL Plus commands are not stored in the SOL buffer SP2 0108 The filenames CREATE REPLACE APPEND FILE and abbreviations may not be used Cause An attempt was made to enter a filename using the word FILE or one of the command keywords CREATE REPLACE APPEND or one of their abbreviations The filename specified in the command was not permitted Action Check the following c
382. ment Variables These environment variables specify the location or path of files used by SQL Plus and the iSQL Plus Application Server For other environment variables that influence the behavior of SOL Plus see the Oracle Database Administrator s Reference Table 3 1 Parameters or Environment Variables influencing SQL Plus and iSQL Plus Parameter or Variable Description LD_LIBRARY_PATH Environment variable to specify the path used to search for libraries on UNIX The environment variable may have a different name on some operating systems such as LIBPATH SHLIB_PATH LD_LIBRARY_PATH64 Not applicable to Windows Example SORACLE_HOME 1ib Configuring SQL Plus 3 1 SQL Plus and iSQL Plus Environment Variables Table 3 1 Parameters or Environment Variables influencing SQL Plus and iSQL Plus Parameter or Variable Description LOCAL NLS_LANG ORACLE_HOME ORA_NLS10 ORACLE_ PATH ORACLE_SID PATH SQLPATH 3 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Windows environment variable to specify a connection string Performs the same function as TWO_TASK on UNIX Environment variable to specify globalization behavior Example american_america utf 8 Environment variable to specify where SQL Plus is installed It is also used by SQL Plus to specify where message files are located Examples d oracle 10g u01 app oracle product v10g Environment variable to specify the locations of the NLS data
383. mmands That Can Be Disabled ALTER DELETE MERGE SET CONSTRAINTS ANALYZE DISASSOCIATE NOAUDIT SET ROLE ASSOCIATE DROP PURGE SET TRANSACTION AUDIT EXPLAIN RENAME TRUNCATE CALL FLASHBACK REVOKE UPDATE COMMENT GRANT ROLLBACK VALIDATE COMMIT INSERT SAVEPOINT na CREATE LOCK SELECT na You can disable the following PL SQL commands PL SQL Commands That Can Be Disabled BEGIN DECLARE na na SQL Plus Security 10 5 Disabling SQL Plus SQL and PL SQL Commands Notes a Disabling HOST disables the operating system alias for HOST such as on Windows and on UNIX a Disabling LIST disables and numbers numbers entered to go to that line in a script a You must disable HELP and separately to disable access to command line help a Disabling the SQL Plus SET command also disables SQL SET CONSTRAINTS SET ROLE and SET TRANSACTION Disabling SQL Plus START also disables and Disabling BEGIN and DECLARE does not prevent the use of SQL Plus EXECUTE to run PL SQL EXECUTE must be disabled separately a Disabling EXIT QUIT is not recommended If disabled terminate a command line session by sending an EOF character such as Ctrl D in UNIX or Ctrl Z in Windows Terminate a Windows GUI session with File gt Exit Otherwise terminate a session by terminating the SQL Plus process If disabled using EXIT QUIT to terminate the currently running script in iSQL Plus is also disabled If disabled the EXI
384. mponents provide communication between the iSQL Plus Application Server and Oracle Database in the same way as for a client server installation of Oracle Database SQL Plus Overview 1 3 SQL Plus Installation SQL Plus Installation SQL Plus is a component of Oracle Database SQL Plus and its command line user interface Windows GUI and iSQL Plus web based user interface are installed by default when you install the Oracle Database Some aspects of Oracle Database and SQL Plus differ from one computer and operating system to another These topics are discussed in the Oracle Database Installation Guide for each operating system that SQL Plus supports Keep a copy of your Oracle Database Installation Guide available for reference SQL Plus Date Format The default date format in SQL Plus is determined by the database NLS_DATE_ FORMAT parameter and may use a date format displaying two digit years You can use the SOL TO_CHAR function or the SOL Plus COLUMN FORMAT command in your SELECT statements to control the way dates are displayed in your report Who Can Use SQL Plus The SQL Plus SQL and PL SQL command languages are powerful enough to serve the needs of users with some database experience yet straightforward enough for new users who are just learning to work with the Oracle Database The SQL Plus language is easy to use For example to rename a column labelled LAST_NAME with the heading Family Name enter the command
385. n Make sure the script contains statements to execute and execute the script again SP2 0869 Invalid file content Cause Attempted to load a script into the Input area with a format the web server cannot understand Action Make sure the script is in a text file and the MIME type settings needed by your browser to recognize the file are set correctly Typically if you are loading a file with the extension SQL then make sure the browser has a SQL MIME type SP2 0871 No script to load Cause Clicked Load Script but either no file name was specified or the specified file name did not exist or if it existed it was empty Action Enter the name of an existing file into the field and try again or if the specified file existed but was empty no action is required SQL Plus Error Messages 14 47 iSQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0873 An unexpected quote was found in the URL argument Cause A quote was found in the middle of the value portion of a keyword value pair Action Check for and remove the extra quote SP2 0874 URL argument is missing a keyword Cause No keyword was found in a keyword value pair of a URL argument Action Check for a missing keyword or perhaps a missing equals sign SP2 0875 URL argument contains a keyword but no value Cause The value for a keyword was missing in a keyword value pair of a URL Action Check for a missing value or perhaps a missing equals sign SP2 0876 URL argument is missing a
386. n headiing SHOW non_existed_option SQL Plus Command Reference 13 171 WHENEVER SQLERROR The following PL SQL block error causes SQL Plus to exit and return the SQL error code WHENEVER SQLERROR EXIT SQL SQLCODE begin SELECT COLUMN_DOES_NOT_EXIST FROM DUAL END SELECT COLUMN_DOES_NOT_EXIST FROM DUAL ERROR at line 2 ORA 06550 line 2 column 10 PLS 00201 identifier COLUMN_DOES_NOT_EXIST must be declared ORA 06550 line 2 column 3 PL SQL SQL Statement ignored Disconnected from Oracle 13 172 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference 14 SQL Plus Error Messages This appendix lists error messages with prefixes SP2 and CPY generated by SQL Plus and iSQL Plus a SQL Plus Error Messages a iSQL Plus Error Messages COPY Command Messages For error messages with prefixes such as ORA TNS and PLS generated by Oracle Database see the Oracle Database Error Messages guide SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0002 ACCEPT statement must specify a variable name Cause Required variable name was missing after the ACCEPT command Action Re enter the ACCEPT command with a variable argument to store the input value SP2 0003 Ill formed ACCEPT command starting as command_string Cause An invalid option was used in the ACCEPT command Action Check the syntax of the ACCEPT command for the correct option SP2 0004 Nothing to append Cause There was no specified text entered after the AP
387. n batch mode SQL Plus uses the redirected file After you enter a value at the prompt SQL Plus lists the line containing the substitution variable twice once before substituting the value you enter and once Using Scripts in SQL Plus 6 17 Using Substitution Variables after substitution You can suppress this listing by setting the SET command variable VERIFY to OFF Example 6 9 Using Substitution Variables Create a script named STATS to be used to calculate a subgroup statistic the maximum value on a numeric column SELECT amp GROUP_COL MAX amp NUMBER_COL MAXIMUM FROM amp TABLE GROUP BY amp GROUP_COL SAVE STATS Created file STATS Now run the script STATS STATS And respond to the prompts for values as shown Enter value for group_col JOB_ID old 1 SELECT amp GROUP_COL new 1 SELECT JOB_ID Enter value for number_col SALARY old 2a MAX amp NUMBER_COL MAXIMUM new 2 MAX SALARY MAXIMUM Enter value for table EMP_DETAILS_VIEW old 3 FROM amp TABLE new 3 FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW Enter value for group_col JOB_ID old 4 GROUP BY amp GROUP_COL new 4 GROUP BY JOB_ID 6 18 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Using Substitution Variables SQL Plus displays the following output JOB_ID MAXIMUM AC_ACCOUNT 8300 AC_MGR 12000 AD_ASST 4400 AD_PRES 24000 AD_VP 17000 FI_ACCOUNT 9000 FI_MGR 12000 HR_REP 6500 IT_PROG 9000 MK_MAN 13000 MK_REP 6000
388. n ccc i eiei i a T A tent E E E 13 84 RECOVER EEE ETA E EEES SAA E 13 85 REMARK onsems arii an i aai a tees a EE AE E A E OEA O EE A ES 13 94 REPFOOT ER i a a a a a r aa a aa a a Min aa aa aaa aaa aa aa aaea ESS 13 95 REPHEA DER r cess a a en setae E a eee ie ee ice ee 13 97 FRU gage chs ovat iea ek oven ode tea ok a ERA ETTE cas O ee duels tnedeua cds cnstucy dish A EET edocs 13 100 SAVE roae i A a OT a ae AE Ee a PAE r AA ogsacounes E E Re re a Eae Taks 13 101 SED EEEE E EEEE E T S E SEEE AENEAS EA EAEE 13 103 SET System Variable Summary s s esssesesesesesesisessssssesesiseenesssnenenisenenininnenenenenenenentenenenenenee 13 104 SETAPPIINFO Jinn repera gi aaan a a a ala Reha nieces 13 107 SEFARRA Y OZE r r a aa Ste a eel atiii 13 109 SETAUTOICOMMIT Meriti hinin aa ar a a 13 109 SETAUTOPIRI T rnea E e a E R A Ea avin ES 13 109 SEE AVTOR C OV R e a aeri Taa e shasta sets ee toad apecs sack cues R EEA 13 110 SEL AUTOT RACGE isene nna a e a erat ee e a E 13 110 SET BLO CKTERMINATOR cccccccesscessssseescescessceesecesseseseeseseseeseseecsecseecaecsaeeascesseaseeseees 13 111 SET CMDS EP EEAS aden less dabise hada ine lean naens 13 111 SET COLSEP tint e tout hoes Bioeth elated tint SPR heel Se ii eG 13 112 SET COM PA PIBISIETY s cfese Peele ecehias ieee Sel Bach aekctes ROR eaten reticent ee 13 113 SET CON GAT ecen ante dtatiaen ial Bin heer tein Aa a a el eta ante acter hel 13 114 SET COPY G OMMIT scsccccosteseezest e r a na ied
389. n codes is also restricted on some operating systems This limits the portability of EXIT n and EXIT variable between platforms For example on UNIX there is only one byte of storage for return codes therefore the range for return codes is limited to zero to 255 If you make a syntax error in the EXIT options or use a non numeric variable SQL Plus performs an EXIT FAILURE COMMIT For information on exiting conditionally see the WHENEVER SQLERROR command on page 13 170 and WHENEVER OSERROR command on page 13 168 The following example commits all uncommitted transactions and returns the error code of the last executed SQL command or PL SQL block EXIT SQL SQLCODE SQL Plus Command Reference 13 71 GET GET Syntax Terms Usage GET is not available in iSQL Plus In iSQL Plus use Load Script GET FILE file_name ex LIST NOL IST Loads an operating system file into the SOL buffer In iSQL Plus click the Load Script button to load a script into the Input area The buffer has no command history list and does not record SQL Plus commands FILE Keyword to specify that the following argument is the name of the script you want to load This optional keyword is usually omitted If you want to load a script with the name file because it is a command keyword you need to put the name file in single quotes file_name ex Represents the file you wish to load typically a script LIS T Lists the contents o
390. n end quote Cause Could not find the end quote to match an open quote in a keyword value pair of a URL Action Check for and insert the matching end quote SP2 0877 Found an unexpected character in a URL argument Cause Already have a keyword value pair where the value is quoted but extra characters were still found in a URL argument Action Remove the extra characters SP2 0878 Duplicate keyword keyword specified Cause The keyword was already specified in a previous parameter of a URL argument Action Remove one of the keyword occurrences SP2 0879 Must specify a script for dynamic reports to execute Cause The script keyword was not specified in the URL Action Add a script keyword value pair to the URL argument SP2 0880 Enter connection details to run script script_url Cause iSQL Plus could not log in to the server because there was not URL userid argument or the information supplied was insufficient or incorrect Action Log in through the Login screen to execute the Dynamic Report script 14 48 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference iSQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0882 Empty password field Cause The password field of the iSQL Plus Login screen was empty Action Enter your password before attempting to log in SP2 0883 Invalid Input area size specified Cause The width or height specified for the Input area size was either not a numeric value or was not in the range 1 to 999 Action Re enter va
391. n internal error occurred in the SET command Action Make a note of the message then contact Oracle Support Services SP2 0271 variable_name is not a buffer variable Cause The specified variable was not defined as a buffer Action Make sure that the buffer variable name is correct and try again SP2 0272 character_name character cannot be alphanumeric or white space Cause The specified character in the SET command cannot be alphanumeric or white space Action Check the syntax of the command you used for the correct options SP2 0277 entered_value value not valid Cause The value entered was incorrect Action Re enter with a valid value SQL Plus Error Messages 14 13 SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0281 option_name missing set option Usage SET SHIFT INOUT VIS IBLE INV ISIBLE or Usage SET MARKUP HTML ON OFF HEAD text BODY text TABLE text ENTMAP ON OFF SPOOL ON OFF PRE FORMAT ON OFF M ARKUP HTML ON OFF HEAD text BODY text Cause SET option was missing in the command Action Check the syntax of the command you used for the correct options SP2 0306 Invalid option Usage CONNIECT login AS SYSDBA SYSOPER Where lt login gt lt username gt lt password gt lt connect_string gt or Usage CONN ECT username password connect_identifier AS SYSOPER SYSDBA Jor CONN ECT connect_identifier AS SYSOPER SYSDBA Cause Invalid option was sp
392. n of C 3 DOCUMENT variable C 2 C 4 DROP command disabling 10 5 DUPLICATES clause 13 22 dynamic reports creating 8 8 E ECHO SET command 13 116 ECHO variable 6 14 13 105 13 116 Ed on UNIX 13 54 EDIT command 6 2 13 53 13 54 13 67 creating scripts with 6 2 defining EDITOR 13 67 modifying scripts 13 67 setting default filename 13 105 13 116 Edit menu 2 6 EDITFILE variable 13 105 13 116 editor defining 2 6 invoking 2 6 registry entries 3 29 EDITOR operating system variable 13 54 EMBEDDED variable 13 105 13 116 enabling iSOL Plus 3 24 Enter statements field 2 18 2 19 entities HTML 8 7 ENTMAP 4 21 ENTMAP clause 4 21 8 7 13 32 environment variables iSQL Plus 3 1 LD_LIBRARY_PATH 3 1 LOCAL 3 2 NLS_LANG 3 2 ORA_NLS10 3 2 ORACLE_HOME 3 2 ORACLE _PATH 3 2 ORACLE _SID 3 2 PATH 3 2 SQL Plus 3 1 SQLPATH 3 2 SQLPLUS 3 3 TNS_ADMIN 3 3 TWO_TASK 3 3 error messages COPY command 14 54 interpreting 5 15 iSQL Plus 14 45 sqlplus 14 1 errors compilation errors 5 9 13 137 14 40 making line containing current 6 5 escape characters definition of 13 105 13 117 ESCAPE variable 6 23 13 105 13 117 Euro sign command line interface 2 2 GUI 2 9 2 10 example interactive HTML report 8 2 8 4 execute button 2 17 EXECUTE command 13 69 executing a CREATE command 5 9 statements 5 3 executing scripts See running execution plan 9 4 execution statistics including in repor
393. n short and cryptic however and expressions can be hard to understand Formatting SQL Plus Reports 7 1 Formatting Columns Changing Default Headings You can define a more useful column heading with the HEADING clause of the COLUMN command in the following format COLUMN column_name HEADING column_heading Example 7 1 Changing a Column Heading To produce a report from EMP_DETAILS_VIEW with new headings specified for LAST_NAME SALARY and COMMISSION_PCT enter the following commands COLUMN LAST_NAME HEADING LAST NAME COLUMN SALARY HEADING MONTHLY SALARY COLUMN COMMISSION_PCT HEADING COMMISSION SELECT LAST_NAME SALARY COMMISSION_PCT FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN LAST NAME MONTHLY SALARY COMMISSION Russell 14000 4 Partners 13500 3 Errazuriz 12000 i Cambrault 11000 3 Zlotkey 10500 2 Note The new headings will remain in effect until you enter different headings reset each column s format or exit from SQL Plus To change a column heading to two or more words enclose the new heading in single or double quotation marks when you enter the COLUMN command To display a column heading on more than one line use a vertical bar where you want to begin a new line You can use a character other than a vertical bar by changing the setting of the HEADSEP variable of the SET command See the SET command on page 13 103 for more information 7 2 SQL Plus Users Guide and Refer
394. n the default operating system editor if EDITOR is undefined EDIT places the contents of the SQL buffer in a file named AFIEDT BUF by default in your current working directory and runs the text editor on the contents of the file If the file AFIEDT BUF already exists it is overwritten with the contents of the buffer You can change the default filename by using the SET EDITFILE command For more information about setting a default filename for the EDIT command see the EDITFILE variable of the SET command in this chapter SQL Plus Command Reference 13 67 EDIT Note The default file AFIEDT BUF may have a different name on some operating systems If you do not specify a filename and the buffer is empty EDIT returns an error message To leave the editing session and return to SQL Plus terminate the editing session in the way customary for the text editor When you leave the editor SOL Plus loads the contents of the file into the buffer Note In Windows if you use WordPad as your editor _EDITOR write exe the buffer is not reloaded when you exit WordPad In this case use GET to reload the buffer Examples To edit the file REPORT with the extension SQL using your operating system text editor enter EDIT REPORT 13 68 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference EXECUTE EXECUTE Syntax Usage Examples EXEC UTE statement where statement represents a PL SQL statement Executes a sin
395. n this release file_name ex Represents the script you wish to run If you omit ext SOL Plus assumes the default command file extension normally SQL For information on changing the default extension see SET SUF FIX SQL text on page 13 133 When you enter file_name ext SQL Plus searches for a file with that filename and extension in the current default directory If SQL Plus does not find the file in the current directory it searches a system dependent path to find it Some operating systems may not support the path search See the platform specific Oracle documentation provided for your operating system for specific information related to your operating system environment arg Represent data items you wish to pass to parameters in the script If you enter one or more arguments SOL Plus substitutes the values into the parameters amp 1 amp 2 and so forth in the script The first argument replaces each occurrence of amp 1 the second replaces each occurrence of amp 2 and so forth The command defines the parameters with the values given by the arguments if you run the script again in this session you can enter new arguments or omit the arguments to use the current values For more information on using parameters See Substitution Variables in iSQL Plus on page 6 24 13 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference at sign Usage Examples All previous settings like COLUMN command settings stay in
396. nd all redo log file groups fill database operation is suspended until a redo log file is archived for example until you enter the command ARCHIVE LOG NEXT or ARCHIVE LOG ALL START Enables automatic archiving Starts the background process ARCH which performs automatic archiving as required If ARCH is started and a filename is supplied the filename becomes the new default archive destination ARCH automatically starts on instance startup if the initialization parameter LOG_ARCHIVE_START is set to TRUE NEXT Manually archives the next online redo log file group that has been filled but not yet archived ALL Manually archives all filled but not yet archived online redo log file groups integer Causes archival of the online redo log file group with log sequence number n You can specify any redo log file group that is still online An error occurs if the log file cannot be found online or the sequence number is not valid This option can be used to re archive a log file group destination Specifies the destination device or directory in an operating system Specification of archive destination devices is installation specific see your platform specific Oracle Database documentation for examples of specifying archive destinations On many operating systems multiple log files can be spooled to the same tape If not specified in the command line the archive destination is derived from the initialization parameter LOG_ARCHIVE
397. nd as follows COMPUTE function LABEL label_name function LABEL label_name function LABEL label_name OF column ON break_column 7 22 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines If you include multiple columns after OF and before ON COMPUTE calculates and prints values for each column you specify Example 7 16 Computing Multiple Summary Lines on the Same Break Column To compute the average and sum of salaries for the sales department first enter the following BREAK and COMPUTE commands BREAK ON DEPARTMENT_ID COMPUTE AVG SUM OF SALARY ON DEPARTMENT_ID Now enter and run the following query SELECT DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE DEPARTMENT_ID 30 ORDER BY DEPARTMENT_ID SALARY DEPARTMENT_ID LAST _NAME SALARY 30 Colmenares 2500 Himuro 2600 Tobias 2800 Baida 2900 Khoo 3100 Raphaely 11000 WREREREAREERE O i a a ul a at avg 4150 sum 24900 6 rows selected Listing and Removing COMPUTE Definitions You can list your current COMPUTE definitions by entering the COMPUTE command with no clauses COMPUTE Formatting SQL Plus Reports 7 23 Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions Example 7 17 Removing COMPUTE Definitions To remove all COMPUTE definitions and the accompanying BREAK definition enter the following commands CLEAR BREAKS breaks cleared CLEAR COMPUTES computes cleared You
398. nd clauses also apply to the BTITLE command text The title text Enter text in single quotes if you want to place more than one word on a single line variable A substitution variable or any of the following system maintained values SQL LNO the current line number SOL PNO the current page number SQL RELEASE the current Oracle Database release number SQL SQLCODE the current error code or SQL USER the current username SQL Plus Command Reference 13 155 TTITLE To print one of these values reference the appropriate variable in the title You can format variable with the FORMAT clause SQL Plus substitution variables amp variables are expanded before TTITLE is executed The resulting string is stored as the TTITLE text During subsequent execution for each page of results the expanded value of a variable may itself be interpreted as a substitution variable with unexpected results You can avoid this double substitution in a TTITLE command by not using the amp prefix for variables that are to be substituted on each page of results If you want to use a substitution variable to insert unchanging text in a TTITLE enclose it in quotes so that it is only substituted once OFF Turns the title off suppresses its display without affecting its definition ON Turns the title on restores its display When you define a top title SQL Plus automatically sets TTITLE to ON COL n Indents to column n of the current
399. nd then returns control to the operating system LOGON Option L OGON Specifies not to reprompt for username or password if the initial connection does not succeed This can be useful in operating system scripts that must either succeed or fail and you don t want to be reprompted for connection details if the database server is not running The LOGON option is not supported in the Windows GUI MARKUP Options M ARKUP You can use the MARKUP option to generate a complete stand alone web page from your query or script MARKUP currently supports HTML 4 0 transitional Note Depending on your operating system the complete markup_ option clause for the SQLPLUS command may need to be contained in quotes Use SOLPLUS MARKUP HTML ON or SQLPLUS MARKUP HTML ON SPOOL ON to produce standalone web pages SQL Plus will generate complete HTML pages automatically encapsulated with lt HTML gt and lt BODY gt tags The HTML tags in a spool file are closed when SPOOL OFF is executed or SQL Plus exits The SILENT and RESTRICT command line options may be useful when used in conjunction with MARKUP You can use MARKUP HTML ON to produce HTML output in either the lt PRE gt tag or in an HTML table Output to a table uses standard HTML lt TABLE gt lt TR gt and lt TD gt tags to automatically encode the rows and columns resulting from a Starting SQL Plus 4 19 SQLPLUS Program Syntax query Output to an HTML table is the
400. nd to display Data in Thousands in the center of the next line enter TTITLE LEFT Monthly Analysis CENTER 01 Jan 2003 RIGHT Page FORMAT 999 SQL PNO SKIP CENTER Data in Thousands Monthly Analysis 01 Jan 2003 Page 1 Data in Thousands To suppress the top title display without changing its definition enter TTITLE OFF 13 158 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference UNDEFINE UNDEFINE Syntax UNDEF INE variable where variable represents the name of the substitution variable you want to delete Deletes one or more substitution variables that you defined either explicitly with the DEFINE command or implicitly with an argument to the START command Examples To undefine a substitution variable named POS enter UNDEFINE POS To undefine two substitution variables named MYVAR1 and MYVAR2 enter UNDEFINE MYVAR1 MYVAR2 SQL Plus Command Reference 13 159 VARIABLE VARIABLE Syntax Terms VAR IABLE variable NUMBER CHAR CHAR n CHAR BYTE NCHAR NCHAR n VARCHAR2 n CHAR BYTE NVARCHAR2 n CLOB NCLOB REFCURSOR BINARY_FLOAT BINARY_DOUBLE Declares a bind variable that can be referenced in PL SQL VARIABLE without arguments displays a list of all the variables declared in the session VARIABLE followed only by a variable name lists that variable See Using Bind Variables on page 6 32 for more information on bind variables See your PL SQL User s Guide and
401. nds the complete PL SQL subprogram to Oracle Database for processing as it does SQL commands See your PL SQL User s Guide and Reference for more information You might enter and execute a PL SQL subprogram as follows DECLARE x NUMBER 100 BEGIN FOR i IN 1 10 LOOP IF MOD i 2 0 THEN i is even INSERT INTO temp VALUES i x i is even ELSE INSERT INTO temp VALUES i x i is odd END IF x x 100 END LOOP END 5 8 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Running PL SQL Blocks Creating Stored Procedures Stored procedures are PL SQL functions packages or procedures To create stored procedures you use the following SQL CREATE commands a CREATE FUNCTION a CREATE LIBRARY a CREATE PACKAGE a CREATE PACKAGE BODY a CREATE PROCEDURE a CREATE TRIGGER a CREATE TYPE Entering any of these commands places you in PL SQL mode where you can enter your PL SQL subprogram When you have finished typing your PL SQL subprogram enter a slash ona line by itself to terminate PL SQL mode A semicolon is treated as part of the PL SQL subprogram and will not execute the command When you use CREATE to create a stored procedure a message appears if there are compilation errors To view these errors you use SHOW ERRORS For example SHOW ERRORS PROCEDURE ASSIGNVL See SHOW on page 13 136 for more information To execute a PL SQL statement that references a stored procedure you can use the SQL Plus EX
402. nect_identifier Consists of an Oracle Net connect identifier The exact syntax depends upon the Oracle Net communications protocol your Oracle Database installation uses For more information refer to the Oracle Net manual appropriate for your protocol or contact your DBA Represents a default logon using operating system authentication You cannot enter a connect identifier if you use a default logon In a default logon SQL Plus typically attempts to log you in using the username OPS name where name is your operating system username Note that the prefix OPS can be set to any other string of text For example you may wish to change the settings in your INIT ORA parameters file to LOGONname or USERIDname See the Oracle Database Administrator s Guide for information about operating system authentication AS SYSOPERISYSDBA The AS clause enables privileged connections by users who have been granted SYSOPER or SYSDBA system privileges NOLOG Establishes no initial connection to Oracle Database Before issuing any SQL commands you must issue a CONNECT command to establish a valid logon Use NOLOG when you want to have a SQL Plus script prompt for the username password or database specification The first line of this script is not assumed to contain a logon urllfile_name ext arg Specifies the name of a script and arguments to run The script can be called from the local file system or from a web server SQL P
403. nected to the database are implicitly disconnected and the next database startup will require instance recovery You must use this option if a background process terminates abnormally IMMEDIATE Does not wait for current calls to complete or users to disconnect from the database Further connects are prohibited The database is closed and dismounted The instance is shutdown and no instance recovery is required on the next database startup NORMAL NORMAL is the default option which waits for users to disconnect from the database Further connects are prohibited The database is closed and dismounted The instance is shutdown and no instance recovery is required on the next database startup TRANSACTIONAL LOCAL Performs a planned shutdown of an instance while allowing active transactions to complete first It prevents clients from losing work without requiring all users to log off No client can start a new transaction on this instance Attempting to start a new transaction results in disconnection After completion of all transactions any client 13 142 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SHUTDOWN Usage Examples still connected to the instance is disconnected Now the instance shuts down just as it would if aSHUTDOWN IMMEDIATE statement was submitted The next startup of the database will not require any instance recovery procedures The LOCAL mode specifies a transactional shutdown on the local instance only so
404. ng Rename from the Edit menu 6 Click Modify from the Edit menu or press Enter again to display the Edit String dialog 7 Enter the font name you want to use such as Courier New in the Value Data field SQL Plus will use the new font the next time you start the SQL Plus Windows GUI The font must be a True Type fixed pitch font such as Courier New or Lucida Console SQL Plus User Interface 2 9 iSQL Plus User Interface or Enter the font size you want to use in pixels such as 14 in the Value Data field SQL Plus will use the new font size the next time you start the SQL Plus Windows GUI The size must be a size that exists on the client machine for the specified font Note You should not change the font face font size or font subset while any SQL Plus Windows GUI is active You should exit all SOL Plus Windows GUI sessions make font face font size and font subset changes in the registry exit the Registry Editor and then restart the SQL Plus Windows GUI to see the changes Using a Special Character To check if a font contains a particular character such as the Euro sign enter the character s decimal number equivalent in the SQL Plus Windows GUI For example the decimal number equivalent for the Euro sign is 128 so you would enter Alt 0128 hold Alt while pressing 0 1 2 and 8 on the numeric keypad to display it If it appears correctly the font contains the Euro sign otherwise you need to try another f
405. ng to remote 13 48 copying data between B 1 B 4 copying data between tables ona single B 9 disconnecting without leaving SQL Plus 4 2 13 66 mounting 11 2 opening 11 3 recovering 11 5 13 86 shutting down 11 2 11 3 starting 11 2 DATAFILE clause 13 88 DATE column definition from DESCRIBE 13 59 DATE clause 13 11 DATE columns changing format 13 34 13 40 default format 7 6 date storing current in variable for titles 7 32 13 37 13 40 Index 8 DB2 13 114 DBA 11 1 connections 3 17 DBA Login screen 2 13 DBA Workspace 2 17 iSQL Plus access 10 11 mode 13 148 privilege 2 13 13 148 DBMS output 9 13 13 126 DBMS_APPLICATION_INFO package 9 12 13 104 13 107 DECLARE command disabling 10 5 PL SQL 5 8 DEFAULT clause 13 12 default port conflict 3 12 DEFINE command 6 16 13 51 and system editor 6 2 13 54 and UNDEFINE command 6 16 13 159 CHAR values 13 51 SET DEFINE ON OFF 13 104 13 114 substitution variables 13 51 DEFINE variable See substitution variable DEL command 6 3 6 9 13 57 using an asterisk 6 4 13 57 DELETE command disabling 10 5 DESCRIBE command SQL Plus 5 4 13 59 connect_identifier 13 59 PL SQL properties listed by 13 60 table properties listed by 13 59 DISABLED keyword disabling commands 10 3 disabling iSQL Plus 3 24 PL SQL commands 10 5 SQL commands 10 4 SQL Plus commands 10 4 DISCONNECT command 4 2 13 66 DOCUMENT command C 1 C 3 REMARK as newer versio
406. nment in a script See SAVE on page 13 101 for information on the other terms and clauses in the STORE command syntax SET Saves the values of the system variables This command creates a script which can be executed with the START at sign or double at sign commands If you want to store a file under a name identical to a STORE command clause that is CREATE REPLACE or APPEND you must put the name in single quotes or specify a file extension To store the current SQL Plus system variables in a file named DEFAULTENV with the default command file extension enter STORE SET DEFAULTENV To append the current SQL Plus system variables to an existing file called DEFAULTENV with the extension OLD enter STORE SET DEFAULTENV OLD APPEND 13 152 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference TIMING TIMING Syntax Terms Usage TIMI NG START text SHOW STOP Records timing data for an elapsed period of time lists the current timer s name and timing data or lists the number of active timers START text Sets up a timer and makes text the name of the timer You can have more than one active timer by STARTing additional timers before STOPping the first SQL Plus nests each new timer within the preceding one The timer most recently STARTed becomes the current timer SHOW Lists the current timer s name and timing data STOP Lists the current timer s name and timing data then deletes the timer If any
407. nsert data into an existing table INSERT specifies the following actions a Ifthe destination table already exists COPY inserts the copied data in the destination table If the destination table does not already exist COPY reports an error and stops Use APPEND when you want to insert data in an existing table or create anew table if the destination table does not exist APPEND specifies the following actions a Ifthe destination table already exists COPY inserts the copied data in the destination table a Ifthe table does not already exist COPY creates the table and then inserts the copied data in it Example B 1 Copying from a Remote Database to Your Local Database Using CREATE To copy HR from a remote database into a table called EMPLOYEE_COPY on your own database enter the following command Note See your DBA for an appropriate username password and service name for a remote computer that contains a copy of EMPLOYEE_COPY COPY FROM HR your_password BOSTONDB CREATE EMPCOPY USING SELECT FROM HR Array fetch bind size is 15 arraysize is 15 Will commit when done copycommit is 0 Maximum long size is 80 long is 80 SQL Plus COPY Command B 7 Copying Data from One Database to Another SQL Plus then creates the table EMPLOYEE_COPY and copies the rows Table SALESMAN created 5 rows selected from HR BOSTONDB 5 rows inserted into SALESMAN 5 rows committed into SALESMAN at
408. nt line through line n LAST Deletes the current line through the last line LAST Deletes the last line Enter DEL with no clauses to delete the current line of the buffer DEL makes the following line of the buffer if any the current line You can enter DEL several times to delete several consecutive lines Note DEL is aSQL Plus command and DELETE is a SQL command For more information about the SQL DELETE command see the Oracle Database SQL Reference SQL Plus Command Reference 13 57 DEL Examples Assume the SQL buffer contains the following query SELECT LAST_NAME DEPARTMENT ID FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN ORDER BY DEPARTMENT ID To make the line containing the WHERE clause the current line you could enter LIST 3 3 WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN followed by DEL The SQL buffer now contains the following lines SELECT LAST_NAME DEPARTMENT_ID FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW ORDER BY DEPARTMENT_ID To delete the third line of the buffer enter DEL 3 The SQL buffer now contains the following lines SELECT LAST_NAME DEPARTMENT_ID FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW 13 58 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference DESCRIBE DESCRIBE Syntax Terms Usage DESC RIBE schema object connect_identifier Lists the column definitions for the specified table view or synonym or the specifications for the specified function or procedure schema Represents the schema wher
409. nt to override a THROUGH THREAD integer SEQUENCE integer clause issued in an earlier statement If the THROUGH clause is omitted this is the default THROUGH ALL SWITCHOVER Keeps managed standby recovery running through all switchover operations THROUGH LAST SWITCHOVER Terminates managed standby recovery after the final end of redo archival indicator THROUGH NEXT SWITCHOVER Terminates managed standby recovery after recovering the next end of redo archival indicator CANCEL managed clause Terminates managed standby recovery after applying the current archived redo file Session control returns when the recovery process terminates CANCEL IMMEDIATE Terminates managed standby recovery after applying the current archived redo file or after the next redo log file read whichever comes first Session control returns when the recovery process terminates CANCEL IMMEDIATE WAIT Terminates managed standby recovery after applying the current archived redo file or after the next redo log file read whichever comes first Session control returns when the managed standby recovery terminates CANCEL IMMEDIATE cannot be issued from the same session that issued the RECOVER MANAGED STANDBY DATABASE statement SQL Plus Command Reference 13 91 RECOVER CANCEL IMMEDIATE NOWAIT Terminates managed standby recovery after applying the current archived redo file or after the next redo log file read whichever comes first Session control
410. ntered the SET MARKUP HTML ON command To enable these characters to be displayed in your web browser HTML provides character entities to use instead Table 8 1 Equivalent HTML Entities Character HTML Entity Meaning lt amp lt Start HTML tag label gt amp et End HTML tag label 7 amp quot Double quote amp amp amp Ampersand The web browser displays the gt character but the actual text in the HTML encoded file is the HTML entity amp gt The SET MARKUP option ENTMAP controls the substitution of HTML entities ENTMAP is set ON by default It ensures that the characters lt gt and amp are always replaced by the HTML entities representing these characters This prevents web browsers from misinterpreting these characters when they occur in your SQL Plus commands or in data resulting from your query You can set ENTMAP at a global level with SET MARKUP HTML ENTMAP ON or at a column level with COLUMN column_name ENTMAP ON Generating HTML Reports from SQL Plus 8 7 Creating Reports using iSQL Plus Creating Reports using iSQL Plus You can create dynamic reports and pass variables to scripts by sending iSQL Plus a request to run a script from a URL The script is uploaded using the HTTP POST protocol and must be available through HTTP or FTP iSQL Plus executes the script using any HTML form field values as parameters and returns the results in a new web browser window iSQL Plus prompts for undefined
411. nterested in recovering have been taken offline before proceeding with recovery for those tablespaces Database Administration with SQL Plus 11 5 Database Recovery 11 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference 12 SQL Plus Globalization Support Globalization support enables the storing processing and retrieval of data in native languages The languages that can be stored in an Oracle database are encoded by Oracle Database supported character sets Globalization support ensures that database utilities error messages sort order and date time monetary numeric and calendar conventions adjust to the native language and locale Topics a Configuring Globalization Support in Command line SQL Plus Configuring Multiple Language Support in iSQL Plus a NLS LANG Environment Variable For more information on globalization support see the Oracle Technology Network globalization notes at http otn oracle com tech globalization and see the Oracle Database Globalization Support Guide SQL Plus Globalization Support 12 1 Configuring Globalization Support in Command line SQL Plus Configuring Globalization Support in Command line SQL Plus SQL Plus supports multiple languages through the NLS_LANG environment variable To display another language in SQL Plus before starting SQL Plus you must configure a NLS _LANG in the SQL Plus client environment The Oracle Database during installation SQL Plus Client The
412. ntering these commands you use the SPOOL command as shown in the previous section to create the flat file The SET COLSEP command may be useful to delineate the columns For more information see the SET command on page 13 103 Sending Results to a File To store the results of a query in a file and still display them on the screen enter the SPOOL command in the following form SPOOL file_name SQL Plus stores all information displayed on the screen after you enter the SPOOL command in the file you specify Sending Results to a Printer To print query results spool them to a file as described in the previous section Then instead of using SPOOL OFF enter the command in the following form SPOOL OUT SQL Plus stops spooling and copies the contents of the spooled file to your computer s standard default printer SPOOL OUT does not delete the spool file after printing Example 7 26 Sending Query Results to a Printer To generate a final report and spool and print the results create a script named EMPRPT containing the following commands 7 36 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Storing and Printing Query Results First use EDIT to create the script with your operating system text editor EDIT EMPRPT Next enter the following commands into the file using your text editor SPOOL TEMP CLEAR COLUMNS CLEAR BREAKS CLEAR COMPUTES COLUMN DEPARTMENT_ID HEADING DEPARTMENT COLUMN LAST_NAME HEADING LAST NAME COLUM
413. ntifier for SALES1 SQLPLUS hr password DESCRIPTION ADDRESS PROTOCOL tcp HOST sales server PORT 1521 CONNECT_DATA SERVICE_NAME sales us acme com Easy Connection Identifier The easy or abbreviated connection identifier has the syntax Jhost port service_name Example 4 4 Start a command line session to the sales database using the easy connection identifier sqlplus hr password sales server 1521 sales us acme com Example 4 5 CONNECT to the sales database using the easy connection identifier connect hr password sales server 1521 sales us acme com The easy connection identifier can be used wherever you can use a full connection identifier or a net service name The easy syntax is less complex and no tnsnames ora entry is required Connectionless Session with NOLOG In the command line interface it is possible to start SQL Plus without connecting to a database This is useful for performing some database administration tasks 4 6 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Starting SQL Plus writing transportable scripts or to use SQL Plus editing commands to write or edit scripts You use the NOLOG argument to the SQLPLUS command to start a connectionless command line session After SQL Plus has started you can connect to a database with the CONNECT command Example 4 6 Start a connectionless SQL Plus session with NOLOG SQLPLUS NOLOG Starting SQL Plus If you are connecting to a remote Oracle
414. nued to fail even if the object had since been validated DESCRIBE now automatically validates the object and continues if the validation is successful Glogin and Login Calls Previously the SQL Plus site and user profile files glogin and login were run when SQL Plus was started with a username and password or with NOLOG The profile files glogin and login are now also run after successful CONNECT commands Whitespace Support in File and Path Names in Windows In Windows whitespace can be included in file names and paths in particular START and RUN commands and SPOOL SAVE and EDIT commands To reference files or paths containing spaces enclose the name or path in quotes For example SPOOL Monthly Report sql SAVE c program files oral0 scripts Monthly Report sql XXxi xxxii Changes to SET SERVEROUTPUT ON Changes to the way output from nested PL SQL functions is displayed may change the appearance of output with SET SERVEROUTPUT ON SET SERVEROUTPUT ON now correctly shows output DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_LINE from a PL SQL function nested inside a SQL statement Previously output from a nested PL SQL function did not display until a subsequent PL SQL function was executed See Also SET on page 13 103 SHOW RECYCLEBIN A new option RECYCLEBIN original_name has been added to the SHOW command It enables users to view tables that are available for purging or reverting using the new PURGE and FLASHBACK BEFORE DROP
415. o in the statistics is SQL Plus Oracle Net refers to the generic process communication between SQL Plus and the server regardless of whether Oracle Net is installed You cannot change the default format of the statistics report For a more complete list of database statistics see the Oracle Database Reference For more information about the statistics and how to interpret them see Chapter 3 Gathering Optimizer Statistics in the Oracle Database Performance Tuning Guide Example 9 4 Tracing Statements for Performance Statistics and Query Execution Path If the SQL buffer contains the following statement SELECT E LAST_NAME E SALARY J JOB_TITLE FROM EMPLOYEES E JOBS J WHERE E JOB_ID J JOB_ID AND E SALARY gt 12000 The statement can be automatically traced when it is run SET AUTOTRACE ON Tuning SQL Plus 9 5 Tracing Statements LAST _NAME SALARY JOB_TITLE King 24000 President Kochhar 17000 Administration Vice President De Haan 17000 Administration Vice President Russell 14000 Sales Manager Partners 13500 Sales Manager Hartstein 13000 Marketing Manager 6 rows selected Execution Plan 0 SELECT STATEMENT Optimizer CHOOSE BE 0 TABLE ACCESS BY INDEX ROWID OF EMPLOYEES 2 a NESTED LOOPS 3 2 TABLE ACCESS FULL OF JOBS 4 2 INDEX RANGE SCAN OF EMP_JOB_IX NON UNIQUE Statistics recursive calls 2 db block gets 34 consistent gets 0 physical reads 0 redo size 848 bytes sent through SQL Net
416. o select the data that the COPY command copies Here is an example of a COPY command that copies only two columns from the source table and copies only those rows in which the value of DEPARTMENT_ID is 30 COPY FROM HR your_password BOSTONDB REPLACE EMPCOPY2 USING SELECT LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_ VIEW WHERE DEPARTMENT_ID 30 You may find it easier to enter and edit long COPY commands in scripts or in the Input area of the iSQL Plus Workspace rather than trying to enter them directly at the command prompt Controlling Treatment of the Destination Table You control the treatment of the destination table by entering one of four control clauses REPLACE CREATE INSERT or APPEND The REPLACE clause names the table to be created in the destination database and specifies the following actions a Ifthe destination table already exists COPY drops the existing table and replaces it with a table containing the copied data a If the destination table does not already exist COPY creates it using the copied data You can use the CREATE clause to avoid accidentally writing over an existing table CREATE specifies the following actions B 6 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Copying Data from One Database to Another a Ifthe destination table already exists COPY reports an error and stops a If the destination table does not already exist COPY creates the table using the copied data Use INSERT to i
417. ocessing in iSQL Plus is performed regardless of the status of SET AUTOCOMMIT EXIT QUIT Can be used interchangeably QUIT is a synonym for EXIT SUCCESS Exits normally FAILURE Exits with a return code indicating failure WARNING Exits with a return code indicating warning COMMIT Saves pending changes to the database before exiting n Represents an integer you specify as the return code variable Represents a user defined or system variable but not a bind variable such as SQL SQLCODE EXIT variable exits with the value of variable as the return code 13 70 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference EXIT Usage Examples BindVariable Represents a variable created in SQL Plus with the VARIABLE command and then referenced in PL SQL or other subprograms BindVariable exits the subprogram and returns you to SQL Plus ROLLBACK Executes a ROLLBACK statement and abandons pending changes to the database before exiting EXIT with no clauses commits and exits with a value of SUCCESS EXIT enables you to specify an operating system return code This enables you to run SQL Plus scripts in batch mode and to detect programmatically the occurrence of an unexpected event The manner of detection is operating system specific The key words SUCCESS WARNING and FAILURE represent operating system dependent values On some systems WARNING and FAILURE may be indistinguishable The range of operating system retur
418. of the SET command RECSEP determines when the line of characters is printed you set RECSEP to EACH to print after every line to WRAPPED to print after wrapped lines and to OFF to suppress printing The default setting of RECSEP is WRAPPED RECSEPCHAR sets the character printed in each line You can set RECSEPCHAR to any character You may wish to wrap whole words to additional lines when a column value wraps to additional lines To do so use the WORD_WRAPPED clause of the COLUMN command as shown COLUMN column_name WORD_WRAPPED 7 10 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Formatting Columns Example 7 9 Printing a Line of Characters after Wrapped Column Values To print a line of dashes after each wrapped column value enter the commands SET RECSEP WRAPPED SET RECSEPCHAR Finally enter the following query SELECT LAST_NAME JOB_TITLE CITY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 Now restrict the width of the column JOB_TITLE and tell SQL Plus to wrap whole words to additional lines when necessary COLUMN JOB_TITLE FORMAT A20 WORD_WRAPPED Run the query LAST_NAME JOB_TITLE CITY King President Seattle Kochhar Administration Vice Seattle President De Haan Administration Vice Seattle President Russell Sales Manager Oxford Partners Sales Manager Oxford Hartstein Marketing Manager Toronto 6 rows selected If you set RECSEP to EACH SQL Plus prints a line of characters after ever
419. om documentation In iSQL Plus click the Help icon to access the iSQL Plus Online Help Enter HELP or without topic to get help on the help system Usage You can only enter one topic after HELP You can abbreviate the topic for example COL for COLUMN However if you enter only an abbreviated topic and the abbreviation is ambiguous SQL Plus displays help for all topics that match the abbreviation For example if you enter HELP EX SQL Plus displays the syntax for the EXECUTE command followed by the syntax for the EXIT command If you get a response indicating that help is not available consult your database administrator Examples To see a list of SQL Plus commands for which help is available enter HELP INDEX or INDEX To see a single column list of SQL Plus commands for which help is available enter HELP TOPICS 13 74 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference HOST HOST Syntax Usage HOST is not available in iSQL Plus HO ST command where command represents an operating system command Executes an operating system command without leaving SOL Plus Enter HOST without command to display an operating system prompt You can then enter multiple operating system commands For information on returning to SQL Plus refer to the platform specific Oracle documentation provided for your operating system Note Operating system commands entered from a SQL Plus session using the HOST command do not aff
420. ommand 7 1 13 31 ALIAS clause 13 32 and BREAK command 13 21 and DEFINE command 13 51 CLEAR clause 7 9 13 32 DEFAULT clause C 2 displaying column values in bottom titles 7 32 13 38 displaying column values in top titles 7 31 13 37 entering multiple 13 39 ENTMAP clause 13 32 FOLD_AFTER clause 13 32 13 33 FOLD_BEFORE clause 13 33 FORMAT clause 7 4 7 6 13 33 formatting a REFCURSOR variable 13 163 formatting NUMBER columns 7 4 13 34 HEADING clause 7 2 13 36 HEADSEP character 13 36 JUSTIFY clause 13 36 LIKE clause 7 9 13 36 listing column display attributes 7 9 13 31 NEW_VALUE clause 7 31 13 37 NEWLINE clause 13 37 NOPRINT clause 7 31 9 12 13 37 NULL clause 13 37 OFF clause 7 10 13 38 OLD_VALUE clause 7 32 13 38 ON clause 7 10 13 38 PRINT clause 13 37 resetting a column to default display C 1 resetting to default display 7 9 13 32 C 1 restoring column display attributes 7 10 13 38 storing current date in variable for titles 13 40 suppressing column display attributes 7 10 13 38 TRUNCATED clause 7 7 13 38 WORD_WRAPPED clause 7 7 7 10 13 38 WRAPPED clause 7 7 13 38 column headings aligning 13 36 changing 7 1 13 36 changing character used to underline 13 107 13 135 changing to two or more words 7 2 13 36 displaying on more than one line 7 2 13 36 suppressing printing inareport 13 105 13 118 when truncated 13 33 when truncated fo
421. ommand 7 21 13 43 ON ROW clause in BREAK command 7 15 13 21 in COMPUTE command 13 43 online help 4 9 13 74 OPEN clause 13 149 Index 14 opening a database 13 149 operating system editor 6 2 13 54 13 67 file loading into buffer 13 72 running commands from SQL Plus 5 13 13 75 text editor 6 2 Options menu 2 7 ORA_NLS10 environment variables 3 2 Oracle Database home specifying font 2 9 Oracle Net 1 3 3 24 10 11 configuring 3 12 connect identifier 13 48 security 10 10 ORACLE_HOME environment variables 3 2 ORACLE_PATH environment variables 3 2 ORACLE_SID environment variables 3 2 Oraclel0g 1 3 globalization support 12 5 ORDER BY clause displaying column values in titles 7 31 displaying values together in output 7 12 OUT clause 7 36 13 144 output formatting white space in 9 14 13 134 pausing during display 5 13 13 125 P PAGE clause 13 97 page number including in titles 7 15 7 29 pages changing length 7 33 9 13 13 106 13 124 default dimensions 7 33 matching to screen or paper size 7 33 setting dimensions 7 33 PAGESIZE clause in LOGIN SQL 3 8 PAGESIZE variable 5 6 7 33 9 13 13 106 13 124 parameter 6 26 13 6 13 146 iSQL Plus session timeout 3 15 iSQLPlusAllowUserMarkup 3 24 SQLPATH 3 29 SQLPLUS_FONT 2 8 3 30 SQLPLUS_FONT_SIZE 2 8 3 30 parameter files INIT ORA files specifying alternate 13 148 PARAMETERS clause 13 137 password Applica
422. ommand or a PL SQL block You control the autocommit feature with the SQL Plus AUTOCOMMIT system variable Regardless of the AUTOCOMMIT setting changes are committed when you exit SQL Plus successfully Example 5 5 Turning Autocommit On To turn the autocommit feature on enter SET AUTOCOMMIT ON Alternatively you can enter the following to turn the autocommit feature on SET AUTOCOMMIT IMMEDIATE Until you change the setting of AUTOCOMMIT SQL Plus automatically commits changes from each SQL DML command that specifies changes to the database After each autocommit SQL Plus displays the following message COMMIT COMPLETE When the autocommit feature is turned on you cannot roll back changes to the database To commit changes to the database after a number of SQL DML commands for example 10 enter SET AUTOCOMMIT 10 SQL Plus counts SQL DML commands as they are executed and commits the changes after each 10th SQL DML command Note For this feature a PL SQL block is regarded as one transaction regardless of the actual number of SQL commands contained within it 5 14 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Interpreting Error Messages To turn the autocommit feature off again enter the following command SET AUTOCOMMIT OFF To confirm that AUTOCOMMIT is now set to OFF enter the following SHOW command SHOW AUTOCOMMIT AUTOCOMMIT OFF See SET AUTO COMMIT ON OFF IMM EDIATE n on
423. ommand syntax and enter a valid filename command filename ext CR EATE REP LACE AP PEND where command can be SAVE SPOOL or STORE SET To use the command keywords CREATE REPLACE APPEND or one of their abbreviations as the filename or to use the word FILE as the filename you must enclose it in single quotes SP2 0109 Cannot append to file file_name Cause An attempt was made to append the content of the SQL buffer to a file and the file could not be written Possible causes a An error was encountered when creating the destination file a A directory name specified in the SAVE statement was not found A system error made it impossible to open the file Action Take the following actions m Check that the destination is valid and that there is sufficient space on the destination device Check the statement for a typing mistake in the directory name Then issue the statement again after correcting the directory name SP2 0110 Cannot create save file file name Cause An attempt was made to save the content of the SQL buffer to a file and the file could not be written Possible causes a An error was encountered when creating the destination file A directory name specified in the SAVE statement was not found SQL Plus Error Messages 14 7 SQL Plus Error Messages A system error made it impossible to open the file Action Take the following actions a Check that the destination is valid and that ther
424. on iSQL Plus Preference Equivalent SET Command Array Size Check SQL Syntax Commit Changes Commit when Copying Compare Datatypes when Copying Escape Character LOB Offset LOB LONG and XML Type Size Multiple SQL Plus Commands on Single Line Register Scripts SQL and PL SQL Terminator SQL Case SQL Compatibility SQL Terminator SQL Plus Compatibility Substitution Variable Prefix Substitution Variable Reference Terminator Trace Statements SET ARRAYSIZE SET FLAGGER SET AUTOCOMMIT SET COPYCOMMIT SET COPYTYPECHECK SET ESCAPE SET LOBOFFSET SET LONG SET CMDSEP SET APPINFO SET BLOCKTERMINATOR SET SOLCASE SET COMPATIBILITY SET SOLTERMINATOR SET SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY SET DEFINE SET CONCAT SET AUTOTRACE Table 2 4 Database Administration iSQL Plus Preference Equivalent SET Command Archive Log Source Automatic Recovery SET LOGSOURCE SET AUTORECOVERY SQL Plus User Interface 2 27 Preferences and Equivalent SET Commands 2 28 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference 3 Configuring SQL Plus This chapter explains how to configure your SQL Plus command line Windows GUI and iSQL Plus environments It has the following topics SQL Plus and iSQL Plus Environment Variables SQL Plus and iSQL Plus Configuration iSQL Plus Application Server Configuration iSQL Plus Web Browser Configuration Windows Graphical User Interface Configuration SQL Plus and SQL Plus Environ
425. on Server Oracle Net services and the database listener are installed by default during Oracle Database installation For further information about installing and configuring Oracle Net see the Oracle Database documentation at http otn oracle com documentation ISQL Plus Application Server Configuration You can set the following behavior and security settings on the iSQL Plus Application Server a Changing the iSQL Plus Application Server Port in Use Testing if the iSQL Plus Application Server is Running a Setting the Level of iSQL Plus Logging a Setting the Session Time Out Enabling or Disabling Restricted Database Access Enabling iSQL Plus DBA Access a Enabling SSL with iSQL Plus a Enabling or Disabling iSQL Plus or iSOQL Plus Help Enabling User Defined HTML Markup Changing the iSQL Plus Application Server Port in Use After Oracle Database installation if you are unable to connect to your iSQL Plus Server check that your Application Server is running and that you are using the correct URL to connect to it If you are still unable to connect it may be because the port that the Application Server is attempting to use is already in use by another 3 12 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference iSQL Plus Application Server Configuration application There is no consistent message to indicate that the port is already in use A message if any depends on the application using the port To determine the port n
426. on Servet srna eai cng cebsevesa ied ceeweia el E a At duane ate Sseucectherty 1 3 Oracle Database siiieiit seh ihe a Hee ein oc hi Se ee ee Pe ee 1 3 SOL Plas Instalblats onic T T a araa ohana a aE saben ra eb a ae neds ebantieente 1 4 SOL PlusiDate Format mossies a sta elemental ested dais 1 4 Who GCan Use SOL Pluses ces sssck ane cd sdeay cto btancoati ob otha A le cbea tects desuestib EE 1 4 How Can Learn SOL Pl s iss sesecaaessaceecksas e E aA ots sats en A e aAA EAr banbe Poea E ESEE 1 5 How to Use the SQL Pl s Guide isencereneci hernia irnia ii i eer aires 1 5 Oracle Database Sample Schemas and SQL Plus n snsnsssssssssirssstsesteseseesiseeseseesesessesessesese 1 5 Unlocking the Sample Taples i ynia ea a a y e aa e EAEAN 1 6 2 SQL Plus User Interface SQL Plus Command line User Interface 20 0 cc cecceseesecssceseeseceseesecceesceeneeceeaceaeecaecaaecaeeaeeneees 2 1 The Commiandaline Screens 4 hn tacsiettiienln dete dea isnt Sela hence 2 1 Changing the Command line Font and Font Size cece ee ceeeeeeececeeeeenecececeeeeene tees 2 2 Windows Graphical User Interface ccccccccccssessseesesenseececseeeeceesesessseecsenseececssseeseeaseenaeeeesens 2 3 Using the Mouse to Copy Text to the Command Prompt ssssssssississsssresiesiestesresiesteseessess 2 3 Using Command Keys sisri ie EE E eae cet E e lea A ete 2 4 Using the Windows GUI Menus sissies ccsdescntectetievetsssetsevetestatiedeveveueiedecsedeeselesded
427. on a break 7 17 referencing a SELECT expression in OF 13 43 referencing a SELECT expression in ON 13 43 removing definitions 7 24 13 29 used to format a REFCURSOR variable 13 163 COMPUTES clause 13 29 CONCAT variable 6 23 13 104 13 114 configuration globalization support configuration parameter iSQLPlusAllowUserMarkup 3 4 iSQLPlusConnectIdList 3 4 log4j rootLogger 3 4 configuring cookies for iSQL Plus 3 25 javascript for iSQL Plus 3 25 Oracle Net 3 12 SQL Plus 3 1 Windows GUI 3 26 CONNECT command 4 2 13 48 and at sign 13 48 changing password 13 48 13 49 13 81 SYSDBA clause 4 25 13 49 SYSOPER clause 4 25 13 49 username password 13 48 connect identifier 13 48 field 2 12 2 15 in CONNECT command 13 48 in COPY command B 1 in DESCRIBE command 13 59 in SQLPLUS command 4 25 connect port conflict 3 12 connect string See connection identifier connection identifier 4 5 4 10 easy or abbreviated 4 6 full 4 6 net service name 4 6 CONTINUE clause WHENEVER OSERROR 13 168 WHENEVER SQLERROR 13 170 continuing a long SQL Plus command 5 11 13 1 cookies configuring for iSQL Plus 3 25 COPY command 13 50 B 1 B 4 and at sign B 1 B 5 and ARRAYSIZE variable B 4 B 8 and COPYCOMMIT variable B 3 B 8 and LONG variable B 3 B 8 APPEND clause B 2 B 7 copying data between databases B 4 copying data between tables on one database B 9 CREATE clause B 2 B 6 creating a table B 2 B 6
428. on about the obsolete form of this command TIMI NG Deletes all timers created by the TIMING command To clear breaks enter CLEAR BREAKS To clear column definitions enter CLEAR COLUMNS 13 30 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COLUMN COLUMN Syntax COL UMN column expr option where option represents one of the following clauses ALI AS alias CLE AR ENTMAP ON OFF FOLD_A FTER FOLD_B EFORE FOR MAT format HEADING text JUS TIFY L EFT C ENTER R IGHT LIKE expr alias NEWL INE NEW_V ALUE variable NOPRI NT PRI NT NULL text OLD_V ALUE variable ON OFF WRA PPED WOR D_WRAPPED TRU NCATED Specifies display attributes for a given column such as a text for the column heading a alignment of the column heading format for NUMBER data wrapping of column data Also lists the current display attributes for a single column or all columns Enter COLUMN followed by column or expr and no other clauses to list the current display attributes for only the specified column or expression Enter COLUMN with no clauses to list all current column display attributes SQL Plus Command Reference 13 31 COLUMN Terms column expr Identifies the data item typically the name of a column in a SQL SELECT command to which the column command refers If you use an expression in a COLUMN command you must enter expr exactly as it appears in the SELECT com
429. onnected to a database instance Action Disconnect from the database instance before attempting to set the system variable SP2 0784 Invalid or incomplete character beginning byte returned Cause Attempted to return a string from the database that contained an invalid or incomplete character Action Replace the invalid or incomplete string in the database with a valid or complete string SP2 0804 Procedure created with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL procedure has been created but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL procedure Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0805 Procedure altered with compilation warnings SP2 SP2 Cause The PL SQL procedure has been altered but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL procedure Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages 0806 Function created with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL function has been created but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL function Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages 0807 Function altered with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL function has been altered but has one
430. ont You can also use the Windows Character Map accessory to view the characters available in a font Character Map also shows the decimal number equivalent for extended ASCII characters You access the Character Map accessory by selecting Start gt Programs gt Accessories gt System Tools gt Character Map iSQL Plus User Interface iSQL Plus is a web based user interface to an Oracle Database iSQL Plus Navigation There are a number of ways to navigate in iSQL Plus Icons Global navigation icons are displayed on each screen Icons have two states a A white background when that functionality is available A blue background when active when you have navigated to that screen 2 10 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference iSQL Plus User Interface Three navigation icons are always available after you have logged into iSQL Plus Logout Deletes your history list ends your iSQL Plus session and displays the Login screen with a message confirming that you have logged out Preferences iz Opens the Preferences screen where you can configure interface settings system settings or change your password Help 2 Opens the iSQL Plus Help in a separate web browser window Help is also available from the Login screen Tabs Tabs appear on the top right of the current screen Click a tab to go to that screen Menus There are side menus to provide navigation to the screens comprising sections such as Preferences C
431. optionally use INSTANCE_NAME instance phrase in place of the SERVICE_NAME name phrase When connecting to an Oracle8 or earlier database you use the S D name phrase Alternatively you can use an Oracle Net alias If you use an Oracle Net alias it must be specified on the machine running the iSQL Plus Server which may not be the same machine from which you run your web browser iSQL Plus can be configured to restrict connections to specific databases If restricted database access has been enabled a dropdown list of available databases is displayed in place of the Connection Identifier text field This enables greater security for iSQL Plus Servers in hosted environments This is configured using the iSQLPlusConnectIdList parameter in the configuration file Privilege The Privilege dropdown list has two options SYSDBA connects to the specified database with SYSDBA privileges a SYSOPER connects to the specified database with SYSOPER privileges Login Click the Login button to log in to iSQL Plus with the supplied username password connection identifier and DBA privilege If you enter an invalid username or password you are returned to the Login screen and a message is displayed SQL Plus User Interface 2 15 iSQL Plus User Interface iSQL Plus Workspace The Workspace consists of the Workspace History and Load Script screens After successfully logging in the Workspace is displayed From the Workspace you can
432. or SQL Plus to take when the value of the expression changes 13 20 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference BREAK When you omit actions BREAK ON expr suppresses printing of duplicate values of expr and marks where SQL Plus will perform the computation you specify in a corresponding COMPUTE command You can use an expression involving one or more table columns or an alias assigned to a report column in a SQL SELECT or SQL Plus COLUMN command If you use an expression in a BREAK command you must enter expr exactly as it appears in the SELECT command If the expression in the SELECT command is a b for example you cannot use b a or a b ina BREAK command to refer to the expression in the SELECT command The information given for ON column also applies to ON expr ON ROW action action When you include actions specifies actions for SQL Plus to take when a SQL SELECT command returns a row The ROW break becomes the innermost break regardless of where you specify it in the BREAK command You should always specify an action when you BREAK ona row ON REPORT action Marks a place in the report where SQL Plus will perform the computation you specify in a corresponding COMPUTE command Use BREAK ON REPORT in conjunction with COMPUTE to print grand totals or other grand computed values The REPORT break becomes the outermost break regardless of where you specify it in the BREAK command Note that SQL Plus will not skip a page at t
433. or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL function Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages 14 36 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0808 Package created with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL package has been created but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL package Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0809 Package altered with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL package has been altered but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL package Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0810 Package Body created with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL package body has been created but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL package body Action Use the SQL Plus SHOW ERR ORS command to display the warnings and messages SP2 0811 Package Body altered with compilation warnings Cause The PL SQL package body has been altered but has one or more warnings informational messages or performance messages that may help you to improve your PL SQL package body Action Use t
434. orm specific environment to verify that you are connecting to an Oracle server that is at least release 9 2 SP2 0754 FROM clause cannot contain AS SYSDBA or AS SYSOPER Cause The COPY command does not support AS SYSDBA or AS SYSOPER connections Action Remove AS SYSDBA or AS SYSOPER from the FROM clause SP2 0755 TO clause cannot contain AS SYSDBA or AS SYSOPER Cause The COPY command does not support AS SYSDBA or AS SYSOPER connections Action Remove AS SYSDBA or AS SYSOPER from the TO clause SP2 0756 FROM clause length clause_len bytes exceeds maximum length max_ len Cause The FROM clause is too long Action Reduce the string specified in the FROM clause SP2 0757 TO clause length clause_len bytes exceeds maximum length max_len Cause The TO clause is too long Action Reduce the string specified in the TO clause SP2 0758 FROM clause missing username or connection identifier Cause The COPY command FROM clause must include a username and a connection identifier Action Specify a username and a connection identifier in the FROM clause SQL Plus Error Messages 14 33 SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0759 TO clause missing username or connection identifier Cause The COPY command TO clause must include a username and a connection identifier Action Specify a username and a connection identifier in the TO clause SP2 0762 Mismatched quotes in SHOW ERRORS object Cause Invalid syntax was found in the objec
435. ory for ad hoc reports but if you want to run the same report repeatedly you would probably prefer to have the date automatically appear when the report is run You can do this by creating a variable to hold the current date You can reference the predefined substitution variable DATE to display the current date in a title as you would any other variable The date format model you include in your LOGIN file or in your SELECT statement determines the format in which SQL Plus displays the date See your Oracle Database SQL Reference for more information on date format models See 7 32 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions Modifying Your LOGIN File on page 3 7 for more information about the LOGIN file You can also enter these commands interactively See COLUMN on page 13 31 for more information Setting Page Dimensions Typically a page of a report contains the number of blank line s set in the NEWPAGE variable of the SET command a top title column headings your query results and a bottom title SQL Plus displays a report that is too long to fit on one page on several consecutive pages each with its own titles and column headings The amount of data SQL Plus displays on each page depends on the current page dimensions The default page dimensions used by SQL Plus are shown underneath a number of lines before the top title 1 number of lines per page from the top title to t
436. other timers are active the next most recently STARTed timer becomes the current timer Enter TIMING with no clauses to list the number of active timers For other information about TIMING see SET AUTOTRACE You can use this data to do a performance analysis on any commands or blocks run during the period Refer to the SET TIMING command for information on automatically displaying timing data after each SQL command or PL SQL block you run To delete all timers use the CLEAR TIMING command SQL Plus Command Reference 13 153 TIMING Examples To create a timer named SQL_TIMER enter TIMING START SQL_TIMER To list the current timer s title and accumulated time enter TIMING SHOW To list the current timer s title and accumulated time and to remove the timer enter TIMING STOP 13 154 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference TTITLE TTITLE Syntax Terms TTI TLE printspec text variable ON OFF where printspec represents one or more of the following clauses used to place and format the text BOLD CE NTER COL n FORMAT text LE FT RIGHT S KIP n TABn Places and formats a specified title at the top of each report page Enter TTITLE with no clauses to list its current definition The old form of TTITLE is used if only a single word or string in quotes follows the TTITLE command See TTI TLE text obsolete old form on page C 5 for a description of the old form of TTITLE These terms a
437. ound trips to from client 3 sorts memory 0 sorts disk 0 rows processed If consistent gets or physical reads is high relative to the amount of data returned it indicates that the query is expensive and needs to be reviewed for optimization For example if you are expecting less than 1 000 rows back and consistent gets is 1 000 000 and physical reads is 10 000 further optimization is needed Note You can also monitor disk reads and buffer gets using V SQL or TKPROF SQL Plus Script Tuning Most performance benefit comes from tuning SQL queries executed in a script This is done with tools like SQL Plus s AUTOTRACE command It involves restructuring queries to make best use of the Oracle Database SQL optimizer For information about Tuning SQL statements see the Oracle Database Performance Tuning Guide The performance gains made by tuning SQL Plus specific commands are smaller but could be important for some applications The following system variables and commands can influence SQL Plus performance Tuning SQL Plus 9 11 SQL Plus Script Tuning COLUMN NOPRINT COLUMN NOPRINT turns off screen output and printing of the column heading and all values selected for the column It is better to remove an unneeded column from a SELECT then it is to use COLUMN NOPRINT to stop it displaying Removing the column from the query means the SQL engine does not need to process it or need to transfer the column data
438. owns and has all privileges on the PUP table Other Oracle Database usernames should have only SELECT access to this table which enables a view of restrictions for that username and those restrictions assigned to PUBLIC The script PUPBLD SQL when run grants SELECT access on the PUP table to PUBLIC Disabling SQL Plus SQL and PL SQL Commands To disable a SQL or SQL Plus command for a given user insert a row containing the user s username in the Userid column the command name in the Attribute column and DISABLED in the Char_Value column The Scope Numeric_Value and Date_Value columns should contain NULL For example PRODUCT USERID ATTRIBUTE SCOPE NUMBERIC CHAR DATE LONG VALUE VALUE VALUE VALUE SQL Plus HR HOST DISABLED SQL Plus INSERT DISABLED SQL Plus UPDATE DISABLED SQL Plus DELETE DISABLED To re enable commands delete the row containing the restriction SQL Plus Commands That Can Be Disabled ACCEPT DEFINE PASSWORD SHUTDOWN APPEND DEL PAUSE SPOOL ARCHIVE LOG DESCRIBE PRINT START ATTRIBUTE DISCONNECT PROMPT STARTUP BREAK EDIT RECOVER STORE BTITLE EXECUTE REMARK TIMING CHANGE EXIT QUIT REPFOOTER TTITLE CLEAR GET REPHEADER UNDEFINE COLUMN HELP RUN VARIABLE COMPUTE HOST SAVE WHENEVER OSERROR 10 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Disabling SQL Plus SQL and PL SQL Commands SQL Plus Commands That Can Be Disabled CONNECT INPUT SET WHENEVER SQLERROR COPY LIST SHOW SQL Co
439. p COLUMN plan_plus_exp FORMAT a60 COLUMN object_node_plus_exp FORMAT a8 COLUMN other_tag_plus_exp FORMAT a29 COLUMN other_plus_exp FORMAT a44 For SOL Plus command line and Windows GUI connections SOL Plus also supports a User Profile script The User Profile is executed after the Site Profile and is intended to allow users to specifically customize their session The User Profile script is generally named login sql SQL Plus searches for the User Profile in your current directory and then the directories you specify with the SQLPATH environment variable SQL Plus searches this colon separated list of directories in the order they are listed You can add any SQL commands PL SQL blocks or SQL Plus commands to your user profile When you start SQL Plus it automatically searches for your user profile and runs the commands it contains A user profile is not used in iSQL Plus Modifying Your LOGIN File You can modify your LOGIN file just as you would any other script The following sample User Profile script shows some modifications that you could include H login sql SQL Plus user login startup file Configuring SQL Plus 3 7 SQL Plus and iSQL Plus Configuration This script is automatically run after glogin sql To change the SQL Plus prompt to display the current user connection identifier and current time First set the database date format to show the time ALTER SESSION SET nls_date_format HH MI SS
440. p and Recovery Basics guide Because of possible network timeouts it is recommended that you use SQL Plus command line not iSQL Plus for long running DBA operations such as RECOVER AUTOMATIC Automatically generates the name of the next archived redo log file needed to continue the recovery operation Oracle Database uses the LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST or LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_ 1 and LOG_ARCHIVE_FORMAT parameters or their defaults to generate the target redo log filename If the file is found the redo contained in that file is applied If the file is not found SQL Plus prompts you for a filename displaying a generated filename as a suggestion If you do not specify either AUTOMATIC or LOGFILE SQL Plus prompts you for a filename suggesting the generated filename You can either accept the generated filename or replace it with a fully qualified filename You can save time by using the LOGFILE clause to specify the filename if you know the archived filename differs from the filename Oracle Database would generate FROM location Specifies the location from which the archived redo log file group is read The value of location must be a fully specified file location If you omit this parameter SQL Plus assumes the archived redo log file group is in the location specified by the 13 86 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference RECOVER initialization parameter LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST or LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST_1 Do not specify FROM if you have set a file with
441. page 13 109 for more information Interpreting Error Messages If SQL Plus detects an error in a command it displays an error message See Chapter 14 SQL Plus Error Messages for a list of SQL Plus error messages Example 5 6 Interpreting an Error Message If you attempt to execute a file that does not exist or is unavailable by entering START EMPLYYES SQL An error message indicates that the table does not exist SP2 0310 unable to open file emplyyes sql You will often be able to figure out how to correct the problem from the message alone If you need further explanation take one of the following steps to determine the cause of the problem and how to correct it a Ifthe error is a numbered error beginning with the letters SP2 look up the SQL Plus message in SQL Plus Error Messages on page 14 1 a Ifthe error is a numbered error beginning with the letters CPY look up the SQL Plus COPY command message in COPY Command Messages on page 14 54 a Ifthe error is a numbered error beginning with the letters ORA look up the Oracle Database message in the Oracle Database Error Messages guide or in the platform specific Oracle documentation provided for your operating system SQL Plus Basics 5 15 Interpreting Error Messages a Ifthe error is a numbered error beginning with the letters PLS look up the Oracle Database message in the PL SQL User s Guide and Reference If the error is unnumbered look up correc
442. playing current date 7 32 13 37 13 40 displaying page number 7 29 13 158 displaying system maintained values 7 29 13 155 formatting elements 13 157 formatting system maintained values in 7 30 indenting 7 28 13 156 listing current definition 7 30 13 24 13 157 restoring definition 7 31 setting at start or end of report 7 24 setting lines from top of page to top title 7 33 13 105 13 123 C 1 setting lines from top title to end of page 9 13 13 106 13 124 setting top and bottom 7 24 13 24 13 155 C 1 C 2 spacing between last row and bottom title 7 27 suppressing definition 7 30 13 156 TNS_ADMIN environment variables 3 3 TO clause B 5 tracing queries 9 8 tracing statements for performance statistics 9 5 for query execution path 9 5 using a database link 9 7 with parallel query option 9 9 TRIMOUT variable 13 107 13 135 TRIMSPOOL variable 13 107 13 135 TRUNCATE command disabling 10 5 TRUNCATE variable C 2 C 5 TRUNCATED clause 7 7 13 38 TTITLE clause 13 139 TTITLE command 7 24 13 155 aligning title elements 7 26 13 156 BOLD clause 13 157 CENTER clause 7 27 13 156 COL clause 7 28 13 156 FORMAT clause 7 30 13 157 indenting titles 7 28 13 156 LEFT clause 7 27 13 156 listing current definition 7 30 13 157 OFF clause 7 30 13 156 old form C 5 ON clause 7 31 referencing column value variable 7 31 13 37 restoring current definition 7 31 RIGHT clause 7 27 13 156 SKIP claus
443. port for more information Session Integrity Each iSQL Plus login is uniquely identified so you can Connect multiple times from the same machine a Connect multiple times from different machines iSQL Plus supports this stateful behavior by storing session context information in the Application Server You must ensure that your Application Server always routes HTTP requests to the same server otherwise the session context will not be found However you may find it useful to start more than one Application Server to distribute user load across the multiple servers Configuring SQL Plus 3 25 Windows Graphical User Interface Configuration Retained Session Settings Certain settings from a session are either retained or automatically filled in the next time you log in to iSQL Plus from the same workstation a Script Input area size Number of History entries Your username password and Output preferences are not saved by iSQL Plus Your login details may be retained by your web browser Windows Graphical User Interface Configuration Configuring the Windows Graphical User Interface is discussed in the following topics Setting Options and Values Using the Environment Dialog Customizing Registry Entries that affect SQL Plus on Windows Setting Options and Values Using the Environment Dialog Choose Environment from the Options menu to display the Environment dialog which you can use to create a SQL environment statemen
444. pose you have composed a query to display a list of salespeople and their commissions You plan to run it once a month to keep track of how well each employee is doing 6 2 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Editing Scripts in SQL Plus Command Line To compose and save the query using your system editor invoke your editor and create a file to hold your script EDIT SALES Enter each of the following lines in your editor Do not forget to include the semicolon at the end of the SQL statement COLUMN LAST_NAME HEADING LAST NAME COLUMN SALARY HEADING MONTHLY SALARY FORMAT 99 999 COLUMN COMMISSION_PCT HEADING COMMISSION FORMAT 90 90 SELECT LAST_NAME SALARY COMMISSION_PCT FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN The format model for the column COMMISSION_PCT tells SQL Plus to display an initial zero for decimal values and a zero instead of a blank when the value of COMMISSION_PCT is zero for a given row Format models and the COLUMN command are described in more detail in the COLUMN command on page 13 31 and in the Oracle Database SQL Reference Now use your editor s save command to store your query in a file called SALES SQL Editing Scripts in SQL Plus Command Line You can use a number of SQL Plus commands to edit the SQL command or PL SQL block currently stored in the buffer Table 6 1 SQL Plus Editing Commands lists the SQL Plus commands that allow you to examine or change the command in the buffer withou
445. pt with sqlplus myscript sql When SQL Plus is started like this it uses the first line of the script as the username password connection_identifier string Any file on your computer storing a username and password needs to be secured from non authorized access ISQL Plus Security There are two main areas to consider for security and user authentication when using iSQL Plus a The HTTP protocol connection between the web browser and the Application Server a The Oracle Net connection between the Application Server and Oracle Database It is useful to note that in iSQL Plus you cannot access the middle tier operating system to run commands such as HOST EDIT and SPOOL which depend on operating system access 10 10 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference iSQL Plus Security In iSQL Plus security for the connection between the web browser and the Application Server is provided by standard HTTPS It enables secure listener connections with an Oracle Database provided encryption mechanism through the Secure Sockets Layer SSL The Oracle Net connection between the iSQL Plus Server and Oracle Database provides the same security as in previous client server architectures It is recommended that you enable an Oracle Net listener password if possible For more information about Oracle Net connection security see the Oracle Net Services Administrator s Guide and the Oracle Advanced Security Administrator s Guide Enabling SSL wi
446. r CREATE TYPE addr_varray AS VARRAY 10 OF ADDRESS Type created DESCRIBE addr_varray addr_varray VARRAY 10 OF ADDRESS Name Null Type STREET VARCHAR2 20 CITY VARCHAR2 20 To create and describe the table department that contains the columns DEPARTMENT_ID PERSON and LOC enter CREATE TABLE department DEPARTMENT_ID NUMBER PERSON EMPLOYEE LOC NUMBER i SQL Plus Command Reference 13 63 DESCRIBE Table created DESCRIBE department Name Null Type DEPARTMENT_ID NUMBER PERSON EMPLOYEE LOC NUMBER To create and describe the object type rational that contains the attributes NUMERATOR and DENOMINATOR and the METHOD rational_order enter CREATE OR REPLACE TYPE rational AS OBJECT NUMERATOR NUMBER DENOMINATOR NUMBER MAP MEMBER FUNCTION rational_order RETURN DOUBLE PRECISION PRAGMA RESTRICT_REFERENCES rational_order RNDS WNDS RNPS WNPS CREATE OR REPLACE TYPE BODY rational AS OBJECT MAP MEMBER FUNCTION rational_order RETURN DOUBLE PRECISION IS BEGIN RETURN NUMERATOR DENOMINATOR END END DESCRIBE rational Name Null Type NUMERATOR NUMBER DENOMINATOR NUMBER METHOD sia arenes FUNCTION RATIONAL _ORDER RETURNS NUMBER 13 64 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference DESCRIBE To create a table which contains a column of XMLType and describe it enter CREATE TABLE PROPERTY Price NUMBER Description SYS XMLTYPE Table create
447. r CHAR and LONG columns 7 6 when truncated for DATE columns 7 6 when truncated for NUMBER columns 7 4 column separator 13 104 13 112 C 2 columns assigning aliases 13 32 computing summary lines 7 17 13 42 copying display attributes 7 9 13 18 13 36 copying values between tables B 1 B 4 B 9 displaying values in bottom titles 7 32 13 38 displaying values in top titles 7 31 13 37 formatting CHAR VARCHAR LONG and DATE 13 33 formatting in reports 7 1 13 31 formatting MLSLABEL RAW MLSLABEL ROWLABEL 13 33 formatting NUMBER 7 4 13 34 listing display attributes for all 7 9 13 31 listing display attributes for one 7 9 13 31 names in destination table when copying B 3 B 5 printing line after values that overflow 7 10 13 106 13 125 resetting a column to default display 7 9 13 32 C 1 resetting all columns to default display 13 29 restoring display attributes 7 10 13 18 13 38 setting printing to off or on 7 31 9 12 13 37 starting new lines 13 37 storing values in variables 7 31 13 37 suppressing display attributes 7 10 13 18 13 38 truncating display for all when value overflows 7 7 13 135 truncating display for one when value overflows 7 7 13 38 wrapping display for all when value overflows 7 7 13 135 wrapping display for one when value overflows 7 7 13 38 wrapping whole words for one 7 10 COLUMNS clause 13 29 comma number format 7 5 command files
448. r SOL Plus exits Generating HTML Reports from SQL Plus_ 8 1 Creating Reports using Command line SQL Plus You can use SET MARKUP HTML ON SPOOL OFF to generate HTML output suitable for embedding in an existing web page HTML output generated this way has no lt HTML gt or lt BODY gt tags Creating Reports During a SQL Plus session use the SET MARKUP command interactively to write HTML to a spool file You can view the output in a web browser SET MARKUP HTML ON SPOOL ON only specifies that SQL Plus output will be HTML encoded it does not create or begin writing to an output file You must use the SQL Plus SPOOL command to start generation of a spool file This file then has HTML tags including lt HTML gt and lt HTML gt When creating a HTML file it is important and convenient to specify a html or htm file extension which are standard file extensions for HTML files This enables you to easily identify the type of your output files and also enables web browsers to identify and correctly display your HTML files If no extension is specified the default SQL Plus file extension is used You use SPOOL OFF or EXIT to append final HTML tags to the spool file and then close it If you enter another SPOOL filename command the current spool file is closed as for SPOOL OFF or EXIT and anew HTML spool file with the specified name is created You can use the SET MARKUP command to enable or disable HTML output as required Examp
449. r damaged tablespace in the standby database using archived redo log files copied from the primary database and a control file 13 88 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference RECOVER STANDBY DATAFILE Reconstructs a lost or damaged datafile in the standby database using archived redo log files copied from the primary database and a control file UNTIL CONSISTENT WITH CONTROLFILE Specifies that the recovery of an old standby datafile or tablespace uses the current standby database control file PARALLEL integer SQL Plus selects a degree of parallelism equal to the number of CPUs available on all participating instances times the value of the PARALLEL_THREADS_PER_CPU initialization parameter The PARALLEL keyword overrides the RECOVERY_PARALLELISM initialization parameter For more information about the PARALLEL keyword see the Oracle Real Application Clusters Quick Start guide Use integer to specify the degree of parallelism which is the number of parallel threads used in the parallel operation Each parallel thread may use one or two parallel execution processes NOPARALLEL Specifies serial recovery processing This is the default MANAGED STANDBY DATABASE Specifies sustained standby recovery mode This mode assumes that the standby database is an active component of an overall standby database architecture A primary database actively archives its redo log files to the standby site As these archived redo logs arrive at the
450. racle9i and Oracle Database 10g databases XXX X If restricted database access has been configured the Connection Identifier field is a dropdown list of available databases to select 5 Click Login to connect to the database The iSQL Plus Workspace is displayed in your web browser Now you can start entering and executing SQL PL SQL and SQL Plus statements and commands in the Workspace Connecting to a Different Database To connect to a different database from a current command line session From an existing Windows GUI or command line session enter a CONNECT command in the form SQL gt connect username password connect_identifier To hide your password enter the CONNECT command in the form SQL gt connect username connect_identifier You will be prompted to enter your password To connect to a different database from a current iSQL Plus session From an existing iSQL Plus session enter a CONNECT command in the form connect username password connect_identifier If you do not enter a password iSQL Plus prompts you to enter one Sample Schemas and SQL Plus xl Sample schemas are included with the Oracle Database Examples in this guide use the EMP_DETAILS_VIEW view of the Human Resources HR sample schema This schema contains personnel records for a fictitious company For more information about the sample schemas see the Oracle Database Sample Schemas guide Unlocking the Sample Tables The Human Resou
451. rces HR Sample Schema may be installed as part of the default Oracle Database installation The HR account is locked by default You need to unlock the HR account before you can use the HR sample schema To unlock the HR account log in as the SYSTEM user and enter the following command where password is the password you want to define for the user HR ALTER USER HR IDENTIFIED BY password ACCOUNT UNLOCK Running your first Query To describe a database object using iSQL Plus for example column details for EMP_DETAILS_VIEW enter a DESCRIBE command like DESCRIBE EMP_DETAILS_VIEW which produces the following output EMPLOYEE_ID NOT NULL _NUMBER JOB_ID NOT NULL VARCHAR2 10 MANAGER_ID NUMBER DEPARTMENT_ID NUMBER 4 LOCATION_ID NUMBER 4 COUNTRY _ID CHARO FIRST_NAME VARCHAR2 20 LAST_NAME NOT NULL VARCHAR2 25 SALARY NUMBER 2 COMMISSION_PCT _NUMBER 2 DEPARTMENT NAME NOTNUL VARCHAR2GD JOB_TITLE NOT NULL _VARCHAR2 35 CITY NOT NULL VARCHAR2 30 STATE_PROVINCE VARCHAR2 25 COUNTRY_NAME VARCHAR2 40 REGION_NAME VARCHAR2 25 To rename the column headings and to select data from the HR sample schema view EMP_DETAILS_VIEW enter COLUMN FIRST_NAME HEADING First Name COLUMN LAST_NAME HEADING Family Name SELECT FIRST_NAME LAST_NAME FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE LAST _NAME LIKE K xli which produces the following output Payam Kaufling
452. re n is the number of 9 s after the V X XXXX Displays the hexadecimal value for the rounded value of the XXXX specified number of digits The MI and PR format elements can only appear in the last position of a number format model The S format element can only appear in the first or last position If a number format model does not contain the MI S or PR format elements negative return values automatically contain a leading negative sign and positive values automatically contain a leading space SQL Plus Command Reference 13 35 COLUMN A number format model can contain only a single decimal character D or period but it can contain multiple group separators G or commas A group separator or comma cannot appear to the right of a decimal character or period in a number format model SQL Plus formats NUMBER data right justified A NUMBER column s width equals the width of the heading or the width of the FORMAT plus one space for the sign whichever is greater If you do not explicitly use COLUMN FORMAT or SET NUMFORMAT then the column s width will always be at least the value of SET NUMWIDTH SQL Plus may round your NUMBER data to fit your format or field width If a value cannot fit in the column SQL Plus displays pound signs instead of the number If a positive value is extremely large and a numeric overflow occurs when rounding a number then the infinity sign replaces the value Likewise if a negative
453. reak occurs in the specified column called the break column column cannot have a table or view appended to it To achieve this you can alias the column in the SQL statement A break is one of three events a change in the value of a column or expression the output of a row or the end of a report When you omit actions BREAK ON column suppresses printing of duplicate values in column and marks a place in the report where SQL Plus will perform the computation you specify in a corresponding COMPUTE command You can specify ON column one or more times If you specify multiple ON clauses as in BREAK ON DEPARTMENT_ID SKIP PAGE ON JOB_ID SKIP 1 ON SALARY SKIP 1 SQL Plus Command Reference 13 19 BREAK the first ON clause represents the outermost break in this case ON DEPARTMENT_ID and the last ON clause represents the innermost break in this case ON SALARY SQL Plus searches each row of output for the specified breaks starting with the outermost break and proceeding in the order you enter the clauses to the innermost In the example SQL Plus searches for a change in the value of DEPARTMENT_ID then JOB_ID then SALARY Next SQL Plus executes actions beginning with the action specified for the innermost break and proceeding in reverse order toward the outermost break in this case from SKIP 1 for ON SALARY toward SKIP PAGE for ON DEPARTMENT_ID SQL Plus executes each action up to and including the action specified for t
454. returns immediately CANCEL NOWAIT Terminates managed standby recovery after the next redo log file read and returns session control immediately FINISH Recovers the current standby online logfiles of the standby database This clause may be useful if the primary database fails It overrides any delays specified for archivelogs so that logs are applied immediately FINISH cannot be issued if you have also specified TIMEOUT DELAY EXPIRE or NEXT clauses Usage You must have the OSDBA role enabled You cannot use the RECOVER command when connected through the multi threaded server To perform media recovery on an entire database all tablespaces the database must be mounted and closed and all tablespaces requiring recovery must be online To perform media recovery on a tablespace the database must be mounted and open and the tablespace must be offline To perform media recovery on a datafile the database can remain open and mounted with the damaged datafiles offline unless the file is part of the SYSTEM tablespace Before using the RECOVER command you must have restored copies of the damaged datafiles from a previous backup Be sure you can access all archived and online redo log files dating back to when that backup was made When another log file is required during recovery a prompt suggests the names of files that are needed The name is derived from the values specified in the initialization parameters LOG_ARCHIVE
455. rkspace cause SQL Plus to exit and COMMIT any pending changes if a failure occurs when reading from the output file WHENEVER OSERROR EXIT START no_such_file OS Message No such file or directory Disconnected from Oracle SQL Plus Command Reference 13 169 WHENEVER SQLERROR WHENEVER SQLERROR Syntax Terms WHENEVER SQLERROR EXIT SUCCESS FAILURE WARNING n I variable BindVariable COMMIT ROLLBACK CONTINUE COMMIT ROLLBACK NONE Performs the specified action exits SQL Plus by default if a SQL command or PL SQL block generates an error In iSQL Plus performs the specified action stops the current script by default and returns focus to the Workspace if a SQL command or PL SQL block generates an error SUCCESS FAILURE WARNING n I variable Bind Variable Directs SQL Plus to perform the specified action as soon as it detects a SQL command or PL SQL block error but after printing the error message SQL Plus will not exit on a SQL Plus error EXIT SUCCESS FAILURE WARNING n variable BindVariable Directs SQL Plus to exit as soon as it detects a SQL command or PL SQL block error but after printing the error message SQL Plus will not exit on a SQL Plus error The EXIT clause of WHENEVER SQLERROR follows the same syntax as the EXIT command See EXIT on page 13 70 for more information CONTINUE Turns off the EXIT option COMMIT Directs SQL Plus to execute a COMM
456. rm ccccees COL UMN column expr DEF AULT obsolete DOCIUMENT obsolete ccccccccscesceeseeeeeeeeees NEWPAGE 1 In obsolete ccceceeeereereeees SET BUFIFER buffer SQL obsolete SET CLOSECUR SOR ON OFF obsolete SET DOC UMENT ON OFF obsolete SET MAXD ATA n obsolete cccccesteeseeeees SET SCAN ON OFF obsolete ceeeee SET SPACE 111 obsolete 0c ccc cece eee SET TRU NCATE ON OFF obsolete SHO W LABEL obsolete ccceeceseceseeeeeeeeees TTI TLE text obsolete old form cccccee Commands Not Supported in iSQL Plus Index XV xvi Send Us Your Comments SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Release 10 1 Part No B12170 01 Oracle welcomes your comments and suggestions on the quality and usefulness of this publication Your input is an important part of the information used for revision Did you find any errors Is the information clearly presented Do you need more information If so where Are the examples correct Do you need more examples What features did you like most about this manual If you find any errors or have any other suggestions for improvement please indicate the title and part number of the documentation and the chapter section and page number if available You can send comments to us in the
457. rs aligning elements 13 98 displaying at bottom of page 13 95 displaying system maintained values 13 97 formatting elements 13 98 indenting 13 98 listing current definition 13 95 setting at the end of reports 7 24 suppressing definition 13 98 FORCE clause 13 148 FORMAT clause 13 11 13 33 Index 10 in ATTRIBUTE command 13 18 in COLUMN command 7 4 7 6 in REPHEADER and REPFOOTER commands 13 98 in TTITLE and BTITLE commands 7 30 13 157 format models number 7 4 13 36 formfeed to begin a new page 7 33 13 123 FROM clause 13 86 B 5 G GET command 13 72 LIST clause 13 72 NOLIST clause 13 72 retrieving scripts 13 72 globalization support Oraclel0g 12 5 glogin profile 13 131 See also login sql site profile xxxi xxxiv 3 5 3 6 3 8 4 23 9 4 9 8 10 12 13 131 13 137 GRANT command 10 1 disabling 10 5 graphical user interface See GUI GUI changing face and size 2 8 2 9 changing font 2 8 menus 2 4 Windows Character Map utility 2 10 H HEAD clause 4 20 HEAD option 4 20 headers aligning elements 7 26 displaying at top of page 13 97 displaying system maintained values 13 97 setting at the start of reports 7 24 suppressing 7 26 HEADING clause 7 2 13 36 HEADING variable 13 118 headings aligning elements 13 98 column headings 13 118 formatting elements 13 98 indenting 13 98 listing current definition 13 97 suppressing definition 13 98 HEADSEP variable 13
458. rs toa script 13 6 script 6 14 13 6 similar toSTART 6 14 13 6 13 147 double at sign command 3 9 13 8 script 13 8 similar toSTART 13 8 13 147 Cancel key 5 12 _CONNECT_IDENTIFIER predefined variable xxxii 3 8 13 53 _DATE predefined variable 13 53 _EDITOR predefined variable 2 6 6 2 13 53 13 54 13 67 13 68 _EDITOR substitution variable 13 54 _EDITOR in EDIT command 6 2 13 54 13 67 _O_RELEASE predefined variable 13 53 13 54 _O_VERSION predefined variable 13 53 13 54 _PRIVILEGE predefined variable xxxii 13 53 13 54 _RC predefined variable 13 75 _SQLPLUS_RELEASE predefined variable 13 53 13 55 13 56 _USER predefined variable 13 53 13 55 infinity sign 13 36 negative infinity sign 13 36 Index 1 Numerics 0 number format 7 5 9 number format 7 5 A ABORT mode 13 142 abort query 5 12 ACCEPT command 6 28 13 11 and DEFINE command 13 51 BINARY_DOUBLE clause 13 11 BINARY_FLOAT clause 13 11 customizing prompts for value 6 29 DATE clause 13 11 DEFAULT clause 13 12 FORMAT clause 13 11 HIDE clause 13 12 NOPROMPT clause 13 12 NUMBER clause 6 30 PROMPT clause 6 28 13 12 access denying and granting 10 1 AFIEDT BUF See editor alias 4 6 ALIAS clause 13 32 in ATTRIBUTE command 13 17 ALL clause 13 136 ALTER command disabling 10 5 ampersands amp in parameters 6 26 13 6 13 146 substitution variables 6 17 ANALYZE command disabling 10 5 APPEND cl
459. rver to use 5 Save http web site xml Configuring SQL Plus 3 13 iSQL Plus Application Server Configuration 6 Restart the iSQL Plus Application Server Testing if the SQL Plus Application Server is Running You can use operating system utilities to determine if the SQL Plus Application Server is running On Windows the iSQL Plus Application Server can be run as a Windows Service or can be started from a Windows command prompt UNIX To determine if the SQL Plus Application Server is running 1 Open a terminal 2 Enter the following command to find the iSQL Plus Application Server process ps eaf grep Djava One of the lines returned should be something like oracle 6082 1 0 Nov 05 pts 8 28 42 SORACLE_HOME jdk bin java Djava awt headless true Djava security properties This running process is the iSQL Plus Application Server Windows Service To determine if the SSQL Plus Application Server is running 1 Select Services from the Start gt Programs gt Administrative Tools menu 2 Find the iSQL Plus Windows service called OracleOracleHomeNameiSQL Plus 3 Check the status of the Windows service to see whether it is started Windows Command Prompt To determine if the SQL Plus Application Server is running iSQL Plus can also be started from a Windows command prompt To determine whether the iSQL Plus Application Server was started and is running from the command line check whether there is an open Windows
460. s Configuration Restoring the System Variables To restore the stored system variables enter START file_name If the file has the default extension as specified by the SET SUFFIX command you do not need to add the period and extension to the file name You can also use the at sign or the double at sign commands to run the script Example 3 1 Storing and Restoring SQL Plus System Variables To store the current values of the SQL Plus system variables in a new script plusenv sql STORE SET plusenv Created file plusenv Now the value of any system variable can be changed SHOW PAGESIZE PAGESIZE 24 SET PAGESIZE 60 SHOW PAGESIZE PAGESIZE 60 The original values of system variables can then be restored from the script START plusenv SHOW PAGESIZE PAGESIZE 24 Configuring SQL Plus 3 9 SQL Plus and iSQL Plus Configuration Installing Command line Help Command line help is usually installed during Oracle Database installation If not the database administrator can create the SQL Plus command line help tables and populate them with SQL Plus help data in two ways a Running a supplied shell script or batch file from the operating system a Running a supplied SQL script from SQL Plus The database administrator can also remove the SQL Plus command line help tables by running a SQL script from SQL Plus Before you can install or remove SQL Plus help ensure that a SQL Plus is inst
461. s a CHAR value to DEPARTMENT_ID consisting of two characters 2 and 0 To list the definition of DEPARTMENT_ID enter DEFINE DEPARTMENT_ID DEFINE DEPARTMENT_ID 20 CHAR This result shows that the value of DEPARTMENT_ID is 20 13 52 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference DEFINE Predefined Variables There are eight variables defined during SQL Plus installation These variables only differ from user defined variables by having predefined values Table 13 3 Variables Predefined at SQL Plus Installation Variable Name Contains _CONNECT_IDENTIFIER Connection identifier used to make connection where available _DATE Current date or a user defined fixed string _EDITOR Specifies the editor used by the EDIT command _O_VERSION Current version of the installed Oracle Database _O_RELEASE Full release number of the installed Oracle Database _PRIVILEGE Privilege level of the current connection _SOQLPLUS_RELEASE Full release number of installed SOL Plus component _USER User name used to make connection _CONNECT_IDENTIFIER _DATE Contains the connection identifier as supplied by the user to make a connection where it is available Contains the current date or a fixed string DATE can be either dynamic showing the current date which is the default or it can be set to a fixed string The current date is formatted using the value of NLS_DATE_FORMAT Because _DATE can be used as a normal substitution v
462. s are listed in the order defined by the iSQLPlusConnectldList in the configuration file web xml For more information about restricted database access see Enabling or Disabling Restricted Database Access on page 3 16 Security Usage Notes The following notes may assist you in understanding and configuring iSQL Plus Once you have successfully logged in with SYSDBA or SYSOPER privileges and authenticated with your Application Server authentication username and password you may not be required to re authenticate to the Application Server until you restart your browser However you are still required to log in with your Oracle Database username and password The Product User Profile PUP tables apply to each user in each database as for SOL Plus client server installations See PRODUCT_USER_PROFILE Table on page 10 1 for more information about PUP tables The global configuration file glogin sql is read from the middle tier machine as for a client server installation login sql files are not read 10 12 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference 11 Database Administration with SQL Plus Overview This chapter provides a brief overview of the database administration tools available in SQL Plus and discusses the following topics a Overview a Introduction to Database Startup and Shutdown a Redo Log Files a Database Recovery This chapter is intended for use by database administrators In order to access the fun
463. s created in a session type VARIABLE without any arguments Referencing Bind Variables You reference bind variables in PL SQL by typing a colon followed immediately by the name of the variable For example ret_val 1 To change this bind variable in SQL Plus you must enter a PL SQL block For example BEGIN ret_val 4 END PL SQL procedure successfully completed This command assigns a value to the bind variable named ret_val 6 32 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Using REFCURSOR Bind Variables Displaying Bind Variables To display the value of a bind variable in SQL Plus you use the SQL Plus PRINT command For example PRINT RET_VAL RET_VAL This command displays a bind variable named ret_val See PRINT on page 13 83 for more information about displaying bind variables Using REFCURSOR Bind Variables SQL Plus REFCURSOR bind variables allow SQL Plus to fetch and format the results of aSELECT statement contained in a PL SQL block REFCURSOR bind variables can also be used to reference PL SQL cursor variables in stored procedures This enables you to store SELECT statements in the database and reference them from SQL Plus A REFCURSOR bind variable can also be returned from a stored function Example 6 14 Creating Referencing and Displaying REFCURSOR Bind Variables To create reference and display a REFCURSOR bind variable first declare a local bind variable of the REFCURSOR dat
464. s from other applications and paste them directly into the Input area You can use the Save Script and Load Script buttons to save scripts from and load scripts to the Input area This may be useful when editing and testing In iSQL Plus you can enter multiple commands in the Input area then click the Execute button to run them all sequentially iSQL Plus script output can be Displayed in the Workspace below the Input area Displayed ina separate web browser window a Saved to a file on your client machine 5 2 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Entering and Executing Commands The SQL Buffer The SQL buffer stores the most recently entered SQL command or PL SQL block but not SQL Plus commands The command or block remains in the buffer until replaced by the next SQL command or PL SQL block You can view the buffer contents with the LIST command You can execute the command or block in the SQL buffer using the RUN or slash commands RUN displays the command or block in the buffer before executing it slash executes the command or block in the buffer without displaying it first For information about editing a command or block stored in the buffer see Editing Scripts in SQL Plus Command Line on page 6 3 SQL Plus does not store SOL Plus commands or the semicolon or slash characters you type to execute a command in the SQL buffer Executing Commands In command line SQL Plus you type a command and direct SQL Plus
465. s in SQL Plus 6 11 Placing Comments in Scripts HELLO AS BEGIN DBMS_OUTPUT PUT_LINE HELLO END YAO FP WwW Procedure created 2 Do not put comments after statement terminators period semicolon or slash For example if you enter SELECT Y FROM DUAL TESTING You get the following error SELECT Y FROM DUAL TESTING x ERROR at line 1 ORA 00911 invalid character SQL Plus expects no text after a statement terminator and is unable to process the command 3 Do not put statement termination characters at the end of a comment line or after comments in a SQL statement or a PL SQL block For example if you enter SELECT COMMENT You get the following error COMMENT ERROR at line 2 ORA 00923 FROM keyword not found where expected The semicolon is interpreted as a statement terminator and SQL Plus submits the partially formed SQL command to the server for processing resulting in an error 6 12 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Running Scripts 4 Do not use ampersand characters amp in comments in a SQL statement or PL SQL block For example if you enter a script such as SELECT REGION_NAME CITY THIS amp THAT FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 SQL Plus interprets text after the ampersand character amp as a substitution variable and prompts for the value of the variable amp that Enter value for that old 2 T
466. s not displayed in step 2 This is to establish whether the OC4J instance has started correctly http 127 0 0 1 5560 http localhost 5560 The OC4J default page should be displayed If the OC4J default page is not displayed the iSQL Plus Application Server is not running Also see Testing if the iSQL Plus Application Server is Running on page 3 14 To Check the HTTP Port used by the SQL Plus Application Server To discover the HTTP port number used by the iSQL Plus Application Server search the SORACLE_HOME install portlist ini file on the Application Server Also see Changing the iSQL Plus Application Server Port in Use on page 3 12 4 12 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Starting SQL Plus Stopping the SQL Plus Application Server To Stop the SQL Plus Application Server on Unix 1 Start a command line session 2 Enter SORACLE_HOME bin isqlplusctl stop The iSQL Plus Application Server is stopped To Stop the iSQL Plus Application Server on Windows 1 Select Services from the Start gt Settings gt Administration Tools menu 2 Locate the iSOL Plus Windows Service OracleOracleHomeNameiSQL Plus 3 Stop the Windows Service To Stop the SQL Plus Application Server from the Command Prompt 1 Start a command line session 2 Enter S ORACLE_HOME bin isqlplusctl stop The iSQL Plus Application Server is stopped Once stopped no iSQL Plus sessions are possible through this server until the
467. s or FORMAT WRAPPED WORD_WRAPPED PL SOL blocks in SOL Plus TRUNCATED SET SHIFTINOUT VISIBLE INVISIBLE on Enables correct alignment for terminals that display shift page 13 128 characters SET SHOWMODE ON OFF on Controls whether SQL Plus lists the old and new settings page 13 128 of aSQL Plus system variable when you change the setting with SET SET SQLBLANKLINES ON OFF on Controls whether SQL Plus puts blank lines within a SQL page 13 129 command or script SET SQLCASE MIXED LOWER UPPER on Converts the case of SQL commands and PL SQL blocks page 13 129 just prior to execution SET SQLCONTINUE gt text on Sets the character sequence SQL Plus displays as a prompt page 13 130 after you continue a SQL Plus command on an additional line using a hyphen SET SQLNUMBER ON OFF on Sets the prompt for the second and subsequent lines of a page 13 130 SQL command or PL SQL block SET SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY x yj z on Sets the behavior or output format of VARIABLE to that of page 13 130 the release or version specified by x y z SET SQLPREFIX c on Sets the SQL Plus prefix character page 13 132 SET SQLPROMPT SQL gt texi on Sets the SQL Plus command prompt page 13 132 SET SQLTERMINATOR fe clON OFF on Sets the character used to end and execute SQL commands page 13 133 toc SET SUFFIX SQL text on Sets the default file that SQL Plus uses in commands that page 13 133 refer to scripts
468. sabled in each restriction level Command Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 EDIT disabled disabled disabled GET disabled HOST disabled disabled disabled SAVE disabled disabled SPOOL disabled disabled START disabled STORE disabled disabled Notes a Disabling HOST also disables your operating system s alias for HOST such as on Windows and on UNIX a Disabling the SQL Plus START command will also disable the SOL Plus and commands For more information about the RESTRICT option see the SQLPLUS RESTRICT Option on page 4 23 SQL Plus Security 10 9 Program Argument Security Program Argument Security Some operating systems allow any user to see what programs are being run If the display also shows command line arguments it may be possible to view the usernames and passwords of other SQL Plus users For example on many UNIX or Linux systems the ps command shows program arguments To stop passwords being displayed depends on how you use SQL Plus Torun SQL Plus interactively always wait for SQL Plus to prompt for the connection information a To run a batch SQL script from a UNIX shell script set environment variables MYUSERNAME and MYPASSWORD to the appropriate values Run a shell script containing sqlplus nolog lt lt EOF connect SMYUSERNAME SMYPASSWORD select EOF To run a batch SQL script hard code the username and password as the first line of the SQL script Then call the scri
469. sage Examples If you do not enter a printspec clause before the text or variables REPHEADER left justifies the text or variables You can use any number of constants and variables in a printspec SQL Plus displays the constants and variables in the order you specify positioning and formatting each constant or variable as specified by the printspec clauses that precede it To define EMPLOYEE LISTING REPORT as a report header on a separate page and to center it enter REPHEADER PAGE CENTER EMPLOYEE LISTING REPORT TTITLE RIGHT Page FORMAT 999 SQL PNO SELECT LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 Page 1 EMPLOYEE LISTING REPORT Page 2 LAST_NAME SALARY King 24000 Kochhar 17000 De Haan 17000 Russell 14000 Partners 13500 Hartstein 13000 sum 98500 6 rows selected To suppress the report header without changing its definition enter REPHEADER OFF SQL Plus Command Reference 13 99 RUN RUN Syntax Usage Examples R UN Lists and executes the SQL command or PL SQL block currently stored in the SQL buffer The buffer has no command history list and does not record SQL Plus commands RUN causes the last line of the SOL buffer to become the current line The slash command functions similarly to RUN but does not list the command in the SQL buffer on your screen The SQL buffer always contains the last SQL statement or PL SQL block entered Assume th
470. scribes typographic conventions used in code examples and provides examples of their use Convention Meaning Example Xxvi Brackets enclose one or more optional DECIMAL digits precision items Do not enter the brackets Braces enclose two or more items one of ENABLE DISABLE which is required Do not enter the braces A vertical bar represents a choice of two ENABLE DISABLE or more options within brackets or braces COMPRESS NOCOMPRESS Enter one of the options Do not enter the vertical bar Horizontal ellipsis points indicate either That we have omitted parts of the CREATE TABLE AS subquery code that are not directly related to the example SELECT coll col2 coln s FROM employees That you can repeat a portion of the nes code Convention Meaning Example Other notation Italics UPPERCASE lowercase Vertical ellipsis points indicate that we have omitted several lines of code not directly related to the example You must enter symbols other than brackets braces vertical bars and ellipsis points as shown Italicized text indicates placeholders or variables for which you must supply particular values Uppercase typeface indicates elements supplied by the system We show these terms in uppercase in order to distinguish them from terms you define Unless terms appear in brackets enter them in the order and with the spelling shown
471. script Enter the BLOCKTERMINATOR to stop SOL command entry without running the SQL command Enter the SQLTERMINATOR character to stop SOL command entry and run the SQL statement To allow blank lines in a SOL statement enter SET SQLBLANKLINES ON REM Using the SQLTERMINATOR default is REM Could have used the BLOCKTERMINATOR default is SELECT FROM DUAL 1 The following output results SET SQLC ASE MIX ED LO WER UP PER Converts the case of SQL commands and PL SQL blocks just prior to execution SQL Plus converts all text within the command including quoted literals and identifiers to uppercase if SQLCASE equals UPPER to lowercase if SQLCASE equals LOWER and makes no changes if SQLCASE equals MIXED SQLCASE does not change the SQL buffer itself SQL Plus Command Reference 13 129 SET SQLCO NTINUE gt text SET SQLCO NTINUE gt text Example SET SQLCONTINUE is not supported in iSQL Plus Sets the character sequence SQL Plus displays as a prompt after you continue a SQL Plus command on an additional line using a hyphen To set the SQL Plus command continuation prompt to an exclamation point followed by a space enter SET SQLCONTINUE SQL Plus will prompt for continuation as follows TTITLE MONTHLY INCOME RIGHT SQL PNO SKIP 2 CENTER PC DIVISION The default continuation prompt is gt SET SQLN UMBER ON OFF SET SQLNUMBER is not suppor
472. se SQL wild cards or make multiple entries Thus all of the following entries are valid HR a CLASS1 a CLASS all users whose names start with CLASS a all users Must contain the name in uppercase of the SQL SQL Plus or PL SQL command to disable for example RUN If you are disabling a role it must contain the character string ROLES You cannot enter a wildcard See PUP Table Administration on page 10 4 for a list of SQL and SQL Plus commands you can disable See Creating and Controlling Roles on page 10 7 for information on how to disable a role Not used it is recommended that you enter NULL Other products may store specific file restrictions or other data in this column Not used it is recommended that you enter NULL Other products may store numeric values in this column Must contain the character string DISABLED to disable a SQL SOL Plus or PL SQL command If you are disabling a role it must contain the name of the role you wish to disable You cannot use a wildcard See Disabling Commands with SQLPLUS RESTRICT on page 10 9 for information on disabling a role Not used it is recommended that you enter NULL Other products may store DATE values in this column Not used it is recommended that you enter NULL Other products may store LONG values in this column SQL Plus Security 10 3 Disabling SQL Plus SQL and PL SQL Commands PUP Table Administration The DBA username SYSTEM
473. sed variables to make room for this variable and re run the command SP2 0146 Unable to allocate dynamic space needed number_of_bytes bytes exiting Cause An internal error occurred Action Note the message and number and contact the System Administrator SP2 0152 ORACLE may not be functioning properly Cause Unable to initialize a session to the Oracle instance Action Make a note of the message and the number then contact the Database Administrator SP2 0157 unable to CONNECT to ORACLE after 3 attempts exiting SQL Plus Cause Unable to connect to Oracle after three attempts Action Validate login details and re try SP2 0158 unknown command_name option option_name Cause An invalid option was specified for the given command Action Check the syntax of the command you used for the correct options SP2 0160 Unable to open file_name Cause Possible causes a The file was not found under the specified name in the specified location File lacked the necessary privileges to open the file a A system error made it impossible to open the file Action Take the following actions Make sure the file name specified is stored in the appropriate directory a Make sure that the file has the privileges necessary for access If it does not then change privileges accordingly Consult operating system documentation or contact the System Administrator SQL Plus Error Messages 14 9 SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0
474. set options that affect database administration Each of these options contains either a field set of radio buttons or text area to change the setting with explanatory text ORACLE 200 Logout Preferences Help Database Administration Configure settings that affect database administration Apply Archive Log Source Set the location from which archive logs are retrieved during recovery M Default Database Ma Administration Path Automatic Recovery Set whether to use the default filenames of archived redo log files during recovery COn Off Cony Workspace History Logout Preferences Help Copytigh 2003 Oracle All right reserved 2 24 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Preferences and Equivalent SET Commands Change Password Click Change Password in the side menu to access the Change Password screen See 4 Logout Preferences Help Changing Your Password in iSQL Plus on page 4 2 ORACLE pSQPis Cpply Change Password Indicates required field Username Old Password New Password Retype New Password Apply Change Password Workspace History Logout Preferences Hel Copytigh 2003 Oracle All righi reserved Preferences and Equivalent SET Commands The tables below show the preferences availabl
475. set to a version less than 9 0 0 In this case the length n can be in bytes or characters depending on the chosen national character set with the upper limit of 2000 bytes still retained VARCHAR2 n CHAR BYTE Creates a variable of type VARCHAR with length of up to n bytes or n characters The maximum that n can be is 4000 bytes and the minimum is 1 byte or 1 character The maximum n for a VARCHAR variable with character semantics is determined by the number of bytes required to store each character for the chosen character set with an upper limit of 4000 bytes The length semantics are determined by the length qualifiers CHAR or BYTE and if not explicitly stated the value of the NLS_LENGTH_SEMANTICS environment variable is applied to the bind variable Explicitly stating the length semantics at variable definition stage will always take precedence over the NLS_LENGTH_SEMANTICS setting NVARCHAR2 n Creates a variable of type NVARCHAR2 with length of up to n characters The maximum that n can be is determined by the number of bytes required to store each character for the chosen national character set with an upper limit of 4000 bytes The only exception to this is when a SQL Plus session is connected to a pre Oracle9i server or the SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY system variable is set to a version less than 9 0 0 In this case the length n can be in bytes or characters depending on the chosen national character set with the upper limit of 40
476. siestentesteniesientestennenientennennen tet 4 9 Starting the Windows Graphical User Interface ssssssssessesssesiesistestesiesiestesenssesiesreseesnesens 4 9 Starting the iSQL Plus Application Server cccccccsesesecsecsesesescsesesesesescsesesesescseseseseseeees 4 11 To Check the HTTP Port used by the iSQL Plus Application Server ccecceeeeeeeee 4 12 Stopping the iSQL Plus Application Server c ccc eee ce cesseseeeecenssesseesesessseeneseneeeeeees 4 13 Rinmin SOU PIS esi e D a a a a tesco siden e a a eabevtna eens 4 13 Running SQL Plus as a DBA esineti ia era E a a laa o aia it 4 14 Starting ISQL Pl s froma URL risistenti ihipa iiias iisi eiia arietta 4 14 Getting HelpinISQLSPlUS Sosina rpi ee aA EE E A E uate cueteeat 4 16 Exiting SOL PlUSis 2 nenoai ia i a eel Ei ts A Eaa ae Deed EEA Ea S ees ets 4 16 Exiting the Command line User Interface sssssssssssessessessiesesstsseesiestestsntesieniesessrenieneenennnene 4 17 Exiting the Windows Graphical User Interface cccceeccseseeeeecesssssseesesessseeseseneseeneees 4 17 Exiting the iSQL Plus User Interface ccc eee cseseseecececesseseesesessesseesesessseeseseeneneees 4 17 SOLPLUS Program Syntax sioan naie ore Soave elite tee a a aiea ie 4 18 OP TONS E EET EEES O ESE 4 18 TO BOM PEA E E N E AA T E T E A T A T 4 24 01 E2 i N EAEE E EREE EE EEN aha ETAS A A EEA EA AEA 4 25 Part II Using SQL Plus 5 vi SQL Plus Basics Entering and Executin
477. splayed screen Note When Find reaches the end of the displayed screen it does not wrap and continue searching from the top of the screen buffer Find Next The Find Next option finds the next occurrence of the search text not applicable F3 2 6 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Windows Graphical User Interface Option Options Menu The Options menu has the following options Description of Options Menu Option Command line Environment The Environment option enables you to set system variables to alter the SQL Plus environment for your current session This dialog has three areas Set Options Value and Screen Buffer Note See Setting Options and Values Using the Environment Dialog on page 3 26 for examples of how these controls interact Set Options SET variable value This area has a list of variables you can select to establish aspects of the SQL Plus environment for your current session such as a Setting the display width for NUMBER data Setting the display width for LONG data a Enabling or disabling the printing of column headings a Setting the number of lines in each page See the SET command on page 13 103 for descriptions of each system variable Value SET variable value The Value area has four options Default Custom On and Off Note When Custom is selected the On and Off buttons and the text field may or may not be enabled for user selection The availability of these fields dep
478. ssisrississtsiesiestestssresiesiestesreseereene 3 26 Setting Options and Values Using the Environment Dialog s ss sssssissssssesissiesesssesieseesee 3 26 Customizing Registry Entries that affect SQL Plus on WindoWS ss ssssssesississsssesierese 3 28 4 Starting SQL Plus Login Username and PasSwotd cccccccssssssssessesssssesesenseececseseseceesesesessessscssneeesesseseceasseseneeesesaees 4 1 Changing your Password eeisoneiesrierereio aiii ann civevete aren o e re ia e 4 2 Changing Your Password in iSQL PIUS ss ssssssssessiesissesstesiestesteseesiestestestnsnesiesressesnestertessess 4 2 Expired Passw Orde taceshessidassdessidlevsdesctdsousneits decodes cast a a a aaa EE R RE E 4 4 Expired Password Screen in SQL PIUS xsin e a aaa a 4 4 Connecting to a Database ccccccccsescssessescsesesenseseecsesseececseseesesesesseseesscsesecessesesesesaseesenseeseeeeeeets 4 4 Net S tviceName cenar eeii n i n aves ites vine ei a a iaa i 4 5 Full Connection Identifier sssini aa a i A ieee i aeaa atas 4 6 Easy Connection Identifiers saa o e e a aa aaa aaa eia 4 6 Connectionless Session with NOLOG Wu icccccccesscecccescessccessesecessssessssecscesseceeessessseeceseseveeess 4 6 Statting SOL PLUS riren shea sues cack ovens iva cued ss pE EE PEE a Susu Ea E E AE TRA aE 4 7 Starting Command line SQLPIUS etsoa hopie ia E E E Er aaa 4 8 Getting Command line Help s sssssessessisstsstssseseestsstssiestesiesssntest
479. st this free text entry for HTML validity You must ensure that the text you enter is valid for the HTML lt BODY gt tag This gives you the flexibility to customize output for your browser or special needs TABLE text The TABLE text option enables you to enter attributes for the lt TABLE gt tag You can use TABLE text to set HTML lt TABLE gt tag attributes such as BORDER CELLPADDING CELLSPACING and WIDTH By default the lt TABLE gt WIDTH attribute is set to 90 and the BORDER attribute is set to 1 4 20 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQLPLUS Program Syntax If text includes spaces it must be enclosed in quotes SQL Plus does not test this free text entry for HTML validity You must ensure that the text you enter is valid for the HTML lt TABLE gt tag This gives you the flexibility to customize output for your browser or special needs ENTMAP ONIOFF ENTMAP ON or OFF specifies whether or not SQL Plus replaces special characters lt gt and amp with the HTML entities amp lt amp gt amp quot and amp amp respectively ENTMAP is set ON by default You can turn ENTMAP ON and OFF as required during a session For example with ENTMAP OFF SQL Plus screen output is SQL gt PROMPT A gt B A gt B With ENTMAP ON SQL Plus screen output is SQL amp gt PROMPT A gt B A agt B As entities in the lt HEAD gt and lt BODY gt tags are not mapped you must ensure that valid entities are used in the MAR
480. stry entry SQLPATH 3 2 3 29 SQLPLUS_FONT 2 8 3 3 3 30 SQLPLUS_FONT_SIZE 2 8 3 3 3 30 RELEASE clause 13 138 REMARK command 6 10 13 94 removing sample tables 1 6 RENAME command disabling 10 5 REPFOOTER clause 13 138 REPFOOTER command 7 24 13 95 aligning footer elements 13 98 BOLD clause 13 98 CENTER clause 13 98 COL clause 13 98 FORMAT clause 13 98 indenting report footers 13 98 LEFT clause 13 98 OFF clause 13 98 RIGHT clause 13 98 SKIP clause 13 98 suppressing current definition 13 98 TAB clause 13 98 REPHEADER clause 13 138 REPHEADER command 7 24 13 97 aligning header elements 7 26 aligning heading elements 13 98 BOLD clause 13 98 CENTER clause 13 98 COL clause 13 98 FORMAT clause 13 98 indenting headings 13 98 LEFT clause 13 98 OFF clause 13 98 PAGE clause 13 97 RIGHT clause 13 98 SKIP clause 13 98 suppressing current definition 13 98 TAB clause 13 98 REPLACE clause in COPY command B 3 B 6 in SAVE command 13 101 13 144 reports autotrace 9 2 breaks 13 19 clarifying with spacing and summary lines 7 12 columns 13 32 creating bottom titles 7 24 13 24 C 1 creating dynamic 8 8 creating footers 13 95 creating headers 13 97 creating headers and footers 7 24 creating master detail 7 31 13 37 13 38 creating top titles 7 24 13 155 C 2 displaying 13 104 13 110 formatting column headings 7 2 13 31 formatting columns 7 4 7 6 13 31 interactive HTML example 8
481. submitted as an argument to SHOW ERRORS Action If a schema is specified check that the schema and object names are separated by a period SP2 0777 Invalid single quotes in SHOW ERRORS object Cause Invalid syntax was found in the object name submitted as an argument to SHOW ERRORS Action If the SHOW ERRORs argument is quoted check that only double quotes are used Either quote the whole argument or quote the schema and object components separately SP2 0778 Script filename and arguments too long Cause The combined length of the script filename and script arguments is too long for SQL Plus Action Reduce the length of the script name and path Reduce the number and or size of the script arguments SP2 0780 Value entered is not a valid datatype Cause The value entered in the ACCEPT command was not valid for the specified datatype Action Enter a valid number within a valid range for the datatype SP2 0781 command option option_name out of range min through max Cause Attempted to enter a value outside the allowed range for the command option Action Check the limits for the command option and enter a value within the allowed range SP2 0782 Prelim connection established Cause Document Feedback message Action SQL Plus Error Messages 14 35 SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0783 Cannot SET variable while connected to a database Cause Attempted to set a system variable that cannot be set while still c
482. suppress a title definition enter TTITLE OFF BTITLE OFF 7 30 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Defining Page and Report Titles and Dimensions These commands cause SQL Plus to cease displaying titles on reports but do not clear the current definitions of the titles You may restore the current definitions by entering TTITLE ON BTITLE ON Displaying Column Values in Titles You may wish to create a master detail report that displays a changing master column value at the top of each page with the detail query results for that value underneath You can reference a column value in a top title by storing the desired value ina variable and referencing the variable ina TTITLE command Use the following form of the COLUMN command to define the variable COLUMN column_name NEW_VALUE variable_name You must include the master column in an ORDER BY clause and in a BREAK command using the SKIP PAGE clause Example 7 24 Creating a Master Detail Report Suppose you want to create a report that displays two different managers employee numbers each at the top of a separate page and the people reporting to the manager on the same page as the manager s employee number First create a variable MGRVAR to hold the value of the current manager s employee number COLUMN MANAGER_ID NEW_VALUE MGRVAR NOPRINT Because you will only display the managers employee numbers in the title you do not want them to print as part of the detail The NOPR
483. t 13 110 EXIT clause WHENEVER OSERROR 13 168 WHENEVER SQLERROR 13 170 EXIT command 4 17 13 70 BindVariable clause 13 71 COMMIT clause 13 70 FAILURE clause 13 70 inascript 13 147 ROLLBACK clause 13 71 use with SET MARKUP 8 2 WARNING clause 13 70 exit conditional 13 168 exiting iSQL Plus xlii 4 17 SQL Plus GUI 2 5 Expired Password screen 4 4 extension 13 101 13 133 13 152 F FAILURE clause 13 70 FEEDBACK variable 13 105 13 117 fields connection identifier 2 12 2 15 enter statements 2 18 2 19 new password 4 3 Index 9 fields continued password 2 12 2 15 privilege 2 15 script location 2 21 username 2 12 2 15 4 3 file extensions 3 8 13 101 13 133 13 152 File menu 2 4 file names in at sign command 13 6 in double at sign command 13 8 in EDIT command 13 67 in GET command 13 72 inSAVE command 13 101 in SPOOL command 7 36 13 144 in SQLPLUS command 4 25 files flat 7 35 finding text 2 6 FLAGGER variable 13 105 13 118 flat file 7 35 FLUSH variable 9 12 13 105 13 118 FOLD_AFTER clause 13 33 FOLD_BEFORE clause 13 33 font changing face and size in command line 2 2 changing face and size in GUI 2 8 2 9 changing in GUI 2 8 euro sign in command line 2 2 fixed pitch TrueType 2 8 Oracle Database home 2 9 setting default in GUI 3 30 setting default size in GUI 3 30 special character in command line 2 2 Windows Character Map utility 2 2 foote
484. t available default value The default setting cannot be changed To change the ARRAYSIZE click Custom and enter the number in the text box Configuring SQL Plus 3 27 Windows Graphical User Interface Configuration Environment f Set Options autocommit autoprint autorecovery autotrace blockterminator closecursor compatibility concat copycommit Example 3 4 Hl m Value C Default Custom On C Off Screen Buffer Buffer Width Buffer Length Cancel Enter a custom numeric value in the text box Click Custom to set your own value The default for ECHO is off To change the setting click Custom and then click On Set Options copycommit copytypecheck define describe DEPTH describe INDENT describe LINENUM Value C Default Custom On Off ie Screen Buffer Buffer Width Buffer Length cancel The text box is not available because echo can only be on or off Customizing Registry Entries that affect SQL Plus on Windows This section describes how to customize your Windows GUI and command line interface configuration by setting Windows registry entries Click Custom to set your own value Warning Microsoft does not recommend modifying the registry Editing the registry may affect your operating system and software installation Only
485. t for the current session Choose an item from the Set Options list to begin You can use the default settings or you can customize the settings by using the other dialog controls The available controls vary with the options you choose You can make multiple changes to options and values When the text box is available you can enter appropriate text or appropriate numeric values Click OK to commit your settings 3 26 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Windows Graphical User Interface Configuration Note Options introduced in SQL Plus Release 8 1 can only be accessed through the command line and are not available in the SQL Plus for Windows Environment dialog These options are SET APPINFO SET LOBOFFSET SET MARKUP SET SHIFTINOUT SET SQLBLANKLINES SET SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY ON OFF See Command Reference in the SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference for descriptions of these SET commands Example 3 2 The ARRAYSIZE is set to 15 the default value Set Options autocommit autoprint autorecovery autotrace blockterminator closecursor Choose one of these options Example 3 3 Value Default C Custom On Screen Buffer Buffer Width Buffer Length 100 C Off p Because default is chosen the text box shows the Cancel Click the default radio button to use the default value Because arraysize is a numeric value these buttons are no
486. t name submitted as an argument to SHOW ERRORS Action If quotes are used check that they are correctly matched Either quote the whole argument or quote the schema and object components separately SP2 0768 Illegal SPOOL command Cause An invalid option was used in the SPOOL command Action Check the syntax of the SPOOL command for the correct options SP2 0769 Usage SPOOL lt file gt OFF OUT where lt file gt is file_name ext CRE ATE REP LACE APP END Cause Incorrect syntax for the SPOOL command was entered Action Check the syntax of the SPOOL command for the correct usage SP2 0771 File filename already exists Use another name or SPOOL filename ext REPLACE Cause The file specified in the SPOOL command already exists Action Use the REPLACE option to overwrite the existing file or specify another file name SP2 0772 Automatic Storage Manager instance started Cause Document Feedback message Action SP2 0773 Automatic Storage Manager diskgroups mounted Cause Document Feedback message Action SP2 0774 Automatic Storage Manager instance shutdown Cause Document Feedback message Action 14 34 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0775 Automatic Storage Manager diskgroups dismounted Cause Document Feedback message Action SP2 0776 Invalid schema and object separator in SHOW ERRORS object Cause Invalid syntax was found in the object name
487. t re entering the command Table 6 1 SQL Plus Editing Commands Command Abbreviation Purpose APPEND text A text adds text at the end of the current line CHANGE old new C old new changes old to new in the current line CHANGE text C text deletes text from the current line CLEAR BUFFER CL BUFF deletes all lines DEL none deletes the current line Using Scripts in SQL Plus 6 3 Editing Scripts in SQL Plus Command Line Table 6 1 SQL Plus Editing Commands Command Abbreviation Purpose DEL n none deletes line n DEL none deletes the current line DEL n none deletes line n through the current line DEL LAST none deletes the last line DEL mn none deletes a range of lines m to n DEL n none deletes the current line through line n INPUT I adds one or more lines INPUT text I text adds a line consisting of text LIST or L lists all lines in the SQL buffer LIST n L nor lists line n LIST L lists the current line LIST n Ln lists line n through the current line LIST LAST L LAST lists the last line LIST mn Lmn lists a range of lines m to n LIST n L n lists the current line through line n These are useful if you want to correct or modify a command you have entered Listing the Buffer Contents The SQL buffer contains the last SQL or PL SQL command Any editing command other than LIST and DEL affects only a single line in the buffer This line is called the current line It is marke
488. t redo log files LIST Requests a display that shows the range of redo log files to be archived the current log file group s sequence number and the current archive destination specified by either the optional command text or by the initialization parameter LOG_ARCHIVE_DEST If you are using both ARCHIVELOG mode and automatic archiving the display might appear like ARCHIVE LOG LIST Database log mode Archive Mode Automatic archival Enabled Archive destination vobs oracle dbs arch Oldest online log sequence 221 Next log sequence to archive 222 Current log sequence 222 Since the log sequence number of the current log group and the next log group to archive are the same automatic archival has archived all log groups up to the current one If you are using ARCHIVELOG but have disabled automatic archiving the last three lines might look like Oldest online log sequence 222 Next log sequence to archive 222 Current log sequence 225 If you are using NOARCHIVELOG mode the next log sequence to archive line is suppressed The log sequence increments every time the Log Writer begins to write to another redo log file group it does not indicate the number of logs being used Every time 13 14 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference ARCHIVE LOG an online redo log file group is reused the contents are assigned a new log sequence number STOP Disables automatic archival If the instance is still in ARCHIVELOG mode a
489. t syntax for the command that generated the error in Chapter 13 SOL Plus Command Reference for a SQL Plus command in the Oracle Database SQL Reference for a SQL command or in the PL SQL User s Guide and Reference for a PL SQL block Otherwise contact your DBA 5 16 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference 6 Using Scripts in SQL Plus This chapter helps you learn to write and edit scripts containing SQL Plus commands SQL commands and PL SQL blocks It covers the following topics Editing Scripts Editing Scripts in SQL Plus Command Line Placing Comments in Scripts Running Scripts Nesting Scripts Exiting from a Script with a Return Code Defining Substitution Variables Using Predefined Variables Using Substitution Variables Substitution Variables in iSQL Plus Passing Parameters through the START Command Communicating with the User Using Bind Variables Using REFCURSOR Bind Variables Read this chapter while sitting at your computer and try out the examples shown Before beginning make sure you have access to the sample schema described in Chapter 1 SQL Plus Overview Using Scripts in SQL Plus_ 6 1 Editing Scripts Editing Scripts In the command line and Windows GUI the use of an external editor in combination with the or START commands is an effective method of creating and executing generic scripts You can write scripts which contain SQL Plus SQL and PL SQL commands which you can retrieve and edit
490. t the current SQL Plus session but may affect SQL Plus sessions started subsequently You can suppress access to the HOST command For more information about suppressing the HOST command see Chapter 10 SQL Plus Security Pausing the Display You can use the PAUSE system variable to stop and examine the contents of the screen after each page during the display of a long report or during the display of a table definition with many columns After examining the display you can press Return or click Next in iSOL Plus to continue You can use SET PAUSE to pause output after displaying each screen of a query or report See SET PAU SE ON OFF text on page 13 125 for more information Saving Changes to the Database Automatically You can specify changes you wish to make to the information stored in the database using the SQL Database Manipulation Language DML commands UPDATE INSERT and DELETE which can be used independently or within a PL SQL block These changes are not made permanent until you enter a SQL COMMIT command or a SQL Database Control Language DCL or Database Definition SQL Plus Basics 5 13 Saving Changes to the Database Automatically Language DDL command such as CREATE TABLE or use the autocommit feature The SQL Plus autocommit feature causes pending changes to be committed after a specified number of successful SQL DML transactions A SQL DML transaction is either an UPDATE INSERT or DELETE c
491. t the output and display line numbers enter SET DESCRIBE DEPTH 2 LINENUM ON INDENT ON DESCRIBE employee SQL Plus Command Reference 13 115 SET ECHO ON OFF Name Null Type 1 LAST_NAME VARCHAR2 30 2 EMPADDR ADDRESS 3 2 STREET VARCHAR2 20 4 2 CITY VARCHAR2 20 5 JOB_ID VARCHAR2 20 6 SALARY NUMBER 7 2 SET ECHO ON OFF Controls whether or not to echo commands in a script that is executed with or START ON displays the commands on screen OFF suppresses the display ECHO does not affect the display of commands you enter interactively or redirect to SQL Plus from the operating system SET EDITF ILE file_namef ex SET EDITFILE is not supported in iSQL Plus Sets the default filename for the EDIT command See EDIT on page 13 67 for more information about the EDIT command The default filename for the EDIT command is afiedt buf which is the SQL buffer The buffer has no command history list and does not record SOL Plus commands You can include a path and or file extension See SET SUF FIX SQL text on page 13 133 for information on changing the default extension The default filename and maximum filename length are operating system specific SET EMB EDDED ON OFF Controls where on a page each report begins OFF forces each report to start at the top of a new page ON enables a report to begin anywhere on a page Set EMBEDDED to ON when you want a report to begin printing immediatel
492. table CPY 0008 More column list names than columns in the destination table Cause On an APPEND operation or an INSERT when the table exists the number of columns in the column name list is greater than the number of columns in the destination table Action Re specify the COPY command making sure that the number of columns in the column list agrees with the number in the destination table CPY 0009 Fewer column list names than columns in the destination table Cause On an APPEND operation or an INSERT when the table exists the number of columns in the column name list is less than the number of columns in the destination table Action Re specify the COPY command making sure that the number of columns in the column list agrees with the number in the destination table CPY 0012 Datatype cannot be copied Cause An attempt was made to copy a datatype that is not supported in the COPY command Datatypes supported by the COPY command are CHAR DATE LONG NUMBER and VARCHAR2 Action Re specify the COPY command making sure that the unsupported datatype column is removed For more information see Appendix B SQL Plus COPY Command SQL Plus Error Messages 14 55 COPY Command Messages 14 56 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference PartlV SQL Plus Appendixes This section contains the following SQL Plus appendixes SQL Plus Limits SOL Plus COPY Command Obsolete SOL Plus Commands Commands Not Supported in iSQL Plus
493. tarting a database see the STARTUP command on page 13 148 Example 11 1 Starting an Instance To start an Oracle Database instance without mounting the database enter STARTUP NOMOUNT Example 11 2 Mounting the Database To start an instance mount the database but leave the database closed enter STARTUP MOUNT 11 2 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Introduction to Database Startup and Shutdown Example 11 3 Opening the Database To start an instance using the Oracle Database Server parameter file INITSALES ORA mount and open the database named SALES and restrict access to database administrators enter STARTUP OPEN sales PFILE INITSALES ORA RESTRICT where SALES is the database name specified in the DB_LNAME parameter in the INITSALES ORA parameter file Example 11 4 Opening the Database To start an instance using the Oracle Database Server parameter file INITSALES ORA mount and open the database named SALES in exclusive mode and restrict access to administrative personnel enter STARTUP OPEN sales PFILE INITSALES ORA EXCLUSIVE RESTRICT where SALES is the database name specified in the DB_LNAME parameter in the INITSALES ORA parameter file Database Shutdown Shutting down a database involves three steps 1 Closing the database When a database is closed all database and recovery data in the SGA are written to the datafiles and redo log files and all online datafiles are closed 2 Dismounting the data
494. tax MANAGED STANDBY DATABASE recover_clause cancel_clause finish_clause where the recover_clause has the following syntax DISCONNECT FROM SESSION TIMEOUT integer NOTIMEOUT NODELAY DEFAULT DELAY DELAY integer NEXT integer EXPIRE integer NO EXPIRE parallel_clause USING CURRENT LOGFILE UNTIL CHANGE integer THROUGH THREAD integer SEQUENCE integer ALL ARCHIVELOG ALL LAST NEXT SWITCHOVER DISCONNECT FROM SESSION TIMEOUT integer NOTIMEOUT NODELAY DEFAULT DELAY DELAY integer NEXT integer EXPIRE integer NO EXPIRE parallel_clause SQL Plus Command Reference 13 85 RECOVER Terms USING CURRENT LOGFILE UNTIL CHANGE integer THROUGH THREAD integer SEQUENCE integer ALL ARCHIVELOG ALL LAST NEXT SWITCHOVER J where the cancel_clause has the following syntax CANCEL IMMEDIATE WAIT NOWAIT where the finish_clause has the following syntax DISCONNECT FROM SESSION parallel_clause FINISH SKIP STANDBY LOGFILE WAIT NOWAIT where the parallel_clause has the following syntax NOPARALLEL PARALLEL integer Performs media recovery on one or more tablespaces one or more datafiles or the entire database For more information on the RECOVER command see the Oracle Database Administrator s Guide the ALTER DATABASE RECOVER command in the Oracle Database SQL Reference and the Oracle Database Backu
495. tays in effect after the script has finished You can include in a script any command you would normally enter interactively typically SQL or SQL Plus commands 13 8 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference double at sign Examples If the START command is disabled see Disabling SQL Plus SQL and PL SQL Commands on page 10 4 this will also disable the command For more information see the SPOOL command on page 13 144 SQL Plus removes the SQLTERMINATOR a semicolon by default before the command is issued A workaround for this is to add another SQLTERMINATOR See SET SQOLT ERMINATOR c ON OFF on page 13 133 for more information Suppose that you have the following script named PRINTRPT SELECT DEPARTMENT_ID CITY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 EMPRPT SQL QR WKRPT SQL When you START PRINTRPT and it reaches the command it looks for the script named EMPRPT in the current working directory and runs it When PRINTRPT reaches the command it looks for the script named WKRPT in the same path as PRINTRPT and runs it Suppose that the same script PRINTRPT was located on a web server and you ran it with START HTTP machine_name domain port PRINTRPT When it reaches the command it looks for the script named EMPRPT in the current working directory and runs it When PRINTRPT reaches the command it looks for the script named WKRPT in the same url as PRINTRPT HTTP machine_n
496. ted in iSQL Plus Sets the prompt for the second and subsequent lines of a SQL command or PL SQL block ON sets the prompt to be the line number OFF sets the prompt to the value of SOLPROMPT SET SQLPLUSCOMPATIIBILITY x y z Sets the behavior to that of the release or version specified by x y z Where x is the version number y is the release number and z is the update number For example 8 1 7 9 0 1 or 10 1 The features affected by SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY are tabulated in the SQL Plus Compatibility Matrix shown You can also set the value of SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY using the CIOMPATIBILITY argument of the SQLPLUS command when starting SQL Plus from the command line The default setting for SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY is the value of the SQL Plus client which is 10 1 0 13 130 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary It is recommended that you add SET SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY 10 1 0 to your scripts to maximize their compatibility with future versions of SOL Plus SQL Plus Compatibility Matrix The SQL Plus Compatibility Matrix tabulates behavior affected by each SQL Plus compatibility setting SQL Plus compatibility modes can be set in three ways a You can include a SET SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY command in your site or user profile On installation there is no SET SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY setting in glogin sql Therefore the default compatibility is 10 1 a You can use the SQLPLUS C OMPATIBILITY x y z command
497. ter the format you can DEFINE _page with a new formatting string as follows SET ESCAPE SQL gt DEFINE _page Page amp P2 This formatting string will print the word page with an initial capital letter and format the page number to a width of two You can substitute any text for page and any number for the width You must set escape so that SQL Plus does not interpret the ampersand amp as a substitution variable See SET ESC APE c ON OFF on page 13 117 for more information on setting the escape character Obsolete SQL Plus Commands C 5 TTI TLE text obsolete old form SQL Plus interprets TTITLE in the old form if a valid new form clause does not immediately follow the command name If you want to use CENTER with TTITLE and put more than one word on a line you should use the new form of TTITLE For more information see the TTITLE command on page 13 155 Example To use the old form of TTITLE to set a top title with a left aligned date and right aligned page number on one line followed by SALES DEPARTMENT on the next line and PERSONNEL REPORT on a third line enter TTITLE SALES DEPARTMENT PERSONNEL REPORT C 6 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference D Commands Not Supported in SQL Plus Attempting to use the following unsupported commands or command options not implemented in the iSQL Plus user interface raises an SP2 0850 error message SQL Plus Commands with No Context in SSQL Plus SE
498. ters The SET SHIFTINOUT command is useful for terminals which display shift characters together with data for example IBM 3270 terminals You can only use this command with shift sensitive character sets for example JA16DBCS Use VISIBLE for terminals that display shift characters as a visible character for example a space or a colon INVISIBLE is the opposite and does not display any shift characters To enable the display of shift characters on a terminal that supports them enter SET SHIFTINOUT VISIBLE SELECT LAST_NAME JOB_ID FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 mn where visible shift character uppercase represents multibyte characters lowercase represents singlebyte characters SET SHOW MODE ON OFF SET SHOWMODE is not supported in iSQL Plus Controls whether SQL Plus lists the old and new settings of a SQL Plus system variable when you change the setting with SET ON lists the settings OFF suppresses the listing SHOWMODE ON has the same behavior as the obsolete SHOWMODE BOTH 13 128 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET SQLBL ANKLINES ON OFF Example SET SQLBLANKLINES is not supported in iSQL Plus Controls whether SQL Plus puts blank lines within a SQL command or script ON interprets blank lines and new lines as part of aSQL command or script OFF the default value does not allow blank lines or new lines in a SQL command or script or
499. text follows the line number For example 2 CHANGE OLD NEW will change the second line of the buffer to be 2 C OLD NEW 13 28 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference CLEAR CLEAR Syntax Terms CL EAR option where option represents one of the following clauses BRE AKS BUFF ER COL UMNS COMP UTES SCRIEEN SQL TIMI NG Resets or erases the current value or setting for the specified option CLEAR SCREEN command not available in iSQL Plus BRE AKS Removes the break definition set by the BREAK command BUFF ER Clears text from the buffer CLEAR BUFFER has the same effect as CLEAR SQL unless you are using multiple buffers See SET BUF FER buffer SQL obsolete on page C 3 for more information about the obsolete form of this command COL UMNS Resets column display attributes set by the COLUMN command to default settings for all columns To reset display attributes for a single column use the CLEAR clause of the COLUMN command CLEAR COLUMNS also clears the ATTRIBUTEs for that column COMP UTES Removes all COMPUTE definitions set by the COMPUTE command SQL Plus Command Reference 13 29 CLEAR Examples SCRIEEN Clears your screen CLEAR SCREEN is not available in iSQL Plus SQL Clears the text from SQL buffer CLEAR SQL has the same effect as CLEAR BUFFER unless you are using multiple buffers See SET BUF FER buffer SQL obsolete on page C 3 for more informati
500. th SQL Plus You can enable security for the connection between the web browser and the iSQL Plus Application Server using SSL To enable SSL for the iSQL Plus Application Server see Enabling SSL with iSQL Plus on page 3 21 For detailed information about SSL see the Oracle Application Server Containers for J2EE Security Guide Administration Privileges There are two modes of access to iSQL Plus a Connect as anormal user Requires an Oracle Database account username and password entered in the iSQL Plus Login screen Connect as a SYSDBA or SYSOPER privileged user Requires an Oracle Database account username and password entered in the iSQL Plus DBA Login screen and an Application Server authentication username and password entered in a separate dialog Enabling DBA Access To connect with SYSDBA or SYSOPER privileges your username and password must be added to the iSQL Plus authentication file for the iSQL Plus Application Server To enable DBA access see Enabling isQL Plus DBA Access on page 3 17 SQL Plus Security 10 11 iSQL Plus Security Enabling or Disabling Restricted Database Access The restricted database parameter limits the databases that users can access in iSQL Plus When enabled a dropdown list of available databases is displayed in place of the Connection Identifier text field on the Login screen This enables greater security for iSQL Plus Servers in hosted environments Connection identifier
501. the DEFINE command to redefine their values or you can use the UNDEFINE command to remove their definitions and make them unavailable To view a specific variable definition enter DEFINE variable where variable is the name of the substitution variable whose definition you want to view To view all predefined and user defined variable definitions enter DEFINE All predefined and all user defined variable definitions are displayed You can use UNDEFINE to remove a substitution variable definition and make it unavailable SQL Plus Command Reference 13 55 Predefined Variables Examples of Use of Predefined Variables To change your SQL Plus prompt to display your connection identifier enter SET SQLPROMPT _CONNECT_IDENTIFIER gt To view the predefined value of the SQLPLUS_RELEASE substitution variable enter DEFINE _SQLPLUS_RELEASE DEFINE _SOLPLUS_RELEASE 101000100 CHAR 13 56 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference DEL DEL Syntax Terms Usage DEL is not available in iSQL Plus DEL n nmi n n LAST n LAST LAST Deletes one or more lines of the buffer SQL Plus commands are not stored in the buffer There is no history of commands previously entered in the buffer Term Description n Deletes line n nm Deletes lines n through m n Deletes line n through the current line nLAST Deletes line n through the last line s Deletes the current line n Deletes the curre
502. the HELP command to show the syntax of SQL Plus commands SP2 0863 iSQL Plus processing completed Cause All commands in the iSQL Plus input script have been executed with no explicit output Action No action required SP2 0864 Session has expired Please log in again Cause The iSQL Plus session was idle for too long and the context has been removed to free resources for other connections Action Reconnect to iSQL Plus The System Administrator configures the timeout period 14 46 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference iSQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0865 Session is blocked Please log in again Cause An attempt was made to execute a query from iSQL Plus when a previous query was still processing This condition occurs when the browser Back button or Stop button is pressed during query processing Action Reconnect to iSQL Plus SP2 0866 Please enter statements in the Input area Cause The Execute button was clicked when there were no statements in the Input area to execute Action Enter statements to run in the Input area and click Execute again SP2 0867 No script to be saved Cause Save Script was clicked when there were no statements in the Input area to save Action Enter statements to save in the Input area and click Save Script again SP2 0868 No script to execute Cause An attempt was made to execute a script and output the results to a file when there were no statements in the script to execute Actio
503. the RUN command to run the command again RUN SQL Plus correctly displays the query and its result 1 SELECT EMPLOYEE_ID LAST_NAME JOB_ID SALARY 2 FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW 3 WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN EMPLOYEE_ID LAST_NAME JOB_ID MONTHLY SALARY 145 Russell SA_MAN 14 000 146 Partners SA_MAN 13 500 147 Errazuriz SA_MAN 12 000 148 Cambrault SA_MAN 11 000 149 Zlotkey SA_MAN 10 500 Note that the column SALARY retains the format you gave it in Example 5 4 Entering a SQL Plus Command not in iSQL Plus If you have left SQL Plus and 6 6 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Editing Scripts in SQL Plus Command Line started again since performing Example 5 4 Entering a SQL Plus Command not in iSQL Plus the column has reverted to its original format See CHANGE command on page 13 26 for information about the significance of case in a CHANGE command and on using wildcards to specify blocks of text in a CHANGE command Appending Text to a Line To add text to the end of a line in the buffer use the APPEND command 1 Use the LIST command or the line number to list the line you want to change 2 Enter APPEND followed by the text you want to add If the text you want to add begins with a blank separate the word APPEND from the first character of the text by two blanks one to separate APPEND from the text and one to go into the buffer with the text Example 6 5 Appending Text to a Line To append a space
504. the defined values override values entered in the Input Required screen Substitution variables can also be given values passed as parameters using the iSQL Plus dynamic report URL syntax These values can be sent to iSQL Plus in a POST action from an HTML form you write This enables you to write applications that gather all input in one form and also to do field level validation in JavaScript 6 24 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Substitution Variables in iSQL Plus iSQL Plus Input Required Screen When iSQL Plus executes a script containing substitution variables the Input Required screen is displayed for each substitution variable For example when you enter BREAK ON amp amp SORTCOL SELECT amp SORTCOL SALARY FROM amp MYTABLE WHERE SALARY gt 12000 ORDER BY amp SORTCOL iSQL Plus displays ORACLE 3 z R te 2 7SQL Plus eh A 2 Connected as SYSTEM inst1 T Input Required Cancel Continue Enter value for sortcol Jlast_name Cancel Continue Workspace History Logout Preferences Help Copytigh 2003 Oracle All right reserved Enter Value for sortcol Enter a value for the sortcol variable For example enter LAST_NAME Remember that when a substitution variable is defined with a single ampersand you are prompted for its value at every occurrence If you define the variable with a double ampersand the value is defined for the session and you
505. the screen output and printing of the column PRINT turns the printing of the column ON NUL L text Controls the text SQL Plus displays for null values in the given column The default is a white space SET NULL controls the text displayed for all null values for all columns unless overridden for a specific column by the NULL clause of the COLUMN command When a NULL value is selected a variable s type always becomes CHAR so the SET NULL text can be stored in it SQL Plus Command Reference 13 37 COLUMN Usage OLD_V ALUE variable Specifies a variable to hold a column value You can reference the variable in BTITLE commands Use OLD_VALUE to display column values in the bottom title You must include the column in a BREAK command with the SKIP PAGE action OLD_VALUE is useful for master detail reports in which there is a new master record for each page For master detail reporting you must also include the column in the ORDER BY clause Variables specified with OLD_V ALUE are expanded before BTITLE is executed The resulting string is stored as the BTITLE text During subsequent execution for each page of the report the expanded value of a variable may itself be interpreted as a variable with unexpected results You can avoid this double substitution in a BTITLE command by not using the amp prefix for OLD_V ALUE variables that are to be substituted on each page of the report If you want to use a substitution variable to
506. this book use the sample schemas of the seed database which is installed by default when you install Oracle Database Refer to Oracle Database Sample Schemas for information on how these schemas were created and how you can use them yourself SQL Plus error message documentation is available in Chapter 14 SQL Plus Error Messages Oracle Database error message documentation is only available in HTML If you only have access to the Oracle Database Documentation CD you can browse the Oracle Database error messages by range Once you find the specific range use your browser s find in page feature to locate the specific message When connected to the Internet you can search for a specific error message using the error message search feature of the Oracle Database online documentation Printed documentation is available for sale in the Oracle Store at http oraclestore oracle com To download free release notes installation documentation white papers or other collateral please visit the Oracle Technology Network OTN You must register online before using OTN registration is free and can be done at http otn oracle com membership If you already have a username and password for OTN then you can go directly to the documentation section of the OTN Web site at http otn oracle com documentation Conventions This section describes the conventions used in the text and code examples of this documentation set It describes a
507. through the iSQL Plus DBA URL Remove the AS SYSDBA or AS SYSOPER arguments from the login request or log in through the iSQL Plus DBA URL SP2 0924 Supplied connect string has duplicate or incorrect keyword Cause The login details supplied in the connect string may contain a duplicate keyword an incorrect keyword or an out of sequence keyword Action Check the syntax of the connect string and fix or remove the incorrect content SP2 0925 No scripts selected to load or delete Cause In the History page no scripts were selected for loading or deleting from the history list Action Click the checkbox of each script to be loaded or deleted and then click the Load or Delete button SP2 0926 iSQL Plus internal error state number message message Cause An internal error has occurred in iSQL Plus Action Make a note of the message then contact Oracle Support Services 14 52 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference iSQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0927 CONNECT AS SYSDBA or AS SYSOPER not allowed through iSQL Plus URL Cause An attempt was made to CONNECT with AS SYSDBA or AS SYSOPER privileges through the iSQL Plus URL Action CONNECT with AS SYSDBA or AS SYSOPER privileges is only permitted through the iSQL Plus DBA URL Remove the AS SYSDBA or AS SYSOPER arguments from the CONNECT request or CONNECT through the iSQL Plus DBA URL SP2 0929 To use ENTMAP reconfigure iSOQLPlusAllowUserMarkup in the iSQL Plus Server Cause
508. ting Page Dimensions ass isisa sieri ea aia AEE ASEE EE a EEEE AAS E OEE ERE a 7 33 Storing and Printing Query Results cccccccceeesseseeesenseeeecseseeesessseseseecesssseeesessesensaeessees 7 35 Creating a PlatsPile tcc innin an a A A A A E A A A RES 7 35 Sending Results toa Files nia EA yE E E iai 7 36 Sending Results toa Printet eiinoeoooe iiia stirii 7 36 8 Generating HTML Reports from SQL Plus Creating Reports using Command line SQL PIUG 0 ccccccec cece teneteteceeeeeneteeseesenenenenens 8 1 Creatine Reporti e ie erada last vce a e tases e aa aushss aaa N 8 2 Suppressing the Display of SQL Plus Commands in Reports s ss sssessssissesiesisrissessesteen 8 6 M PAT S e r aa a a e e a e a a e e E 8 7 Creating Reports using iSQL PIUS merri ce cece cscs rari insa Aa Vaia ENAN EER EA ieaie E anii 8 8 9 Tuning SQL Plus Tracing Statements 1 3 isin ninos oe r EE E EA a ie o e Aaa la aa aa ataoi ai aaa 9 1 Controlling the Autotrace REPOr taisiin tssirini iisi 9 2 Execution Plamene sanne Prt e a a a iaa 9 4 MAUS a e RR RAESTE TEO ESA ele OIA E EAT EAE EIERN AAO 9 4 Collecting Timing Statistics ccccccssseescseseeecsesesesesseececseseeceesesesessessscssneeeseeaseesesssseseneeeeesaees 9 8 Tracing Parallel and Distributed Queries ccccccccesssesseseescsseeeeeecseeceesesesenseseecseeseseeseeenes 9 8 SOL Plus Script TUming isopreeni serion eenas aaa EEE Aea ESEE En aee EEEE AETR eS EA EE En a 9 11 COL
509. ting and Printing Subtotals To compute the total of SALARY by department first list the current BREAK definition BREAK which displays current BREAK definitions break on DEPARTMENT_ID page nodup on JOB_ID skip 1 nodup Now enter the following COMPUTE command and run the current query COMPUTE SUM OF SALARY ON DEPARTMENT_ID 7 18 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines DEPARTMENT_ID JOB_ID LAST_NAME SALARY 20 MK_MAN Hartstein 13000 KEKEREKE KRRRERRERE I at gal a sum 13000 DEPARTMENT_ID JOB_ID LAST_NAME SALARY 80 SA_MAN Russell 14000 Partners 13500 kkkkxkkkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkk sum 27500 DEPARTMENT_ID JOB_ID LAST_NAME SALARY Do 90 AD PRES King 24000 AD_VP Kochhar 17000 De Haan 17000 kkkkxkkxkkkkkkk kkkkkkkkkk sum 58000 6 rows selected To compute the sum of salaries for departments 10 and 20 without printing the compute label COLUMN DUMMY NOPRINT COMPUTE SUM OF SALARY ON DUMMY BREAK ON DUMMY SKIP 1 SELECT DEPARTMENT_ID DUMMY DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 ORDER BY DEPARTMENT_ID Formatting SQL Plus Reports 7 19 Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY 20 Hartstein 13000 13000 80 Russell 14000 80 Partners 13500 27500 90 King 24000 90 Kochhar 17000 90 De Haan 17000 58000 6 rows selected To compute the salaries j
510. tion 4 20 HTML option 4 20 MARKUP clause 4 20 MARKUP option 4 19 NOLOG clause 4 25 PREFORMAT option 4 22 RESTRICT 4 23 10 9 service name 4 25 SILENT clause 4 24 SQLPLUS command continued SILENT option 4 24 8 6 SPOOL clause 4 21 syntax 4 18 SYSDBA clause 4 25 TABLE option 4 20 unsuccessful connection 4 16 username password 4 8 4 24 SQLPLUS_FONT registry entry 2 8 3 3 3 30 SQLPLUS_FONT_SIZE registry entry 2 8 3 3 3 30 SQLPREFIX variable 13 106 13 132 SQLPROMPT variable 9 13 13 106 13 132 SQLTERMINATOR variable 13 75 13 106 13 129 13 133 SSL iSQL Plus setup 3 21 security 10 11 STANDBY DATAFILE clause 13 89 STANDBY TABLESPACE clause 13 88 START clause 13 15 13 153 START command 6 13 13 146 arguments 6 26 passing parameters toa script 6 26 script 6 13 13 146 similar to at sign command 6 14 13 6 13 147 similar to double at sign command 13 147 Start menu starting SQL Plus 4 9 starting iSQL Plus 4 11 4 14 SQL Plus 2 1 4 7 4 8 SQL Plus shortcuts 4 9 SQL Plus Windows GUI 4 9 STARTUP command 13 148 FORCE clause 13 148 MOUNT clause 13 149 NOMOUNT clause 13 149 OPEN clause 13 149 PFILE clause 13 148 RECOVER clause 13 149 RESTRICT clause 13 148 specifying a database 13 149 statements executing 5 3 statistics 9 4 collecting TIMING statistics 9 8 STOP clause 13 15 13 153 stop query 5 12 stopping i
511. tion Re specify the COPY command making sure that the column names and their respective order in the destination table match the column names and column order in the optional column list or in the SELECT command CPY 0005 Source and destination column attributes don t match Cause On an APPEND operation or an INSERT when the table exists at least one column in the destination table does not have the same datatype as the corresponding column in the SELECT command Action Re specify the COPY command making sure that the data types for items being selected agree with the destination Use TO_LDATE TO_CHAR and TO_NUMBER to make conversions CPY 0006 Select list has more columns than destination table Cause On an APPEND operation or an INSERT when the table exists the number of columns in the SELECT command is greater than the number of columns in the destination table Action Re specify the COPY command making sure that the number of columns being selected agrees with the number in the destination table 14 54 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COPY Command Messages CPY 0007 Select list has fewer columns than destination table Cause On an APPEND operation or INSERT when the table exists the number of columns in the SELECT command is less than the number of columns in the destination table Action Re specify the COPY command making sure that the number of columns being selected agrees with the number in the destination
512. tion Server authentication 2 14 changing iniSQL Plus 4 2 4 4 changing with the PASSWORD command 13 81 field 2 12 2 15 in CONNECT command 4 2 13 48 in COPY command _ B 5 B 7 B 9 in SQLPLUS command 4 8 4 24 viewable warning 4 24 PASSWORD command 13 48 13 81 pasting text 2 6 PATH environment variables 3 2 PAUSE command 6 31 13 82 PAUSE variable 5 13 13 106 13 125 performance of SQL statements 9 1 over dial up lines 13 135 period terminating PL SQL blocks 5 8 13 104 13 111 PLAN_TABLE creating 9 2 table 9 2 PL SQL 5 8 blocks PL SQL 5 8 executing 13 69 formatting output in SQL Plus 13 162 listing definitions 5 5 mode in SQL Plus 5 9 within SQL commands 5 9 PLUSTRACE creating role 9 3 role 9 2 PNO clause 13 138 port conflict 3 12 pound sign 13 36 predefined variable _CONNECT_IDENTIFIER xxxii 3 8 13 53 _DATE 13 53 _EDITOR 2 6 6 2 13 53 13 54 13 67 13 68 _O_RELEASE 13 53 13 54 _O_VERSION 13 53 13 54 _PRIVILEGE xxxii 13 53 13 54 _RC 13 75 _SQLPLUS_RELEASE 13 53 13 55 13 56 _USER 13 53 13 55 Preferences screen 2 20 PREFORMAT 4 22 PREFORMAT clause 4 22 PRINT clause 13 37 PRINT command 13 83 printing bind variables automatically 13 109 REFCURSOR variables 13 163 SPOOL command 13 144 privileges list 2 15 Product User Profile table 10 1 10 12 prompt SET SQLPROMPT 9 13 13 106 13 132 PROMPT clause 6 28 13 12 PROMPT command 6 28
513. tionally in the command line user interface and the Windows GUI the User Profile login sql sets user specific settings The exact names of these files is system dependent 3 4 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference SQL Plus and iSQL Plus Configuration The following tables show the profile scripts and some commands and settings that affect the Command line Windows and iSQL Plus user interfaces Table 3 2 Profile Scripts affecting SQL Plus User Interface Settings This script is run in the Command line and Windows GUI is run in the iSQL Plus Server Site Profile glogin sql Can contain any content that can be included in a SQL Plus script such as system variable settings or other global settings the DBA wants to implement After successful Oracle Database connection from a SQLPLUS or CONNECT command Where NOLOG is specified On successful Oracle Database connection from an iSQL Plus session or a CONNECT command from an iSQL Plus session User Profile login sq Can contain any content that can be included in a SQL Plus script but the settings are only applicable to the user s sessions Immediately after the Site Profile Not Applicable Table 3 3 Commands in Profile scripts affecting SQL Plus User Interface Settings In a profile script this affects the Command line affects the iSQL Plus command and Windows GUI by Server by SET Setting the SQL Pl
514. to load command line help 1 Log in to SQL Plus as the SYSTEM user with SQLPLUS SYSTEM your_password where your_password is the password you have defined for the SYSTEM user In UNIX run the SQL script HLPBLD SQL from SQL Plus with SORACLE_HOME SQLPLUS ADMIN HELP HLPBLD SQL HELPUS SQL In Windows run the SQL script HLPBLD SQL from SQL Plus with SORACLE_HOME SQLPLUS ADMIN HELP HLPBLD SQL HELPUS SQL The HLPBLD SQL script creates and loads the help tables Running the helpdrop sq Script to Remove Command line Help Run the provided SQL script HELPDROP SQL to remove the command line help 1 Log in to SQL Plus as the SYSTEM user with SQLPLUS SYSTEM your_password where your_password is the password you have defined for the SYSTEM user In UNIX run the SQL script HELPDROP SQL from SQL Plus with SORACLE_HOME SQLPLUS ADMIN HELP HELPDROP SQL Configuring SQL Plus 3 11 iSQL Plus Application Server Configuration In Windows run the SQL script HELPDROP SQL from SQL Plus with SORACLE_HOME SQLPLUS ADMIN HELP HELPDROP SQL The HELPDROP SQL script drops the help tables and then disconnects Configuring Oracle Net Services If you plan to connect to a database other than the default whether on the same computer or another computer you need to ensure that Oracle Net is installed and the database listener is configured and running Oracle Net services are used by SQL Plus and the iSQL Plus Applicati
515. tomatically enables a very wide column The default column width may also depend on the character sets in use in SQL Plus and in the database To maximize script portability if multiple characters sets are used Oracle Database recommends using COLUMN FORMAT for each column selected To change the width of a DATE column to n use the COLUMN command with FORMAT An If you specify a width shorter than the column heading the heading is truncated NUMBER Columns For numeric columns COLUMN FORMAT settings take precedence over SET NUMFORMAT settings which take precedence over SET NUMWIDTH settings See SET NUMF ORMAT format on page 13 124 and SET NUM WIDTH 10 n on page 13 124 To change a NUMBER column s width use FORMAT followed by an element as specified in Table 13 1 Number Formats Table 13 1 Number Formats Element Examples Description comma 9 999 Displays a comma in the specified position period 99 99 Displays a period decimal point to separate the integral and fractional parts of a number 9999 Displays a leading dollar sign 0 0999 Displays leading zeros 9990 Displays trailing zeros 9 9999 Displays a value with the number of digits specified by the number of 9s Value has a leading space if positive a leading minus sign if negative Blanks are displayed for leading zeroes A zero 0 is displayed for a value of zero B B9999 Displays blanks for the integer part of a fixed point number when the int
516. ts value in the current session Example 6 10 Using Double Ampersands To expand the script STATS using double ampersands and then run the file first suppress the display of each line before and after substitution SET VERIFY OFF Now retrieve and edit STATS by entering the following commands GET STATS SELECT amp GROUP_COL MAX amp NUMBER_COL MAXIMUM FROM amp TABLE GROUP BY amp GROUP_COL 2 MAX amp NUMBER_COL MAXIMUM APPEND 2 MAX amp NUMBER_COL MAXIMUM CHANGE amp amp amp 6 20 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Using Substitution Variables 2 MAX amp amp NUMBER_COL MAXIMUM MIN amp amp NUMBER_COL MINIMUM SUM amp amp NUMBER_COL TOTAL AVG amp amp NUMBER_COL AVERAGE 1 SELECT amp GROUP_COL CHANGE amp amp amp 1 SELECT amp amp GROUP_COL 7 GROUP BY amp GROUP_COL CHANGE amp amp amp 7 GROUP BY amp amp GROUP_COL SAVE STATS2 Using Scripts in SQL Plus 6 21 Using Substitution Variables Created file STATS2 Finally run the script STATS2 and respond to the prompts as follows START STATS2 Enter value for group_col JOB_ID Enter value for number_col SALARY Enter value for table EMP_DETAILS VIEW SQL Plus displays the following output JOB_ID MAXIMUM MINIMUM TOTAL AVERAGE AC_ACCOUNT 8300 8300 8300 8300 AC_MGR 12000 12000 12000 12000 AD_ASST 4400 4400 4400
517. tting it to the value returned by a function VARIABLE id NUMBER BEGIN id EMP_MANAGEMENT HIRE BLAKE MANAGER KING 2990 SALES END SQL Plus Command Reference 13 163 VARIABLE The value returned by the stored procedure is being placed in the bind variable id It can be displayed with the PRINT command or used in subsequent PL SQL subprograms The following example illustrates automatically displaying a bind variable SET AUTOPRINT ON VARIABLE a REFCURSOR BEGIN OPEN a FOR SELECT LAST_NAME CITY DEPARTMENT_ID FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 ORDER BY DEPARTMENT_ID END PL SQL procedure successfully completed LAST_NAME CITY DEPARTMENT_ID Hartstein Toronto 20 Russell Oxford 80 Partners Oxford 80 King Seattle 90 Kochhar Seattle 90 De Haan Seattle 90 6 rows selected In the above example there is no need to issue a PRINT command to display the variable The following example creates some variables VARIABLE id NUMBER VARIABLE txt CHAR 20 VARIABLE myvar REFCURSOR Enter VARIABLE with no arguments to list the defined variables VARIABLE 13 164 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference VARIABLE variable id datatype NUMBER variable txt datatype CHAR 20 variable myvar datatype REFCURSOR The following example lists a single variable VARIABLE txt variable txt datatype CHAR 20 The following example illustrates prod
518. uage If you do not have familiarity with this database tool see the Oracle Database SQL Reference If you plan to use the PL SQL database language in conjunction with SQL Plus see the PL SQL User s Guide and Reference for information on using PL SQL Documentation Accessibility XX Our goal is to make Oracle products services and supporting documentation accessible with good usability to the disabled community To that end our documentation includes features that make information available to users of assistive technology This documentation is available in HTML format and contains markup to facilitate access by the disabled community Standards will continue to evolve over time and Oracle is actively engaged with other market leading technology vendors to address technical obstacles so that our documentation can be accessible to all of our customers For additional information visit the Oracle Accessibility Program Web site at http www oracle com accessibility Accessibility of Code Examples in Documentation JAWS a Windows screen reader may not always correctly read the code examples in this document The conventions for writing code require that closing braces should appear on an otherwise empty line however JAWS may not always read a line of text that consists solely of a bracket or brace Accessibility of Links to External Web Sites in Documentation This documentation may contain links to Web sites of other companies or or
519. ucing a report listing individual salaries and computing the departmental salary cost for employees who earn more than 12 000 per month VARIABLE rc REFCURSOR BEGIN OPEN rc FOR SELECT DEPARTMENT_NAME LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 ORDER BY DEPARTMENT_NAME LAST_NAME END PL SQL procedure successfully completed SET PAGESIZE 100 FEEDBACK OFF TTITLE LEFT Departmental Salary Bill SKIP 2 COLUMN SALARY FORMAT 999 990 99 HEADING Salary COLUMN DEPARTMENT_NAME HEADING Department COLUMN LAST_NAME HEADING Employee COMPUTE SUM LABEL Subtotal OF SALARY ON DEPARTMENT_NAME COMPUTE SUM LABEL Total OF SALARY ON REPORT BREAK ON DEPARTMENT_NAME SKIP 1 ON REPORT SKIP 1 PRINT rc SQL Plus Command Reference 13 165 VARIABLE Departmental Salary Bill DEPARTMENT_NAME Employee Salary Executive De Haan 17 000 00 King 24 000 00 Kochhar 17 000 00 REREKREREEREBERARE REE KERR 0 sss a ata eG a Subtotal 58 000 00 Marketing Hartstein 13 000 00 VERE KERRERERRAARE BERR KERERERER pane i lel Subtotal 13 000 00 Sales Partners 13 500 00 Russell 14 000 00 KKK KR KKK KKK KR KKK KERR RRR RRR RRR RRR S a a Subtotal 27 500 00 Total 98 500 00 The following example illustrates producing a report containing a CLOB column and then displaying it with the SET LOBOFFSET command Assume you have already created a table named clob_tab which contains a
520. ultiple COLUMN commands for the same column SQL Plus applies their clauses collectively If several COLUMN commands apply the same clause to the same column the last one entered will control the output To make the LAST_NAME column 20 characters wide and display EMPLOYEE NAME on two lines as the column heading enter COLUMN LAST_NAME FORMAT A20 HEADING EMPLOYEE NAME To format the SALARY column so that it shows millions of dollars rounds to cents uses commas to separate thousands and displays 0 00 when a value is zero enter COLUMN SALARY FORMAT 9 999 990 99 To assign the alias NET to a column containing a long expression to display the result in a dollar format and to display lt NULL gt for null values you might enter COLUMN SALARY COMMISSION_PCT BONUS EXPENSES INS TAX ALIAS NET COLUMN NET FORMAT 9 999 999 99 NULL lt NULL gt Note that the example divides this column specification into two commands The first defines the alias NET and the second uses NET to define the format Also note that in the first command you must enter the expression exactly as you enter it in the SELECT command Otherwise SOL Plus cannot match the COLUMN command to the appropriate column To wrap long values in a column named REMARKS you can enter COLUMN REMARKS FORMAT A20 WRAP CUSTOMER DATE QUANTITY REMARKS 123 25 AUG 2001 144 This order must be s hipped by air freigh t to ORD SQL Plus Command Reference 13 39 COLUMN If you
521. umber used by the SSQL Plus Application Server 1 Open the configuration file http web site xml located in SORACLE_HOME o0c4j j2ee isqlplus config 2 Search for the web site element It has the form lt website port 5560 display name Oracle9iAS Containers for J2EE HTTP Web Site gt 3 The value specified by the attribute port is the port number that the Application Server is attempting to use To view currently used ports and determine if the Application Server is trying to use a port that is already in use run the following command netstat an If there is another application using the same port you need to change the port used by the Application Server to a number that is not in use By convention it is recommended that you use a port number above 2000 and that you do not use 80 or 8080 as they are usually used by web services A port number can be any unique integer number To change the port number used by the SQL Plus Application Server 1 Stop the Application Server 2 Open the configuration file http web site xml located in SORACLE_HOME o0c4j j2ee isqlplus config 3 Search for the web site element It has the form lt website port 5560 display name Oracle9iAS Containers for J2EE HTTP Web Site gt The number specified by the attribute port is the port number that the Application Server is attempting to use 4 Change the port number to a unique port number that you want the iSQL Plus Application Se
522. umn Cause Incorrect syntax for the DESCRIBE command was entered Action Check the syntax of the DESCRIBE command for the correct usage SP2 0561 Object does not exist Cause The specified object you tried to DESCRIBE does not exist in the database Action Retry the command with a valid object name SP2 0562 Object does not exist in package Cause The specified object you tried to DESCRIBE does not exist in the package Action Check and make sure that the object name is correct SP2 0564 Object object_name is INVALID it may not be described Cause The specified object you tried to DESCRIBE is invalid Action Re validate the object SP2 0565 Illegal identifier Cause An invalid character was used in the DESCRIBE command Action Correct the character and try again SQL Plus Error Messages 14 21 SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0566 Illegal sub object specification Cause Invalid sub object specification in the DESCRIBE command Action Correct the subject specification and try again SP2 0567 Illegal column specification for PL SQL object Cause A column was described within an object in the DESCRIBE command Action Remove the column specification in the DESCRIBE command and try again SP2 0568 No bind variables declared Cause There are no bind variables declared Action No action required SP2 0570 Usage SET SERVEROUTPUT ON OFF SIZE n FOR MAT WRA PPED WOR D_WRAPPED TRU NCATED Ca
523. ure you have access to the sample tables described in Chapter 1 SQL Plus Overview The COPY command will be obsoleted in future releases of SQL Plus No new datatypes will be supported by COPY COPY Command Syntax COPY FROM database TO database FROM database TO database APPENDICREATEIINSERTIREPLACE destination_table column column column USING query where database has the following syntax username password connect_identifier Copies data from a query to a table in the same or another database COPY supports the following datatypes CHAR DATE LONG NUMBER VARCHAR2 SQL Plus COPY Command B 1 COPY Command Syntax Terms Refer to the following list for a description of each term or clause FROM database The database that contains the data to be copied If you omit the FROM clause the source defaults to the database to which SQL Plus is connected that is the database that other commands address You must use a FROM clause to specify a source database other than the default The COPY command FROM clause does not support SYSDBA or SYSOPER privileged connections TO database The database containing the destination table If you omit the TO clause the destination defaults to the database to which SQL Plus is connected that is the database that other commands address You must use a TO clause to specify a destination database other than the default The COPY command TO clause does not support
524. us XXXVI SQL Plus is an interactive and batch query tool that is installed with every Oracle Database Server or Client installation It has a command line user interface a Windows Graphical User Interface GUI and the iSQL Plus web based user interface SQL Plus has its own commands and environment and it provides access to the Oracle Database It enables you to enter and execute SQL PL SQL SQL Plus and operating system commands to perform the following a Format perform calculations on store and print from query results a Examine table and object definitions Develop and run batch scripts a Perform database administration You can use SQL Plus to generate reports interactively to generate reports as batch processes and to output the results to text file to screen or to HTML file for browsing on the Internet You can generate reports dynamically using the HTML output facility of SQL Plus or using the dynamic reporting capability of iSQL Plus to run a script from a web page Before Starting SQL Plus or iSQL Plus What is necessary before you can run SQL Plus or iSQL Plus Install Oracle Database or Oracle Client for the command line SQL Plus or Windows GUI interfaces only See the Oracle Database Installation Guide for your operating system available at http otn oracle com documentation Obtain an Oracle Database login username and password during installation or from your Database Administrator See Login Username
525. us Setting the SQL Plus SQLPLUSCOMPATT IBILITY compatibility mode to compatibility mode to x y z obtain the behavior the obtain the behavior the DBA Also see the SOL Plus DBA wants for this site wants for this site Compatibility Matrix SQLPLUS command As for SET Not Applicable COMPATIBILITY Option SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY but set with the SOQLPLUS command COMPATIBILITY option SQLPLUS command RESTRICT Starting SQL Plus with the Not Applicable Option RESTRICT option set to 3 prevents the User Profile script from being read Configuring SQL Plus 3 5 SQL Plus and iSQL Plus Configuration Site Profile A Site Profile script is created during installation It is used by the database administrator to configure session wide behavior for SQL Plus Command line Windows GUI and iSQL Plus connections The Site Profile script is generally named glogin sql SOL Plus or the iSQL Plus Server executes this script whenever a user starts a SQL Plus or iSQL Plus session and successfully establishes the Oracle Database connection The Site Profile enables the DBA to set up SQL Plus environment defaults for all users of a particular SQL Plus or iSQL Plus Application Server installation Users cannot directly access the Site Profile Default Site Profile Script The Site Profile script is ORACLE_HOME sqlplus admin glogin sql in UNIX and ORACLE_HOME sqlplus admin glogin sql in Windows If a Site Profile already exists
526. use An invalid option was used in the SET SERVEROUTPUT command Action Specify a valid option SP2 0575 Use of Oracle SQL feature not in SQL92 Entry Intermediate Full Level Cause A SQL statement was attempted that is not FIPS compliant May also occur if a SQL Plus feature for example SET AUTOTRACE that uses Oracle specific SQL was turned on when you are using FIPS flagging Action Use SET FLAGGER and turn FIPS compliance checking OFF or rewrite the statement SP2 0577 Usage SET FLAGGER OFF ENTRY INTERMEDIATE FULL Cause An invalid option was specified in the SET FLAGGER command Action Specify a valid option SP2 0581 Object object_name is a package use DESCRIBE lt package gt lt procedure gt Cause A attempt was made to describe a package as stand alone no sub object such as a procedure was supplied Action Use the DESCRIBE command to describe a sub object within a package 14 22 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQL Plus Error Messages SP2 0582 Usage EXIT QUIT SUCCESS FAILURE WARNING n lt variable gt lt bindvariable gt COMMIT ROLLBACK Cause An option to EXIT was invalid in SQL Plus Action Specify a valid option SP2 0584 EXIT variable variable_name was non numeric Cause The specified EXIT variable is non numeric Action Check the syntax of the EXIT command for the correct usage SP2 0590 A COMPUTE function must appear before each LABEL keyword Cause Th
527. ust at the end of the report COLUMN DUMMY NOPRINT COMPUTE SUM OF SALARY ON DUMMY BREAK ON DUMMY SELECT NULL DUMMY DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 ORDER BY DEPARTMENT_ID DEPARTMENT _ID LAST_NAME SALARY 20 Hartstein 13000 80 Russell 14000 80 Partners 13500 90 King 24000 90 Kochhar 17000 90 De Haan 17000 98500 6 rows selected 7 20 SQL Plus Users Guide and Reference Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines When you establish the format of a NUMBER column you must allow for the size of the sums included in the report Computing Summary Lines at the End of the Report You can calculate and print summary lines based on all values in a column by using BREAK and COMPUTE in the following forms BREAK ON REPORT COMPUTE function LABEL label_name OF column column column ON REPORT Example 7 14 Computing and Printing a Grand Total To calculate and print the grand total of salaries for all sales people and change the compute label first enter the following BREAK and COMPUTE commands BREAK ON REPORT COMPUTE SUM LABEL TOTAL OF SALARY ON REPORT Next enter and run a new query SELECT LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN LAST _NAME SALARY Russell 14000 Partners 13500 Errazuriz 12000 Cambrault 11000 Zlotkey 10500 TOTAL 61000 To print a grand total or grand average grand maximum and so on
528. uter s standard default printer This option is not available on some operating systems Enter SPOOL with no clauses to list the current spooling status 13 144 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SPOOL Usage To spool output generated by commands in a script without displaying the output on the screen use SET TERMOUT OFF SET TERMOUT OFF does not affect output from commands that run interactively You must use quotes around file names containing white space To create a valid HTML file using SPOOL APPEND commands you must use PROMPT or a similar command to create the HTML page header and footer The SPOOL APPEND command does not parse HTML tags Use SET SQLPLUSCOMPATIIBILITY 9 2 or earlier to use the earlier behavior However this will also disable other functionality that is available in SQL Plus Release 10 1 See SQL Plus Compatibility Matrix on page 13 131 to determine what functionality is controlled by the SET SQLPLUSCOMPAT IBILITY command Examples of SPOOL Command To record your output in the new file DIARY using the default file extension enter SPOOL DIARY CREATE To append your output to the existing file DIARY enter SPOOL DIARY APPEND To record your output to the file DIARY overwriting the existing content enter SPOOL DIARY REPLACE To stop spooling and print the file on your default printer enter SPOOL OUT SQL Plus Command Reference 13 145 START START Syntax Terms STA R
529. utomatic archiving enter ARCHIVE LOG STOP To archive the log file group with sequence number 1001 to the destination specified enter ARCHIVE LOG 1001 vobs oracle dbs arch arch specifies the prefix of the filename on the destination device the remainder of the filename is dependent on the initialization parameter LOG_ARCHIVE_FORMAT which specifies the filename format for archived redo log files 13 16 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference ATTRIBUTE ATTRIBUTE Syntax Terms ATTRIBUTE type_name attribute_name option where option represents one of the following clauses ALI AS alias CLE AR FOR MAT format LIKE type_name attribute_name alias ON OFF Specifies display characteristics for a given attribute of an Object Type column such as the format of NUMBER data Columns and attributes should not have the same names as they share a common namespace Also lists the current display characteristics for a single attribute or all attributes Enter ATTRIBUTE followed by type_name attribute_name and no other clauses to list the current display characteristics for only the specified attribute Enter ATTRIBUTE with no clauses to list all current attribute display characteristics type_name attribute_name Identifies the data item typically the name of an attribute within the set of attributes for a given object of Object Type type_name If you select objects of the same Object Type an ATTRIB
530. valent to specifying AUTOMATIC except that Oracle Database does not prompt for a filename CANCEL Terminates cancel based recovery SQL Plus Command Reference 13 87 RECOVER STANDBY DATABASE Recovers the standby database using the control file and archived redo log files copied from the primary database The standby database must be mounted but not open DATABASE Recovers the entire database UNTIL CANCEL Specifies an incomplete cancel based recovery Recovery proceeds by prompting you with suggested filenames of archived redo log files and recovery completes when you specify CANCEL instead of a filename UNTIL TIME Specifies an incomplete time based recovery Use single quotes and the following format YYYY MM DD HH24 MI SS UNTIL CHANGE Specifies an incomplete change based recovery integer is the number of the System Change Number SCN following the last change you wish to recover For example if you want to restore your database up to the transaction with an SCN of 9 you would specify UNTIL CHANGE 10 USING BACKUP CONTROLFILE Specifies that a backup of the control file be used instead of the current control file TABLESPACE Recovers a particular tablespace tablespace is the name of a tablespace in the current database You may recover up to 16 tablespaces in one statement DATAFILE Recovers a particular datafile You can specify any number of datafiles STANDBY TABLESPACE Reconstructs a lost o
531. value is extremely small and a numeric overflow occurs when rounding a number then the negative infinity sign replaces the value HEA DING text Defines a column heading If you do not use a HEADING clause the column s heading defaults to column or expr If text contains blanks or punctuation characters you must enclose it with single or double quotes Each occurrence of the HEADSEP character by default begins a new line For example COLUMN LAST_NAME HEADING Employee Name would produce a two line column heading See SET HEADS EP c ON OFF on page 13 119 for information on changing the HEADSEP character JUS TIFY L EFT C ENTER R IGHT Aligns the heading If you do not use a JUSTIFY clause headings for NUMBER columns default to RIGHT and headings for other column types default to LEFT LIKE expr alias Copies the display attributes of another column or expression whose attributes you have already defined with another COLUMN command LIKE copies only attributes not defined by another clause in the current COLUMN command 13 36 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference COLUMN NEWL INE Starts a new line before displaying the column s value NEWLINE has the same effect as FOLD_BEFORE NEWLINE does not work in SET MARKUP HTML ON mode or in iSQL Plus unless PREFORMAT is SET ON NEW_V ALUE variable Specifies a variable to hold a column value You can reference the variable in TT
532. value n SQL Plus performs a SQL Plus COPY Command B 3 Copying Data from One Database to Another Examples commit after copying every n batches of records The SQL Plus SET ARRAYSIZE variable determines the size of a batch Some operating environments require that service names be placed in double quotes The following command copies the entire EMPLOYEES table to a table named WESTEMPLOYEES Note that the tables are located in two different databases If WESTEMPLOYEES already exists SQL Plus replaces the table and its contents The columns in WESTEMPLOYEES have the same names as the columns in the source table EMPLOYEES COPY FROM HR your_password HQ TO JOHN your_password WEST REPLACE WESTEMPLOYEES USING SELECT FROM EMPLOYEES The following command copies selected records from EMPLOYEES to the database to which SQL Plus is connected SQL Plus creates SALESMEN through the copy SQL Plus copies only the columns EMPLOYEE_ID and LAST_NAME and at the destination names them EMPLOYEE_ID and SA_MAN COPY FROM HR your_password ORACLE01 CREATE SALESMEN EMPLOYEE_ID SA_MAN USING SELECT EMPLOYEE_ID LAST_NAME FROM EMPLOYEES WHERE JOB_ID SA_MAN Copying Data from One Database to Another Use the SQL Plus COPY command to copy CHAR DATE LONG NUMBER or VARCHAR data between databases and between tables on the same database With the COPY command you can copy data between databases in the following ways Copy data
533. veveddsesdvevess 2 4 Changing the Windows GUI Font and Font Size eeeeeeesseseesesesesssseesesesesesseeeesenenees 2 8 ISOL Plus User niterface r r ablaxtion taste eiatel Gh bees bbe et dese Geese eedeaats 2 10 ISOL Pl s Navigation ccsenc serait ece Siete hated a a A aes eres 2 10 TOOL Plus Login Scree ns niaan a sa iei a A a a 2 12 ISQL Plus DBA LOGIN Sreet nn nns aaen ia e aara stata saute apn aR Eaa 2 13 ISOL Pl s Workspace sicivs sscd tect a ait ee a e ara ai a aa 2 16 ISOL Plus DBA W rksp cs niesniinneiknn onn hiii enin a ia 2 17 SQL Plus History Sor e eitera adenine a e a a leita E 2 18 ISQL Plus Input Required Screen s ssssssssississsssiesiesisstsstesiestestssresiestestssteniesiesessnententeneestnns 2 19 ISOL Plus Preferences Screens cheese Oe a eee lee 2 20 Preferences and Equivalent SET Command ccccecccscsseessessesensesesesenseesecseseseseeseseneeeeesens 2 25 3 Configuring SQL Plus SQL Plus and iSQL Plus Environment Variables 0 0 ccceceeesceesceseeeeececeeseceaeeseceeeeseseneeaes 3 1 SQL Plus and iSQOL Plus Configuration 0 0 ccc ccc secs terse cece rece tessetesseneeenesseneaenea 3 4 Site Profile a ea Pees a ede hin ae Reh yh hae Svcs a e el deeneldle vetghieides tadors aah 3 6 WI S r Protil AE EE E tug bavedene EEE E eee tienes 3 7 Storing and Restoring SQL Plus System Variables 0ccccccccseseeeseeesssssesesesesesssesesesenenees 3 8 Installing Command line Help
534. w to edit the SQLPLUS_FONT_ SIZE registry entry 3 30 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference 4 Starting SQL Plus This chapter describes how to start login and connect to a database how to get help and how to exit SQL Plus Specific topics discussed are Login Username and Password Connecting to a Database a Starting SQL Plus a Exiting SQL Plus a SQLPLUS Program Syntax Login Username and Password When you start SQL Plus you need a username and password to login to an Oracle Database schema Your username and password identify you as an authorized user of the Oracle Database schema The database administrator DBA is responsible for creating your database account with the necessary privileges and giving you the username and password that enables you to access your account Default logins are created and you are prompted for associated passwords during Oracle Database installation Some of the default login usernames created are a SYS a SYSTEM a HR Logins are created and displayed in messages during Oracle Database installation Starting SQL Plus 4 1 Login Username and Password For further information about the default logins see the Oracle Database Administrator s Guide Once you have logged in you can connect under a different username with the SQL Plus CONNECT command The username and password must be valid for the database For example to connect the username TODD to the default data
535. wing NLS_LANG Settings You can view the NLS_LANG setting by entering the SELECT command SELECT FROM NLS_SESSION_PARAMETERS The NLS_TERRITORY and NLS_LANGUAGE values correspond to the language and territory components of the NLS_LANG variable You can also obtain a list of valid values for the NLS_SORT NLS_LANGUAGE NLS_TERRITORY and NLS_CHARACTERSET by querying the NLS dynamic performance view table VSNLS_VALID_VALUES 12 4 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference Setting NLS_LANG Setting NLS_LANG You can set the NLS_LANG environment variable to control globalization features Example 12 1 Configuring Japanese Support in SQL Plus on Windows 1 2 3 Ensure you have exited your current SQL Plus session Open System from Start gt Settings gt Control Panel Click the Advanced tab and select Environment Variables Create a new environment variable NLS_LANG with a value of Japanese_ Japan UTF8 You may need to restart Windows for this setting to take effect Example 12 2 Configuring Japanese Support in SQL Plus on UNIX 1 2 Ensure you have exited your current SQL Plus session Set the NLS_LANG variable using either set or setenv depending on the UNIX shell you are using For example in csh you would enter setenv NLS_LANG Japanese_Japan UTF8 Example 12 3 Configuring Japanese Support in Oracle Database To store data in the Japanese character set using UTF 8 character encoding ensure that the Oracle data
536. wing syntax H ELP V ERSION C OMPATIBILITY x y z L OGON M ARKUP markup_option R ESTRICT 1 2 3 S ILENT and markup_option has the following syntax HTML ON OFF HEAD text BODY text TABLE text ENTMAP ON OFF SPOOL ON OFF PRE FORMAT ON OFF where Logon has the following syntax username password connect_identifier AS SYSOPER SYSDBA NOLOG where Start has the following syntax url file_name ext arg You have the option of entering logon If you do not specify logon but do specify start SQL Plus assumes that the first line of the script contains a valid logon If neither start nor logon are specified SQL Plus prompts for logon information The following sections contain descriptions of SQLPLUS command options COMPATIBILITY Option C OMPATIBILITY x y z Sets the value of the SQLPLUSCOMPATIBILITY system variable to the SQL Plus release specified by x y z Where x is the version number y is the release number and z is the update number For example 9 0 1 or 10 1 For more information see the SET SQLPLUSCOMPATI IBILITY x y z system variable on page 13 130 4 18 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SQLPLUS Program Syntax HELP Option H ELP Displays the usage and syntax for the SQLPLUS command and then returns control to the operating system VERSION Option V ERSION Displays the current version and level number for SQL Plus a
537. xed pitch font you choose contains those characters To Change the Windows GUI Font and Font Size 1 Select Run from the Start menu and then enter regedit in the Open field 2 Click OK to start the Registry Editor The Registry Editor is displayed 3 Navigate to HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE ORACLE HOMEO Note If you have more than one Oracle Database installation you must select the HOME entry associated with the Windows GUI you want to change HOME is the registry entry for an Oracle Database installation A subsequent Oracle Database installation will have the registry entry HOME1 and the next HOME2 and so on Changes only affect a SQL Plus Windows GUI started from the associated Oracle Database installation so you can use different settings for each Oracle Database installation 4 Click New String Value in the Edit menu A new string value with the default name NewValue 1 is created at the bottom of the right pane of the Registry Editor The default name of the new string value is selected ready for you to replace with the name you want 5 Enter SQLPLUS_FONT as the name of the new font face string value If you miskey the name or inadvertently enter it in mixed or lower case you can edit the name by selecting Rename from the Edit menu or Enter SQLPLUS_FONT_SIZE as the name of the new font size string value If you miskey the name or inadvertently enter it in mixed or lower case you can edit the name by selecti
538. xt field for example Fay Click the Run Report button iSQL Plus executes the script and displays the results in your web browser Example 8 5 Creating a Dynamic Script with Parameters and Login Details Create and save the following script to a file called employee_id sql on your Application Server SET VERIFY OFF SET PAGESIZE 200 SET MARKUP HTML ENTMAP OFF PROMPT lt H1 gt Employee Details for Employee Number amp eid lt H1 gt SET MARKUP HTML ENTMAP ON SELECT FROM EMPLOYEES WHERE EMPLOYEE_ID amp eid Create an HTML file which contains lt HTML gt lt HEAD gt lt TITLE gt iSQL Plus Dynamic Report lt TITLE gt lt HEAD gt lt BODY gt lt H1 gt lt em gt i lt em gt SQL Plus Report lt H1 gt lt H2 gt Query by Employee ID lt H2 gt lt FORM METHOD get ACTION http machine_name domain port isqlplus gt lt INPUT TYPE hidden NAME userid VALUE hr your_password gt lt INPUT TYPE hidden NAME script VALUE http machine_ name domain port employee_id sql gt Enter employee identification number lt INPUT TYPE text NAME eid SIZE 10 gt lt INPUT TYPE submit VALUE Run Report gt lt FORM gt lt BODY gt lt HTML gt Replace machine_name domain with the host and domain names port with the iSQL Plus port number of your Application Server and hr your_password witha valid userid and password Save the HTML file on your Application Server Load the H
539. y meaning in iSQL Plus such as a SQL buffer editing command or it is not allowed for security reasons or it is an obsolete command Action Remove the command from your script If you used a disabled command check the documentation for a replacement command SP2 0851 Command beginning command_name is not available in iSQL Plus Cause The command was not recognized by the SQL Plus engine or it is disabled in iSQL Plus This occurs if it is a command that does not have any meaning in iSQL Plus such as a SQL buffer editing command or it is not allowed for security reasons or it is an obsolete command Action Remove the command from your script If you used a disabled command check the documentation for a replacement command SP2 0852 Option not available in iSQL Plus Cause The command option is not available in iSQL Plus This error usually occurs after SP2 158 or SP2 735 Some options are disabled in a web based context because they have no meaning because they prevent proper operation or because they pose a security risk Action Remove the option from the command SP2 0853 Empty username field Cause The Username field of the iSQL Plus Login screen was empty Action Enter a username before attempting to log in SP2 0854 Password cannot be entered twice Cause An error occurred while parsing the Username and Password fields of the iSQL Plus Login screen Action Check that you haven t specified a password as part of th
540. y content provided on third party Web sites You bear all risks associated with the use of such content If you choose to purchase any products or services from a third party the relationship is directly between you and the third party Oracle is not responsible for a the quality of third party products or services or b fulfilling any of the terms of the agreement with the third party including delivery of products or services and warranty obligations related to purchased products or services Oracle is not responsible for any loss or damage of any sort that you may incur from dealing with any third party Contents Send Us Your Comments o cccccecccccccccsssssssesssessecssesssscsssssscssessssesecssessucasscesessseesecasecsuesseeesesanes xvii PROTACC 3 Gudea diane en aaa a A A nabinannts xix Meid ax Ips 6 Kc 6K a1 E tee a a r e e a aa XX Documentation Accessibilityisii anp a a EE A R aE XX SEU CHUTE Te seeiens Ldecistes tbe a esti abet Wn a aa bd Wii aa aeaa bye a bereits ae aal xxi Related D cumentss eunea ar r a vlna up a e a a xxiii CONVENTIONS 25 e a cess aan E EREA A e Gy cde a Tea a oa sas Sta Beaks AEREE E TE esaa xxiv What s New in SQL PluS ccc Scenarios eaten amseee atietnadineeeah mata ceeueanain aes xxxi New Features in SQL Plus and iSQL PIUS 10 1 wo cece ececssessecsecsseeecesseseceeceseseceseseeeeseeesecnees XXxXi SQL Plus Quick Ste i ries ese se ee ide rca aaee Reon acn pie ide eS XXXV RESOUUT CES E R AE E EEE A
541. y following the end of the previously run report 13 116 SQL Plus User s Guide and Reference SET System Variable Summary SET ESC APE c ON OFF Example Defines the character used as the escape character OFF undefines the escape character ON enables the escape character ON changes the value of c back to the default You can use the escape character before the substitution character set through SET DEFINE to indicate that SQL Plus should treat the substitution character as an ordinary character rather than as a request for variable substitution If you define the escape character as an exclamation point then SET ESCAPE ACCEPT v1 PROMPT Enter amp 1 displays this prompt Enter amp 1 To set the escape character back to the default value of backslash enter SET ESCAPE ON SET FEED BACK 6 n ON OFF Displays the number of records returned by a script when a script selects at least n records ON or OFF turns this display on or off Turning feedback ON sets n to 1 Setting feedback to zero is equivalent to turning it OFF SET FEEDBACK OFF also turns off the statement confirmation messages such as Table created and PL SQL procedure successfully completed that are displayed after successful SOL or PL SQL statements SQL Plus Command Reference 13 117 SET FLAGGER OFF ENTRY INTERMED IATE FULL SET FLAGGER OFF ENTRY INTERMED IATE FULL Checks to
542. y row after every department for the above example Before continuing set RECSEP to OFF to suppress the printing of record separators SET RECSEP OFF Formatting SQL Plus Reports 7 11 Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines Clarifying Your Report with Spacing and Summary Lines When you use an ORDER BY clause in your SQL SELECT command rows with the same value in the ordered column or expression are displayed together in your output You can make this output more useful to the user by using the SQL Plus BREAK and COMPUTE commands to create subsets of records and add space or summary lines after each subset The column you specify in a BREAK command is called a break column By including the break column in your ORDER BY clause you create meaningful subsets of records in your output You can then add formatting to the subsets within the same BREAK command and add a summary line containing totals averages and so on by specifying the break column in a COMPUTE command SELECT DEPARTMENT_ID LAST_NAME SALARY FROM EMP_DETAILS_VIEW WHERE SALARY gt 12000 ORDER BY DEPARTMENT_ID DEPARTMENT_ID LAST _NAME SALARY 20 Hartstein 13000 80 Russell 14000 80 Partners 13500 90 King 24000 90 Kochhar 17000 90 De Haan 17000 6 rows selected To make this report more useful you would use BREAK to establish DEPARTMENT_ID as the break column Through BREAK you could suppress duplicate values in DEPARTMENT_

SQL*Plus User's Guide and Reference

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents